JP2020137647A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately and rapidly executing display of a setting operation history.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: setting confirmation means; history information storage means for storing setting operation history information in a memory; history display means for displaying a setting operation history on a display screen on the basis of setting operation history information stored by the history information storage means according to satisfaction of a predetermined display condition; a first memory for disabling retention of storage information when the power of the game machine is shut off; and a second memory that can retain storage information even if the power of the game machine is shut off and has a read speed of information faster than that of the first memory. The history information storage means stores setting operation history information in the first memory when setting confirmation operation is performed, and includes transmission means for transmitting setting operation history information stored in the first memory to the second memory at predetermined timing, and the history display means displays a setting operation history on a display screen on the basis of setting operation history information stored in the first memory.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine and a rotating body game machine, and in particular, has a means for confirming a set value indicating a probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player. Related to the technical field related to game machines.

For example, various game machines such as a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine and a rotating body type game machine such as a slot machine are widely known.
As a gaming machine, for example, there is a slot machine in which a setting value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to a player can be set based on an operation.

The following Patent Document 1 can be mentioned as a related prior art.

Japanese Patent No. 5956529

In a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed and set, it is conceivable to present the user with a history related to the operation related to the set value (hereinafter referred to as "setting operation history"). For example, a list of setting operation histories may be displayed as an image on a liquid crystal display device.
In displaying the setting operation history, history information is accumulated in a predetermined memory each time the target operation is performed, and a list of history or the like is displayed based on the accumulated information.
At this time, it is desirable to use a RAM used as a work memory as the storage destination of the history information from the viewpoint of reading speed.
However, the RAM provided in the microcomputer is often regarded as a memory that cannot keep the stored information when the power is cut off, such as not having a backup power supply. The setting operation history is expected to display the history over a relatively long period such as several weeks or one month. Therefore, as described above, the memory whose stored information cannot be retained due to the power cutoff is stored. If the history information is saved, the history information will be lost every time the power is cut off, and the history display cannot be performed properly.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a gaming machine capable of displaying a setting operation history appropriately and promptly.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has image control means having a CPU circuit that issues a display list that specifies a display screen of a display device, and image data based on an instruction command described in the display list issued by the image control means. An image generation means having a drawing circuit for generating data, a setting confirmation means for displaying a set value indicating a probability of winning a gaming state advantageous to the player based on a setting confirmation operation, and the above-mentioned setting. A history information storage means for storing the setting operation history information as a history of operations related to the setting when a confirmation operation is performed, and the history information storage means stored by the history information storage means according to the establishment of a predetermined display condition. In a gaming machine having a history display means for displaying the setting operation history on the display screen based on the setting operation history information, a first memory whose stored information cannot be retained when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and a game The image generation means includes a second memory that can hold the stored information even when the power of the machine is cut off and the reading speed of the information is slower than that of the first memory. It is configured to have a data transfer circuit that transfers the configuration data of the display list received in units to the drawing circuit in predetermined transfer bit units, and the image control means is related to the generation of the display list in the image data generation process. The end instruction command for instructing the drawing circuit to end is described in the middle or at the end of the display list, and the actual bit lengths of all the instruction commands listed in the display list are made to be an integral multiple of the acquisition bit unit. The history information storage means stores the setting operation history information in the first memory when the setting confirmation operation is performed, and the setting operation history information stored in the first memory at a predetermined timing. The history display means includes a transfer means for transferring the data to the second memory, and the history display means displays the setting operation history on the display screen based on the setting operation history information stored in the first memory.

According to the above configuration, the setting operation history information stored in the first memory is transferred and saved in the second memory which can retain the stored information even when the power is cut off, for example, with a backup power supply. It is possible to keep the setting operation history information properly even through the above. Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation history information saved in the second memory can be written back to the first memory, so that the display of the setting operation history is appropriate stored in the first memory. It is possible to perform the setting operation history information.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of displaying the setting operation history properly and promptly.

It is a front side perspective view which shows the appearance of the game machine as the embodiment which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of the game machine as an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing about the example of the look-ahead notice production in an embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process of the main control side of embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the initial setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the power supply abnormality check process of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between each judgment condition in operation side at the time of transition to a setting change processing, a RAM clear processing, a setting confirmation processing, and a backup restoration processing, and a value of a W register. It is a flowchart which showed the main loop processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the setting change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the output management process in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the 7-segment decoding table. It is a figure which illustrated the relationship between the segment composition and the display pattern of a segment in the display of a set value. It is a flowchart which showed the RAM clear process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the setting confirmation process in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the set value offset conversion table. It is a flowchart which showed the main loop preprocessing in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt processing of the main control side of embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the power supply check / backup process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the setting abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol management process in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit random number determination process in FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot random number determination method of embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the random number determination table for jackpot determination used for the jackpot random number determination processing. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern lottery process in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the deviation variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed other example of the hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error of embodiment. It is a figure which showed another example of the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the storage example of the 1st data table and the 2nd data table in embodiment. It is a figure which showed the 1st data table and the other storage example of the 2nd data table in embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the storage area structure in ROM of a main control part. It is explanatory drawing of the scenario registration information, the lamp data registration information, and the motor data registration information of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the sound data registration information of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the main scenario table of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the sub-scenario table of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect control main processing of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command analysis process in the effect control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command correspondence processing in the effect control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect control timer interrupt process of embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display control timing of embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated one display mode of the setting operation history. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting confirmation screen. It is a figure which showed the example of the history display information in an embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the backup operation example of the history display information as an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the additional processing of the individual history information in the history display information. It is a flowchart of history information initial setting processing at the time of power-on of embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process for updating the history information according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display. It is a flowchart of the history information update processing of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the history display processing of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the history information screen creation process of an embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the numerical value of the set value which can be expressed in an embodiment. It is the flowchart of the left symbol lottery process of embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the left symbol lottery table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for the left symbol lottery. It is the flowchart which showed another example of the left symbol lottery process. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for the left symbol lottery used in the process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart of the mini character notice lottery process of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the 1st mini character notice lottery table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for the first notice. It is a figure which showed the example of the 2nd mini character notice lottery table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for the second notice. It is a flowchart of the jackpot production lottery process of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. It is a figure which showed the example of the 1st offset table for reference to the table of FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the 2nd offset table for reference to the table of FIG. It is a flowchart of SU notice lottery processing of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the SU effect table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU stage lottery. It is a figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU3 replacement. It is a flowchart which showed another example of SU notice lottery processing. It is a figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement first offset table and SU3 replacement second offset table used in the process of FIG. 76. It is explanatory drawing about the lottery mode example of SU notice production in embodiment. It is a flowchart of the setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a first modification. It is a flowchart of the setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a second modification. It is a figure which showed the example of the setting value conversion table used by the effect control part in the modification. It is a figure which shows the kind of suggestion effect of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing when the suggestion effect of embodiment is executed. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type and the timing of the suggestion effect of embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 01) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 02) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command correspondence processing at the time of receiving the customer waiting demo command in the production control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of a command correspondence process at the time of receiving a decorative symbol designation command in the effect control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 05) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 06) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart of a command correspondence process at the time of receiving a decorative symbol designation command in the effect control of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table used when executing the suggestion effect (effect 09) of an embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 10) of the embodiment. It is a table and the flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 11) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 12) of the embodiment. This is an example of a table used in the re-lottery process of the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestion effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestion effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestion effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 13) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 14) of the embodiment. It is a table used in the suggestion effect (effect 14) of the embodiment. It is the flowchart of the command correspondence processing at the time of receiving the big prize opening prize command in the production control unit of embodiment, and the table to use. It is a flowchart of the command correspondence processing at the time of receiving the jackpot end command in the effect control unit of embodiment. This is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the suggestion effect (effect 16) of the embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the suggestion effect (effect 17) of an embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the suggestion effect (effect 18) of an embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the suggestion effect (effect 19) of an embodiment. It is a figure for executing the suggestion effect (effect 20) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect (effect 21) of the embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the other effect example of embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the other effect example of embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the setting value change suggestion effect 2 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting value change suggestion effect 3 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting value suggestion effect 1 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting value suggestion effect 1 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting value suggestion effect 1 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting value suggestion effect 1 of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of suggestion effect of embodiment, and execution timing. It is a figure which shows the kind of the jackpot suggestion effect of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing when the jackpot suggestion effect of an embodiment is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of selective implementation of the effect on the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the state of waiting for a customer of embodiment, and the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect 02 of embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of production and execution timing of an embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of suggestion effect 16 of embodiment. It is a block diagram of the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment (separate embodiment) having one CPU configuration. It is a block diagram of the effect control means of another embodiment. It is a figure which showed the schematic structure of the main part among the structure shown in FIG. 128. It is a block diagram of the display circuit and LCD interface in another embodiment. It is a functional block diagram schematically showing each functional configuration of an effect control unit and a liquid crystal control board in the case of a two-CPU configuration. It is a functional block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of the effect control unit of the embodiment having one CPU configuration. It is the flowchart of the effect control main processing of another embodiment. It is a figure which showed various timings in a frame period of display data. It is a figure exemplifying the correspondence relationship between an effect control command and a liquid crystal control command. It is a figure which represented typically the example of the scenario data for each effect element defined corresponding to the effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the process executed by the effect control unit of another embodiment in response to the reception of an effect control command. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow of operation in an Example which does not make a preloader function. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow of operation in an Example which makes a preloader function. It is a block diagram which described the internal structure of the data transfer circuit in another embodiment together with the related circuit structure. It is a figure which showed the example of the index table in another embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the area division of VRAM in another embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the relationship between the virtual drawing area which can be arbitrarily set in the virtual drawing space in VRAM, and the real drawing area (drawing area Ad) in a frame buffer. It is a figure which showed the relationship between the whole frame buffer and an effective data area in another embodiment. It is a flowchart of various initial setting processing in another embodiment. It is a flowchart of the drawing update process (when the preloader is not made to function) in another embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the configuration example of a display list. It is a flowchart which showed the issue process of a display list (when DMAC is not intervened). It is explanatory drawing that the CPU issues a display list to a drawing circuit via a data transfer circuit in a VDP circuit. It is a flowchart which showed the issue process (when DMAC is intervened) of the display list. It is a flowchart which showed the DMA start setting process in FIG. 150. It is a flowchart which showed the process following FIG. 150. It is explanatory drawing that the display list is transferred to a drawing circuit by DMAC. It is a flowchart of the drawing update process (when the preloader is made to function) in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed a part process of FIG. 154. It is a figure for demonstrating the transfer mode to the drawing circuit of the rewrite list in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the processing of another part of FIG. 154. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of issuing a display list to a preloader (when DMAC is not intervening). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of issuing a display list to a preloader (in the case of interposing DMAC). It is explanatory drawing of the modification (when the preloader does not function) which delays a drawing start timing. It is explanatory drawing about the modification (when the preloader functions) which delays a drawing start timing. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the modification which uses the CPU which performs only the image effect control. It is explanatory drawing of the operation (when the preloader does not function) in the modification based on the configuration of FIG. 162. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of an operation (when the preloader is made to function) in a modified example based on the configuration of FIG. 162. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process of normal operation in a modified example based on the configuration of FIG. 162. It is explanatory drawing about the drawing method as a modification. It is explanatory drawing about another drawing method as a modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Game machine structure>
<2. Game machine control configuration>
[2-1. Main control unit]
(About the operation to change the set value)
(About performance display)
(Direction control command)
[2-2. Production control unit]
<3. Outline explanation of operation ＞
[3-1. Design fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol fluctuation display game)
(Decorative pattern variation display game)
(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
(About hold)
[3-2. Game state]
[3-3. About hit]
[3-4. About the production]
(Direction mode)
(Notice production)
(Direction means)
<4. Main control processing>
[4-1. Main control side main processing]
(Initial setting process)
(Processing after initial setting)
(Main loop processing)
(Setting change processing)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(Main loop pre-processing)
(Advantages of setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)
[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
(Power check / backup process)
(Error management and processing for game progress, etc.)
[4-3. Processing related to special symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol management process)
(Special figure 1 Start port check process)
(Special symbol change start processing)
(Variation management process)
(Big hit random number judgment processing)
(Variable pattern lottery process)
(Advantages of data table related to set values as an embodiment)
<5. Production control unit processing>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. About the data type of the set value in the embodiment]
[5-4. Setting value suggestion effect]
(Suggestion production by the left design)
(Suggestion production by mini character notice)
(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)
(Suggestion production by SU notice)
[5-5. Difference between the set value range corresponding to the main control unit and the production control unit]
<6. Modification example of setting related command processing and setting value conversion>
<7. Other transformation examples related to the set value>
<8. Summary so far>
<9. Suggestion effect regarding set value>
[9-1. Type of production]
[9-2. Production timing]
[9-3. Production example]
(Direction 01) ~ (Direction 21)
(Summary of each production)
[9-4. Other production examples]
(Set value change suggestion effect 1)
(Set value change suggestion effect 2)
(Set value change suggestion effect 3)
(Set value suggestion effect 1)
<10. Suggestion production about big hit>
[10-1. Type of production]
[10-2. Production timing]
[10-3. Production example]
<11. Other productions>
<12. About the production where the appearance probability differs depending on the set value>
[12-1. First example]
[12-2. Second example]
<13. Example of selective implementation on a game machine>
[13-1. About the appearance timing of the production]
[13-2. Waiting for customers]
[13-3. About pre-reading]
[13-4. During fluctuation (first half)]
[13-5. During fluctuation (second half)]
[13-6. About big hit]
[13-7. During fluctuation (overall)]
[13-8. Setting value suggestion effect and appearance timing]
[13-9. Big hit suggestion production and appearance timing]
[13-10. Production buttons and each production]
<14. Example 2 of selective implementation on a game machine>
<15. Definition>
<16.1 CPU configuration>
[16-1. Control configuration of pachinko game machines]
[16-2. Composition of production control unit]
[16-3. Function comparison of production control unit]
[16-4. Production control unit processing]
[16-5. Operation example of production control]
[Summary of 16-6.1 CPU configuration and modification example]
<17. About image production control>
[17-1. Comparison with and without preload]
[17-2. About data transfer circuit]
[17-3. About cache of preload data]
[17-4. About drawing]
[17-5. CPU processing related to image production control]
(Example of not making the preloader work)
(Example of making the preloader work)
[17-5. Modification example and other modification related to image production control]

<1. Game machine structure>

The structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as “game machine 1”) has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and is attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in the mounted game board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. Have. A glass door 6 that supports transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and payout of the game balls to the game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card returning button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided. Further, the upper saucer unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The built-in lamp (button LED75) of the effect button 13 is lit during a predetermined input reception period to enable operation (input reception is possible), and a predetermined operation (press, repeated hit, long press, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. It is possible to bring about a change in the production by doing.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for a user such as a player or a hall staff to select various items and give a direction instruction. There is.

A launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, LEDs for light effect by full-color LED) that exert a light effect by decorating light are provided at appropriate positions of the glass door 6. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light production) as the decorative lamp 45 are provided around the pachinko gaming machine, that is, around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. On the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a. The four corners are non-gaming areas.

In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, symbols, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently used. The liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), the middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and the right symbol (corresponding to the right display area) It is provided. In the following description, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may be described as "design group". That is, for example, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left display area is one of the symbol groups that constitute the left symbol.
Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images in addition to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winded manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow of the game balls depends on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that makes it possible to distribute the road to the left and right. In the present embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow paths of the game balls are formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. The game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and has a left flow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and a right flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and is decorated with various notice effects (effect images). The symbol variation display games are being executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. There are five types of compound called compound: special symbols 1 and 2, display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, and status notification during the operation of the variable time shortening function (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this ordinary symbol display device 39a, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is. Further, a round number display device 39b is provided in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The round number display device 39b notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting and extinguishing states of the three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. Ordinary variable winning devices 41 are provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of them. ing.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases, "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as), and is configured as a winning rate fixed winning device having no starting opening opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path 3b to the upper start port 34 The game ball that has flowed down the ball has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), whereas the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable winning device in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, the so-called "electric tulip" is provided with a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that allow the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port, to be opened or expanded as the starting port opening / closing means. It is configured as a "type" winning device.

The lower start port 35 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and in some cases, abbreviated as "special symbol 2". ) Is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an open state (operated or not activated) that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into a closed state (difficult to win), which makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (easy to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, three general winning openings 43 are arranged on the left side and one on the right side, for a total of four, and inside each of them, a general winning hole for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. Further, in the area of the game board, a movable body accessory (not shown) that exerts a visual effect is arranged at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball.

Further, diagonally upward to the right of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c, a normal symbol start port 37 (third start) composed of a passage gate (specific passage area) through which a game ball can pass. Means) are provided. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning port related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in both flow paths, respectively.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the recessed open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the right flow path 3c, in the region above the upper side 55a of the bulge portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the grand prize opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is placed on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game balls roll on the large winning opening 50, and the game balls have a predetermined arrangement (not shown). The game nail guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 is open (the large winning opening 50 is open), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start port The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. The movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is more advantageous than the normal state when it is in a gaming state accompanied by a state with electric support, which will be described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, what kind of striking method the player should take to obtain an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the game state accompanied by the "state without electric support" described later, the "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass the left flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous, and the "electric support" described later is considered to be advantageous. In the game state accompanied by the "presence state", the "right-handed" aiming at the game ball so as to pass through the right flow path 3c is considered to be advantageous.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, if there is a prize in a prize opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, each winning opening is promised. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, 13 for the large winning opening 50, and 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3). It is supposed to be paid out from (see). The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49.
Here, "winning" means a winning opening that does not have a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" occurs in the winning opening. It is treated as if it had been done. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Therefore, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, whether or not the game ball is detected by the winning detection switch. Regardless of this, it may be referred to as "winning" including the case where the game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Game machine control configuration>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing game motion control of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The game machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") and a main control unit that collectively control control (game operation control) related to the overall game operation. An effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives an effect control command from 20 and controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means, and a prize ball. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls payouts, and a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) that generates and supplies the power supply required for the game machine 1 from an external power source (not shown). Is composed of.
A liquid crystal control unit 40 that drives the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The liquid crystal control unit 40 is a microcomputer mounted on a substrate separate from various substrates such as the above-mentioned main control board (main control unit) 20, effect control board (effect control unit) 24, payout control board 29, and power supply board. It is configured with a computer.
In FIG. 3, the power supply route to each part is omitted.

[2-1. Main control unit]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure, various data necessary for game operation control are stored. It is equipped with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storing and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area or buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer as a whole. ..

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 is used for a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) for a fixed period, and a time measurement function, and a CPU 201. An interrupt controller circuit that exerts an interrupt enable / interrupt prohibit function such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal, and can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU 201 by detecting power on / off or power failure. Reset circuit, watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of the control program, and out-of-area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is correctly executed within the preset address range. , And a counter circuit for generating a certain range of random numbers in terms of hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. The random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

The main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize (ball winning) in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43, and the out opening 49. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) discharged from the player is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals output from these switches. Based on the detection signals from each sensor, the main control unit 20 can grasp which winning opening the game ball has entered.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for opening and closing the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. .. Furthermore, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and it is possible to transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol.

Further, a composite display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 displays and controls various information displayed on the composite display device 38c, such as control signals and rounds. It is possible to transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling a specified number of rounds by a big hit displayed on the number display device 39b.

Further, the frame external centralized terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is predetermined to the hall computer HC provided outside the game machine via the frame external centralized terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, jackpot information, prize ball number information, symbol change execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control unit 20 and comprehensively managing the operating status of the pachinko hall game machine.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) related to payout is given to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a payout control command) that specifies.

The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, to transmit a status signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the payout control board 29 includes these. It is possible to receive each detection signal of. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, the payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the stored state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9) and a full detection sensor 60 that detects the full state of the upper tray 9 with the game balls. , The front door open sensor 61 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects at least the open state of the front frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the front door opening sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This status signal includes a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is open, a supply shortage signal indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and a prize ball. A counting error signal indicating that the payout is insufficient or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and the like are included, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 is open (door open error), whether the game ball payout device 19 is paying out normally (supply shortage error), and the upper tray 9. Monitor the full state (ball jam error), etc.

Furthermore, the launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and it is possible to transmit a permission signal for permitting the launch to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the payout control board 29, and operates the launch operation handle 15. The game ball launching operation is realized. Specifically, the player touches the handle by the fact that the launch permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (launch permission signal ON state) and the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the presence is detected and the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal is not output (launch permission signal OFF state), the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.
When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, it transmits a ball clogging signal to the main control unit 20 and stops the output of the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (launch permission signal OFF), and the upper tray 9 It is designed to stop the launching operation until the full state of is resolved.
Further, the payout control board 29 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28 on condition that the launch permission is instructed by the main control unit 20.

Here, the main control unit 20 is connected to the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98, and is capable of receiving detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for instructing and inputting to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to the setting change mode (during the ON operation) by inserting the setting key possessed by the hall staff at the time of turning on the power and performing the ON / OFF operation.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing a stage regarding the winning probability of whether or not the player is allowed to win in a favorable gaming state.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON / OFF in response to the operation of the RAM clear button provided so as to be operable with the front frame 2 open. Further, the setting key switch 98 is provided with a key cylinder in which the above-mentioned setting key can be inserted and removed, and is turned on by rotating the setting key inserted in the key cylinder in the forward direction. It is turned off by being rotated in the opposite direction from the ON state. The key cylinder is provided so that the operation can be performed by inserting the setting key with the front frame 2 open. The key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting the setting key.

In this example, the above RAM clear button is also used for the operation of changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially advancing the set value Ve.

The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate positions inside the game machine 1. For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20.

A setting / performance indicator 97 is connected to the main control unit 20.
The setting / performance display 97 is configured to include, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as a display means capable of displaying a set value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting / performance indicator 97 is mounted at a position on the main control unit (main control board) 20 that is easy to see, for example.
The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying the set value Ve and performance information to the setting / performance display 97.

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least a big hit (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). Therefore, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the set value), which is advantageous to the player. There is. In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball output rate, PAYOUT rate)", which is advantageous for the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the jackpot winning probability, machine discount, etc., and means a value related to the susceptibility to a specific event such as a profit state acting on the player. In the present embodiment, the advantage of the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are 6 stages (advantage stages) of the set value Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, it is assumed that the usable range (hereinafter referred to as "usable range Re") according to the rule of the set value Ve is the range of "1" to "6".
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only a part of the set values Ve among the set values Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only three values of, for example, "1", "2", and "6" among the set values Ve of "1" to "6" in the usable range Re. To do. In other words, the specification is limited to 3 stages instead of 6 stages, which is the maximum stage in the rules, regarding the winning probability.
Hereinafter, the range of the set value Ve actually used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, specifically, the range of the set value Ve actually used among the set value Ve within the usable range Re (“1” in the above example. "The range of" 2 "and" 6 ") is referred to as" the range of use Ru ".

The set value Ve is set exclusively by the hall staff such as the hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (game store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, it is possible to appropriately determine which jackpot winning probability is to be changed according to the set value Ve, and the target jackpot type. For example, if there are three types of jackpots, jackpots 1-3, the one with a relatively high set value Ve may increase the winning probability of all jackpots 1-3, or jackpots 1-3. The total winning probability may be increased. In addition, the probability of winning some big hits may be increased. For example, only the winning probability of the jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the jackpot 3 may be constant with all the set values Ve.

(About the operation to change the set value)

In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned on (operated to the setting change mode side) while the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and the front frame 2 is released. The power to the game machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance display 97, and the mode shifts to the "setting change mode" in which the set value Ve (1, 2, 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is performed in the main control side main process described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above-mentioned operating conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, the process for changing the setting is executed accordingly.

After the transition to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button that functions as the setting value Ve change operator is turned on, the current display value of the setting / performance indicator 97 changes to "1 → 2 → 6 → 1 → 1 →". It can be switched to the circulation type within the range of use Ru like "2 → 6 → ...". Then, when the desired set value Ve is reached, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the set value Ve is determined, and the information of the determined set value Ve is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated and the display of the setting / performance indicator 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state shifts to the state where the game progress is allowed.

(About performance display)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information on the setting / performance display 97.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to confirm, and typical examples are information on the presence or absence of illegal prize balls such as excess prize balls for game machine 1 and information on the original ball ejection performance of game machine 1. Is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game when the player plays the game, unlike the advance notice effect.

Therefore, the setting / performance display 97 is inside the game machine 1, for example, the main control unit (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, and the effect control unit (effect control board (liquid crystal)). It is provided at a position where the display information can be visually recognized when the front frame 2 is opened, such as on the (including the control board) 24) or the board case (protective cover that protects the board).

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payouts paid out by winning in the specific state (total number of prize balls in the specific state: α) is the total number of out balls discharged from the out port 49 in the specific state (out in the specific state) Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α / β) divided by the number: β) can be adopted as the performance information.
The above "total number of payouts" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when winning a prize in the winning openings (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 50). Is. In the case of the present embodiment, the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 is 3, the large winning opening 50 is 13, and the general winning opening 43 is 10.
In addition, which state is to be adopted as the specific state can be appropriately determined depending on what state the performance information is to be grasped. In the case of the present embodiment, any of the normal state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, the probable change state, and the jackpot game can be adopted. Further, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, it is a normal state and a probable change state, all game states except during a hit game, and the type to be measured can be appropriately determined.
Further, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is either a low probability state or a high probability state may be adopted.
Further, the total number of payouts may be one or a plurality of specific winning openings excluded from the measurement target (total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, the one excluding the large winning opening 50 from the measurement target may be used as the total number of payouts.

(2) In addition, only any one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings, and the total number of out balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (number of payouts in the normal state) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (number of outs in the normal state) are measured in real time, and the number of payouts in the normal state is the number of outs in the normal state. The value divided by is multiplied by 100 (the value calculated by the number of payouts in normal time ÷ the number of outs in normal time x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as "normal time ratio information"). The displayed value at this time shall be a value rounded to the first decimal place.
Therefore, each data of the normal time payout number, the normal time out number, and the normal time ratio information is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (specific medium total prize ball number storage area, specific medium out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area), respectively. It is designed to be stored (memorized). However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. This specified number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during the total gaming state (including during the winning game) (hereinafter referred to as "total number of out balls"). The total number of out-states is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (storage area for all-state outs) of RAM 203. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the specific medium total prize ball number storage area, the specific medium out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the all state out number storage area are abbreviated as "measurement information storage area".

Then, the normal time ratio information at the end time is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current normal time ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal time payout number, normal time out number). And all state out number), and then start the measurement again (normal time payout number, normal time out number, normal time ratio information and all state out ball number measurement are started). Then, on the setting / performance display 97, the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured are displayed. In addition to the previous information, the history of the previous two times or the previous one (three times before) may be displayed so that the information up to the previous time can be appropriately determined.

Here, in the case of this example, the set value Ve and the performance information are selectively displayed on the setting / performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, setting changes and setting confirmations are performed only at startup when the power is turned on, so settings are made according to the transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after startup when the power is turned on. The set value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and the performance information is displayed after the setting change and the setting confirmation are completed.
The configuration is not limited to displaying the set value Ve and the performance information on a common display, and it is also possible to display the set value Ve and the performance information on separate displays. In that case, the set value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Direction control command)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting various effect control commands including information on the special symbol variation display game, information on errors, and the like to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraud such as goto acts, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

Here, the effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, the effect control command of MODE Bit7 is ON, and Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

[2-2. Production control unit]

The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), and is also equipped with an acoustic control unit (sound source IC), RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. It controls the overall production operation.
The effect control unit 24 of this example has a memory 244 in addition to the above RAM 243 as a memory capable of reading and writing information. The memory 244 is composed of, for example, SRAM (Static RAM), and the reading speed of information by the CPU 241 is slower than that of the RAM 243. The backup power supply is not connected to the RAM 243, and the stored information cannot be retained when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. On the other hand, the memory 244 is connected to the backup power supply and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. Even if it is done, the stored information can be retained.
The use of the memory 244 will be described later.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are to receive the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determine the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, and control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image. , Sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 75, other production LEDs (not shown)), operation control of the movable body (accessory), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various memory devices, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The liquid crystal control unit 40 stores an image that stores VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) that VDP performs image development processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, and a CPU that controls the operation of the VDP based on various instructions (such as "liquid crystal control command" described later) from the effect control unit 24. A liquid crystal control CPU), a ROM (liquid crystal control ROM) that stores a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU, and various data necessary for the display control, and a RAM (liquid crystal) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a control RAM).
The liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of the VDP (display drive operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on the instruction from the effect control unit 24, so that the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image according to the instruction of the effect control unit 24. Is done.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 3 has a CPU for displaying a liquid crystal (CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40) on a substrate separate from the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24. Such a configuration is generally referred to as a "2 CPU" configuration. On the other hand, the configuration of "1 CPU" is such that a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40 is mounted on the effect control unit 24, that is, the effect control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40. Is called.

The effect control unit 24 has an acoustic control unit (sound controller: sound source IC) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and the acoustic signal output by the acoustic control unit is amplified by the amplifier unit 46d and becomes the speaker 46. Be supplied.
Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a lamp driver unit 45d that functions as an optical display control unit for an optical display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, and a movable body accessory motor that operates a movable body (not shown). A motor driver unit 80d (motor drive circuit) that functions as a drive control unit for the 80c is connected. The effect control unit 24 gives instructions to the lamp driver unit 45d and the motor driver unit 80d to control the light display operation by the light display device 45a and the operation of the movable accessory motor 80c.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory is also connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, this is detected as an error.

Further, the effect button 13 and the switch of the cross key 16 shown as the operation unit 17 in the drawing, that is, the operation detection switch of the effect button 13 and the cross key 16 are connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button. It is possible to receive the operation detection signals from the 13 and the cross key 16, respectively.

Based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 selects (determines) the effect pattern from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance by lottery or uniquely, and is required. By controlling various production means at the timing, the desired production is produced. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display operation and By developing the notice production etc. in chronological order, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

Here, regarding the effect control command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU201), and receives and analyzes the interrupt process. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes a control program for command reception interruption processing based on the above-mentioned input of the strobe signal, acquires an effect control command in the interrupt processing realized by the control program, and analyzes the command contents. Do.
At this time, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt. The command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting to, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed.

<3. Outline explanation of operation ＞
[3-1. Design fluctuation display game]

Next, an outline of the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration (FIG. 3) as described above will be described.
First, a symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol fluctuation display game)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35. In, a "big hit lottery" is performed by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, specializes the result. Derived display is performed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start port 34. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "missing" mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variable display game is referred to as a "special symbol variable display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol". The "special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative pattern variation display game)

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started. Along with that, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big hit" (when the jackpot lottery result is "big hit"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and "7". "Display state) is stopped and displayed.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 operates and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A special game state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b allows the opening time of the winning opening to elapse until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example), or the number of game balls that have won the winning opening (big winning opening). The number of winning balls to 50) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winning balls: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9). The "round game", in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the number reaches, and the large winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (for example, a maximum of 16). Round) Repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening effect for notifying that the jackpot has started is performed first, and after the opening effect is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. Then, after the end of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to notify that the big hit is finished, and the big hit game is finished by this.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a and the start condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, a lottery is made as to whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss". "Winning lottery (winning type lottery)" and if it is a "big hit", the big hit type is drawn, and if it is "missing", the losing type is drawn. "Design lottery (winning type (winning type) lottery")'And a big hit lottery (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery may be omitted because it is not necessary to perform a type lottery for the loss), and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is based on the lottery result information. In addition, a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") to be finally stopped and displayed is determined according to the winning type.
Then, the main control unit 20 issues a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) as the effect control command for specifying the processing state. It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect. It has become like.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect" described later) is generated. In detail, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "missing fluctuation pattern" in the case of a miss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a'reach fluctuation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of the reach effect described later, a'normal fluctuation pattern'that does not specify the occurrence of the reach effect, and the occurrence (overlap occurrence) of the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as a specified'pseudo-ream reach variation pattern', a'pseudo-ream normal variation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of a pseudo-ream effect and does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation pattern that specifies the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the production to be developed (the production scenario such as the advance notice production) and the decorative design to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop design) are determined, and the decorative design is changed and displayed according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special design. Run the symbol variation display game. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, the reproduction of the image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED (light effect) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games".

(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)

Further, in the game machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or "○" and "○" and " Of the LEDs expressing "x", the LED on the "○" side is lit) to stop and display.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter, referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric opening game, a game in which the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or the lower starting port 35 is won by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41. Until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the lower starting port 35 is closed, and the like is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, maximum). (Twice) It is supposed to be repeated.

(About hold)

Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the jackpot game, the normal electric opening game, etc., the upper start port 34, the lower start port 35, or the normal symbol start port 37 When a prize is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. This is used as data related to the start right of the variable display game, and is stored up to the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, up to 4), which is a predetermined upper limit value, except for those related to the variable display. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation, or the game ball related to the reserved data, is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

[3-2. Game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present embodiment, first, various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state. These game states are distinguished by the presence or absence of a jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state) and an electric chew support state (privilege game) (with electric support, without electric support).

The "electric chew support state" is a normal state in which the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of times of opening thereof) in the normal variable opening game is Refers to the "open extension state" that is more extended than. When the open extension state occurs, the open operation period of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds in the normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is, for example, It is extended from 1 time in normal time to 2 to 3 times.
In the case of the present embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the lottery probability per auxiliary varies from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (usually). Along with the occurrence of the figure probability fluctuation state, the'normal symbol time reduction state'that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (normal symbol fluctuation display operation time) occurs (for example, from 10 seconds). It is shortened to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the normal power opening game frequently occurs, and the operating rate is improved (high base state) in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the electric chew support state is abbreviated as "with electric support", and the case where it is not is abbreviated as "without electric support".

In the present embodiment, the "normal state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and a gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

In the "time saving state", the jackpot lottery probability is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation time) is higher than the normal state. It is a game state in which a'special symbol time reduction state'is generated and the electric chew support state is set. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + with electric support + special symbol time saving state".

The "latent probability state" is a "special symbol probability change state" in which the jackpot lottery probability fluctuates to a high probability (for example, 1 / 39.9) higher than the above low probability, and is a gaming state without electric support (high). Probability + no electric support).

The "probability change state" refers to a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the latent probability state, but a special symbol time reduction state and an electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probability change state, it becomes "high probability + with electric support + special symbol time saving state".

Regarding the game state, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability, when the game state is "normal state" and "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability state", and the game state is "latent state" and "probability change". In the case of "state", at least the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". During the big hit, a big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but the big hit lottery probability and the presence / absence of the electric support are placed under the same low probability / no electric support game state as the above normal state.

[3-3. About hit]

Subsequently, the "hit" in the game machine 1 will be described.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big hit lottery (winning lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of hits. In the case of this example, the hit type includes, for example, each jackpot belonging to the jackpot type, for example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R".
The above-mentioned "R" notation means the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or the game ball is displayed. A game that operates when a specific area in the winning opening is passed.

In the above probability variation state, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the specified number of STs) without winning the jackpot type, the high probability state is terminated and the probability shifts to a low probability. , So-called "number-cutting probability change machine (ST machine)", and when the specified number of ST times is completed, the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. However, it may be a type of "general probability change machine" that continues until the next big hit is won.
The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Further, the number of times of the time saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In addition, there is no particular limitation on what kind of hit is provided, and it can be appropriately determined.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for "missing" as well as the jackpot type. Specifically, there are three types of outliers, "outlier 1", "outlier 2", and "outlier 3".
As described above, when the result of the winning lottery is "missing", the lottery of the losing type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About the production]
(Direction mode)

Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for displaying an effect related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to switch between the effect modes. Specifically, a normal effect mode, a time-saving effect mode, a latent effect mode, and a probability change effect mode are provided corresponding to each of the normal state, the time-saving state, the latent state, and the probable change state. In each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern is displayed by different background effects so that the player can grasp what kind of game state he / she is currently staying in. It has become.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) is a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, an effect control command including game state information managed by the main control unit 20 side. Based on this, the current game state is grasped in a form that is consistent with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side, and the transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes is possible. Specific effect control commands as described above include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Notice production)

Next, the notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, and variously related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled. Such a notice production suggests (notices) the degree of expectation (hereinafter referred to as "winning expectation") of whether or not the player has won the winning type, and serves as a "fanning effect" to fuel the player's sense of expectation of winning. work. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", and "look-ahead notice production". The effect control unit 24 functions as a notice effect control means capable of executing (appearing) and controlling these effects.

The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode with a reach state (variation display mode with a reach state: reach variation pattern), and specifically, the final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. A mode of production. Reach effects include multiple types of reach effects associated with winning expectations. For example, there are cases where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect appears. Such a reach production is called a "super reach production". Many of these "super reach" have a relatively longer production time (variable time) than the normal reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects of super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of these super reach 1 to 4 is "super reach 1 <super reach 2 <super". It has a relationship of "reach 3 <super reach 4".

The "pseudo-continuous effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo-continuous variation) of the decorative symbol, and the "pseudo-continuous variation" is one of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol variation display game. It refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times, such as temporarily setting a part or all of them in a temporarily stopped state and executing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)" described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the occurrence rate (appearance rate) of such a "pseudo-ren" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the supermarket is determined according to the number of pseudo-variations. It is easy to select a production to fuel expectations such as reach.

The "look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as "look-ahead notice" or "look-ahead effect") is based on the result of the look-ahead judgment and before the variable display of the symbol to be judged is performed. It means an effect of notifying the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. The "advantageous state" means an advantageous state for the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead effect of this example is mainly for holding display of operation-holding balls (undigested operation-holding balls) that have not yet been used for executing the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols). It is performed in an effect mode that can notify the winning expectation in advance before the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game by using the mode and the background effect of the symbol variation display game executed earlier. .. In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "SU (step-up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "revival effect", and "premier notice effect" are performed. It occurs and the game content is getting excited.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hold change notice effect” as an example of the pre-reading notice effect will be described.
In the case of the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, a display area for displaying the decorative symbol variable display game (a variable display effect of the decorative symbol and a notice effect are displayed). A display area for the purpose of) is provided, and a hold display area 76 (hold display units a1 to d1) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the special symbol 1 side and a special symbol are provided in the lower display area in the screen. A hold display area 77 (hold display units a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, the fact is notified by a predetermined holding display mode. In FIG. 4, the presence or absence of the operation holding ball is currently lit (with the operation holding ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or off (without the operation holding ball: the dashed circle in the figure). An example is shown in which information on the number of pending balls is notified.

The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation hold ball (hold display) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each hold display area 76, 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is all the operations in the hold display. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game in progress hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, it moves on the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and its state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation hold ball is generated, the main control unit 20 sends the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the number of existing operation hold balls including the operation hold ball generated this time). A "hold addition command" for designating the above is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of the present embodiment, the hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the hold addition command makes it possible to specify the data on the upper byte side that can specify the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead determination and the look-ahead judgment information. It is composed of low-order byte side data.

Here, as understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, a pre-reading of the reserved ball is performed based on the fact that a winning is generated in the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 and a new reserved ball is generated. As a determination, a big hit lottery is performed for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 holds and stores information representing the result of the jackpot lottery performed as such a look-ahead determination in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203.
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of pre-reading determination is used for selecting (lottery) a symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be paraphrased as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 performs the look-ahead determination and holds and stores the "variation pattern selection information" obtained as a result in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the "look-ahead advance notice effect" as a part of the display control process related to the hold display based on the look-ahead determination information included therein. Performs production control processing related to. Specifically, a "look-ahead notice lottery" is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed, and if this is won, the look-ahead notice effect is displayed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is specifically a big hit lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. This is game information obtained by pre-reading and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. That is, this information includes at least information that pre-reads the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation (pre-reading winning information), and other information that pre-reads the symbol lottery result (pre-reading symbol information) and fluctuation at the start of fluctuation. Information for which the pattern is pre-read-determined (pre-reading fluctuation pattern information) can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified by the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the hold addition command includes the look-ahead winning information, the look-ahead symbol information, and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information.

It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball occurs must be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation-holding ball is actually subjected to the fluctuation display operation. There is no. For example, if the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "super reach 1" is typically described, in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is called "super reach 1". It is possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, but the "super reach type" that is the essence of the effect.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example, a normal hold display. "Hold display change" that can change from white (normal hold display mode) to hold display (special hold display mode) with blue, green, red, and Danger pattern (or special color or pattern such as rainbow color) of the notice display. A look-ahead notice effect (also called "hold change notice") of "system" is performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in blue, green, red, and the Danger pattern means that the expectation of winning is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the hold icon of the Danger pattern has an extremely high expectation of winning a big hit. It is a premium hold icon to be displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects in the game machine 1 are manifested by the effect means provided in the game machine 1. The directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device (light display device 45a: Light effect means), sound generator such as speaker 46 (sound generator 46a: sound effect means), effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, Typical examples are a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to a player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). The term "image display device" mainly refers to a type in which an effect is displayed by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<4. Main control processing>

Subsequently, the process performed by the main control unit 20 of the present embodiment will be described. The processing of the main control unit 20 is mainly a predetermined main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 5) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 18). And are included.

[4-1. Main control side main processing]

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control side.
The main processing on the main control side is started when a system reset occurs due to a system reset signal from the power supply board when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control, the watchdog timer function ( WDT) may be exerted and the CPU 201 may be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes initial setting processing necessary for starting the game operation, such as initializing the register values of each unit including the CPU201. (Step S101).

(Initial setting process)

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself in the interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then sets the stack pointer value of the RAM 203 to the stack area as the stack pointer setting process in step S202. Executes the process to set according to the final address of. Then, in the following step S203, the RAM protection is invalidated, and the prohibited area in the out-of-designated area travel prohibition function of the RAM 203 is invalidated.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes a process for turning off the security signal, turning off the set value display, and turning off the firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame, and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a status such as a setting being changed. The setting value display OFF means turning off the display of the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97.
The launch permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the launch control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 gives an instruction to the payout control board 29 to turn off the launch permission signal.
Here, the security signal OFF and the set value display OFF are measures for turning on / off the power while the setting is being changed. That is, since the power may have been turned off while the set value Ve is being displayed in the setting change process, the set value display and the security signal are temporarily turned off.

In step S205 following step S204, the CPU 201 executes a power supply abnormality check process.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power supply abnormality check process, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON (step S12). The power supply abnormality signal is a signal output from the power supply board, indicates that the power supply abnormality signal OFF is at a normal level, and indicates that the power supply abnormality signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, is abnormal). If the power supply abnormality signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5 and restarts the main processing on the main control side from the beginning. That is, when an abnormality is found in the power supply, the main processing on the main control side is reset.
Then, if the power supply abnormality signal is not ON, no abnormality is found in the power supply, so that the CPU 201 finishes the power supply abnormality check process.

Returning to FIG. 6, the CPU 201 performs various setting processes at startup in step S206 in response to the completion of the power supply abnormality check process in step S205. In the setting process of step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hard random number setting process for activating an internal hard random number circuit, and the like are executed.

In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the startup waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24). Then, the process of steps S208 to S210 waits for the set start-up waiting time to elapse. Specifically, after subtracting 1 from the set startup waiting time (step S208) and executing the power supply abnormality check process (step S209), if the startup waiting time is not zero (step S210: ≠ 0), step S208 Return to the process of. By the standby process based on such an activation waiting time, the activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed.

In step S210, when the above startup waiting time has elapsed (waiting time = 0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S211 and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control unit 24.
In response to this standby screen display command, the effect control unit 24 displays a predetermined screen display, such as a screen on which characters such as "Please Wait ...", are arranged on the liquid crystal display device 36 at the time of startup. Control to execute.

In response to the transmission process of step S211 being executed, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S212, and by the processes of step S212 and step S213, while executing the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. It waits for the power-on signal from the board 29 to be sent. This power-on signal is a signal output when the payout control board 29 starts up normally, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. As a result, when the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the game operation is not started only by repeating the processes of steps S212 and S213. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted because the payout abnormality such as the prize ball not being paid out does not occur.
When the power-on signal is sent (step S213: ON), the CPU 201 ends the initial setting process in step S101.

(Processing after initial setting)

The CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG. 5 in response to the completion of the above initial setting process.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires the information of the input port n (that is, a predetermined input port) and copies it to the W register.
Here, the input port n is a 1-byte (8-bit) port, and in this example, the following signals are input. In addition, "b0" to "b7" shown below represent a bit position.

b0: Setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: Out of supply detection signal b2: Counting error signal b3: Disconnection detection signal 1
b4: Disconnection detection signal 2
b5: Door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal

Here, regarding the setting key of b0, "0" means the setting key switch 94 = OFF, and "1" means the setting key switch 94 = ON. Regarding the door opening signal of b5, "0" means the door is closed (front frame 2 is closed), and "1" means the door is opened. Further, regarding the RAM clear button of b6, "0" means RAM clear switch 98 = OFF (button non-operated state), and "1" means RAM clear switch 98 = ON (button operated state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, the values required for determining the migration of the setting change processing (S115), RAM clear processing (at least S117 and S118), setting confirmation processing (S109), and backup restoration processing (S111) described below. The process of masking the values other than the setting key (b0), the RAM clear button (b6), and the door opening signal (b5) is performed.
As can be understood from the above explanation, the transition condition to the setting change process is that both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state with the front frame 2 open at the time of startup. ing.
Further, in this example, the transition condition to the RAM clear processing is that, in terms of operation, the setting key is in the non-operation state and the RAM clear button is in the operation state at the time of startup.
Further, the transition condition to the setting confirmation process is that, in terms of operation, the setting key is in the operating state and the RAM clear button is in the non-operating state when the front frame 2 is open.
Further, the transition condition to the backup restoration process is that, in terms of operation, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the non-operation state at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows the correspondence between each determination condition in terms of operation in shifting to the setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and backup restoration processing, and the value of the W register.
FIG. 8 shows the order of setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and transition determination to backup restoration processing.
As shown in the figure, the judgment conditions for the transition to the first setting change process are the setting key: ON (setting key switch 94: ON), door opening: ON (front door opening sensor 61: ON), RAM clear switch 98. : ON, and therefore the W register value is conditional on 0th bit: 1, 5th bit: 1, and 6th bit: 1.
In the second determination of transition to the RAM clear process, it is determined whether or not the determination condition is the RAM clear switch 98: ON and the value of the W register is the 6th bit: 1. Here, in this example, the transition determination to the RAM clear processing is executed when the transition condition of the setting change processing is not satisfied. Further, in the transition to the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process, it is a condition that the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF. From these points, if the transition condition to the setting change processing is not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the transition operation to the RAM clear processing is being performed. Therefore, in this example, in the transition determination to the RAM clear processing as described above, in terms of operation, only whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (6th bit: 1 or not) is determined. It is said.

In the judgment of transition to the third setting confirmation process, the judgment conditions are set key: ON, door open: ON, RAM clear switch 98: OFF, and therefore the W register value is the 0th bit: 1st and 5th bits. The condition is: 1, 6th bit: 0.
Further, in the determination of transition to the fourth backup restoration process, the determination conditions are set key: OFF and RAM clear switch 98: OFF, and therefore, the W register values are 0th bit: 0 and 6th bit: 0. It is a condition.

Here, regarding the backup restoration process, as the transition condition for performing only the backup restoration process without going through the setting confirmation process, the setting key: OFF and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF are described on the operation side as described above. However, the condition for whether or not to simply shift to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed is that the backup flag described later is ON (step S106). Refer to the judgment process of).

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The CPU 201 executes the setting change condition establishment determination process in step S104 in response to performing the mask process in step S103. Specifically, in order to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not the masked value (3 bits) in step S103 is "111".
When the value after masking is "111" and an affirmative result that the setting change condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process in step S115. That is, a process for newly setting the set value Ve is performed according to the operation of the RAM clear button or the setting key.
The details of the setting change process in step S115 will be described later.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the detection signals by the setting key switch 94, the front door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, each detection used in determining the transition to the setting change mode. A signal is input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and it is collectively determined whether or not the value of each input detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition.
As a result, the number of determination processes for the determination of transition to the setting change mode can be reduced as compared with the case of individually determining whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition.

In response to executing the setting change process in step S115, the CPU 201 executes the RAM clear process in step S116. This RAM clear process is a setting for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the process of initializing the value in the predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203 and the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. It includes the process of sending the change end command, but the details will be described later.

Subsequently, in the previous step S104, if the value after masking by step S103 is not "111" and a negative result is obtained that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 and the RAM is abnormal. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is at least determined whether or not the "set value" stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the range of use Ru (in this example, outside the range of "1", "2", and "6"). To do.
Here, as a value handled by the CPU 201 with respect to the set value Ve, there is a set value Vd. The set value Vd is a value corresponding to the set value Ve, which is a 1-byte value in this example, and is 00H so as to be able to express at least three stages corresponding to the above-mentioned usage range Ru. The values of (0) to 02H (3) are defined. In addition, "H" means a hexadecimal number (hereinafter, the same applies). In this example, the set value Vd = 00H represents the set value Ve = "1", the set value Vd = 01H represents the set value Ve = "2", and the set value Vd = 02H represents the set value Ve = "6". It is supposed to be. In the main control unit 20, the set value Vd is mainly handled as the "set value", and this set value Vd is stored in the storage area of the "set value" in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 20. ..
In the determination process of step S105, it is determined whether or not the set value Vd stored in the work area is a value in the range of 00H to 02H.

In step S105, when the set value is a value outside the above-mentioned usage range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 is a process for waiting for the power to be turned on again after step S112. After that.
Specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201 gives an effect control command (setting) for instructing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be notified to re-turn on the power and change the setting as a command transmission process when the power is turned on again. A process of transmitting a change waiting command) to the effect control unit 24 is performed. If a RAM error is detected at startup, the mode is forcibly shifted to the setting change mode and the change (setting) of the set value Ve is accepted. Therefore, in step S112, the CPU 201 first notifies the effect control unit 24 side that the setting change mode is to be entered by the setting change waiting command.
In response to the setting change waiting command, the effect control unit 24 executes a screen display on the liquid crystal display device 36 to prompt the setting change operation, such as a screen containing characters such as "Open the door and change the setting". Let me. At this time, the effect control unit 24 may perform control to display the corresponding light effect (for example, lighting of all LEDs in the light display device 45a) and the sound effect together with the screen display.

In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and repeats the error display process of step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting / performance indicator 97 to execute the error display is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes after step S101 are executed again as the main process on the main control side. At this time, if the operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed according to the above screen display or the like, the shift to the setting change mode is performed and the RAM abnormal state is resolved.

In step S105 described above, if it is determined that the set value is not a value outside the usage range Ru and is not a RAM abnormality, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S106 to determine whether the backup flag is ON (in this example, the backup flag = 5AH). Is ON state) is determined.
In the game machine 1, when the power is cut off, a process for backing up the stored information of the RAM 203 is performed by a power check / backup process (step S901, see FIG. 19) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process. If the backup process is properly performed when the power is cut off, the backup flag is turned on (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in step S106 described above, the backup flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the backup can be restored. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether or not the backup flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S112 described above. As a result, when the backup restoration condition is not satisfied, the transition to the setting change mode is forcibly performed as in the case where the RAM abnormality described above is recognized.

Here, as described above, the determination process in step S106 corresponds to the process of determining whether or not to shift to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether or not the RAM clear condition (transition condition to the RAM clear process) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1".
When the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1" and an affirmative result that the RAM clear condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to the process in step S116 described above. As a result, the RAM clearing process described above is executed.

Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from step S107 to S116 described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing the setting. As a result, it is possible to deal with a case where it is desired to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as the payout-related data in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S107, when the value of the 6th bit of the W register is not "1" and a negative result that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 to confirm the setting (setting confirmation condition). It is determined whether or not the transition condition to the setting confirmation process) is satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the W register after masking in step S103 is "110".
When the value of the W register after masking is "110" and an affirmative result that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process in step S109 and proceeds to step S110. That is, the process shifts to the process for restoring the backup.
The details of the setting confirmation process in step S109 will be described again.

On the other hand, if the value of the W register after masking is not "110" and a negative result that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 passes the setting confirmation process in step S109 and proceeds to step S110. ..

In step S110, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined effect control command corresponding to the backup return to the effect control unit 24 as a command transmission process at the time of backup return.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs a backup restoration process.
The backup restoration process is a process of restoring the operation after the power is turned on and before the power is turned off, based on the stored contents of the RAM 203 backed up when the power is turned off. Specifically, the CPU 201 returns the stack pointer before the power is cut off, and performs a process for starting the game operation from the processing state when the power is cut off.
Further, in the backup restoration process, the power failure restoration display command (OB03H) for issuing the information display instruction corresponding to the backup restoration is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in the main loop preprocessing in step S119 described later. Therefore, the process of storing the lower byte data of the power failure recovery display command in the register is executed.

When the backup restoration process in step S111 is executed, or when the RAM clear process in step S116 described above is executed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are executed, or when only the RAM clear process is executed). , CPU 201 proceeds with step S117 processing.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets the CTC for periodically generating a timer interrupt at predetermined time intervals such as 4 ms.
By performing the setting process in step S117, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output thereafter, and the main control side timer interrupt process is executed.

In the following step S118, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command for instructing the start of the game to the effect control unit 24, then proceeds to step S119 to execute the main loop pre-process, and then step S120. Executes the main loop processing of.
The main loop preprocessing in step S119 will be described later.

(Main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing in step S120.
In the main loop process of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself in the interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes the random number update process in the subsequent step S602. In this random number update process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game (random numbers related to the jackpot lottery circulating in a predetermined numerical range by the increment process (special symbol determination used for the symbol lottery). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers related to the lottery for auxiliary hits (random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment used in the winning lottery for auxiliary hits) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment) , Initial value random number for auxiliary hit judgment) and random number for fluctuation pattern used for selection of fluctuation pattern are updated.

In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as various random number counters used for a symbol lottery related to a big hit lottery, an auxiliary hit lottery, a variable pattern lottery, etc., a random number counter for special symbol determination, a counter for generating an initial value, and a special symbol determination A random number counter for, a random number counter for determining auxiliary hits, a counter for generating initial values, a random number counter for determining auxiliary hits, a random number counter for fluctuation patterns, and the like are provided. These counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. In the random number update process of step S602, the above-mentioned special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters that generate the initial values of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated, and the above various types are described. Generate soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern is "0 to 238", a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating the value of the random number for the fluctuation pattern of the RAM 203, and the acquired value is used. After adding "1", it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding "1" to the acquired value is "239", "0" is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner.

When the random number update process in step S602 is completed, the CPU 201 performs a process of saving the values of all the registers in step S603, and then performs a performance display monitor aggregation division process in step S604.
This performance display monitor aggregation division process is a process for calculating a value as the performance information described above (here, for example, a value as the “normal time ratio information” described above). As described above, the value of the normal time ratio information is calculated by using the total number of payouts and the total number of out balls, but the CPU 201 has a winning opening (upper start opening 34, Calculated based on the result of counting the number of game balls that won in the lower start opening 35, general winning opening 43, and large winning opening 50). For the total number of out balls, the number of game balls discharged from the out opening 49 is used. Obtained by counting.
The counting of the number of winning balls and the counting of the number of out balls are performed in the input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18) described later in the timer interrupt process on the main control side. The CPU 201 calculates the value as the normal time ratio information in step S604 based on the count values of the count of the number of winning balls and the count of the number of out balls performed on the timer interrupt processing side in this way. As described above, the calculated value as the normal time ratio information is stored in the predetermined area (measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203.
The value of the normal time ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting / performance indicator 97 by the performance display monitor display process (see step S916 in FIG. 18) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs all register reset processing, sets itself in the interrupt enabled state in the following step S606, and then returns to step S601.

As described above, in the main loop processing of step S123, the processing of steps S601 to S606 is repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S601 to S606 except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

(Setting change processing)

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the set value Ve based on the operation and an effect control command for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting change is completed (completed) are sent to the effect control unit 24. Processing for transmission is performed.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first executes a process of transmitting a setting changing command (BA76H) to the effect control unit 24 in step S401.
In response to this setting changing command, the effect control unit 24 displays on the liquid crystal display device 36 a screen display for notifying that the setting is being changed, such as a screen on which characters such as "setting is being changed" are arranged. A process is performed to execute the command or to output the corresponding sound from the speaker 46 while the setting is being changed. Further, at this time, the effect control unit 24 may light a predetermined LED (for example, all LEDs) in the light generating means (light display device 45a) described above according to a predetermined lighting pattern.
The processing executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to the various effect control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 in connection with the setting change, including the command during the setting change, will be described later (FIG. 52A, etc.).

In the following step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, the OFF state), and then sets the system operation status = 2 in the step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the system has passed the setting change process of step S115 at the time of startup, and "2" indicates that the system has passed the setting change process, other than "2". Indicates that the value (for example, "0") does not go through the setting change process.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in this example, there are cases where both the setting change process and the RAM clear process (S116) are executed, and the case where only the RAM clear process is executed without executing the setting change process. Although the clear process (program) is shared, by using the above system operation status, the process can be executed separately between the former case and the latter case while sharing the RAM clear process program. ..

In step S404 following step S403, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring a set value. Specifically, the set value Vd (any of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired.

In the processing after step S405 following step S404, the display value on the setting / performance indicator 97 is updated according to the progressive operation of the set value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), or the setting change completion operation (setting key). It is a process for setting the set value Ve according to the operation).
First, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired set value Vd by 1 in step S405 (“set value -1”), and determines whether or not the set value Vd is “2” (maximum number of steps -1) or more in the following step S406. (Set value ≥ 2 "). In this example, since the maximum value of the set value Vd is 02H (the maximum number of steps is "3"), it is not determined that the set value ≥ 2 in step S406 executed for the first time after the start of the setting change process. ..
In step S406, if the set value Vd is not 2 or more, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag in step S407 (after turning it ON), and then increments the set value Vd by 1 in step S408 (“set value +1”). Then, in step S409, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes the setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 by the subsequent command process in step S412.
The command for changing the setting will be described later.
Then, in response to executing the command transmission process in step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management process in step S413. By this output management process, the set value Ve corresponding to the current set value Vd is displayed on the setting / performance display 97. The details of the output management process in step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether the setting key is OFF, that is, whether the setting key switch 94 is OFF, and if the setting key is not OFF, the change switch, that is, in step S415. It is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 re-executes the output management process of step S413.
By the processing of steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until either the setting key or the change switch is turned ON, and during the standby, the setting / performance display 97 displays the current set value Ve by the processing of step S413. Repeat the process for.

If the change switch is ON in step S415, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
Here, if the set value Vd (set value Vd that was being set up to that point) acquired at the start of the setting change process in step S115 is 02H, it is determined in step S415 that the change switch is ON. In the process of step S406 executed accordingly, a determination result that "set value ≥ 2" is obtained (because it is -1 in step S405 but +1 in step S408). The set value Vd should be returned to 00H according to the change operation (progressive operation) performed when the set value Vd is 02H. Therefore, if it is determined in step S406 that "set value ≥ 2", the carry flag set process in step S407 is passed and the process proceeds to step S408. As a result, since the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410 and the set value Vd is returned to 00H (“set value ← 0”).
The CPU 201 proceeds to step S413 via the processes of steps S411 and S412 in response to the return of the set value Vd to 00H in step S410. That is, in this case, the set value Ve (“1” in this example) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is displayed on the setting / performance display 97.
The carry flag is turned off when it is determined to be ON in step S409, for example.

By the above processing, during the setting change, the set value Vd is cyclically changed within the range of 00H to 02H (within the usage range Ru) according to the change operation, and corresponds to the changed set value Vd. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance display 97.

Here, according to the processing of steps S405 to S410 described above, it can be seen that the upper limit value when the set value Vd is returned to "00H" can be changed depending on the size of the value to be compared with the set value Vd in step S405. .. That is, in the above example, by setting the comparison target value in step S405 to "2 (02H)", when the operation of the change switch is detected in step S415 when the set value Vd = 2, the set value Vd is set. It is designed to be returned to "00H". If the comparison target value in step S405 is set to "1" or "0", the set value Vd is set when the set value Vd = 1 and the change switch operation is detected when the set value Vd = 0, respectively. It is returned to "00H".
Regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is conceivable to make a model that enables the setting change and a model that does not allow the setting change, but if the processing of steps S405 to S410 described above is adopted, the comparison target value in step S405 is adopted. By setting "0", it can be seen that a model whose setting cannot be changed can be easily created. This means that the program for causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to execute the process is the same, and only the stored value of the comparison target value referred to in the process of step S405 is changed, and the setting can be changed and the setting cannot be changed. It means that it is possible to make different models. In other words, in this respect, it is considered to be a highly versatile program.
Further, according to the process shown in FIG. 10, even when the comparison target value in step S405 is set to "0" and the setting change is disabled, the setting change operation is effectively processed (S415). Then, in the process of FIG. 10, the value of the set value information stored in the register also changes according to the setting change operation effectively processed in this way (S406). However, if the comparison target value in step S405 is set to "0", the program is such that the set value Vd is not finally changed even if the setting change operation is performed.

Further, the setting change command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd being selected during the setting change process, and the selected setting value. It is a command that stores information representing Ve.
By the series of processes of steps S406 to S415 described above, every time the selected set value Ve is switched by the progressive operation of the set value, a setting change command reflecting the changed set value Ve is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Will be.
Although the description by illustration is omitted in FIG. 10, the CPU 201 uses the set value offset conversion table described later in acquiring the set value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd (see FIG. 16).

If it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 to execute a process of saving the set value Vd. That is, the process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 ends the setting change process in step S115 in response to the execution of the save process in step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the output management process in step S413.
First, the CPU 201 executes the security signal output process in step S501. Specifically, a process is performed so that a security signal is output to the hall computer HC through the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame.
In the following step S502, the CPU 201 executes a process of outputting 0 to the LED common port, that is, the LED common port as the setting / performance indicator 97, and then acquires display data from the 7-segment decoding table in step S503. Execute the process. That is, it is a process of acquiring display data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “6”) based on the set value Vd.
When 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting / performance indicator 97 is in the display OFF state (non-display state), the significance of which will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a 7-segment decoding table, and FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the segment configuration and the segment display pattern in the setting / performance display 97.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.

In this example, the seven segments of the setting / performance indicator 97 are numbered by numerical values 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. The setting / performance display 97 is provided with a DP (dot point) display unit (light emitting unit) together with these seven segments 0 to 6, and the DP display unit is numbered “7”. ing.
As the 7-segment display data, a total of 10 data are prepared, from the display data of "SEG_0" representing the numerical value "0" to the display data of "SEG_9" representing the numerical value "9". The display data is 1 byte (8 bits) of data, and when the least significant bit position is the first bit position, the first bit position is the display / non-display of the segment "0" (light emission / non-light emission). Represents. After that, similarly, the second bit position is the segment "1", the third bit position is the segment "2", the fourth bit position is the segment "3", the fifth bit position is the segment "4", and the sixth bit position. The bit position of is the display / non-display of the segment "5", and the 7th bit position is the display / non-display of the segment "6".
Further, in the display data in this example, the eighth bit position is assumed to represent the display / non-display of DP (“7”).

In the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12, the corresponding display data, specifically, the display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, and SEG_6 are acquired from the set values Vd = 00H, 01H, and 02H, respectively. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, an area for storing display data for each set value Vd of at least 00H to 05H is secured, such as the address areas of "6203" to "6208" in the figure. The display data SEG_1 (“06” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is set in the second area in the uppermost area (the area with the youngest number) in this area. The display data SEG_2 (“5B” in the figure) corresponding to Vd = 01H is stored, and the display data SEG_6 (“7D” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 02H is stored in the third area.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 03H, the fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 05H are for display. Although "00" is stored as data, its significance will be described again.
Further, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, display data SEG_E ("79") for displaying "E" indicating a setting value error is stored in the 7th area. It is possible to notify the set value error through the setting / performance indicator 97 in response to the case where the set value Vd shows an abnormal value such as the set value Vd is a value outside the usage range Ru. ..

The description returns to FIG.
The CPU 201 performs a process of outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table by the process of step S503 to the setting / performance display 97 in step S504.
Subsequent steps S505 to S508 are processes for dynamically lighting (intermittently lighting) the LED for displaying the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97. Specifically, in step S505, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by 1, and in the subsequent step S506, determines whether or not the 0th and 1st bits (lower 2 bits) of the LED counter are "11". Here, the lower 2 bits of the LED counter become "11" when the increment process of step S505 is performed a multiple of 4.
If the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are "11" in step S506, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs data for designating a segment for displaying the set value to the LED common port, and displays the LED counter in step S508. Executes timer count processing. By executing the output process in step S507, the setting / performance indicator 97 displays the set value Ve based on the display data output in step S504. Then, this display state is continued for the time of the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 ends in response to the execution of the process of step S509 following the timer count process of step S508, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. 10. At this time, the setting key is OFF. If the change switch is ON, the output management process of step S413 is repeated. As described above, since 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the lighting state of the LED for setting value display started in the process of step S507 is released by the execution of step S502. Since the LED counter is incremented by 1 in step S505, it is determined that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11" in step S506, the output processing in step S507 is passed, and the timer count processing in step S508 is performed. Will be executed. That is, after the process of step S507 is executed and the LED for displaying the set value is turned on for a period of at least 4 ms, until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter become "11" again, that is, in this example. The LED is turned off for at least 4 ms × 3 = 12 ms.
In this way, dynamic lighting is realized in which the LED for displaying the set value is intermittently lit at a predetermined cycle.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 executes the input data creation process in step S509 in response to executing the timer count process in step S508.
This input data creation process is executed by calling, for example, the same process in step S902 in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). As will be described later, the input data created by the input data creation process includes the input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating the presence / absence of the progressive operation of the set value Ve and the setting key switch indicating the presence / absence of the setting change completion operation. Contains 94 input data.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 10, the determination of the presence / absence of the setting change completion operation (S414) and the determination of the presence / absence of the progressive operation of the set value Ve (S415) are executed after the output management process of step S413. By executing the input data creation process in step S509, the data required for these determination processes can be obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clearing process shown in FIG.
First, the CPU 201 executes the in-region RAM initialization process in step S601. The initialization process of step S601 is a process of initializing (clearing) the value in the predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203. However, in the initialization process of step S601, the storage area of the set value Vd in the work area is excluded from the initialization target.

The above-mentioned performance information is stored in an area outside the used area in the RAM 203, and therefore is not cleared by the initialization process in step S601.
The data to be cleared in the RAM clearing process is data in the RAM area (normal data storage area) such as various flags, timers, and counters required for normal game progress. These data include, for example, the following. That is, data related to game state designation (game state flag that specifies the current game state such as normal state, probability change state, time saving state, latent probability state, etc.), and a flag that specifies whether or not a winning game is in progress (conditional device). Operation flag), various data related to the execution of the winning game (current number of rounds, maximum number of rounds, etc.), data related to the big hit lottery result (big hit judgment flag: winning lottery result information, special symbol judgment data: symbol lottery result information) , Manages hold data related to operation hold balls (number of operation hold balls, various random numbers used for big hit lottery, various random numbers used for auxiliary hit lottery, random numbers for fluctuation patterns), special symbol operation status, and game progress Timer (special symbol accessory operation timer), input / output data related to switches and sensors, various winning counters that count the number of winning balls in the winning opening, a flag that specifies whether or not there is an electric support state (open extension flag), electric Electric support count counter that counts the remaining number of support, counter that counts the remaining number of high probability state (special figure probability variation counter, normal figure probability variation counter), various error flags (excluding RAM error flag), and payout related Data etc. In any case, when the RAM clear process is executed, all the data other than the specific data (set value Vd and performance information) are set to the initial state.

Here, as understood from the above description of FIG. 5, when the setting change process (S115) is executed, the process proceeds to step S116 and the RAM clear process is executed.
In the setting change process, the set value Vd can be changed. When the set value Vd is changed, the stored values other than the set value Vd in the work area of the RAM 203 may be inconsistent with the changed set value Vd. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed, the area other than the set value Vd in the work area is cleared (initialized) by executing the RAM clear process.

In response to executing the initialization process of step S601, the CPU 201 sets 30 s in the RAM clear notification timer in step S602 and also executes a process for setting a deviation in this special figure. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the RAM clear notification time executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to the RAM clear command transmitted in the process of step S803 of FIG. 17, which will be described later, and is 30 s in this example. To set. Further, the present special figure referred to here means, for example, the above-mentioned special figure 1 and special figure 2.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the system operation status described above is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been performed after the startup.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes the process corresponding to the case of passing through the setting change process in steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 proceeds to step S613 to store the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and ends the RAM clear process in step S116.
The operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as an operation of designating the command type to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop preprocessing (FIG. 17) described later.

When passing through the setting change process, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to "0" in step S604, executes the acquisition process of the setting change end command (BA77H) in step S605, and then executes the command in step S606. The setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the transmission process.

The processes of steps S607 to S612 following step S606 are processes related to the display of the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs data for designating the set value display segment to the LED common port, and in the following step S608, the display data corresponding to the set value Vd is output from the 7 segment decode table (see FIG. 13). After executing the process of acquiring and adding DP to the display data in step S609, that is, the process of setting the value of the 7th bit position of the display data to "1", the display data is output by the output process of step S610. Output to the setting / performance indicator 97.

The processes of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 are processes for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting / performance indicator 97 for a predetermined time (1s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes the display timer count process in step S612 (for example, the timer count process having a cycle of 4 ms similar to that in step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. To do.

If it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed, the CPU 201 executes the storage process of step S613 and ends the RAM clear process of step S116.

As can be understood from the above description, when the setting change process of step S115 is executed and the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412: Y in FIG. 10), the RAM clear process of step S116 A setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (S605, S606), and a notification that the setting change is completed is given.
In the case of this example, the setting change end command notifies the effect control unit 24 that the setting change is completed, and does not provide the function of notifying the setting value Ve set in the setting change process. ..
In this example, the set value Ve set in the setting change process is notified to the effect control unit 24 by the set value command transmitted in the process of step S808 of FIG. 17 (main loop preprocessing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process in step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the set value Ve that is being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets 30s in the fraudulent information timer in step S701. The fraud information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the security signal described above for the hall computer HC.
In the following step S702, a process of acquiring the current set value information is performed. That is, the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is acquired.

In step S703 following step S702, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring the set value data from the set value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of a set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.
In the set value offset conversion table, the set value Vd (00H to 02H) is set to the set value Ve ("1".
It functions as a table for converting the identification data ("SETNUM1" to "SETNUM6") of "2" and "6").
In the case of this example, the set value offset conversion table has an area for storing the identification data of the set value Ve for at least each set value Vd of 00H to 05H, such as the address areas of "6215" to "6220" in the figure. The identification data (“00” in the figure) of the set value Ve “1” corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is set to the set value Vd = 01H in the uppermost area in this area. The identification data (“01” in the figure) of the corresponding set value Ve “2” is the identification data (“05” in the figure) of the set value Ve “6” corresponding to the set value Vd = 02H in the third area. It is stored.
In this example, the set value is set in the fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 03H, the fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 05H. "00" is stored as the identification data of Ve, and its significance will be described again.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above-mentioned identification data as “set value data” by the acquisition process in step S703.

In response to the execution of the acquisition process in step S703, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting checking command (BA6xH) in step S704, and then sends the setting checking command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process in step S705. Send.
In the acquisition process of step S704, the CPU 201 performs a process of including the setting value data acquired in step S703, that is, the identification data for identifying the set value Ve being set in the currently set value, in the setting confirmation command.
As a result, when the command transmission process in step S705 is executed, the effect control unit 24 is notified that the setting is being confirmed and the current set value Ve.

The processes of steps S706 and S707 following step S705 are processes for displaying the current set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first executes a process of acquiring set values and DP data in step S706. That is, the process of acquiring the current set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) in the setting / performance display 97 is executed. Then, the output management process of step S707 is executed. The output management process in step S707 is the same as the output management process in step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the setting / performance display 97 in this case displays the value representing the current set value Ve and the DP.

In step S708 following step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (the setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether or not the end instruction operation of the setting confirmation display has been performed, and the setting key must be OFF. If so, the output management process of step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the setting confirmation command is transmitted in step S705, the process of step S708 waits until the end instruction operation of the setting confirmation display is performed, and during the standby, the setting / performance is set and performed by the process of step S707. The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display 97 is continuously performed.

When it is determined in step S708 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and issues the setting confirmation end command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of the subsequent step S710. The command is transmitted, and the setting confirmation process in step S109 is completed.

(Main loop pre-processing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main loop preprocessing in step S119.
In the main loop pre-processing, the CPU 201 first executes the initialization command acquisition process in step S801, and then transmits the initialization command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process in step S802. The initialization command is a command for instructing the initialization (returning to the origin) of the movable body accessory motor 80c that operates the movable body as an accessory.

In step S803 following step S802, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S804.
Here, in the acquisition process of step S803, the data of the command in which the lower byte data is stored in the register is acquired in the process of the process that has passed after the startup. Specifically, when the RAM clear processing in step S116 is performed (when both the setting change processing and the RAM clear processing are performed, or when the setting change processing is not performed and only the RAM clear processing is performed), The data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is acquired. On the other hand, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed (when both the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process are performed, or when the setting confirmation process is not performed and only the backup restoration process is performed), the power failure is restored. The data of the display command (OB03H) is acquired.
As a result, the effect control unit 24 is configured to execute different processes when the RAM clear process is performed and when the backup return process is performed.

In step S805 following step S804, the CPU 201 executes a process for transmitting the reserved number of the special figures 1 and 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed, the reserved numbers of special figures 1 and 2 are transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the RAM clear process of step S116 is performed. In that case, the pending quantity is not transmitted (because the information on the reserved quantity is cleared).

The processes of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 are processes for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve by the set value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as a process for acquiring the current set value information, and in the subsequent step S807, the set value offset conversion table ( The process of acquiring the set value data from FIG. 16) is executed. Specifically, the identification data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “5”) corresponding to the set value Vd (00H to 02H) acquired in step S806 is acquired.
Then, the CPU 201 performs the acquisition process of the set value command (F6xxH) in the following step S808, and transmits the set value command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S809.
In the acquisition process of step S808, the set value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. By such a setting value command, the current setting value Ve can be notified to the effect control unit 24.

In response to the command transmission process of step S809, the CPU 201 executes the internal function register setting process, that is, the register setting process for initial setting of various functions such as the hardware random number counting function in step S810, and steps. In S811, the process of setting the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5s is executed. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (blinking operation for 5 seconds in this example) at the time of starting the setting / performance display 97.

Further, in step S812 following step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to "0", and in step S813, turns on the launch permission signal for the payout control board 29. In response to this, the payout control board 29 determines that the launch permission state is obtained, outputs the permission signal to the launch control board 28, and allows the launching device 32 to launch the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be launched by the launch operation handle 15.
Here, the configuration in which the payout control board 29 receives the launch permission signal from the main control unit 20 and allows the launch operation, that is, the launch permission instruction information from the main control unit 20 is indirectly transmitted through the payout control board 29. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which a launch permission signal by the main control unit 20 is directly output to the launch control board 28 may be used. ..
The CPU 201 ends the main loop pre-processing in step S119 in response to the execution of the processing in step S813.

(Advantages of setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)

Here, in the present embodiment, like the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 contains a data table including a plurality of set value related information selected by referring to the set value. Is stored.
Then, in this data table, the set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the set value Vd (“00H” to “02H”) that can be set by the setting change process (see FIG. 10). A certain first set value related information and a second set value related information which is the set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process are included. Specifically, as the first set value related information, "00", "01", and "05" stored in the addresses "6215", "6216", and "6217" in the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 correspond to each other. As the second set value related information, "00", "00", and "00" stored in the addresses "6218", "6219", and "6220" correspond to each other.
Further, in the data table, as the first set value related information, at least specific information regarding the set value Ve representing the stage with the lowest winning probability (that is, "00" in the address "6215") is stored, and the second setting is made. The same information as the specific information is stored as the value-related information.

When the set value Vd is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value Vd stored in the RAM 203 to a value representing the lowest stage.
However, if the data is tampered with after rewriting, the corresponding information may be acquired from the data table based on the unsettable setting value Vd, and the operation according to the unsettable setting value may be realized.
According to the above configuration, since it is impossible to acquire information according to the set value Vd that cannot be set from the data table, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and fairness of the game Can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, 0 is stored as the above-mentioned specific information.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the establishment of fraudulent acts by falsifying the set value by a simple method of writing the specific information = 0 in the set value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple method.

Further, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is also set value-related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the set value Vd that can be set by the setting change process. Second setting value related information which is the setting value related information selected when the setting value related information (addresses "6203" to "6205") and the setting value which cannot be set by the main control unit 20 are referred to by the setting change process. (Addresses "6206" to "6208") are included. Then, in the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the information related to the second set value.
As a result, even if the data table is referenced by the set value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process due to fraudulent activity or some malfunction, it is set in the set value display means (setting / performance indicator 97 in this example). It is possible to prevent the value display from being performed. Specifically, in this example, since the data of "00", that is, "00000000000" is acquired as the display data, all the segments "0" to "6" in the 7-segment display for setting value display are hidden. As a result, the numerical value is not displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous display of the set value.

[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]

The timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
The main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes the power supply check / backup process in step S901. In this power check / backup process, the power level supplied from the power supply board is mainly monitored, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored. A backup process or the like for storing predetermined game information at the time in the RAM 203 is performed.

(Power check / backup process)

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the power supply check / backup process in step S901.
In the power supply check / backup process, the CPU 201 reads the power supply abnormality signal output from the power supply board twice in step S1001, and determines whether or not both read values match in the subsequent step S1002. If both values do not match, the process returns to step S1001 and the power supply abnormality signal is read twice again.

If both values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level (the power supply abnormality signal is OFF = normal level, ON = not normal level).
If the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns off the backup flag in step S1004, clears the power supply abnormality confirmation counter in the following step S1005, and ends the power supply abnormality check process in step S901. That is, when it is confirmed that the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level, the backup processing described below is not performed and the timer interrupt processing is continued.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter by 1 in step S1006, and then the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is changed in step S1007. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value = natural number of 2 or more: for example, “2”).
If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is not equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check process in step S901. That is, if a state in which the power supply abnormality signal is not at a normal level is detected but is not continuous detection, the backup process is not performed and the timer interrupt process is continued.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 performs the backup process shown in steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (S1108), turns off the launch permission signal (S1009), and then turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Further, the CPU 201 transmits a power off command to the effect control unit 24 (S1011), and proceeds to the process in step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 performs a process of enabling RAM protection and invalidating the prohibited area.
The RAM protect is a rewrite prevention function for the RAM 203 due to a malfunction or erroneous operation. By enabling RAM protection, only data can be read from RAM 203, and data cannot be written.
Further, the prohibited area is an area corresponding to the designated area in the IAT (prohibition of traveling outside the designated area) function, and by setting the prohibited area to invalid, the IAT reset will not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port, stops the timer interrupt processing in the subsequent step S1014, sets itself to the interrupt disabled state, and shifts to the infinite loop processing.
In this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT and shifts to the operation stop state due to the loss of the operating power supply.

The description returns to FIG.
In FIG. 18, when the power check / backup process in step S901 is completed, the CPU 201 executes the input data creation process in step S902. Specifically, input data is created from various sensors and switches based on input information (ON / OFF signal and rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)).
The input information here is, for example, from a winning detection switch such as an upper starting port sensor 34a, a lower starting port sensor 35a, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, a large winning port sensor 52a, a general winning port sensor 43a, and an OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON / OFF information of the output switch signal (winning detection information) and ON / OFF information of the switch signal output from the switch related to the setting operation of the set value Ve such as the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 (operation). Information), a status signal from the payout control board 29 (ON / OFF information of the front door opening sensor 61 and the fullness detection sensor 60), and the like. As a result, whether or not a game ball is detected at the out port or each winning port is monitored for each interrupt.

After completing the input data creation process in step S902, the CPU 201 executes a timer management process for managing the timer used for the game operation control in step S903. Here, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 are updated (subtracted).

Next, the CPU 201 performs the input management process in step S904. In this input management process, the values of the winning counter, the OUT ball monitoring counter, and the like are updated based on the input data created in the input data creation process (S902). The "winning counter" is a counter provided for each winning opening and counting the number of winning game balls (number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter that counts game balls (out balls) discharged from the out port 49.
The input management process of step S904 functions as an input management means for managing input signals (detection signals) from various winning opening sensors.

In step S905 following step S904, the CPU 201 executes a setting abnormality check process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 confirms the set value error flag in step S1101. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned on) by the process of step S1103 described below when an abnormality of the set value Vd is recognized, and in this example, "5AH" means an ON state. ..

If the set value error flag is "5AH" (ON state) in step S1101, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905. That is, the fact that the set value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101 means that the set value error command (command for instructing the effect control unit 24 to execute the set error notification) is already executed in step S1104 described later. Therefore, the setting error check process is completed without sending the setting value error flag again.

On the other hand, when it is confirmed in step S1101 that the set value error flag is not "5AH" (OFF), the CPU 201 has in step S1102 whether the set value Vd is within the normal range (within the range of 0 to 2). Determine if not. Specifically, the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is in the range of "00H" to "02H".

If the set value Vd is within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1103 to set the set value error flag (ON state), and in the following step S1104, a setting for indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the set value Vd. A value error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting error check process is completed.
Here, the set value error flag includes step S1308 (setting error determination at the time of winning) of FIG. 22, which will be described later, and step S1501 (setting error determination at the time of jackpot random number determination at the start of fluctuation) in FIG. It is used in step S1701 (determination of setting error when performing fluctuation pattern lottery at the start of fluctuation) in FIG. 28.

Here, in response to the above-mentioned set value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs a process for notifying the data abnormality of the set value Ve. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is subjected to a process of displaying an image including a display such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member."
In the game machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be canceled by performing a setting change operation.

The description returns to FIG.
When the CPU 201 finishes the setting abnormality check process in step S905, the CPU 201 executes the error management process in step S906. In this error management process, the presence or absence of an error is monitored based on the input data related to various sensors and the status signal from the payout control board 29.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201 performs the error processing, and if the error type requires the transmission of an error command, the CPU 201 transmits the corresponding command to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error command, it executes error notification according to the error type. Further, when the error being generated is resolved, the CPU 201 transmits an error canceling command to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error release command, the executing error notification is terminated.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes a random number management process in the timer interrupt that periodically updates the random numbers related to each variation display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and each time the random number counter goes around. In addition, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Since the random number for internal lottery (random number for jackpot determination) is generated by the random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

In step S908 following step S907, the CPU 201 executes the prize ball management process. In this prize ball management process, the above-mentioned winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included therein, and executes the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the normal symbol management process in step S909. In this normal symbol management process, processing necessary for executing the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (random number acquisition process), and store the game information as hold data (operation hold ball related to a normal symbol) up to the maximum number of hold balls (hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, a lottery for the auxiliary hit based on the operation holding ball is performed, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the lottery result for the auxiliary hit, and the stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal). The stop symbol) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing.

Further, the CPU 201 executes a normal electric accessory management process in step S910. In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the Fuden open game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a win, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c, whereby the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

Next, the CPU 201 executes a special symbol management process in step S911. In this special symbol management process, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the special symbol (look-ahead variation pattern and the variation pattern at the start of variation) and the special stop symbol The processing required for the special symbol variation display game, such as the determination of, is executed.
The details of the special symbol management process in step S911 will be described again.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the special electric accessory management process in step S912. In this special electric accessory management process, setting processing necessary for executing and controlling the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit, the winning game (big hit game) corresponding to the winning type is executed and controlled.
Specifically, the solenoid control data is set for the large winning opening solenoid 52c, the number of rounds is counted (in the case of a big hit), the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 50 and the opening time are monitored. When the winning game is completed, the transition setting of the game state based on the game state at the time of winning and the winning type is performed.

Further, here, a plurality of effect control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. At the start of the jackpot, the start of the round game, the end of the round game, the end of the maximum number of rounds, etc., it is time to send the jackpot start command, round start command, round end command, jackpot winning command, and jackpot end command, respectively. Send according to. The jackpot start command includes the hit type information this time, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side determines a series of hit effect scenarios developed during the hit game. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information on the current hit type and the game state at the time of winning the hit, that is, information capable of identifying the game state after the hit game ends, and the effect control unit 24 side hits. It is used when determining the production mode after the game. Therefore, since this "big hit end command" can specify the game state after the end of the hit game, it plays a role as a game state specification command for designating the game state.

When the process for proceeding with the game up to step S912 is completed, the CPU 201 performs the external terminal management process in step S913. In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the game machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external centralized terminal board 21. The operation state information includes, for example, game information such as hit game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, prize number / prize ball number information, and error information.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the LED management process in step S914. In this LED management process, the output of control signals (dynamic lighting data) is controlled for LED indicators such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting / performance indicator 97. The control signal based on the display data created by the normal symbol management process (step S909), the special symbol management process (step S911), etc. is output to the corresponding display device or display in this LED management process, and the display control is performed. Will be done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all the registers and then performs the performance display monitor display process in step S916. That is, it is a process for displaying the value as the above-mentioned normal time ratio information on the setting / performance display 97.
As mentioned earlier, in the case of this example, the value of the normal time ratio information is recalculated every time the number of out-balls in all states reaches a predetermined specified value, and the setting / performance indicator 97 is the current normal. It is possible to display the time ratio information and the previous normal time ratio information (normal time ratio information whose calculation is completed at the latest recalculation timing). Therefore, in the display process of step S916 in this case, a process of displaying the values as the two types of normal time ratio information on the setting / performance indicator 97 is performed.
The current value of the normal time ratio information is a value calculated in the process of step S604 in the above-mentioned main loop process (FIG. 11), and the value of the previous normal time ratio information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads the stored value and displays it on the setting / performance display 97.

Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all the registers in step S917, clears the WDT count value in step S918, and ends the main control side timer interrupt process.

When the above timer interrupt processing is completed, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt is generated.

[4-3. Processing related to special symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol management process)

Next, the processing of the main control unit 20 related to the special symbol variation display game will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol management process (step S911) described above. As described above, the special symbol management process is executed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18, and is mainly used for the big hit lottery in the special symbol variation display game and the lottery result. Based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern (look-ahead fluctuation pattern and fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation), the special stop symbol is determined.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs the special symbol 1 start port check process for the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) in step S1201, and then in the subsequent step S1202 for the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). Special figure 2 The start port check process is performed.
The details of these start port check processes will be described again with reference to FIG.

After completing the start port check processing in steps S1201 and S1202, the CPU 201 determines the state of the condition device operation flag in step S1203. This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (for example, 5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (for example, 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (≠ 5AH), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress, the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol operation status branching process in step S1204, and the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H) is set according to the special symbol operation status. Processes related to the variable display operation are performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1203 that the big hit game is in progress (= 5AH), the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol display data update process of step S1208 as it is without performing the process related to the variation display operation of the special symbol in steps S1205-S1207. That is, when the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed (the display state of the special symbol of the special symbol display device is maintained in the state of being confirmed and displayed after the big hit). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and the status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S1204, depending on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. , Execute the corresponding processing respectively.

Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a special symbol change start process (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", and special when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)". The symbol changing process (step S1206) is executed, and when it is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S1207) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and the above-mentioned "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" means that the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop (confirmation) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time).

In the special symbol changing process in step S1206, it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, an effect control command is issued. As a result, the process of transmitting the "fluctuation stop command" to the effect control unit 24, the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)". (Storing 03H in the special symbol operation status) Performs processing and the like. The above-mentioned "fluctuation stop command" is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended, and the effect control unit 24 has terminated the special symbol variation display game after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed by this variation stop command. Grasp that (end) and stop the decorative design that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game ends. Further, the above-mentioned "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned confirmed display time has elapsed, and if the confirmed display time has elapsed, it is considered that the current special symbol variation display game has ended. If the symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status) and this special symbol fluctuation display game is a big hit, the process required to start the big hit game (big hit symbol stop). Perform various setting processing). In various setting processes when the jackpot symbol is stopped, various settings such as clearing the jackpot judgment flag, turning on the condition device operation flag, and setting the game state to the same game state as the normal state as the process before shifting to the jackpot game. Perform processing.
Further, in the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, when the game state is updated, a process of transmitting a "game state designation command" including the game state transition information to the effect control unit 24 is performed. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that the game state has changed by the game state designation command.

By the process of steps S1205, S1206, and S1207 described above, a fluctuation display operation in which the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the special symbol are set as one set is realized.
The details of the special symbol variation start processing in step S1205 will be described again with reference to FIG. 23.

When any of the processes of steps S120 to S1207 is completed, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol display data update process of step S1208. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, 7-segment display data during the special symbol change is created, and the special symbol must be changing. For example, the data for 7-segment display during the special symbol stop display is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management process (step S914) of FIG.

The CPU 201 finishes the special symbol management process in step S911 in response to the execution of the update process in step S1208, and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 Start port check process)

The special FIG. 1 start port check process (step S1201) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In the special figure 1 start port check process in this example, a prize is generated at the upper start port 34 as a pre-start process (process at the time of winning on the special figure 1 side) for executing the special symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side. The processing of adding the number of pending balls on the special figure 1 side, the storage processing of various random numbers (holding storage processing), the transmission processing of the holding addition command, etc. are executed.
The special figure 2 start port check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, like the special figure 1 start port check process, and is on the special figure 2 side. As a pre-start process (process at the time of winning a prize on the special figure 2 side) for executing the special symbol variation display game 2, the process of adding the number of pending balls on the special figure 2 side due to the occurrence of a prize at the lower start port 35, The storage process of various random numbers, the transmission process of the hold addition command, and the like are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process have substantially the same processing contents. In the following, the special figure 1 start port check process will be mainly described, and the details of the special figure 2 start port check process will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether or not a prize (winning ball) to the upper start port 34 has been detected.
When the CPU 201 detects that the upper starting port 34 has won a prize, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 to determine whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball") is 4 or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls in Special Figure 1 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of holding storages (here, the upper limit is 4). However, if the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S1301: N), the special figure 1 starting port check process of step S1201 is completed without doing anything.

When the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is 4 or more in step S1302, that is, when the winning of the upper start port 34 is detected but the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is 4 or more, the CPU 201 goes to step S1311 described later. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the CPU 201 acquires various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time. Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random number values as hold data are special. Until the symbol 1 is subjected to the variable display operation (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These hold storage areas are provided with hold 1 storage area to hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of hold storages: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and each of them can store hold data for the maximum number of hold storages. It has become.

In step S1305 following step S1304, the CPU 201 determines the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT:) as the winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating the hold addition command. "01H") is acquired.
Next, in step S1306, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the "special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied. The special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

When the pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 without executing the pre-reading determination process (step S1309) related to the pre-reading determination. In this case, the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "01H") specifies the look-ahead prohibition, and the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation hold ball is prohibited, and as a result, the look-ahead notice is given. The production will not be executed either. In other words, it can be said that the read-ahead prohibition data specifies that the look-ahead determination process (step S1309) has not been executed.

In this example, the look-ahead determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed regardless of the game state, but whether or not the look-ahead is prohibited is determined based on the current game state. The reason is as follows.
If you are in a game state with'with electric support', which is advantageous for right-handed hitting (time saving state, probability change state), winning a prize to the lower starting port 35 frequently occurs, but it is advantageous for left-handed hitting. In the game state with "no electric support" (normal state, latent state), the lower starting port 35 is hardly won and the upper starting port 34 is frequently won. In consideration of the above, the look-ahead judgment of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed in the dark clouds regardless of the game state, but the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is made when the time saving state or the probable change state of'with electric support'. Is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is allowed, and when the normal state or latent state of'no electric support'is in, the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is made. Is tolerated.

In step S1306, if the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 refers to the set value error flag (flag set in the setting error check process in step S905) in step S1307, and sets error in the following step S1308. Whether or not (whether or not the set value error flag is ON state: 5AH) is determined.
If there is a setting error, the CPU 201 assumes that an error (setting value data error) has occurred, and proceeds to step S1311 without executing the look-ahead determination process (step S1309). Details will be described later, but if an abnormality in the set value Vd is found in the processing at the time of winning, a hold addition command including read-ahead prohibition data (01H) is transmitted without causing a RAM error, and a start port check in step S1201 is performed. You will exit the process.

On the other hand, if there is no setting error, the CPU 201 executes the look-ahead determination process in step S1309. In this look-ahead determination process, the jackpot lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is pre-read and determined. Therefore, a series of "pre-reading winning judgment" for pre-reading the winning lottery result, "pre-reading symbol judgment" for pre-reading the symbol lottery result, and "pre-reading fluctuation pattern judgment" for pre-reading the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Processing is included.

Specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first acquires the jackpot determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (determination random number storage area), and the jackpot determination random number value and the "big hit determination random number determination table" described later are used. Based on the above, a winning lottery (at least a pre-reading winning judgment that determines whether a big hit or a miss is made) is performed for the operation pending ball, and the result (referred to as "pre-reading winning result") is obtained.

In the present embodiment, the set value Vd is used for the winning determination (winning lottery), and a specific method of the winning determination as the present embodiment based on such a set value Vd will be described later. Since the winning determination is also performed in the processing at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (FIG. 23), the specific method of the winning determination will be described again at the time of explaining the processing at the start of the fluctuation.

Here, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading winning result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being captured in a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201. This is because the pre-reading win / loss determination result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading symbol determination process, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S1309, the CPU 201 prepares a symbol table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result (at least whether it is a hit or a miss) and the special symbol type (special figures 1 and 2) as the process of determining the pre-reading symbol. Perform a lottery for the used symbols. Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery (lottery of the winning type) targeting the operation pending ball this time based on the special symbol determination random value acquired in the previous step S1304 and the symbol table, and the result (“Lottery of winning type) is performed. (Referred to as "look-ahead symbol result") is acquired. In the "symbol table" of the present embodiment, a determination value (winning area) for determining the symbol type is defined, and is displayed as a stop symbol depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. The type of special symbol to be used is determined.
If there are a plurality of types of deviations as in this example, a deviation type table for determining the types of deviations is provided. If there is only one type of loss, the loss symbol table is unnecessary.
Here, in this example, it is assumed that the outlier symbol table for drawing out the outlier type is used in the symbol determination in response to the plurality of outlier types of "outlier 1", "outlier 2", and "outlier 3". To do.
Further, in this example, as described above, there are at least four types of hits, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R", which are provided separately from the above-mentioned outlier symbol table. Based on the hit symbol table, the type of special symbol corresponding to the hit type according to the random value for determining the special symbol is determined among these four types of hit types.

Here, for a part or all of the above-mentioned symbol table, a symbol table may be provided in which different symbol selection rates are set according to the set value Ve. For example, with respect to the jackpot symbol table, a table having a different selection rate for the jackpot type (for example, six types of jackpot symbol tables corresponding to the six settings) can be provided for each of the settings 1 to 6. For example, it is conceivable to determine the table contents so that the ball ejection performance becomes more advantageous to the player as the setting becomes higher. Of course, it may be a jackpot symbol table common to each setting. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used for the process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).

The CPU 201 does not store the pre-reading symbol result in the RAM 203 while being captured in a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201 as in the case of the pre-reading win / loss determination described above. This is because the look-ahead symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM 203.

When the pre-reading symbol determination is completed, the CPU 201 executes the pre-reading variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (in this example, it represents any of "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R", "missing 1", "missing 2", and "missing 3"). Then, a lottery of the variation pattern using the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern according to the look-ahead symbol result and the variation pattern random number acquired in step S1304 is performed, and the look-ahead variation pattern is determined. That is, the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is pre-read and determined.

In this example, the fluctuation pattern table is also used in the fluctuation pattern lottery performed in the processing at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table and a lottery process of the fluctuation pattern using the table will be described again at the time of explaining the processing at the start of the fluctuation.

The look-ahead variation pattern determination result (winning command data (EVENT)) is immediately used in the hold addition command creation process in step S1310 described below, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, the CPU 201 finishes the process of step S1309 without storing the result of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination in the RAM 203 and taking it into the register.

In response to the execution of the look-ahead determination process in step S1309, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1310 and creates data on the lower byte side of the hold addition command according to the look-ahead determination result. Specifically, data representing the type of look-ahead fluctuation pattern is created as winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the hold addition command.
Regarding the EVENT data, "01H" set in step S1305 is updated to a value corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (value obtained in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process) in this process.

When the creation process of step S1310 is completed, the CPU 201 creates data on the upper byte side of the hold addition command according to the number of operation hold balls in step S1311. That is, data representing the current number of pending balls and the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (special symbol type) is created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the pending addition command.
Regarding the data of the MODE, 1 hold of the special figure 1 to 4 holds of the special figure 1 and 1 hold of the special figure 2 to 4 holds of the special figure 2 are set so as to be identifiable.

In response to the execution of the creation process of step S1311, the CPU 201 performs the transmission process of the hold addition command in step S1312. That is, a hold addition command including the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE, respectively, is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Here, if the read-ahead prohibition condition is met (Y in S1306) or if an abnormality in the set value Vd is found in the determination process of the previous step S1308, the CPU 201 performs the read-ahead prohibition data (lower byte = 01H) described above. Is kept as it is without updating, and a hold addition command with read-ahead prohibited data is sent.
Further, at the time of overflow (when a new prize is generated while the maximum number of reserved memories has been reached), the hold addition command for which the overflow is specified is transmitted (see the processing route of Y in step S1302). ).

After being sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the "look-ahead notice effect" related to the current operation hold ball. However, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 23. Therefore, the CPU 201 goes through the special figure 1 start port check process of step S1301 and then performs the special figure 2 start port check process of step S1302 without storing the hold addition command in the RAM 203.

Here, as described above, in this example, even if an abnormality occurs in the data of the set value Vd at the time of winning (when the operation holding ball occurs), the holding addition command is transmitted, but this holding addition command is , Since it is a command with read-ahead prohibition data, even if a look-ahead notice effect based on the set value Ve or a look-ahead notice effect not based on the set value Ve is configured to appear, the effect related to the look-ahead notice Since the control itself is prohibited, the look-ahead notice due to the defect does not appear, and there is no disadvantage to the player, so that no particular problem occurs. If the look-ahead notice effect is not prohibited, even though the set value Ve is abnormal, if a high-expected hold display appears in the hold display system look-ahead notice effect, the subsequent RAM error processing If the game progress is stopped due to (error processing caused by an abnormal setting value), the player's expectation of winning will disappear at once, leading to a great distrust of the game machine. However, in the case of this example, as described above, the pre-reading notice itself is prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

(Special symbol change start processing)

Subsequently, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, a special symbol variation start process (step S1205), which is a process at the start of variation, will be described.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1401 whether or not the number of balls on hold in special drawing 2 is zero, and if the number of balls on hold in special drawing 2 is not zero, the process proceeds to step S1403, and this time. The processing (steps S1403 to S1412) at the start of the fluctuation is performed for the special figure 2 operation holding ball to be used for the fluctuation display.
On the other hand, when the number of balls held in the special figure 2 is zero, the CPU 201 determines in step S1402 whether or not the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is zero, and when the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is not zero, Proceeding to the process of step S1403, the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of the change of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed.
By the processing of steps S1401 and S1402 described above, which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is preferentially digested). ) "Priority change order" is determined. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested. That is, the special symbol variation display game 2 is preferentially executed over the special symbol variation display game 1. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned priority variation type, and the operation holding balls may be digested in the order in which the prizes are won.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball is zero, the state is "no operation-holding ball". This "no operation hold ball" state is a case where a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 is notified that this state has been entered and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is switched and controlled to display a demo screen for waiting for customers (demo screen for waiting for customers). Therefore, when it becomes "no operation hold ball", the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". ..

In step S1413, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)", the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, as the effect control command, a "demo display command" for displaying the customer waiting demo screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S1415), and the special symbol variation start process of step S1205 is completed.
After that, if it is "waiting (00H)" when the determination process of step S1413 is executed, the special symbol variation start process is completed without transmitting the demo display command again. The reason for doing this is that if the demo display command is sent without any conditions when the number of pending balls is zero, the demo display command is repeatedly sent at a cycle of 4 ms while the number of reserved balls is zero. This is to prevent unnecessary transmission from occurring in consideration of the fact that the control burden increases unnecessarily.

When the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls is not zero in step S1401 and when the number of special figure 1 operation hold balls is not zero in step S1402 (the special figure 2 operation hold ball number is zero while the special figure 1 operation hold ball is zero). In each of the cases (when the number is not zero), the CPU 201 performs processing (steps S1403 to S1412) at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol targeting the operation holding ball to be used for the current fluctuation display.
Here, regarding the processing of steps S1403 to S1412 described below, if the determination in step S1401 is'NO', the processing for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the determination in step S1402 above. If it is'NO', the processing will be for the special symbol 1 operation holding ball, but since the processing method is the same, unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the operation on the special symbol 1 side The process will be described without distinguishing between the process for the reserved ball and the process for the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 2 side.

In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of operation-holding balls (the number of operation-holding balls related to the special symbol side used for the current variation display operation-1), and in the following step S1404, the operation-holding ball number information after the subtraction is included. The "hold subtraction command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the remaining number of operation hold balls after the current number of operation hold balls is digested, and shifts the hold display currently being displayed.

Next, the CPU 201 sets the special symbol operation confirmation data in step S1405. This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side this time. For example, if the special symbol 1 is the fluctuation start side, "00H (special symbol 1 fluctuation start designation)" is displayed. If the special symbol 2 is on the fluctuation start side, "01H (special symbol 2 fluctuation start designation)" is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, in step S1406, the CPU 201 shifts the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203, and in the following step S1407, the hold 4 storage area is cleared. In the processing of steps S1406 to S1407, the pending data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern) stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the reserved storage number n = 1 are used. (Random number) is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of RAM 203, and the hold storage area (hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage) corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored. The hold data stored in the area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S1406), the hold 4 storage area is cleared, and a free area is provided (step S1407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number of operation hold balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation hold balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. It is possible to identify whether it corresponds to the area and to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a variable number remaining designation command and a game state command. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the "electric support count counter" that counts the remaining number of times with electric support is zero, and if there is a remaining time reduction number, the "variation" including the remaining time reduction number information. The "count remaining number designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this "variation number remaining number designation command", the effect control unit 24 side can execute the process of grasping the remaining time reduction number and notifying the remaining time reduction number information.
Further, in step S1408, a process of transmitting a game state command for designating the current game state to the effect control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the fluctuation management process in step S1409.
In this fluctuation management process, a big hit lottery corresponding to the start of fluctuation, a symbol lottery for stopped symbols, and a lottery of fluctuation patterns are performed. Further, in the fluctuation management process, an abnormality determination of the set value Vd is performed, and when an abnormality is found in the data of the set value Vd, an effect control command (RAM abnormality command) for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting error. ) Is sent.
The details of the fluctuation management process in step S1409 will be described again with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33.

When the variation management process in step S1409 is completed, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in the special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) that specifies that the variation is being displayed in step S1410. The "special symbol N changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is being changed, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH). Indicates that the target special symbol is changing, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the target special symbol is stopped.
The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes a command transmission process at the start of fluctuation. In this command transmission process, in order to notify the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process of step S1409, the effect control command includes "variation" including variation pattern information capable of specifying the variation pattern content. A "pattern designation command" is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.
Further, in the command transmission process, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result in step S1409 and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The decorative symbol specification command is composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) that specifies the special symbol type on the variable side and a low-order byte (EVENT) that specifies the winning type. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Since this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the winning type, the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type having a reach symbol as a component) and It is used when deciding the combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game.
Further, in the command transmission process, a set value command for notifying the effect control unit 24 side of the current set value Ve is also transmitted. By this set value command, the effect control unit 24 side can display a different type of effect or change the appearance rate of a predetermined effect according to the current set value Ve.

Then, in the following step S1412, the CPU 201 switches to the special symbol operation status "changing (02H)" (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status) as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, and determines the random number storage area for determination and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. Performs processing to clear the storage area.

In response to the execution of the change start setting process in step S1412, the CPU 201 ends the special symbol change start process in step S1205. When the CPU 201 finishes the special symbol variation start process, the special symbol display data update process (step S1208) of FIG. 21 is performed, whereby the variation display of the special symbol is started.

(Variation management process)

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation management process in step S1409.
In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1501 whether or not there is a setting error. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value error flag is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in step S1501 that the setting error flag is OFF and not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 and then proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.
The jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 selects (determines) the jackpot / loss winning type based on the jackpot determination random number (internal lottery random number), the jackpot determination random number determination table, and the set value Vd. is there.
The details of the jackpot random number determination process as the embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

If the CPU 201 determines in step S1501 that a setting error has occurred, the CPU 201 passes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 and proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error occurs (when a determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the jackpot random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As described above, the setting error can be cleared by performing the setting change operation. That is, when a setting error state occurs, the setting change operation is performed to cancel the setting error state, so that the state returns to the state in which the jackpot random number determination process is performed.
As described above, the setting value abnormality command for enabling the setting change operation is transmitted in the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process of step S1503, the CPU 201 performs a process of determining the hit / miss type (stop symbol type) based on at least the winning lottery result (big hit determination flag), the special symbol determination random number, and the symbol table. Do. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203. As a result, the winning type (type of hit / miss) related to this special symbol variation display game is determined.
As with the symbol lottery process at the time of pre-reading determination, the symbol lottery can be performed according to the set value Vd.

In step S1504 following step S1503, the CPU 201 is subjected to the current variation display operation as the variation pattern lottery process, based on at least the symbol lottery result (the above special symbol determination data), the random number for the variation pattern, and the variation pattern table. A process of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation for the operation-holding ball by lottery is performed.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery process in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery using the set value Vd and the number of operation hold balls (the number of operation hold balls obtained by subtracting the digested amount this time) is performed.
The details of the variable pattern lottery process in the present embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

In response to the execution of the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the variation management process in step S1409. That is, after this, the process proceeds to step S1410 shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, in this example, the lottery results of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203. The reason is that these lottery results are the fluctuation management process of step S1409. This is data that is used not only in the special symbol management process (step S911: see FIGS. 18 and 21) to which the special electric accessory management process belongs, but also in the special electric accessory management process (step S912: see FIG. 18) later. Is.
This point is different from the process at the time of pre-reading determination in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203.

Although the description by illustration is omitted, in the variation management process of step S1409, when the winning lottery result is a winning, the game state after the winning game is specified as the setting process for shifting the game state. Perform the necessary setting processing (game state transition preparation processing).

(Big hit random number judgment processing)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment.
Prior to the detailed description of the jackpot random number determination process according to FIG. 25, the jackpot random number determination method adopted in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

First, as a premise, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number can take 65536 values from 0 to 65535. In the jackpot random number determination in the present embodiment, the determination reference value TH is determined within the range of values that such a jackpot determination random number can take, and based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the determination reference value TH. Determine jackpot / miss. As an example, in this example, when the value of the random number for jackpot judgment is within the range of "0 to judgment reference value TH", the jackpot judgment result is obtained, and in other cases, the deviation judgment result is obtained. There is.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number determination corresponds to a low probability time (normal state: hereinafter abbreviated as "low probability time") and a high probability time (probability change state: hereinafter abbreviated as "high probability time"). Two types of judgments corresponding to are performed. Therefore, as the determination reference value TH, two types are set: the determination reference value TH1 used for the determination at the time of low accuracy and the determination reference value TH2 used for the determination at the time of high accuracy.
As illustrated in FIG. 26, the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is larger than the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, so that the probability of winning a big hit is increased in the judgment at the time of high accuracy. ing.

In the case of this example, since the jackpot random number is determined according to the set value Ve, different values are prepared for each set value Ve as the determination reference value TH. As a specific example, regarding the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, the value corresponding to the set value Ve "1" (BIGLMAX1), the value corresponding to the set value Ve "2" (BIGLMAX2), and the set value Ve "6". The value corresponding to (BIGLMAX6) is prepared, and the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy also corresponds to the set value Ve "1" (BIGHMAX1), the value corresponding to the set value Ve "2" (BIGHMAX2), and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve "6" is prepared. The judgment reference value TH1 (= 842) at the time of low accuracy and the judgment reference value TH2 (= 8249) at the time of high accuracy shown in FIG. 26 exemplify the values (BIGLMAX1 and BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve “1”, respectively. are doing.
In this example, the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is BIGLMAX1 <BIGLMAX2 <BIGLMAX6, and the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability is BIGHMAX1 <BIGHMAX2 <BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the winning probability.

In this example, in the actual determination process, a "judgment lower limit value" (corresponding to "BIGMINI-1" described later) is also used as a threshold value for the random number value. First, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the "judgment lower limit value", and if the random number value is not larger than the "judgment lower limit value", a judgment result of loss is obtained. When the random number value is larger than the "judgment lower limit value", the jackpot determination using the above-mentioned determination reference value TH1 and the determination reference value TH2 is performed.
When the "judgment lower limit value" is set to "0", the jackpot judgment condition is that the random number value is within the range of "0" to "judgment reference value TH". On the other hand, if the "judgment lower limit value" is set to a value larger than "0" (assumed to be X), the jackpot judgment condition is that the random number value is within the range of "X" to "judgment reference value TH". Become.

Based on the above premise, the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first acquires the setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table in step S1601.

FIG. 27 illustrates a random number determination table for jackpot determination used in the jackpot random number determination process, FIG. 27A is a random number determination table for jackpot determination for special figure 1, and FIG. 27B is for jackpot determination for special figure 1. An example of a random number judgment table.
As the jackpot random number determination process, a determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and a determination process for special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed. Since the same processing is performed by the common processing shown in FIG. 25, only the determination processing for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A will be described below as a representative.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored in the current reference destination address in the table shown in FIG. 27A, and the reference destination address is set at the start of the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25. Since it is the start address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by "000H" stored in the start address as the setting difference information.
In the following step S1602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting difference information is other than "000H". If the setting difference information is "000H" and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1603 to acquire the determination reference value. That is, the variable (variable represented by "BIGMIN-1") stored in the next address of the start address in the table shown in FIG. 27A is acquired as the determination reference value. This process corresponds to the process of acquiring the above-mentioned "decision lower limit value".
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to the designated address. Specifically, the above-mentioned reference destination address is shifted from the current reference destination address (“4093” in FIG. 27A) to the address four ahead (“4097” in FIG. 27A).
Then, in step S1610, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value (value of the random number for jackpot determination) is larger than the determination reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601 → S1602 → S1603 → S1604 → S1610 described above corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the random number value is larger than the above-mentioned determination lower limit value.

In step S1610, if the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 to acquire the small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the judgment lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”), the variable represented by “000H, 000H, 000H” at the next address of the judgment lower limit value. Is stored. The variables correspond to "low probability medium big hit information", "high probability medium big hit information", and "small hit information" in order from the left side.
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”) in step S1610, the CPU 201 is stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
In the hit information, "05AH" represents "hit" and "000H" represents "missing".

In step S1612 following step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change is in progress, and if it is not in the probability change, the low probability medium jackpot information is acquired in step S1613, the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 is completed, and the probability change is in progress. If so, the high-accuracy medium-big hit information is acquired in step S1614, and the big-hit random number determination process in step S1502 is completed.
Here, if the low-accuracy medium-big hit information acquisition process in step S1613 is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not larger than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”), In step S1613, the CPU 201 acquires the leftmost "000H" of the hit information variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").
Further, regarding the high-accuracy medium-big hit information acquisition process in step S1614, the process in step S1614 is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not larger than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”). In this case, the CPU 201 acquires the central “000H” of the hit information variables “000H, 000H, 000H” stored at the next address of the lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”).

By the series of processing described above, when the random number value is equal to or less than the judgment lower limit value, the information of the deviation is acquired.

Subsequently, when it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires the setting difference information from the jackpot determination random number determination table.
When the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is larger than the determination lower limit value in step S1610, the above-mentioned reference destination address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. As the setting difference information, "001H" stored in the reference destination address is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, in the subsequent step S1602, a determination result that the setting difference information is other than "000H" is obtained, and the CPU 201 proceeds to the process in step S1605.

The process of steps S1605 to S1609 is a process related to the acquisition of the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, the process related to the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as the process of acquiring the set value information, and corrects the set value information acquired in the subsequent step S1606 by 2 bytes. That is, in this example, the set value Vd, which is set to 1 byte, is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 acquires a determination reference value according to the set value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the set value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
When step S1607 is executed for the first time after the start of the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, the reference destination address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the judgment reference value (that is, in this case, "BIGLMAX1" of the address "4098" and "BIGLMAX2" of the address "4099" are stored in the address deviated from the reference destination address by the amount corresponding to the above correction information. "Any of" BIGLMAX6 "of the address" 4100 ") is acquired. Specifically, in this case, if the above correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "1" (set value Vd = "00H"), "BIGLMAX1" at the address next to the reference destination address is acquired. When the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "2" (set value Vd = "01H"), "BIGLMAX2" at the address two ahead of the reference destination address is acquired, and the correction information is the set value Ve. When it corresponds to "3" (set value Vd = "02H"), "BIGLMAX6" at the address three ahead of the reference destination address is acquired.

In response to the acquisition of the determination reference value in step S1607, the CPU 201 goes through the processes of steps S1608 → S1609 (these processes will be described later) to determine whether or not the random number value is larger than the determination reference value in step S1610. judge. As a result, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.

If a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, it is a jackpot), the above-mentioned steps S1611 and subsequent steps are performed. The process is executed, and the hit information acquisition process is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the judgment reference value TH1 (“BIGLMAX1”, “BIGLMAX2”, “BIGLMAX6”) at the time of low probability is stored as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is used. Variables represented by "05AH, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address of the area ("4098" to "4100") (for these variables as well, "low accuracy medium jackpot information" and "high accuracy medium" in order from the left side. Represents "big hit information" and "small hit information").
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201 is among the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above in the process of step S1613. The leftmost "05AH" is acquired, and if the probability is changing, the central "05AH" of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the corresponding information is acquired in the process of step S1614.

Here, in step S1610, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy was performed, and the random number value was larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, the determination at the time of low accuracy was "missing"). In this case, the jackpot determination is performed using the determination reference value TH2 (“BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, “BIGHMAX6”) at the time of high accuracy. At this time, the reference destination address is the address “4097” shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the start address of the information storage area (“4097” to “4101”) for jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy. Therefore, it should be shifted to the address "4103", that is, the start address of the information storage area ("4103" to "4107") for the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.
If the set value Ve is in 3 steps, the amount of address shift is 6 addresses from "4097" to "4103". However, if the set value Ve is in 6 steps, the amount of deviation in the table is low. In the information storage area for jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1, not only "BIGLMAX1", "BIGLMAX2", and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3", "BIGLMAX4", and "BIGLMAX5" are stored. That is, in this case, the amount of address shift should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase of the determination reference value TH1 by 3.

In this way, when the reference destination is transitioned from the information storage area corresponding to the low accuracy time to the information storage area corresponding to the high accuracy time in the table, the shift amount of the reference destination address is the number of stages of the set value Ve (the set value Ve to be used). It should be changed according to the number). Therefore, in this example, the setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and the process of shifting to the designated address is performed in the subsequent step S1609 based on the setting stage information. Specifically, in this example, the setting stage information representing "3 stages" is acquired, and the reference destination address is shifted to the address 6 addresses ahead based on the setting stage information.

When the processes of steps S1608 and S1609 are executed, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed in step S1610, and it is determined that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH1. In the process of step S1601, the setting difference information “001H” of the address “4103” shown in FIG. 27A is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the setting difference information is other than "000H" in the determination process of step S1602, and the processes after step S1605 are executed again.
Then, in the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is acquired from the determination reference values TH2 of "BIGHMAX1", "BIGHMAX2", and "BIGHMAX6", and the determination reference value TH2 is acquired via steps S1608 and S1609. In the determination process of step S1610 to be performed, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the acquired determination reference value TH2. That is, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed.

In this way, when the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 (it is a jackpot), the subsequent steps S1611 are performed. By the processing, the acquisition processing of the hit information is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the storage area (“4104” to “4106”) of the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is used as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is used. Variables represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address (the variables also represent "low accuracy medium jackpot information", "high accuracy medium jackpot information", and "small hit information" in order from the left side). ..
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201 is among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above in the process of step S1613. The leftmost "000H" is acquired, and if the probability is changing, the central "05AH" of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the corresponding information is acquired in the process of step S1614. That is, the information of "missing" is acquired if the probability is not changing, and the information of "hit" is acquired if the probability is changing.

In step S1610, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy was performed, and the random number value was determined to be larger than the determination reference value TH2 (that is, it is out of alignment with both the determination reference values TH1 and TH2). In this case, in this example, processing is performed based on the information stored in the areas of the addresses “4109” to “4111” in the table shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the out-of-order correspondence information for acquiring the out-of-order information.
Here, depending on the processing of steps S1608 and S1609 executed when the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is acquired in step S1607, the reference destination address is 6 addresses ahead of the previous address "4103". It will be shifted to "4109". Therefore, in the process of step S1601 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, "000H" stored in the address "4109" is acquired as the setting difference information. Will be done. That is, in this case, the process proceeds in the order of steps S1601 → S1602 → S1603.

Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, in the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) of the out-of-order correspondence information, “655535” is set as a determination reference value at the next address (“4110”) of the setting difference information. It is stored. That is, the "disengagement determination reference value" for surely obtaining the deviation determination with respect to the random number value which can be 0 to 65535 is stored. Further, variables "000H, 000H, 000H" representing the loss information are stored in the address ("4111") next to the deviation determination reference value. The variables are also provided as information corresponding to low accuracy middle, high accuracy middle, and small hit in order from the left side.

In this case, in the acquisition process of step S1603, "65535" as the "judgment reference value for disconnection" stored in the address next to the reference destination address is acquired as the determination reference value. Then, in the determination process of step S1610 executed through the process of step S1604, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the "disappearance determination reference value" = 65535, and the determination result is that the random number value is A judgment result is obtained that is not larger than the "judgment reference value for loss".

In this way, when the determination using the "disappearance judgment reference value" is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the "disengagement determination reference value", the disengagement information is obtained by the processing after step S1611. Is acquired.
Specifically, in the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the "disappearance determination reference value" in step S1610, the CPU 201 is the "disappearance determination reference value" in the table. Of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored in the next address of, the rightmost "000H" is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201 sets the leftmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the "disengagement determination reference value" in the process of step S1613. If it is acquired and the probability is changing, the central "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" is acquired in the process of step S1614.
In this way, when it is determined that both of the judgment reference values TH1 and TH2 are out of alignment, each "hit information" (small hit information, low probability medium big hit information, high probability) is used as information indicating the winning. Information indicating "missing" is acquired as medium / big hit information).

(Variable pattern lottery process)

The variable pattern lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504.
First, the CPU 201 determines in step S1701 whether or not it is a setting error based on the setting error flag, and if it is not a setting error, determines whether or not it is a hit in step S1702. That is, based on the jackpot determination flag, it is determined whether or not the jackpot (= 5AH) is achieved.

If it is determined in step S1702 that it is not a hit (it is a loss), the CPU 201 selects the deviation variation pattern table in step S1703, and then proceeds to the variation pattern selection process in step S1706. That is, it is a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern based on a table and a random number for the fluctuation pattern.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects the hit variation pattern table in step S1704, and then proceeds to the variation pattern selection process in step S1706.

FIG. 29 shows an example of the out-of-order variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of the hit variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, as the out-of-order fluctuation pattern table and the hit fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 and a fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2 are prepared, respectively.

In the deviation pattern lottery performed using the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 29, the variation patterns (variation patterns that can be selected by the lottery) of the lottery candidates are "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", and "normal variation". There are 9 types of "8s", "normal fluctuation 12s", "normal reach", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4".
Further, in the hit variation pattern lottery performed using the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 30, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are "normal variation per", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", and "super reach 3". It is said to be 5 types of "Super Reach 4".
Regarding "normal fluctuation", the numerical value described together represents the fluctuation time, and "s" after the numerical value means "second".

Here, among the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns, in particular, "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" belong to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the so-called "missing" that is not selected at the time of hitting (hereinafter, Sometimes referred to as "off-the-shelf fluctuation pattern").

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery at the time of loss is performed using a variation pattern table that is different for each loss type (disappearance 1, 2, 3) regardless of whether the special figures 1 and 2 are used (see FIG. 29).
Here, in the present embodiment, the selection rate (the rate at which the corresponding type is selected) by the symbol lottery is different for each of the "missing 1", "missing 2", and "missing 3" types, and "missing 1". "Has the highest selection rate, and" Missing 2 "and" Missing 3 "have a lower selection rate than" Missing 1 ". Specifically, in this example, the selection rate of "outside 1" is "190/200", and the selection rate of "outside 2" and "outside 3" is "5/200", respectively. In this case, if the jackpot determination result is "missing", in most cases, "missing 1" is selected as the losing type.

As the variable pattern lottery for the special figure 1, the variable pattern lottery when the outlier type is "outlier 1" is not a lottery according to the set value Ve, but a lottery according to the number of reserved balls. For this reason, among the fluctuation pattern tables for special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern table used when the loss type is "miss 1" is common among the set values Ve, but is different for each number of reserved balls. Is prepared.

In the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 in the case of "outside 1", the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are set to 5 types of "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", "normal variation 12s" and "normal reach". In this example, the fluctuation pattern to be drawn differs depending on the number of reserved balls.
Specifically, when the number of reserved balls = 0, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "normal reach", when the number of reserved balls = 1, "normal fluctuation 8s" and "normal reach", and when the number of reserved balls = 2, "normal" The fluctuation patterns of "variation 6s" and "normal reach" are set as the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets, respectively, and "normal fluctuation 4s" and "normal reach" are used when the number of reserved balls = 3.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern table, the numerical values stored for each fluctuation pattern of the lottery target are distributed with the winning probability on the premise that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern can take 200 numerical values of 0 to 199. It represents a value (a value that represents distribution). For example, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1, in the table of "out of line 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", the stored value for "normal fluctuation 12s" = "160", and the stored value for "normal reach" = "40". However, this means that the winning probability of "normal fluctuation 12s" is "160/200" and the winning probability of "normal reach" is "40/200".
The above distribution values are shown as the storage values in the table for the sake of convenience of explanation. In the actual fluctuation pattern table, the judgment reference values used in the above-mentioned jackpot random number judgment are stored. become. For example, in the case of the above table of "outside 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", for example, "159" is stored as an actual stored value (judgment reference value), and in that case, the random number for the fluctuation pattern is 159 or less. If, "normal variation 12s" is selected, and if the random number for the variation pattern is larger than 159, "normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution value shown in FIG. 29, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "outlier 1", "normal variation" is more likely to be selected than "normal reach". (I try to increase the appearance rate).
Further, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 1", the normal variation pattern having a shorter variation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

Subsequently, as the variation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1, the variation pattern lottery in each case where the loss types are "missing 2" and "missing 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve, while the number of reserved balls is determined. It will not be a lottery. For this reason, the variation pattern table for special figure 1 used in each of the cases of "off 2" and "out 3" is common among the number of reserved balls, but a different table is prepared for each set value Ve. There is.

In the fluctuation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery candidates are 4 of "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". It is said to be a seed.
In this example, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “out of place 3”, the variation pattern to be drawn differs depending on the set value Ve.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1, the variation patterns to be drawn for each combination of "outside 2" and "outside 3" and settings 1, 2 and 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and "Out of 2" = Super Reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and "Out of 3" = Super Reach 1
Setting 2 and "Out of 2" = Super Reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and "Out of 3" = Super Reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and "Out of 2" = Super Reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and "Out of 3" = Super Reach 4

From the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in this example, as the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "out of line 2", in the case of setting 1, it varies in the order of super reach 4, 3, 2, 1. The pattern is easy to select, and in the case of setting 2, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4 and in the case of setting 3, the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4. It's easy.
Further, in this example, with respect to the variation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the case of "missing 3", the higher the setting (the larger the set value Ve), the higher the expectation of winning the super reach tends to be selected. I am trying to do it.

It should be noted that, as in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the case of "missing 2" above, the variation pattern table used for the lottery in which the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are three or more types has a plurality of values (as judgment reference values). The value represented by "the number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates-1") is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the case of setting 1 and "out of place 2" in the figure, for example, the first value = 9, the second value = 39, and the third value = 99 are the judgment reference values, respectively. In that case, if the random number for the fluctuation pattern is less than or equal to the first value, "super reach 1" is set, and if it is larger than the first value and less than or equal to the second value, "super reach 2" is set. If it is larger than the value and equal to or less than the third value, "Super Reach 3" is selected, and if it is larger than the third value, "Super Reach 4" is selected.

Next, as the variable pattern lottery of Special Figure 2, the variable pattern lottery when the loss type is "Loss 1" is different from the case of Special Figure 1, and the variable pattern of the lottery candidates is only "normal variation 12s". There is. Therefore, in the variation pattern table for the special figure 2, "out of ball 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", "out of line 1" and "number of reserved balls = 1", "out of line 1" and "number of reserved balls =" In each table used in the case of "2", "missing 1" and "number of reserved balls = 3", all the distribution values corresponding to "normal fluctuation 12s" are set to "200".
In this case, since the lottery results are the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variable pattern table can be a common table among the reserved balls.

Further, as the variable pattern lottery of the special figure 2, the variable pattern lottery when the outlier type is "outlier 2" and "outlier 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve as in the case of the special figure 1. The lottery will not be based on the number of reserved balls. Therefore, regarding the fluctuation pattern table for the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern table used in each of the cases of "outside 2" and "outside 3" is common among the number of reserved balls, but differs depending on the set value Ve. A table is prepared.

In the fluctuation pattern lottery of Special Figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery candidates are set to two types, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4", depending on the set value Ve. , Any of these "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4" fluctuation patterns is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "outlier 2" and "outlier 3" in this example, "normal variation 12s" is always selected when either setting 1 or 2 is set, respectively. Then, in the case of setting 6, "Super Reach 4" is selected.

Subsequently, the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting, different tables are used for each hit type in both Special Figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is set as follows for each winning type. That is, when the hit type is "normal 4R", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets are "normal fluctuation hit", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4" in both special figures 1 and 2. It is said that there are five types.
Further, when the hit type is "normal 6R", in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets are 5 of "normal fluctuation hit", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". In Special Figure 2, there are four types, "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4", excluding "normal fluctuation per".
Furthermore, when the hit type is "probability variation 6R" and "probability variation 10R", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets are "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4" in both special figures 1 and 2. There are four types.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of hit in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific hit type. Specifically, regarding the variation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R", and the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 is "normal". A variable pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of "4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R".

Regarding the variation pattern lottery in the case of "normal 4R", the variation pattern of the lottery target is different depending on the set value Ve in both the special figures 1 and 2. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern lottery corresponding to "normal 4R" in this example, 5 types of "normal fluctuation per" to "super reach 4" are selected for setting 1, and "super" is selected for setting 2 or setting 6. The four types of "reach 1" to "super reach 4" are set as fluctuation patterns for the lottery.
Regarding the fluctuation pattern lottery in the case of "normal R6", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R" which are hit types other than "normal 4R", in both Special Figures 1 and 2, the variation pattern to be drawn is set to the set value Ve. It is said to be immutable.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of FIG. 1, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the cases of these “normal 4R” and “probability variation 10R”.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 1, in each of the “normal 4R” and “probability variation 10R” tables, the distribution value for “super reach 4” is set as the set value Ve increases. It's getting bigger. As a result, at the time of hitting each of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R", the higher the current setting, the easier it is to select the variation pattern having the highest expected winning value as the variation pattern of Special Figure 1.

Further, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting in the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed for "probability variation 6R" as well as "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of the special figure 2, a table different for each set value Ve is prepared as the variation pattern table used in the case of "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R". In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 2, in all of these "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R" tables, the distribution value for "super reach 4" is increased as the set value Ve increases. ..

Here, as can be seen by referring to the distribution value in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for "Super Reach 4" is the largest in each table regardless of the hit type or the set value Ve. That is, in this example, in the fluctuation pattern lottery when it is determined to be a big hit, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation of winning is most likely to be selected.

The description returns to FIG.
In the selection process of step S1706 described above, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the deviation or hit fluctuation pattern table as described above.
Specifically, when the deviation variation pattern table is selected in response to the case where it is determined that the deviation occurs in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table according to the deviation type, the number of reserved balls, and the set value Ve from the variation pattern table. Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the hit variation pattern table is selected corresponding to the case where it is determined to be a hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table according to the hit type and the set value Ve from the corresponding variation pattern table, and selects the table. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. At this time, it goes without saying that the tables for special figure 1 and special figure 2 are selected and separated according to which of special figures 1 and 2 is the symbol to be processed.
As can be understood from the above explanation, in each of the winning / losing fluctuation pattern tables, one or a plurality of judgment reference values corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets (number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates-1) are defined. In the selection process of step S1706, the variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the random number for the variation pattern.

In the above description, the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern has been divided into tables for each set value Ve, but a common table may be used among some set value Ves.
FIG. 31 shows an example thereof.
Here, a modified example of the hit variation pattern table is shown on the premise that the set value Ve can take 6 values corresponding to the settings 1 to 6.
In the example of FIG. 31, each is set as a table corresponding to "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R" for special figure 1 and a table corresponding to "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R" for special figure 2. An example is shown in which the table is divided into groups 1 to 3 and sets 4 to 6.
As in the example of FIG. 31, in performing the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, the table is not limited to being individually divided for each set value Ve, and is common among some set value Ve. Table may be used.

Next, processing when a setting error is detected during the variable pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that the setting error occurs, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects the common variation pattern table at the time of the setting error, and executes the selection process of step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of a common variation pattern table at the time of setting error.
In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern lottery at the time of setting error performed using the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error, the deviation fluctuation pattern is forcibly selected regardless of whether the special figures 1 and 2 are hit / miss. To do so. That is, in this example, any of "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" is forcibly selected.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of setting error in this example, a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of reserved balls for the special figure 1 side, and a specific variation pattern is selected for the special figure 2 side regardless of the number of reserved balls. Only, specifically, only "normal fluctuation 12s" is selected.
On the special figure 1 side, a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

Also in FIG. 32, for convenience of explanation, as the table structure, a structure in which the distribution values corresponding to the case where the random number for the variable pattern lottery can take a value of 0 to 199 is stored is shown, but the actual table structure is a reserved ball. As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure in which at least a judgment reference value is associated with a fluctuation pattern of lottery candidates is adopted.
On the special figure 2 side, if a specific fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls as in this example, there is no need to divide the table for each number of reserved balls (0 to 3). Needless to say.

In FIG. 28, in the selection process of step S1706, when the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected in step S1705, the variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the variation pattern. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected, and the magnitude relationship between the judgment reference value stored in the selected table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern is determined. The variation pattern is selected based on the result of the comparison.

The CPU 201 finishes the variable pattern lottery process of step S1508 in response to the execution of the selection process of step S1706. With the end of the lottery process of step S1504, the variation management process of step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 is completed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410 (flag ON process during variation) shown in FIG. 23.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 following step S1410, a "variation pattern designation command" representing the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern and a "decorative symbol designation command" representing the symbol lottery result are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. To.
On the effect control unit 24 side, based on these commands, a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type having a reach symbol as a component) and a decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol). The combination of the above is determined, and a lottery for the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variation display game.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, if a setting error is recognized at the start of fluctuation of the special figure, the detached fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation) is forcibly selected. At this time, the decorative symbol is selected. If the intense heat fluctuation is selected as the side fluctuation, the player is confused. Therefore, in this example, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time such as normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s is selected as described above. There is.
Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24 is also devised so as not to perform the advance notice effect when a setting error occurs. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command (see step S1104 in FIG. 20) for notifying the setting error from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 is prevented from drawing the advance notice effect. To.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is found based on the above setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 sends a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member" to the liquid crystal display device 36. Notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an image containing. The notification is not limited to notification by image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, for example, notification by lighting (and / or blinking) of a sound or LED, or a set of a plurality of types of production means such as an image, sound, or LED. It can also be a combined notification.

In the above, regarding the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error on the special figure 1, the normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases. However, this is an example, for example, the reserved balls. It is also possible to select a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 33, the same fluctuation pattern can be selected for each number of reserved balls as in the case of the special figure 2. In the example of FIG. 33, the case where "normal variation 12s" is commonly selected for each number of reserved balls is shown.
As described above, in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error, the relationship between the number of reserved balls and the selected fluctuation pattern can be considered in various ways and is not limited to a specific relationship.
As for the special figure 2 side, the fluctuation pattern selected depending on the number of reserved balls may be different as in the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of data table related to set values as an embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27A, the area below the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) of the information corresponding to the loss is set as an empty area. Further, in this example, also in the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27B, the area on the lower layer side of the storage area (“4148” to “4150”) of the information corresponding to the loss is set as an empty area. In this example, "0" is stored in these free areas.
In these random number determination tables for jackpot determination, the area other than the free area can be rephrased as a usage data storage area in which usage data used for progress control of a game operation is stored. Further, the free area can be rephrased as an unused data storage area in which unused data not used for controlling the progress of the game operation is stored.

Then, when such a random number determination table for jackpot determination is used as a first data table including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set value Vd, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 In the ROM 202, the first data table and the second data table that is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table and does not include the set value related information are stored.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a storage example of the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment.
As shown in the figure, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the special symbol creation address table, that is, the second data that does not include the set value related information is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table (random number determination table for jackpot determination). The table is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table including a plurality of set value related information and the set value related information stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table are stored. A second data table that is not included is stored, and the first data table contains a usage data storage area in which usage data used for progress control of the game operation is stored and unused data not used for progress control of the game operation. It is composed of a stored unused data storage area.

When only the used data storage area is secured in the first data table containing the set value related information, when trying to increase the number of set values Vd (number of stages) to be used, the set value for the increase When the setting value related information related to Vd is added to the first data table, it is necessary to shift the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table is forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When trying to increase the number of set value Vd to be used by securing the storage area of not only used data but also unused data in the first data table containing the set value related information as described above, It is possible to store the set value-related information related to the increased set value Vd in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the usage data storage area described above stores usage data having a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd (“3” in this example) that can be set in the setting change process, and is not used data. In the storage area, unused data of a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set by the setting change process (in this example, "3" corresponding to the set values Ve "3", "4", and "5") is stored. Has been done. Specifically, in this example, the number of set values Ve that can be set according to the rules = 6 minus the number of set values Ve that are actually used = 3, and the capacity corresponding to "3" set values Ve is not used. The data is to be stored.
As a result, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure the storage capacity of the set value-related information related to the increased set value Ve when the number of the set value Ve used is increased. ..
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data after the second data table from being rewritten.

Further, in the present embodiment, "0" is stored as unused data as described above, so that even if the first data table is referred to by the unused setting value Vd, the unused setting is made. It is possible to prevent the set value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the second data table, and the second data table is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table. The data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowest layer area of the normal data area. ..
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 has "normal program area", "unused area", "normal data area", "unused area", "measurement program area", and "in order from the upper layer side". An unused area, a measurement data area, and an unused area are defined. The "normal program area" is an area in which a program related to general games is stored, and the "normal data area" is an area in which a data table related to general games referred to based on the program of the "normal program area" is stored. is there. For example, the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27 is stored in this "normal data area".
The "measurement program area" is an area in which a program related to display and measurement of performance information such as the above-mentioned normal time ratio information is stored, and the "measurement data area" is referred to based on the program of the "measurement program area". This is the area where the data table related to the display and measurement of the performance information to be performed is stored.

As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the set value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowest layer area of the normal data area, the first data table can be, for example, the above-mentioned "special symbol creation address table" ( (See FIG. 34) and the like, the second data table is stored in the storage area lower than the second data table, and the second data table is not stored in the storage area lower than the first data table.

When the number of set values Vd to be used is increased by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the above manner, the contents of the first data table located at the bottom layer of the data area in the ROM 202. It is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the data part on the lower layer side of the first data table.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

<5. Production control unit processing>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, the processing of the effect control unit 24 will be described. First, a structural example of scenario data for effect control will be described.
The structure of the scenario registration information will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A shows the structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and a sub-scenario. This scenario registration information is set using the work area provided in the RAM 243 (for example, the work memory for the built-in CPU) of the effect control unit 24.
In the present embodiment, the scenario registration information has 64 channels of scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. The scenarios registered in each scenario channel SCH can be executed at the same time.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each scenario channel SCH includes the sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update process, the previous time (scPrevTm), and the sub-scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the sound / motor sub-scenario table. (ScIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) indicating the execution line of the ramp sub-scenario table, main scenario timer (msTm) used for scenario update processing, main scenario execution line (mcIx) indicating the execution line of the main scenario table, There are a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt), a user option (userFn), a waiting time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum), which are optional data that can be added to the main scenario.

When starting the production by sound output by the speaker 46, light emission by the light display device 45a, and driving of the movable body accessory motor 80c, the standby time (delay) and the main scenario number (mcNo) are set to the scenario channel sCH0. Register to a free scenario channel in ~ sCH63.
The delay time indicates the time from registration to the scenario channel SCH until the scenario is started. The waiting time (delay) is subtracted by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later). When the waiting time (delay) is 0, the process corresponding to the registered data is executed.

FIG. 39 shows an example of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the main scenario table. As the scenario of each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) can be described as time data in each line (row) of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can be described. .. That is, in the main scenario table, the sub-scenario (and option in some cases) to be executed is specified as the time by the main scenario timer (msTm). In addition, the scenario data end code D_SEEND or the scenario data loop code D_SELOP is described in the last line of the scenario.
The value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later) from the start of the main scenario.
The scenario table of each scenario number advances to the next row after the time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row elapses. The time data for each row indicates when that row ends.
For example, in the case of scenario number 2, the operation of sub-scenario number 2 is specified as the time of the timer value "1500", the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value "500", and the next timer value " The operation of sub-scenario number 21 is specified as the time of "2000". The next line is the scenario data exit code D_SEEND. If the scenario data end code is D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of the lamp data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, an effect operation (lighting pattern) by the light display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area (work area) of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the lamp data registration information is assumed to have 16 channels of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Priority is set for each lamp channel dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from the lamp channel dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (ramp sub-scenario) registered in the ramp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. Further, for example, if a scenario is registered in the lamp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in the lamp channel dwCH10 is preferentially executed.
The lamp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for a lamp effect associated with BGM (Back Ground Music), the lamp channel dwCH15 is used for an error-related lamp effect, and the lamp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for a normal effect.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH includes a registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the registered lighting pattern number, an execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the execution lighting pattern number, and a lamp subscenario. There is an offset (offset), an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum) that indicate the execution line.

FIG. 40A shows an example of lamp subscenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the lamp subscenario table. As the lamp sub-scenario of each number, the value of the time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and the lamp channel and the lamp number indicating various lighting patterns are described. In addition, the ramp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described in the last line.

In this ramp subscenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the time when the line is started after the subscenario is started.
The above-mentioned main scenario timer (msTm) is compared with the time data of the table, and if they match, the lamp number of the line is registered in the lamp data registration information of FIG. 37B. The registered lamp channel dwCH is the channel indicated by the line.
For example, assume that the scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered and the sub-scenario number 2 is referred to in the above-mentioned certain scenario channel SCH. In the lamp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, the lamp channel 5 (dwCH5) and the lamp number 5 are described with the time data (time) = 0 in the first line. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm) = 0, the information of the first line is first registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information of FIG. 37B as the registration lighting number (lmpNew) = 5. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a relatively low priority of the lamp channel dwCH5, and is a registration for executing the lighting pattern operation of the lighting number 5.
For the second line, the same processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches "500". That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) = 6 (that is, the indication of the lighting pattern of the lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
If the time data (time) is the same value in two consecutive lines, the processing for each line will be started at the same time.
In the lamp drive data creation process described later, the lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information updated in this way.

Next, the structure of the motor data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. As the motor data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the motor data registration information is assumed to have eight channels of motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to, for example, eight motors.
As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH includes the execution operation number (no), the registration operation number (noNew), the operation count (lcnt), the excitation counter (tcnt), the execution step (step), and the operation line. (Offset), parent (migration source) / child (migration destination) attribute (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), Current input information (currentSw), switch information on software (softSw), count on software (softCnt).

FIG. 40C shows an example of the motor sub-scenario number 1 as a part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of the time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and the information of the motor and the solenoid / user option is described. In addition, the scenario data end code D_MSEND is described in the last line.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is 0 at the beginning), the time data (time) value of this motor sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). To do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). Therefore, the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the relevant line)-(time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3, 4 to 7) is configured to indicate the motor operation pattern number (motor operation table number described later) in 1 byte for each motor. The operation pattern number is set in the registration operation number (noNew) and the execution operation number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
In step S2202 of FIG. 44, which will be described later, the motor data registration information is updated, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows sound data registration information. As the sound data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the sound data registration information is assumed to have 16 channels of sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH includes volume transition amount (frzVq), volume (frzVl), transition amount change (rsv2), volume change (rsv1), phrase change (rsv0), and stereo (frzSt). ), Loop (frzLp), phrase number hi (frzHi), phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows an example of sound subscenario numbers 1 and 2 as a part of the sound subscenario table. As the sound / motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line (line) of the scenario, and BGM, warning sound, error sound, and sound control information are described. In addition, the scenario data end code D_SEEND is described in the last line.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is 0 at the beginning), the time data (time) value of this sound sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). To do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). Therefore, the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the relevant line)-(time data of the previous line).
The BGM data of the line is composed of information registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and volume value of the BGM, and is set in the sound channel aCH0 (additionally aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. ..
The warning sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and volume value of the warning sound, and is set in a vacant place of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and volume value of the error sound, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data has the lower 6 bytes as channel information and the upper 2 bytes as control information.
In step S2033 of FIG. 41, which will be described later, playback output control is performed based on the scenario update process and the updated sound data registration information.

The sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have a table structure integrated with each line of time.

An example of processing of the effect control unit 24 that performs effect control using the scenario data structure as described above, particularly processing of the CPU 241 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.
The CPU 241 starts the process shown in FIG. 41 when the power is turned on to the main body of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs necessary initial setting processing before the start of the game operation. For example, as initial setting processing, interface system initialization, interrupt setting, external memory initialization, WDT initialization, starting point return processing and control initialization of movable body accessory, sound source control initialization, serial output controller initialization Initialization of the system, scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler), system timer initialization, liquid crystal control initialization, etc.
Each scheduler refers to the above-mentioned scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information, or the progress of scenario control based on these. As the initialization process, the work area for storing these scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

After completing the initial setting process in step S2000, the CPU 241 executes the power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for holding in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, which will be described later, which is performed by using the liquid crystal display device 36. Although details will be described later, predetermined history information such as change history information of the set value Ve is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
The process as an embodiment in which the CPU 241 executes the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs, including the process of initializing the history information at power-on in step S2001, will be described again.

The CPU 241 repeats the processes after step S2002 in response to the execution of the process of step S2001.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processes after step S2002 while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36. In this example, control is performed based on a V blank signal, which is a synchronization signal used for display control.
In the present embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 second (33.3 ms), which is one frame period of the display image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter in response to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter counts up every 1/60 second (16.6 ms).
As a matter of course, the individual processing of the CPU 241 is performed based on the processing clock having a frequency extremely higher than the frequency of the V blank signal. Each process of FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the start to the end of the frame according to the V blank signal. At the start of the frame, the processes are performed once in steps S2004 to S2006, and then the V blank. Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of the one-frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. When the end of one frame period is detected, the processes of steps S205 to S2052 are performed.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control on the WDT circuit included in the effect control unit 24.
In the following step S2003, the CPU 241 confirms the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing scheduler update and the like in the frame period.
The frame update flag is turned off at the start of a certain frame of the display data (because it is turned off in step S2052 described later at the end of the frame).
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2003 to S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the frame of the scenario scheduler. Specifically, this is a process of updating the waiting time (delay), the main scenario timer (msTm), and the sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information of FIG. 37A. That is, it can be said that the timer of the effect scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.
Then, the CPU 241 turns on the frame update flag in the following step S2005. This is information indicating that the timer of the scenario has progressed in the current frame.
Further, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has not been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information) have not been updated as the timer progresses.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After the CPU 241 clears the WDT circuit, the frame update flag is ON in step S2003, so the process proceeds to step S2020. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset if the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

As described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once after the frame start timing, and in step S2004, the timer of the scenario registration information is updated. The scenario for directing will progress every 33.3 ms, which is a frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3 ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the time of the indicated value × 33.3 ms. Further, the time of one line indicated by the time in the sub-scenario table of FIG. 40 also corresponds to the time of the indicated value × 33.3 ms.

In step S2020, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V-blank interrupt counter has not reached “2” (that is, if it is “0” or “1”), the process proceeds to step S2021.
The V-blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051 and is incremented twice in one frame. Therefore, the V blank interrupt counter = 0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and the V blank interrupt counter = 1 indicates the second half period of the frame. The V blank interrupt counter = 2 at the V blank signal at the end of the frame.
The CPU 241 proceeds from steps S2020 to S2021 so as to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible during the frame period in which the V-blank interrupt counter is “0” or “1”.

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1". That is, whether the present is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
Currently, if the V blank interrupt counter = 0, that is, the first half of the frame, the process proceeds to step S2022 to confirm the reception command from the main control unit 20. That is, it is confirmed whether or not one or more received commands are stored in the command reception buffer. If there is no receive command, the process proceeds to step S2030.
If there is one or a plurality of received commands, the CPU 241 performs a command analysis process in step S2023.

Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. Note that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that if a command is received during the current frame period, even after the scheduler update flag was once turned on in step S2031 before. It has the meaning of turning it off.

An example of the command analysis process in step S2023 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.
As described above, in step S2022 of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 confirms whether or not the effect control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, that command. Will be read out by the process of FIG. 42.

The effect control unit 24 is provided with a command reception buffer in the RAM 243 for taking in the effect control commands transmitted from the main control unit 20.
First, in step S2101 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms the read pointer indicating the read address of the command reception buffer and the write pointer indicating the write address.
The light pointer is updated in response to command reception, and the received effect control command is stored at the address indicated by the light pointer accordingly. The read pointer is updated (step S2102) when reading from the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer = the write pointer, the effect control command that has not been read yet is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer is not a write pointer, the process proceeds to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1 byte of command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

Actually, the presence / absence of the receive command in step S2022 of FIG. 41 can also be determined by whether or not the read pointer = the write pointer. As an actual program, if the read pointer = the write pointer at the time when the command check process is first performed, it may be determined in step S2022 of FIG. 41 that there is no receive command.

As described above, one effect control command is composed of two bytes, one byte as a mode and one byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed by the value of Bit7 out of 8 bits (Bit0 to Bit7).
Then, in the mode, the process proceeds to step S2104 as a process of receiving higher-level data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command HI byte". It also clears the "command LO byte" register. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Even after that, if the read pointer = the write pointer, the effect control command that has not been read yet is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2102, and the CPU 241 is indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. Load 1 byte of command data from the address. It also increments the read pointer.
If the read command is an event, the process proceeds from steps S2103 to S2105 as a process of receiving lower-level data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command LO byte".

The mode and event command data are saved in the registers "command HI byte" and "command LO byte", so that the CPU 241 has fetched one command.
Therefore, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs processing according to the captured command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

The read pointer = write pointer is when the effect control command that the CPU 241 has not yet captured does not exist in the command reception buffer. By confirming the read pointer = write pointer in step S2101, the command analysis process as step S2023 in FIG. 41 ends.

An example of the command correspondence process in step S2106 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
FIG. 43A shows a basic process as a command corresponding process. In response to the reception of the 2-byte effect control command, the CPU 241 first confirms in step S2121 of FIG. 43A whether or not the test mode is currently in progress. In the test mode, in step S2122, all the effect scenarios are cleared, the sound output is stopped, and the LED in the light display device 45a is turned off. Then, the test mode is terminated in step S2123.
These processes are not performed unless the test mode is in use.
Then, the CPU 241 processes the captured effect control command in step S2130.

The effect control commands include, for example, a special symbol variation pattern specification command, a decorative symbol specification command, a hold addition command, a game state specification command, a power-on command, a RAM clear command, a setting changing command, a setting change end command, and a setting confirmation command. Commands, setting confirmation end commands, setting value commands (in this example, the main control unit 20 sends at least at startup (S808 in FIG. 17) and at the start of symbol fluctuation (S1411 in FIG. 23)), error commands (of various errors) Notification command) ... etc. are set in various ways. In step S2130, the CPU 241 performs a process specified by the program in response to the received command. Here, specific processing will be illustrated by listing four effect control commands in FIGS. 43B to 43E.

FIG. 43B shows the process S2130a when the variation pattern designation command is incorporated as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of setting the decoration symbol designation command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the CPU 241 controls the variation display of the symbol by sequentially receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command.

FIG. 43C shows the process S2130b when the symbol designation command is incorporated as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first confirms in step S2132 whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it has not been received, the process ends as it is.
If the variation pattern designation command has already been received when the decorative symbol designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S2133, and first, the scenario registration for the operation of the accessory origin correction is performed. Then, in step S2134, the symbol variation flag is set. The symbol fluctuation flag is provided corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and each flag represents the fluctuation state. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol fluctuation flag FZ1, a second special symbol fluctuation flag FZ2, and a normal symbol fluctuation flag FZ3 are prepared, and fluctuation, stop (hit), and stop (miss) are indicated for each. Here, with the start of fluctuation, the corresponding symbol fluctuation flag (one of FZ1, FZ2, FZ3) is set to a value indicating "changing".
In the case of a hit, the symbol fluctuation flag is set to a value indicating "stopped (hit)" for a predetermined time at the end of the symbol fluctuation, and then a value indicating "stopped (missing)" until the symbol fluctuation is started. Is set to.
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs a fluctuation start process. After that, the fluctuation pattern designation command is deleted in step S2136 according to the start of fluctuation.

FIG. 43D shows the process S2130c when the power-on command is taken in as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, the storage area such as the contents of the command reception / transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers is cleared.
Then, in step S2138, an error release command is transmitted, in step S2139, the accessory error information is cleared, in step S2140, the accessory operation is stopped, in step S2141, the power-on scenario is registered, and in step 2142, the power is turned on to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. Set commands in sequence.

FIG. 43E shows the process S2130d when the RAM clear command is taken in as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, the storage area such as the contents of the command reception / transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers is cleared.
Then, in step S2144, an error release command is transmitted, and in step S2145, a RAM clear error set and an error notification timer are set. Further, in step S2146, the information regarding the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, the information regarding the scenario is cleared. Then, in step S2148, the power initial on display (RAM clear) command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

The example of the process corresponding to the command reception has been described above.
In this example, the process of steps 2022 to S2020 in FIG. 41 as the process corresponding to the above command reception is started only during the period of V blank interrupt counter = 0.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 confirms the scheduler update flag in step S2030 of FIG. 41 and branches the process. Here, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the start of the frame, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed when the processing of step S2030 is first performed in the current frame period. Further, since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, the processes of steps S2031 to S2034 are performed even when a command is received.

The CPU 241 performs a process as a scenario scheduler execution in step S2032. This is the process of updating the scenario registration information. For example, among the information registered in the scenario channel SCH, the processing corresponding to the registered data is executed for the information whose waiting time (delay) is 0. That is, processing is performed according to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), subscenario execution line (scIx), subscenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), etc. are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 executes the sound scheduler and processes the output. This is the update processing of the sound data registration information according to the sound sub-scenario specified in the scenario table, and the output processing of the sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller of the effect control unit 24 to execute sound output according to the progress of the current scenario.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 performs a lamp scheduler execution process.
This is a process of updating the lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following processing for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, the main scenario timer (msTm) and the time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table are compared. The time data (time) in the ramp subscenario table indicates the time at which the line (the line indicated by the subscenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) starts. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is equal to or longer than the time data (time), the process for that line is performed.
For example, first, it is determined whether or not the current line is the line in which the ramp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described. If the line is not the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and the lamp number described in the line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
Further, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) and the execution lighting number (lmpNo) are set in the area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number acquired from the line in the lamp subscenario table is set to the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and "0" is set to the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Also, the value of the subscenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is incremented by 1. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to the state in which the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

In step S2034, the lamp data registration information is updated as described above, and the lamp drive data creation and the lamp drive data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in the later steps S2041 and S2042.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V-blank interrupt counter is "0", the processes of steps S2041 to S2043 are executed, and if it is "1", these processes are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates the lamp drive data. That is, the lamp drive data to be output to the driver that actually drives the various LEDs is generated based on the information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of the lamp data registration information.
Then, in step S2042, the generated lamp drive data is controlled to be output to the above driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs key event processing. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The process of creating and outputting the lamp drive data in steps S2041 and S2042 is started only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0. That is, these processes are started only during the first half of the frame.

After the V blank interrupt counter = 2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020: = 2), the CPU 241 performs the corresponding process at the end of the frame after step S2050.

First, the CPU 241 executes the history display process in step S2050. This history display process is a process for displaying the above-mentioned setting history confirmation screen Gs on the liquid crystal display device 36. The details will be described later.

In response to the execution of the display process in step S2050, the CPU 241 clears the V blank interrupt counter in step S2051, then turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as explained, the processing for the new frame period is performed.

In addition to the above processing of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the processing of FIG. 44 as, for example, an interrupt processing every 1 ms. That is, the process of FIG. 44 is a process executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of the display data.
In FIG. 44, the CPU 241 performs the WDT pulse generation process in step S2200. The WDT circuit counts every 1 ms by this WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs a sensor update process for the motor. This is a process of detecting the information of the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs the device scheduler execution process. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. Further, in step S2203, as the device scheduler output process, the output process of the motor drive data to the driver of the movable accessory motor 80c is performed.
That is, the CPU 241 controls the motor operation every 1 ms, which is an interval of about 1/30 of the frame period.

In the following step S2204, the CPU 241 performs a key input process. That is, the signals corresponding to the operations of various controls such as the effect button 13 are confirmed.
The CPU 241 ends the interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 in response to executing the process of step S2204.

Although the processing example of the CPU 241 has been described so far, in the above processing example, the CPU 241 performs various processing according to the frame of the display data.
FIG. 45 shows various timings for each frame period of the display data.
Let each frame of the display data be frames FR0, FR1, FR2, and so on. For example, the frame FR0 is displayed at the time points T0 to T1, and the frame FR1 is displayed at the time points T1 to T2.
Since the value of the V blank interrupt counter is cleared in step S2051 of FIG. 41, it becomes "0" at the start of the frame and "1" at the middle of the frame (time T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in the figure. It is cleared immediately after it becomes 2 ”.

In the figure, "SL" represents a frame period, and "SLs" represents a frame period start timing (hereinafter referred to as "frame start timing SLs"). "CA" means the first half of the frame.

First, as a premise, the liquid crystal control unit 40 performs the drawing process of the display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 based on the liquid crystal control command from the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed within the time points T0 to T1 which is the display period of the frame FR0.
Further, the liquid crystal control unit 40 preloads the data used for drawing. This preload is executed one frame before the drawing process in preparation for drawing. For example, the preload for drawing the display data of the frame FR2 is executed within the time points T0 to T1 which is the display period of the frame FR0.
The start timings of these drawing processes and preloads are synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown in the figure.

On the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) side, the processes of the steps S2021 to S2043 are repeatedly performed during the frame period indicated by SL.
However, the reception command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only for CA during the first half of the frame. This is because these are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0.
The analysis process of the received command is as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, but this is a process with a relatively heavy processing load, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the type of command, it may be necessary to perform a lottery for the production. In the present embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
Therefore, regarding the command signal, for example, for the command signal received in the period indicated by the broken line as the time points T0m to T1m, the command analysis is performed in the period of the time points T1 to T1m.

In addition, lamp data creation / output processing (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only for CA during the first half of the frame. This is because these are also executed only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0.

[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of displaying a history related to an operation related to a set value Ve (Vd) as a set operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, a history related to the change of the set value Ve and a history related to the confirmation of the set value Ve (setting confirmation process) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 based on the control of the effect control unit 24. In this example, the target events of the setting change and the setting confirmation are described as shown in the figure. Information indicating the content and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and time by hour and minute) is included.
The "content" of the target event corresponds to the name information of the type of the target event (that is, "setting change") and the changed setting value Ve (setting value Vd set by the setting change process) for the setting change. The numerical information of the set value Ve) is included. The setting confirmation includes name information of the type of the target event (that is, "setting confirmation") and numerical information of the setting value Ve (that is, the setting value Ve confirmed by the user) at the time of setting confirmation.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example is composed of a plurality of pages, and specifically, 5 pages can be displayed. The history information that can be displayed on one page is 10 in this example, and therefore a maximum of 50 (10 × 5) history information can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3). For example, each time the direction indicating key of any of the cross keys 16 is pressed once, the page feed for one page is performed.

On the setting history confirmation screen Gs, a display number is assigned to each history information. In the case of this example, this display number is assigned "1" to the latest history, and the numbers are assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
In addition, the current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (the maximum number of pages is also indicated as "1/5" in the figure).

Although not shown in FIG. 46, the target event of the history display in this example includes various errors other than the above-mentioned setting change and setting confirmation. Examples of the error here include various errors other than the set value error, such as a door opening error, a supply shortage error, and a ball jam error.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation being performed under a predetermined state. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 13 during the setting confirmation (during the execution of the setting confirmation process in step S109). Here, as understood from the above description, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the opening of the front frame 2 and the operation of the setting key when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and therefore the setting history. It is assumed that the confirmation screen Gs is displayed in such a state where the front frame 2 is open at the time of activation.

FIG. 47 shows an example of the setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during the setting confirmation. The setting confirmation screen is started to be displayed in response to the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) receiving the setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
On the setting confirmation screen of this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed together with information for notifying the user such as the hall staff that the setting is being confirmed (characters "setting confirmation" in the figure). Guidance information for the operation required for this is displayed (in the figure, the characters of "setting history list", the icon of the effect button 13 and the characters of "determine with" are applicable).

Here, in this example, the operation guide for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during the setting confirmation as described above, and the user follows the operation guide. The transition to the setting history confirmation screen Gs shown in FIG. 46 is performed in response to the predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 13 in this example).
This can be rephrased as the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) accepting the display instruction of the setting history confirmation screen Gs while displaying the operation guide on the notification screen during the setting confirmation.
As a result, the user can be made to grasp two pieces of information, that is, the timing when the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operation required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs only by the process of displaying the setting confirmation screen. it can. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load when presenting information that requires notification to the user in displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

Further, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example can be transitioned to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information. For example, even if the number of stored history information is "8" as shown in FIG. 46, all the pages of the second to fifth pages can be displayed according to the page switching operation. In other words, it is possible to display all pages that do not have history information, so to speak, including empty pages.
As a result, the user can intuitively grasp how many histories the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display at the maximum.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
The history display information is information constructed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 accumulating the corresponding history information in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 for each occurrence of the target event of the history display.

An area for storing history display information (hereinafter referred to as “history storage area”) is defined in the work area of the RAM 243, and the CPU 241 executes a process (see FIGS. 52 and 53) described later. Then, each time the target event occurs, the corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, the history information that is added one by one each time the target event occurs is referred to as "individual history information". In this example, since it is possible to display a maximum of 50 histories, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area in which 50 individual history information of histories 0 to 49 can be stored. ..

As the individual history information, as shown in the figure, the information of "year", "month", "hour", and "minute" required for displaying the date and time information of the history and the type of history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error) are displayed. Includes "type" information and "data" information. In the information of "data", when "type" is a setting change and setting confirmation, information indicating the changed setting value Ve and the setting confirmed setting value Ve due to the setting change is stored, and the information of "type" is stored. If is an "error", information indicating the error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for the latest history position information are provided in the first area, and the area following these areas is used as a storage area for individual history information.
The checksum area is an area for storing the sum value calculated from the stored information in the entire storage area of the individual history information. The role of this sum value will be described later.
The latest history position information is information representing the storage position of the last added individual history information on the RAM 243.

Here, since the RAM 243 has a relatively high information reading speed, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above for the quick display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
However, the backup power supply is not connected to the RAM 243, and it is impossible to keep the stored information when the power supply is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is expected to be a history over a relatively long period such as several weeks or one month. Therefore, only the RAM 243 is the history display information. If it is used as the storage destination memory, the history information will be lost every time the power is cut off, and the history display cannot be performed properly.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. 3 (that is, the memory capable of holding the stored information even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off) is provided as the memory accessible to the CPU 243, and the memory 244 is provided with the memory 244. The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is backed up and stored.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a backup operation example of history display information as an embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas as areas for backing up and storing the history display information. Specifically, two areas, a first history storage area and a second history storage area, are set in the figure.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244.

As described above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed during the setting confirmation (that is, the state immediately after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again). In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. After doing. Since the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (cannot be retained) when the power is cut off, the CPU 241 displays the history backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244 at the time of its own startup. The information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243. As a result, it is possible to obtain a state in which appropriate history display information is stored in the RAM 243 before the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243.
As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of displaying the setting operation history properly and promptly.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244 in this way, a plurality of history storage areas such as the first and second history storage areas described above are provided to take a plurality of backups. It is supposed to be.
By making a plurality of backups of the history display information in this way, it is possible to improve the display resistance of the setting history confirmation screen Gs against the storage data corruption in the memory 244. That is, even if data is damaged in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed by using the history display information of another history storage area. Therefore, the storage data in the memory 244 is damaged. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which proper history information cannot be displayed due to this.

Here, in this example, the copy (backup) of the history display information to the memory 244 is executed every time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243. That is, in response to the addition of new individual history information to the history display information of the RAM 243 in response to the occurrence of the target event, the added history display information is stored in the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244. Copy to each.

For example, it is conceivable to copy the history display information to the memory 244 at regular intervals, but in that case, the power is cut off unexpectedly immediately after the latest individual history information is added (power cutoff of the pachinko gaming machine 1). If this happens, the power will be cut off without the latest history being reflected in the history display information of the memory 244, and when the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup, the latest history may not be displayed. obtain.
On the other hand, if copying is performed for each history addition as described above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the stored contents of the history do not match between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to an unexpected power failure. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of display defects in history information.

It should be noted that copying to the memory 244 each time individual history information is added is just an example, and copying can be performed at other timings, such as copying each time the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. is there.

FIG. 50 shows an example of additional processing of individual history information in the history display information.
In this example, the storage area of the individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area capable of holding 50 individual history information.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state where 50 pieces of history t0 to history t49 are stored as individual history information, a new individual history information as history t50 should be added. Suppose.
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the latest history position information described above is a storage position of individual history information as history t49 as shown in the figure.

When adding the individual history information as the history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of the history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the storage position of the individual history information represented by the latest history position (that is, the history t0 is overwritten).
As a result, when adding new individual history information while the individual history information is held to the maximum, the latest individual history information is overwritten by the latest individual history information, and as a result, the history display data is displayed. In the storage area of the individual history information, the latest and past 50 pieces of individual history information are stored. That is, the number of individual history information to be retained does not exceed the upper limit of 50 (required for display).

In this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored according to the mode of the ring buffer.
When individual history information is stored in the form of a ring buffer, the latest history position is managed, and the new order or old order of each history information is naturally grasped by the storage position of each history information based on the latest history position. Will be done. Therefore, when displaying the history list in new order or old order on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is not necessary to specify the new order and old order of each history information by referring to the time information included in each history information. .. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load when displaying the history in a list in the new order or the old order.

Here, in this example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is executed only on the condition that the setting is being confirmed, and the setting history is confirmed during the setting change (during the setting change process in step S115). Do not display screen Gs.
Since the set value Ve can be changed during the setting change, displaying the history related to the setting change during the setting change may cause confusion for the user, which is not desirable.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the history display of the setting value Ve.

Subsequently, the process for realizing the operation related to the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 55.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the history information initial setting process (S2001) at the time of power-on. The process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as a part of the effect control main process described with reference to FIG. The process of S2001 is executed. As described above, the process of step S2001 is a process for holding the information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the RAM 243.

In FIG. 51, in step S2301, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243). Here, if the target event of the history display has occurred at a stage prior to the current activation, the history information update process of step S2160 described later is performed on the memory 244 (FIG. 53 :). In particular, the history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas in step S2406). In the process of step S2301, among the history display information stored in the memory 244 in this way, the history display information in the first history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In the following step S2302, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the sum value of the first history storage area is abnormal (checksum processing). That is, with respect to the history display information (hereinafter referred to as "first history display information") stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 from the first history storage area as described above, the stored value of the entire storage area of the individual history information. The sum value is calculated from the above, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area was calculated from the stored value in the storage area of the individual history information by the process of step S2405 in the history information update process (FIG. 53) of step S2160 when backing up the history display information to the memory 244. Therefore, by determining the match / mismatch of the sum values in the checksum process of step S2302, it is possible to determine whether the stored values in the entire storage area of the individual history information match / mismatch with those at the time of backup. Is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the backed up history information is abnormal (for example, whether or not it is illegally rewritten).

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initial setting process in step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information of the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 is continued. That is, the history display process (FIG. 54) of step 2050, which will be described later, is executed based on the history information of the first history storage area held in the RAM 243 in this way.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2302 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. .. That is, the history display information of the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information of the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the sum value of the second history storage area is abnormal. That is, with respect to the history display information (hereinafter referred to as "second history display information") of the second history storage area stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above, the stored value of the entire storage area of the individual history information. The sum value is calculated from the above, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the history information backed up in the second history storage area is abnormal.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initial setting process in step S2001. That is, if the history information of the second history storage area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information of the second history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues, and in this case, the second history storage area. The history display process (FIG. 54) based on the history information of is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2304 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2305 to clear the history display information, and ends the initial setting process in step S2001. In the clearing process of step S2305, the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 is cleared together with the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the history information according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display.
The target events in this example are setting change, setting confirmation, and error occurrence, and the CPU 241 updates the history information according to the occurrence of these events based on the effect control command from the main control unit 20 side. It is supposed to run. Specifically, regarding the setting change and the setting confirmation, the history information is updated according to the reception of the setting change end command, the setting value command, and the setting confirmation command from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52A). Further, regarding the error, the history information is updated according to the reception of various error commands from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52B).
In this example, each of the processes of FIGS. 52A and 52B is executed as one of the command processes (see FIG. 43) of step S2130 described above.

FIG. 52A shows the setting-related command process S2130e corresponding to the setting-related command, which is a command related to the setting change and the setting confirmation.
First, the CPU 241 confirms whether any of the setting confirmation command, the setting confirmation end command, the setting change time command, the setting change in progress command, and the setting change end command has been received by the processing of steps S2150 to S2154.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received, and if the setting confirmation command has not been received, it is determined in step S2151 whether or not the setting confirmation end command has been received. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether or not the setting change command has been received, and if the setting change command has not been received, whether or not the setting change command has been received in step S2153. Is determined. If the setting changing command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether or not the setting changing end command has been received.

Here, with respect to step S2150, the setting checking command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve as described with reference to FIG. 15, and in step S2150 in this example, the setting value " It is determined whether or not a command including any of the notification information of "1" to "6" has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying the set value Ve in the usable range Re is received as the setting checking command, not in the usable range Ru.
Further, in this example, as for the command for changing the setting in step S2152, similarly, the command for notifying one of the set values Ve (“1” to “6”) in the usable range Re instead of the used range Ru is used. Determine if it has been received.
Regarding the command for notifying the set value Ve in this way, the significance of allowing the command for notifying the value in the usable range Re instead of the used range Ru will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation scenario registration process in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
If it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation end scenario registration process in step S2156 to proceed to step S2159, and in step S2152, the setting change command (setting value "1"". If it is determined that ~ "6") has been received, the process proceeds to step S2159 as it is.
Further, when it is determined in step S2153 that the setting changing command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change start scenario registration process in step S2157 to proceed to step S2159, and determines that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154. In that case, the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158, and the process proceeds to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processes of steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, the effect operations corresponding to the setting confirmation, the setting confirmation end, the setting change start, and the setting change end are executed, respectively.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the spec specification / setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not either the spec specification command or the setting value command has been received. Although the description by illustration is omitted, the spec specification command is information representing the specifications of the game machine 1 transmitted by the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 at the time of startup (for example, the winning probability of the jackpot and the number of steps of the set value Ve to be used. It is a command to notify (information to be represented, etc.). The set value command is a command transmitted by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop preprocessing.
In both the spec specification command and the set value command, the upper byte is set to a specific value representing the spec information of the game machine 1, and in step S2159, it is determined whether or not the command in which the upper byte is set to the specific value is received. Determines whether or not either the spec specification command or the set value command has been received.

If it is determined in step S2159 that neither the spec specification command nor the setting value command has been received and the spec specification / setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing in step S2130e. That is, in this case, the storage process of the set value in the RAM 243 according to step S2163 described later is not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the spec specification / setting information command has been received, the CPU 241 stores the spec information in the RAM 243. That is, the value of the upper byte of the received spec specification command or set value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.

In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the setting is indefinite. That is, it is determined whether or not the received spec specification / setting information command is not a setting value command but a spec specification command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the spec specification command is "0FH", and the lower byte of the setting value command is a value corresponding to the setting value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, depending on whether or not the lower byte of the received spec specification / setting information command is "0FH", whether the spec specification / setting information command is not a setting value command but a spec specification command. Judge (whether or not the setting is indefinite).

When it is determined that the lower byte is not "0FH" and the setting is not indefinite (that is, it is a setting value command), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2162, and the setting information determines whether or not it is in the usable range Re. That is, whether or not the value indicated by the identification data (see FIG. 16) of the set value Ve included in the received set value command is within the range of "00" to "05" corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
When the value indicated by the identification data is a value within the usable range Re and the setting information is determined to be the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the set value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.
In response to the execution of the storage process in step S2163, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 passes the storage process of step S2163 and proceeds to step S2164.
Further, when it is determined in step S2161 that the setting is undefined (that is, it is a spec specification command), the CPU 241 passes the determination process in step S2162 and the storage process in S2163 and proceeds to step S2164.

The determination process in step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination process for the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, the significance of determining whether or not the value is within the usable range Re instead of the actual usable range Ru as an abnormality determination of the set value Ve on the effect control unit 24 side will be described later.

In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is time to change the setting or confirm the setting. For this determination, for example, the command determined to have been received in the current setting value-related command processing (S2130e) is the first "setting value command" after receiving the "setting change end command", or the "setting checking command". It can be performed as a judgment as to whether or not it was.

If the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2165 to set the history type. That is, the value of "type" and the value of "data" described above are set for the individual history information to be newly added. Specifically, when the setting is changed, the value representing "setting change" is used as the value of "type", and the value representing the current setting value Ve (setting value Ve with completed setting) is used as the value of "data". set. In addition, if it is at the time of setting confirmation, the value indicating "setting confirmation" as the value of "type" is set as the value of "data", and the setting value Ve (setting value Ve notified by the command during setting confirmation). Are set respectively.

In response to executing the set process of step S2165, the CPU 241 executes the history information update process of step S2166.
The history information update process in step S2166 will be described again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes a process of transmitting the set value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, the process of transmitting the information representing the set value Ve notified by the set value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is performed. As a result, it is possible to display the set value Ve notified by the set value command, such as the set value Ve set in the setting change process, on the liquid crystal display device 36.
In response to the execution of the transmission process in step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the process in step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows the process S2130f corresponding to the error command.
First, the CPU 241 executes an error notification in step S2170. That is, the notification process (notification process using a predetermined effect means) is executed according to the error type specified from the received error command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the value of "type" to the value representing "error" and the value of "data" to the error number (value representing the error type) for the individual history information to be newly added as the history type set processing in step S2171. ), The history information update process of step S2166 is executed, and then the process of step S2130f is completed.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the history information update process in step S2166. The update process is a process of updating the history display information of the RAM 243 so that the individual history information is added according to the newly generated target event.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the latest history position information is within the specified range (that is, whether or not it is within the range of 0 to 49 in this example). If the latest history position information is not within the specified range (that is, if it is 50 or more), the CPU 241 ends the update process in step S2160. That is, in this case, since the latest history position information is abnormal, the history display information is not updated.

If the latest history position information is a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2402 and updates the latest history position information to the value of the next position. The value of the latest history position information here is updated within the range of 0 to 49, and as can be understood from the explanation of FIG. 42 above, when the value is "49", the next position "0" will be set as the value of (that is, the value will be cyclically incremented within the range of 0 to 49).

Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires the time information (year / month / day / hour / minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404, performs a process of saving the history information in the area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, on the RAM 243 where the latest history position information indicates individual history information including the acquired time information and the information of "type" and "data" set in the corresponding process among steps S2165 and S2171 described in FIG. 52 above. It is stored in the storage area of.

In addition, as individual history information, it is also possible to save (display) the energization time from the power-on instead of the time information by the RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine that does not have an RTC function unit, it is possible to display information that can specify the occurrence time of the target event as history information.

In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 calculates the sum value of the history information of the internal work and saves it in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, a sum value is calculated from the stored value of the entire storage area of the individual history information including the individual history information newly added in step S2404, and the sum value is used as the history display information. It is stored in the checksum area in.

Further, in the following step S2406, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the internal work to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and finishes the update process of the step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, respectively.

Here, as understood from the above description, in this example, when backing up the history information stored in the RAM 243 to the memory 244, a sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243, and the sum value is used as the sum value. The history information stored in the RAM 243 is stored in the memory 244.
As a method of calculating the sum value for determining the abnormality of the backup information and saving it in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then the copy is stored in the memory 244. It is also conceivable to calculate the sum value from the history information and store the sum value in the memory 244. However, in that case, if the copying of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 fails, the sum value itself becomes a correct value, that is, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the checksum processing (S2302 or S2304). In reality, inaccurate history information is backed up, which may induce display problems of history information.
With the above history information and sum value copying method, if the copy of the history information to the memory 244 fails, the checksum process determines that the history information is abnormal. Since the history information stored in 244 can be prevented from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent inaccurate history information from being displayed.

Subsequently, the process for displaying the history information based on the history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 and 55.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the history display process (S2050). As can be understood from the explanation of FIG. 41 above, this history display process is executed once per frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, the CPU 241 determines in step S2501 whether or not the setting is being confirmed. Whether or not the setting is being confirmed can be determined by whether or not the above-mentioned setting checking command is received.
If the setting is not being confirmed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed only during the setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the setting is being confirmed, the CPU 241 confirms the history display flag in step S2502. This history display flag is an identifier (initial value is OFF) that is set to ON in step S2504, which will be described later.
When the display start condition of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not satisfied, the history display flag is off, so that the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2502 to step S2503.

In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the display instruction operation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines in step S2503 whether or not the effect button 13 is operated.

As understood from the explanations of steps S2501 to S2503 so far, the CPU 241 accepts the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs on condition that the setting is being confirmed.

If there is no display instruction operation in step S2503, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets (turns on) the history display flag in step S2504, and sets the display page identifier P to "0" in the subsequent step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to the execution of the process of step S2505, the CPU 241 executes the history information screen creation process in step S2508. Then, the history display process in step S2050 is completed.
The history information screen creation process in step S2508 is a process for transmitting information necessary for displaying the screen of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed following step S2505, information necessary for displaying the screen for the first page (P = 0) is transmitted.
The details of the history information screen creation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Further, in the previous step S2502, when it is determined that the history display flag is on (that is, the state after the first page has already been displayed), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2506 and whether or not there is a page switching operation. To judge. That is, in this example, it is determined whether or not any of the direction indicating keys of the cross key 16 has been operated.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 proceeds to the history information screen creation process in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation process of step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.
In FIG. 55, first, in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the head position Idx of the history display. That is, the position of the storage area (position on the RAM 243) of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed from now on is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the start position Idx is calculated by "latest history position-P x α" (however, α is the number of individual history information displayed per page: "10" in this example). For example, when displaying the first page (P = 0), the head position Idx is obtained as the "latest history position" from the "latest history position −0 × α". Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P = 2), the head position Idx is obtained as "latest history position-2α".

In step S2602 following step S2601, the CPU 241 sends a command to the page number. That is, the information of the page number specified from the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the page to be displayed) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to "1" in step S2603, and then performs the processing of steps S2604 to S2610 to display the information necessary for displaying the screen of the display target page (specifically, the individual history information and its display number). Is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the head position Idx. That is, the stored information of the area indicated by the head position Idx in the history storage area (history display information) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx.
When the individual history information is stored and it is determined that there is history information, the CPU 241 executes the command transmission process of the display number in step S2606, and then executes the command transmission process of the history information in step S2607. That is, the display number and the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the head position Idx are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command, respectively.

In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the head position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the individual history information in the past (Idx ← Idx-1). This update process is executed so that the value of the start position Idx is periodically updated within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the start position Idx is "0", it is updated to "49").

Further, in the following step S2609, the CPU 241 increments the display number by 1, and in step S2610, determines whether or not the transmission process for one page (transmission of the individual history information and the display number) is completed. This determination can be realized, for example, as a determination as to whether or not the value of the display number is α or more.

If the transmission process for one page is not completed, the CPU 241 executes the processes of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, when one page of individual history information is stored, the transmission process of the individual history information and its display number is repeated until the transmission process for one page is completed. When the stored individual history information is less than one page, the individual history information is transmitted and the display number thereof is transmitted only for the stored individual history information (see S2605).

Even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx (that is, even if the stored value is "0"), the individual history information by "0" is directly controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 40 on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. It can also be sent by command. In that case, on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, for the individual history information that has received such a liquid crystal control command by "0", a display indicating no history is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (for example, "-" illustrated in FIG. 38. Display control is performed so that "---" is displayed.
According to this method, the determination process in step S2605 can be omitted.

Further, when the individual history information is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is the history information (setting change history information) for the setting change. In the case of setting change history information, it is also possible to confirm an abnormality of the set value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re (whether or not it is outside the range of "0" to "5").
Then, when the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re and it is recognized that the set value Ve in the individual history information of the transmission target is abnormal, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is instructed to display the abnormality. Send. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the set value Ve in the corresponding individual history information (for example, display of an "E" mark indicating an error). That is, it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, if an abnormality is found in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information of the set value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which an abnormality is found in the setting value Ve from being displayed, and it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.

The CPU 241 finishes the history information screen creation process in step S2508 in response to the determination in step S2610 that the transmission process for one page is completed.
When the transmission process for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command indicating that fact can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

Here, in response to receiving various liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the above processing, the liquid crystal control unit 40 corresponds to one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs according to the mode illustrated in FIG. 46 above. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that the screen display is performed.

The description returns to FIG.
When the CPU 241 determines in step S2506 that the page switching operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not there is an end instruction operation, that is, whether or not there is an operation instructing the end of the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is the operation of the effect button 13, so that the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not the effect button 13 is operated.

When it is determined that the effect button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050. As described above, the history display process of step S2050 is performed once per frame period, and the processes after step S2501 are executed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2509 that the end instruction operation has been performed, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history display flag in step S2510, sets the demo screen display command in step S2511, and then sets the history of step S2050. Finish the display process.
The process of step S2511 is a process of setting a liquid crystal control command in the command buffer for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to execute the above-mentioned demo screen display for waiting for customers.

Here, according to the above processing, when the individual history information does not exist at all for a certain page, the liquid crystal control unit 40 side is only notified of the page number (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number. Is not sent.
On the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, when the page number is transmitted in this way but the individual history information or the display number is not transmitted, the page number information of the page and each display number are displayed as the screen of the corresponding page. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays a screen showing information indicating that individual history information does not exist for each case (for example, the notation of “−−−−” in FIG. 38).
As a result, it is possible to display all pages including empty pages for which there is no history information. That is, it is possible to transition to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information.

It is also possible to hide pages for which there is no individual history information. In that case, the CPU 241 does not cause the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display the screen for the current display page P in response to the determination in step S2605 (FIG. 55) that there is no history information at the stage where the display number = 1. You can give instructions, etc.

As can be understood from the processes of FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, the individual history information is individually transmitted one by one. There is.
As a result, individual history information can be transmitted by a command.
Therefore, the program design on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side can be facilitated.

In the above, an example of transmitting the history information of the corresponding page for each page switching is given, but first, the history information for all pages is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, and when the page is switched, the liquid crystal control unit 40 A page switching command may be sent to the side to instruct switching of the displayed page.

[5-3. About the data type of the set value in the embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit 24, an area for storing the set value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or the set value command from the main control unit 20 (hereinafter referred to as “notification setting value storage area A1”). ) And a storage area for the setting value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "history setting value storage area A2") that constitutes a part of the individual history information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs are individually provided. ..
Then, in the present embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, the program variable of the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 (hereinafter referred to as "notification setting value Pv1") and the history setting value. The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as "history setting value Pv2") of the setting value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, by setting the types of the notification setting value Pv1 and the history setting value Pv2 to the same "unsigned 8 bits", the number of bits of the setting value Ve stored in the history setting value storage area A2 is set to the notification. It matches the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the value storage area A1.
As a result, it is possible to prevent information loss when the set value Ve stored in the notification set value storage area A1 is stored in the history set value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, since the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, a situation occurs in which the setting value Ve acquired from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. This can be prevented, and accurate information can be displayed as the setting history information.

FIG. 56 illustrates the numerical value of the set value Ve that can be expressed by the above-mentioned “unsigned 8 bits”.
By setting 8 bits, 6 values of "1" to "6" can be expressed as the set value Ve as shown in the figure, and a value larger than "6", in other words, an abnormal value outside the usable range Re can be expressed. It is possible to express.
That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store an abnormal value other than the value of the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Setting value suggestion effect]

The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for displaying the set value suggestion effect that suggests the current set value Ve to the player.
As such a setting value suggestion effect, the effect control unit 24 of this example includes a suggestion effect by the left symbol as described below, a suggestion effect by a mini character notice, a suggestion effect at the end of a big hit, and a suggestion by SU (step-up) notice. Control to make the production appear.

(Suggestion production by the left design)

First, the suggestion effect by the left symbol will be described. The left symbol referred to here means the "left" decorative symbol among the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a left symbol lottery process for drawing the contents of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 determines in step S2701 whether or not the special mode 1 is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the mode of the game is a predetermined mode as the "special mode 1".
If it is not the special mode 1, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is the special mode 2 in step S2702, and if it is not the special mode 2, it determines continuous reach look-ahead in step S2703 (after the look-ahead, the display of the decorative symbol is predetermined for the fluctuation). It is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect controlled by the mode is won.

If the continuous reach look-ahead is not won in step S2703, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area (notification set value storage area A1 described above) of the RAM 243 as the set value information acquisition process in step S2705. In step S2706, the process of acquiring the offset value from the offset table is performed based on the set value information, and in the subsequent step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. Each of these tables is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 242.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probabilities for each symbol content (10 symbol contents of symbol 0 to symbol 9 in this example) to be drawn are "1" to "6". It is set for each set value Ve of. In the figure, the value representing the winning probability is represented by the distribution value on the premise that the random number for lottery can take 10000 values from 0 to 9999, but it is shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 above. As in the case, the threshold value for the lottery random number is actually stored. The same applies to the tables shown in FIGS. 63, 65, 68, 72, and 74, which will be described later.

In the offset table for the left symbol lottery shown in FIG. 59, the corresponding offset value is stored for each set value Ve of "1" to "6". Specifically, "0" for the set value Ve "1", "1" for the set value Ve "2", "2" for the set value Ve "3", and the set value Ve " "3" is stored for "4", "4" is stored for the set value Ve "5", and "5" is stored for the set value Ve "6".

In step S2706 of FIG. 57, an offset value corresponding to the current set value Ve acquired in step S2705 is acquired according to the offset table for left symbol lottery shown in FIG. 59. Then, in step S2707, among the lottery tables for each set value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 58, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value "1" located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored at the address with the lowest number) is selected with the offset value "1". If "", the lottery table with the setting value "2" located second from the top in the left symbol lottery table, and if the offset value is "2", the setting value "2" located third from the top in the left symbol lottery table. The lottery table stored at the position specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table of "3".

If the current state does not correspond to either the first special mode or the second special mode by the above series of processing and the continuous reach look-ahead is not won, the winning probability based on the set value Ve indicates the symbol on the left. The contents will be drawn. In other words, the appearance rate of the symbols 0 to 9 of the left symbol is different depending on the set value Ve, and this is a set value that suggests the type of the set value Ve to the player depending on the appearance rate of the specific symbol content of the left symbol. Suggestion production is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, when it is determined in step S2701 that the mode is the first special mode, the CPU 241 passes the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 and ends a series of processes. That is, under the first special mode, the lottery of the symbol contents of the left symbol is not performed.
Further, when it is determined in step S2702 that the mode is the second special mode, and in each case where it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach look-ahead is won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704 without referring to the set value Ve. The offset value is acquired from the offset table, and the process proceeds to the table selection process in step S2707. That is, in this case, the offset value of "0" in the left symbol lottery offset table is acquired (S2704), and the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). .. Therefore, under the second special mode and under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, the lottery of the symbol contents of the left symbol is performed with a fixed winning probability that does not depend on the set value Ve. In other words, the set value suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed.

As described above, in this example, the set value suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, but as a result, the symbol content of the left symbol won in the left symbol lottery process is continuously reach look-ahead. It is possible to prevent the content of the symbol on the left selected in step 2 from becoming inconsistent.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this alternative example, the table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as the offset table for the left symbol lottery stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same contents as that shown in FIG. 59 is stored as a first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset different from the first left symbol lottery offset table. The table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value (“2” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60 executes the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 instead of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. 57 as the processes executed in each of the second special mode and the continuous reach look-ahead winning. The point to do is different.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the set value information in step S2710, and acquires the offset value from the second offset table based on the set value information in the subsequent step S2711. , Proceed to the lottery table selection process of step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 is the same regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection process of step S2707 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve.
In this alternative example, in step S2706, the first left symbol lottery offset table shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table.

In this way, as a method for performing the left symbol lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve in response to the continuous reach look-ahead winning in the second special mode, a fixed offset value is acquired without referring to the set value Ve. The method is not limited to the method, and as shown in FIG. 61B, the offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve is referred to, and the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve. You can also.

(Suggestion production by mini character notice)

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the mini character notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as a premise, in the game machine 1 of this example, it is possible to appear two types of mini character notice production, the first mini character notice production and the second mini character notice production. Regarding the first mini character advance notice effect and the second mini character advance notice effect, it is assumed that the lottery process for whether or not to make the advance notice effect appear is already executed separately from the process shown in FIG. 62.
In this example, the first mini character advance notice effect is not an effect that suggests the set value Ve, but an effect that suggests the set value Ve can appear as the second mini character advance notice effect.

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 determines in step S2801 whether or not the mini character notice effect has been won. If the mini character notice effect has not been won, the CPU 241 does not execute the series of processes described below, and ends the mini character notice lottery process of FIG. 62.

If the mini character notice effect has been won, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether or not the winning content is the first mini character notice.
If the first mini character notice effect has been won and it is determined that the winning content is the first mini character notice, the CPU 241 is included in the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 as the change pattern information acquisition process in step S2803. After performing the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern information to be obtained, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the fluctuation pattern won in step S2804, and the lottery table is selected based on the offset value in the subsequent step S2805. ..

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini character notice lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first notice offset table used in step S2804. Each of these tables is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 242.
In the offset table for the first notice shown in FIG. 64, a short variation pattern (“short variation P” in the figure), a reach variation pattern (“reach variation P” in the figure), and a super reach variation pattern (“SP reach P” in the figure). An offset value is set for each). In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s", and the reach fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal reach", and the super reach fluctuation corresponds to. The patterns correspond to the above-mentioned "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". As shown in the figure, the short fluctuation pattern is 0, the reach fluctuation pattern is 1, and the super reach fluctuation pattern is 1. Is defined with an offset value of 2.

In the first mini character notice lottery table of FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the winning probabilities are distributed according to the contents of the first mini character notice. In this example, five types of contents of the first mini character notice are prepared, "None", "Holding change explanation", "Strong notice explanation", "Probability change mode explanation", and "Character introduction", and these are used as the lottery table. There are three types of tables, Tables 1 to Table 3, which determine the distribution of winning probabilities for the contents.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2804, an offset value is acquired from the first notice offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning variation pattern specified from the acquired variation pattern information, and the offset value of step S2805 is obtained. In the selection process, the lottery table is selected from the first mini character notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, when the winning fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation pattern and 0 is acquired as an offset value, table 1 is selected. If the winning variation pattern is the reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as the offset value, the table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as the offset value, the table 3 is selected. Be selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the content of the first mini character notice based on the selected value, and finishes the mini character notice lottery process shown in FIG. 62. That is, the content of the first mini character notice is determined according to the distribution value in the selected table from the tables 1 to 3.
As described above, the first mini-character notice effect is not an effect according to the set value Ve, but an effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

If the CPU 241 determines in the previous step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini character notice, the CPU 241 acquires the setting change information in the step S2807 and determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the subsequent step S2808. That is, whether or not the latest individual history information among the individual history information stored for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs described above is acquired and the "type" information in the individual history information is "setting change". Is determined.

If the "type" information is not "setting change" and a negative result is obtained in step S2808 that the setting has not been changed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2809 to execute the setting value information acquisition process. , Step S2810 obtains the offset value from the offset table based on the set value information, in step S2811, the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed, and in step S2820, the second mini character notice is announced based on the lottery value. Determine the content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini character notice lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second notice offset table used in step S2810 (note that these tables are also ROM 242. It is stored in each predetermined area of).
In the second notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. In the second notice offset table of this example, the offset value is set not only for the set values Ve "1" to "6" but also for the values as "up" and "down". However, this will be described later.

In the second mini character notice lottery table shown in FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the winning probabilities are distributed according to the contents of the second mini character notice. In this example, the contents of the second mini character notice are "None", "Game property explanation", "Setting suggestion explanation 1", "Setting suggestion explanation 2", "Setting suggestion explanation 3", "Setting suggestion explanation 4", and "Setting suggestion explanation 5". 7 types are prepared, and as a lottery table, a table that defines the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents is set for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "for raising" and "for lowering". A total of 8 types are prepared accordingly.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, an offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, and in the selection process of step S2811, the offset value is acquired. A lottery table is selected from the second mini character notice lottery table shown in FIG. 65.
Then, in the determination process of step S2820 following step S2811, the process of determining the content of the second mini character notice is performed according to the selected lottery table.

Further, when the CPU 241 obtains an affirmative result that the above-mentioned "type" information is "setting change" and the setting has been changed in the previous step S2808, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2812 and the previous and current setting value information. Is acquired, and in the following step S2813, it is determined whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time.
That is, among the individual history information whose "type" information is "setting change", the information of the setting value Ve included in the individual history information stored at the time of the previous setting change and the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243. The information of the set value Ve stored in is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the latter set value Ve is larger than the former set value Ve.

In step S2813, if the latest set value Ve is not larger than the previous set value Ve and the negative result is obtained that the set value is not higher than the previous time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2814 and first. The selection value is acquired, and in the subsequent step S2815, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the first selection value. That is, the offset value is acquired from the second notice offset table of FIG. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to the “lowering” shown in FIG. 66, and therefore, by executing the processes of steps S2814 and S2815 described above, the second notice is used. The offset value corresponding to "for lowering" is acquired from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, executes a process of selecting a table corresponding to "lowering" from the second mini character notice lottery table of FIG. 65. , Proceed to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini character notice effect when the setting for lowering the set value Ve is changed is determined based on the "lowering" lottery table.

On the other hand, if an affirmative result that the set value is higher than the previous time is obtained in step S2813, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to acquire the second selection value, and in the subsequent step S2818 based on the second selection value. Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to the “up” shown in FIG. 66. Therefore, when the processes of steps S2817 and S2818 are executed, the second notice offset table becomes “ The offset value corresponding to "for raising" is acquired.
Then, in step S2819 following step S2818, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, executes a process of selecting a table corresponding to "raising" from the second mini character notice lottery table of FIG. 65. , Proceed to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini character notice effect when the setting for raising the set value Ve is changed is determined based on the "raising" lottery table.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities of the notice contents "None", "Game property explanation", "Setting suggestion explanation 1", "Setting suggestion explanation 2", and "Setting suggestion explanation 3" are "for raising" and "for raising". Although they are the same for "lowering", the winning probabilities of "setting suggestion explanation 4" and "setting suggestion explanation 5" are different between "for raising" and "for lowering". Regarding "setting suggestion explanation 4", the winning probabilities of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "lowering" are all set to "0", while the winning probabilities of "raising" are other than "0". Specifically, in this example, it is set to "1000/10000", and therefore "setting suggestion explanation 4" is a notice content that can appear only in the case of "for raising". Regarding "setting suggestion explanation 5", the winning probabilities of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "for raising" are all set to "0", while the winning probabilities of "for lowering" are "0". Other than ("1000/10000" in this example), therefore, "setting suggestion explanation 5" is a notice content that can appear only in the case of "lowering".

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 ends the mini character advance notice lottery process in response to the execution of the determination process in step S2820.

Here, in determining whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time in step S2813 described above, the set value Ve stored in the "history setting value storage area A2" in the RAM 243 and the "notification setting value storage area" are used. The set value Ve stored in "A1" is compared, but at this time, the area for storing the previous set value Ve separately from the "history setting value storage area A2" for the RAM 243 ( “Last set value storage area A3”) may be provided.
In this case, the memory 244 stores the previous set value Ve separately from the setting history information. For example, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off, the value of the "notification setting value storage area A1" is stored in the memory 244. It is also possible to configure the value written in the memory 244 to be read into the "previously set value storage area A3" at the time of writing and turning on the power.
Then, regarding the lottery for the effect, the increase / decrease is determined by comparing the values of the "previous set value storage area A3" and the "notification setting value storage area A1".

In step S2813, if the previous and current set value Ve are the same value, refer to the second mini character notice lottery table with the current set value Ve stored in the "notification set value storage area A1" as an offset. It is conceivable to do.

(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process in which the content of the jackpot end INT (interval) effect that appears when the round game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds is drawn based on the set value Ve. Specifically, a lottery of background images is performed in the big hit end INT effect.
In addition, for the sake of explanation, it is assumed that there are three types of hits, "3R probability variation", "9R probability variation", and "3R time reduction".

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the hit type is "3R probability variation". The type of hit is notified by, for example, a decorative symbol designation command transmitted from the main control unit 20.
If the hit type is not "3R probability variation", the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 to determine whether or not the hit type is "9R probability variation", and if the hit type is not "9R probability variation", it is shown in FIG. Finish the jackpot production lottery process. That is, when the hit type is "3R time reduction", the setting suggestion by the big hit end INT effect is not performed.

In each of the case where the hit type is "3R probability change" in step S2901 and the case where the hit type is "9R probability change" in step S2902, is the CPU 241 proceeding with the process to step S2903 and performing the probability change? Determine if not. This is equivalent to determining whether or not this hit is a hit as a consecutive villa (whether or not it is the first hit).

When it is determined that the probability change is not in progress, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904 to execute the set value information acquisition process, and then acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the set value information in step S2905. Then, in the following step S2906, a process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Further, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2910 and determines a suggestion element during the jackpot end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table for drawing the jackpot end INT suggestion element used in step S2906 (hereinafter referred to as “big hit end INT suggestion element table”), and FIG. 69 is the first used in step S2905. An example of an offset table is shown (note that these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of ROM 242).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, offset values of "0" to "5" are set with respect to the set values Ve "1" to "6".

In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each content of the jackpot end INT effect. In this example, the background image in the jackpot end INT effect is used for the setting suggestion, and as shown in the figure, a total of 13 types of contents of "none (no predetermined background image)" and "background 1" to "background 12" are used. Are prepared, and as a lottery table, a plurality of tables that determine the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents are prepared.
In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of this example, as these lottery tables, six that determine the distribution for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" are stored in order from the upper layer side, and the lower layer side thereof. Further, six items that determine the distribution for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" are stored. The six lottery tables on the upper layer side are the tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the first hit, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer side are the tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the consecutive villas. It is said that.

In FIG. 67, in the acquisition process of step S2905, an offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, and in the selection process of step S2906, the offset value is based on the offset value. Then, the lottery table is selected from the jackpot end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. 68. At this time, in the first offset table, the offset value with respect to the set value Ve is in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the selection process of step S2906, a lottery is made from the six upper layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. The table is selected. That is, as a result, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from the lottery tables corresponding to the first hit.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed following step S2906, a process of determining the background (may be none) as a suggestion element in the jackpot end INT is performed according to the selected lottery table.

Further, in the previous step S2903, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress, that is, during the consecutive villas, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2907 to execute the set value information acquisition process, and then is based on the set value information in step S2908. The offset value is acquired from the second offset table, the lottery table is selected based on the offset value in the subsequent step S2909, and the determination process of step S2910 is executed.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the second offset table used in step S2908 (the second offset table is also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242).
As shown in the figure, in the second offset table, offset values of "6" to "11" are defined with respect to the set values Ve "1" to "6".
Therefore, in the acquisition process of step S2908, the lottery table is selected from the six lower layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table, that is, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve from the lottery tables corresponding to the consecutive villas. Is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed following step S2909, a process of determining the background (may not be present) as a suggestion element during the jackpot end INT is performed according to the lottery table selected in step S2909.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this example, for the lottery table stored in the upper layer side corresponding to the first hit, the distribution value for the backgrounds 7 to 12 is set to 0, and the lottery table corresponding to the consecutive villas on the lower layer side. The distribution value for background 1 to background 6 is set to 0. As a result, backgrounds 1 to 6 are not displayed at the time of consecutive villas (the backgrounds are not displayed as setting suggestion elements), and backgrounds 7 to 12 are not displayed at the time of the first hit.

The CPU 241 finishes the jackpot effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to the execution of the determination process in step S2910.

Here, as described above, offset tables (FIGS. 69 and 70) in which different offset values are set for the common set value Ve are provided, and the offset tables are used properly according to the conditions to end the jackpot as shown in FIG. 68. By performing a lottery using the INT suggestion element table, it is possible to make the table reference process a common process when performing a lottery different for each condition as a lottery for the setting suggestion element, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity. it can.

(Suggestion production by SU notice)

Subsequently, the suggestion effect by the SU notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77.
The SU advance notice effect is a kind of advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of controlling to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and is an effect having one to a plurality of stages of advance notice steps. In other words, it is a stage notice production with stages.
In this example, the content of the SU notice effect, specifically, the effect suggesting the set value Ve can be displayed by using the background image.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as the variation pattern information acquisition process in step S3001, the CPU 241 performs a process of acquiring information on the winning variation pattern based on, for example, the above-mentioned decorative symbol designation command. Next, the CPU 241 acquires an offset value from the offset table based on the winning fluctuation pattern in step S3002, selects a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and performs a SU step based on the lottery value in step S3004. And perform the process of determining the content.

FIG. 72 shows an example of a SU effect table used in the selection process of step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of an offset table for SU stage lottery used in the acquisition process of step S3002 (these tables are also predetermined in ROM 242). Each is stored in the area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, the short variation pattern (“short variation P”) and the reach variation pattern (“reach variation P”” are similar to the first advance notice offset table shown in FIG. ), The offset value is set for each super reach fluctuation pattern (“SP reach P”). In this example, the offset is 0 for the short fluctuation pattern, 1 for the reach fluctuation pattern, and 2 for the super reach fluctuation pattern. Each value is set.

In the SU effect table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each lottery target related to the SU notice effect. In this example, the lottery target as SU notice production "None" and each lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B). Three types of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution values for each of the targets are set (“Table 1”, “Table 2”, and “Table 3” in the figure). Here, the parentheses such as (white frame) attached after SU1 to SU5 indicating the SU stage mean the content of the SU notice effect, specifically, the type of the background image. For example, (white frame) is A background image with a white frame, and (character A) and (character B) mean a background image including an image of a specific character, respectively.
In the SU effect table, "table 1", "table 2", and "table 3" are stored in order from the upper layer side.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3002, an offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning fluctuation pattern, and in the selection process of step S3003, the table shown in FIG. 72 is acquired based on the offset value. The lottery table is selected from. Specifically, in this example, when the winning fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation pattern and 0 is acquired as an offset value, table 1 is selected. If the winning variation pattern is the reach variation pattern and 1 is acquired as the offset value, table 2 is selected, and if the winning variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern and 2 is acquired as the offset value, the table 3 is selected. Be selected.
Then, in step S3004 following step S3003, the CPU 241 sets the SU notice effect "none" based on the stored value (lottery value) of the table selected from the tables 1 to 3 in this way and the random number value for the lottery. , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B). That is, the stage and content of SU are determined.

According to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 72 (also in this case, it is assumed that the lottery random numbers can take 10000 patterns of 1 to 9999), in the table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU notice effect "None" The winning probability of "" is the highest, followed by the winning probability of SU1 (white frame), and the remaining SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B). ) Has a winning probability of 0.
In the table 2 corresponding to the reach fluctuation pattern, SU5 (character B), SU4 (character A), SU notice production "none", SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), in that order. We are trying to gradually increase the winning probability.
In Table 3 corresponding to the super reach fluctuation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (Character B) is the highest, and thereafter, SU4 (Character A), SU3 (white frame), and SU notice production "None" gradually occur in this order. The winning probability is lowered, and the winning probability of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) is the lowest.

The CPU 241 determines whether or not SU3 or higher has been won in step S3005 in response to executing the process of step S3004. That is, it is determined whether or not any of SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) is determined in step S3004.
If the SU 3 or higher is not won, the CPU 241 ends the SU notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71. That is, when SU2 or less is won, the process for replacing the contents of the SU notice effect described below is not performed.

On the other hand, if SU3 or higher is won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3006 and determines whether or not the previous SU3 Danger was removed. That is, the SU notice effect that appeared last time is a SU notice effect of SU3 or higher in which the background is replaced with the background of the Danger pattern frame by replacing the contents using the SU3 replacement table described later, and the SU notice effect is the target of the notice. It is determined whether or not a deviation determination result is obtained in the symbol variation display game.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the SU3 Danger was removed last time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3007, acquires an offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and then draws a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3008. The selection is made, and in step S3012, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process of step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3007 (these tables are also in a predetermined area of ROM 242). Each is stored).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the offset values “0” to “6” are set with respect to the set values Ve “1” to “6”. "5" is defined.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table in which the distribution values for the replacement contents of "default", "red", and "danger" are determined is prepared for each set value Ve. Here, "default" means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and "red" and "danger" mean that the frame is replaced with red and a danger pattern, respectively.
As shown in the figure, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table having the set value Ve "1" is stored in the uppermost layer, and thereafter, the lottery table having a larger numerical value of the set value Ve is stored so as to be located in the lower layer side. There is.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the set value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" in the offset table. Then, in the selection process of step S3008, the lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value "0" acquired in this way. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" stored in the uppermost layer of the SU3 replacement table is selected.
Then, in the determination process of step S3012 executed following step S3008, the replacement content is determined from "default", "red", and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in this way.

Here, according to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table having the highest "default" winning probability is selected by performing the above-mentioned processing of steps S3007 → S3008 → S3012. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, if the SU3 Danger is removed last time, it becomes difficult for the SU3 Danger to perform the SU notice effect again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S3006 that the SU3 Danger was removed last time, the CPU 241 executes the set value information acquisition process in step S3009, and then acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the set value information in step S3010. Then, in the following step S3011, the lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, and in the subsequent step S3011, the SU3 shown in FIG. 74 is acquired. From the replacement table, select the lottery table based on the acquired offset value. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value Ve "1" stored in the uppermost layer position is selected, and if the offset value is "1", it is stored in the position next to the uppermost layer position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table with the set value "2".
Then, in the determination process of step S3012 in this case, the replacement content is determined from "default", "red", and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

According to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the "default" winning probability, while the higher the "red" setting, the higher the winning probability. Has been done. In addition, regarding "Danger", the winning probability is lower than that of "Danger" and "Red" regardless of the set value Ve, and the winning probability is highest when the set value Ve "6" is the highest setting. Has been made. In this example, the winning probability of the "danger" is the same for the set values Ve "1" to "5", and the winning probability is increased only for the set value Ve "6".

The CPU 241 ends the SU notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to the execution of the determination process in step S3012.

As understood from the series of processes described above, in the present embodiment, the "stage" of the SU notice effect (stage notice effect) can be determined based on the fluctuation information, and the "content" of the SU notice effect is set to the set value Ve. It can be decided based on. Specifically, in this example, the "content" of the SU notice effect can be determined by replacement.

Regarding the setting suggestion using the stage notice effect, if the stage of the stage notice effect is determined based on the set value, it becomes difficult for the stage notice effect to develop and it becomes difficult to enhance the effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the stage advance notice effect can be determined according to the fluctuation information, and the advance notice content of the stage advance notice effect can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, in realizing the set value suggestion effect using the stage notice effect, it is possible to prevent the stage notice effect from becoming difficult to develop, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Normally, a plurality of types of advance notice effects are implemented in a game machine, but all of the advance notices having stages as the contents of the advance notice effects may be configured as described above, or only some of the advance notices may be described above. The configuration may be as follows. Further, in order to enhance the entertainment of the production, for some notices, the "stage" may be determined based on the set value Ve, and the "content" may be determined based on the fluctuation information. By doing so, it is possible to give different characteristics between the notices, and it is possible to improve the production interest.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of the SU notice lottery process.
First, in this alternative example, the table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as the SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same contents as that shown in FIG. 75 is stored as the first offset table for SU3 replacement (FIG. 77A), and a second offset table for SU3 replacement different from the first offset table for SU3 replacement is stored. (Fig. 77B).
In the SU3 replacement second offset table, the same offset value (“0” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The SU notice lottery process shown in FIG. 76 is different in that the processes of steps S3020 and S3021 are executed instead of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG. 71 as the process executed when the SU3 danger is removed last time.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the set value information in step S3020, and in the subsequent step S3021, the offset value is offset from the SU3 replacement second offset table based on the set value information. Is acquired, and the process proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S3008.
Since the offset value acquired in step S3021 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection process of step S3008 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected, the lottery table in which the content replacement is most unlikely to occur is selected as in the case of the processing example of FIG. 71. become.
In the acquisition process of step S3010 in this case, the SU3 replacement first offset table shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

As described above, the method for selecting the same lottery table regardless of the set value Ve is not limited to the method of acquiring a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve, as shown in FIG. 77B. It is also possible to adopt a method of selecting a lottery table based on an offset value obtained from an offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve.

Here, the lottery for the SU notice production may be performed in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of a lottery mode example of the SU notice effect in the embodiment.
First, in the figure, the expanded M06J-1, the expanded M06J-2, and the expanded M06J-3 shown in the lower left of the upper table mean the following developments, respectively.

M06J-1: While staying in a specific background mode, the target SU notice (fireworks launch SU notice) is won without winning the look-ahead notice (look-ahead effect).

M06J-2: While staying in a specific background mode, the look-ahead notice is being executed and the target SU notice is won.

M06J-3: While staying in a specific background mode, the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice and the target SU notice is won.

In the development M06J-1, a lottery for the target SU notice is performed based on the table TBL1. Further, in the development M06J-2 and the development M06J-3, the lottery for the target SU notice is performed based on the table TBL2 and the table TBL3, respectively.

In the development M06J-1, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on the table TBL1 and the case where the SU5 is won are referred to as the development M06L-1.
Further, in the development M06J-2, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on the table TBL2 and the case where the SU5 is won are referred to as development M06L-2.
Further, in the development M06J-3, the case where the SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on the table TBL3 and the case where the SU5 is won are referred to as the development M06L-3.
If SU5 is won in these developments M06L-1 to M06L-3, a lottery will be conducted based on the tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6 for the contents of SU5, respectively.

The lower table of FIG. 78 illustrates a lottery method for replacing the contents (background replacement) of SU3 for each development of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
As shown in the figure, in the deployed M06L-1, it is determined whether or not the Danger was removed last time (see step S3006). If it was out of the ranger last time, there is no branch for each set value Ve, and the replacement contents are drawn based on the table TBL4.
On the other hand, if the Danger did not come off last time, the lottery method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, the replacement contents are drawn by using a different table (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of "1" to "6".

Further, in the expanded M06L-2 and the expanded M06L-3, there is no branch depending on whether or not the Danger was removed last time, and there is no branch depending on the set value Ve, and the replacement contents are drawn based on the tables TBL11 and TBL12 as shown in the figure.

In the above-mentioned lottery method, it is possible to suggest the setting by SU notice in the state where the look-ahead effect is not won as the development M06J-1.
As a result, in fluctuations with low hit expectations that are not enough to look ahead, or fluctuations in which the look-ahead effect is not executed toward the target fluctuation of look-ahead, the role of SU notice is used for the purpose of suggesting reliability for fluctuations. Instead, it can be used to suggest a setting.

Further, in the state where the look-ahead effect is being executed as the development M06J-2, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
When the pre-reading effect is executed using multiple fluctuations, if the SU notice is won in the fluctuation during the pre-reading, the pre-reading that suggests the winning expectation is performed toward the target fluctuation of the pre-reading. Since it is inside, it is not used for the purpose of suggesting the setting as the role of SU notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice suggests the degree of expectation of winning toward the target change, and the player's interest is focused on that, so in such a situation, do not include the setting suggestion element, and the player We are trying to prevent confusion.

Further, even in the state where the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the look-ahead effect as the development M06J-3, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
In this case, since the fluctuation is a look-ahead target fluctuation and has a high expectation of hitting, the role of SU notice should be used for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the fluctuation, and not for the purpose of suggesting the setting. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

As the above-mentioned lottery method, deployment M06L-1, deployment M06L-2, and deployment M06L-3 are adopted, but any one may be adopted, or any combination may be adopted. Good.
Regarding the development M06L-2, when there are multiple types of look-ahead effects, it is configured so that the setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed only during the execution of a specific look-ahead effect (example: full-screen look-ahead notice, etc.), and other It may be configured to suggest the setting by the SU notice during the execution of the look-ahead effect (example: pending change notice, etc.).
Regarding the development M06L-3, when there are multiple types of look-ahead notices, the setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed when the change is the target change of a specific look-ahead effect (eg, full-screen look-ahead notice, etc.). In the state where the change is the target change of other look-ahead effects (eg, pending change notice, etc.), the setting may be suggested by the SU notice.
In addition, when the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the setting suggestion is not performed by the setting suggestion notice including the setting suggestion element such as the above-mentioned SU notice, and when the fluctuation is out of alignment, the setting suggestion is given. It may be configured to do so.

Here, in the SU notice lottery method of this example described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77 above, when the setting suggestion is performed by the SU notice, among a plurality of tables to which the SU notice contents are associated with each set value, If the SU notice content is drawn based on the table corresponding to the current set value and the setting suggestion is not performed by the SU notice, a specific table (a table specified without being based on the set value) is selected from the above multiple tables. Based on this, the SU notice contents are drawn by lottery.
In such a lottery player method, when the setting suggestion by SU notice is given, the notice content of SU notice is determined based on the set value Ve, and when the setting suggestion by SU notice is not made, the notice content of SU notice is set as the set value. In other words, it is a method of determining without being based on Ve.
When this is applied to the above-mentioned developments M06J-1 to M06J-3, it can be paraphrased that the game machine 1 of this example is performing the SU notice lottery as follows.
First, in the comparison between the development M06J-1 and the development M06J-2 described above, it can be paraphrased as follows.
That is, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, if the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed (development M06J-2), the variable display of the symbol is performed. It is possible to determine the content of the SU notice for the SU notice without being based on the set value Ve, and on the other hand, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is targeted. When the pre-reading effect is not executed (development M06J-1), it can be said that the notice content of the SU notice targeting the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on the set value Ve.

Further, in the comparison between the development M06J-1 and the development M06J-3 described above, it can be paraphrased as follows.
That is, when the pre-reading effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed (development M06J-3), the variable display of the predetermined symbol is displayed. The notice content of the target SU notice can be determined without being based on the set value Ve, while the look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. If it is not executed (development M06J-1), it can be said that the notice content of the SU notice targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined based on the set value Ve.

By the lottery player method as described above, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the SU notice in the state where the look-ahead effect is being executed or the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Here, it is also possible to realize the setting suggestion by a predetermined notice effect such as SU notice by the following method. That is, a "predetermined effect" that is a preliminary effect including an element suggesting a set value Ve (for example, a specific background such as a Danger pattern) is prepared, and whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is set as the set value Ve. It is decided based on. Specifically, for example, by performing a lottery using a table configured so that the higher the setting, the easier it is for the predetermined effect to appear, it is possible to suggest the setting that the setting is high.
On the other hand, when the setting suggestion is not performed, it is determined whether or not to execute the predetermined effect without being based on the set value Ve. Specifically, for example, by making a decision not to execute the predetermined effect regardless of the set value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being performed.

In this way, if it is determined based on the set value Ve whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect can be performed. On the other hand, by deciding whether or not to execute the predetermined effect without being based on the set value Ve, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect.
Applying this to each case of "providing setting suggestion" and "not suggesting setting" in the above-mentioned developments M06J-1 to M06J-3, the game machine 1 of this example has the following configuration. can do.
First, in the comparison between the expanded M06J-1 and the expanded M06J-2 described above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed. In the case (development M06J-2), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol without being based on the set value Ve, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the symbol is displayed. When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is not executed (development M06J-1), it is set whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol. It is a configuration that can be determined based on the value Ve.

Further, in the comparison between the expanded M06J-1 and the expanded M06J-3 described above, when the pre-reading effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed (expanded). In M06J-3), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the variation display of the predetermined symbol without being based on the set value Ve, and before the variation display of the predetermined symbol is performed. , When the pre-reading effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is not executed (development M06J-1), it is set value Ve whether or not to execute the predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol. It is a configuration that can be decided based on.

By adopting these configurations, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the look-ahead effect is being executed or the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Here, in the above, regarding the determination of the advance notice content of the predetermined effect and the determination of whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, when the look-ahead effect is being executed or when the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect. , An example of making these decisions without being based on the set value Ve has been given, but in order to prevent confusion among players, it is better than when the look-ahead effect is not being executed or when the change is not the target change of the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect is being executed or when the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect, it is sufficient that the ratio of setting suggestion by the predetermined effect is reduced.
Therefore, regarding the determination of the content of the advance notice of the predetermined effect and whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed and whether or not the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the ratio of making a decision based on the set value Ve is different. Specifically, it has the following configurations (c1) to (c4).

(C1)
The ratio of determining the advance notice content of the predetermined effect targeting the fluctuation is different depending on the case where the pre-reading effect is being executed and the case where the pre-reading effect is not being executed.
(C2)
The ratio of determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the fluctuation is different depending on the set value Ve depending on whether the pre-reading effect is being executed or the pre-reading effect is not being executed.

(C3)
The ratio of determining the notice content of the predetermined effect for the change based on the set value Ve is different depending on whether the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect or the change is not the target change of the look-ahead effect.
(C4)
The ratio of determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the change depending on whether the change is the target change of the look-ahead effect or the change is not the target change of the look-ahead effect based on the set value Ve. Make it different.

In these configurations, when the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead effect or when the look-ahead effect is being executed, it is more predetermined than when the variation is not the target variation of the look-ahead effect or when the look-ahead effect is not being executed. It is possible to reduce the ratio of setting suggestions by directing.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

The "ratio" in the configurations (c1) to (c4) described above includes "0". That is, for example, taking the configuration of (c1) as an example, when the pre-reading effect is being executed, the advance notice content of the predetermined effect may be determined without being based on the set value Ve.

If there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices in the non-winning state of the look-ahead notice, the notice contents may be determined based on the set value Ve for all the setting suggestion notices, or SU. Only some setting suggestion notices such as notices may be configured so that the contents of the notice can be determined based on the set value Ve.
Further, in the non-winning state of the look-ahead notice, if there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, it may be configured so that all the setting suggestion notices can be executed, or only for some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices. It may be configured to be feasible.

In addition, when the look-ahead notice is being executed (eg, when the lottery for each notice is performed at the start of the change, the look-ahead notice is executed or is performed by targeting the change after the change). , If there are multiple setting suggestion notices, all the setting suggestion notices may be configured so that the notice contents can be determined without being based on the set value Ve, or some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices may be made. (Example: A type of setting suggestion notice that can be executed before reach) may be configured so that the notice content can be determined without being based on the set value Ve.
Further, in the state where the pre-reading notice is being executed, if there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, it may be configured not to execute all the setting suggestion notices, or some setting suggestion notices such as SU notice (eg, SU notice). : It may be configured not to execute only for the setting suggestion notice of the kind that can be executed before reach).

In addition, when the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice and there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, all the setting suggestion notices can be determined so that the notice contents can be determined without being based on the set value Ve. It may be possible, or only for some setting suggestion notices such as SU notices (eg, setting suggestion notices of a type that can be executed before reach), the notice contents can be determined without being based on the set value Ve. You may.
Further, in a state where the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice, if there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, it may be configured not to execute all the setting suggestion notices, or some setting suggestions such as SU notices. It may be configured not to execute only the notice (eg, the setting suggestion notice of the kind that can be executed before the reach).

Further, when the notice content of the setting suggestion notice is determined without being based on the set value Ve, the notice content may be determined by using a specific lottery table. At that time, it is desirable to determine the content of the notice from the lottery table based on the fluctuation pattern information of the fluctuation and the information on the winning. In addition, when the notice content of the setting suggestion notice is determined without being based on the set value Ve in the state where the look-ahead notice is being executed or the target change of the look-ahead notice, a specific lottery table common to each is set. It may be used, or different lottery tables may be used for each. Further, when there are a plurality of setting suggestion notices, it goes without saying that a lottery table exists for each setting suggestion notice because the notice contents differ depending on the type of the setting suggestion notice.

[5-5. Difference between the set value range corresponding to the main control unit and the production control unit]

Here, as understood from the various lottery processes of the effect control unit 24 described above, in the effect control unit 24, the set value Ve is the actual usage range Ru (in this example, "1", "2", "6". ), But if the value is within the usable range Re (“1” to “6”), the effect lottery is configured to be normally performed without causing an error.

On the other hand, if the set value Ve is not within the actual usage range Ru, the main control unit 20 cannot execute at least a specific process related to the progress of the game. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27 above, when the set value Ve (set value Vd) is not within the range of use Ru, it is shown in FIG. 27. It becomes impossible to acquire appropriate judgment reference value TH and setting difference information from the random number judgment table for big hit judgment, and the big hit judgment cannot be properly executed.

The difference in correspondence between the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one of the N (N is a natural number of 2 or more) types by the setting change process (step S115), and is based on the set values of the N types. , It is possible to execute the first process related to the progress of the game operation.
On the other hand, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation based on the set value information of M types, which is more than N types, with respect to the set value information regarding the set values received from the main control unit 20. It is said that.

As a result, in order to make it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the burden of the program rewriting work.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 52A above, the effect control unit 24 uses a command (setting value information) for notifying the setting value transmitted by the main control unit 20, specifically, setting confirmation. Regarding the setting value information as the medium command and the command when changing the setting, it is possible to analyze the 6 types of setting value information corresponding to the usable range Re instead of the 3 types of setting value information corresponding to the actual usage range Ru. ing.
Specifically, for the command during setting confirmation and the command at the time of setting change, it is possible to receive the command including the identification data of any one of "1" to "6" in steps S2150 and S2152, respectively. It is possible to analyze the command of.

That is, if the three types of setting values Ve corresponding to the usage range Ru are N types of setting values that can be set in the setting change process, the effect control unit 24 has M types of setting values that are larger than those of N types. The information is configured to be parseable.

As a result, in order to make it possible to change the number of steps of the set value Ve, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the set value information up to the M step. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of set values to be used while reducing the burden of program rewriting work.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect control unit 24, when the set value Vd set in the setting change process on the main control unit 20 side and the set value analysis information based on the analyzed set value information correspond to each other ( For example, a predetermined process (various effect lottery processes described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 77) is performed regardless of whether the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd and the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information match) or not. It is configured to be executable.

As a result, when the number of stages of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can execute the process up to the M stage, and it is not necessary to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage. It becomes possible to do.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value Ve while reducing the burden of the program rewriting work.

Here, according to the process of FIG. 52A, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154, the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within an appropriate range. It is assumed that the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158 without confirming whether or not there is any (see step S2162).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect control unit 24 side from notifying the abnormality of the set value when the main control unit 20 side is about to end the setting change process normally. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the main control unit 20 side advances the subsequent game operation in response to the normal end of the setting change process even though the effect control unit 24 side is performing the abnormality notification. It is possible to prevent people from feeling anxious.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S2162 whether or not the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side is within the usable range Re, and if it is within the usable range Re. The received set value Ve (identification data described above) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the “notification set value storage area A1” described above), and if it is outside the usable range Re, the received set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. It is not supposed to be.
When the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243, but in the present embodiment, the "set value command" is transmitted at a plurality of timings other than when the setting is changed. Is transmitted at least at the time of recovery from power failure (S808 when recovery from power failure) and at the start of fluctuation (S1411), so that the set value Ve within the usable range Re is received at those timings. An appropriate set value Ve can be stored in the RAM 243.

In addition to the timings illustrated above, the set value command can also be transmitted during a customer waiting demo, at the start or end of a big hit or small hit, at the start of a round game, at the start of an INT between rounds, or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Re, it is stored in the RAM 243 as it is even if it is not within the usable range Ru, but it has been described above. As in the lottery process related to various effects (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.), in this embodiment, the lottery process corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re, so that the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Ru. Even if it is not, a bug does not occur in the production lottery process.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is RAM243 (specifically, in the setting history information update process in step S2166). It is stored in the above-mentioned “history setting value storage area A2”) (see step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history set value storage area A2 in this way, the abnormality confirmation of the set value Ve is performed during the transmission process of step S2607 (FIG. 55) described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As described above, as the process of confirming the abnormality at this time, after determining whether or not the individual history information of the transmission target is the history information (setting change history information) about the setting change, the setting change history information is used. If there is, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve included in the history information is a value outside the usable range Re, and if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, the liquid crystal control The instruction information of the abnormality display is transmitted to the unit 40. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the set value Ve in the corresponding individual history information (for example, display of an "E" mark indicating an error).

<6. Modification example of setting related command processing and setting value conversion>

Here, in the above, the set value Ve (set value Ve saved in step S416) set in the setting change process (S115) shown in FIG. 10 is set in the main loop pre-process (S119) shown in FIG. An example of transmitting to the effect control unit 24 side by the value command (S808) has been given, but the set value Ve set by the setting change process can also be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command at the end of the setting change. Specifically, in the embodiment, as the command at the end of the setting change, the setting change end command is transmitted (S605, S606) in the RAM clear process (S116) shown in FIG. 14, but this setting change end command Alternatively, a "setting change completion command" including the set value Ve set in the setting change process may be transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Further, in the process of FIG. 52A described above, the process (S2163) in which the effect control unit 24 stores the set value Ve in the RAM 243 can be executed every time the set value command from the main control unit 20 is received. However, the storage process of the set value Ve for the RAM 243 may be performed only when the setting is changed.
When the storage process of the set value Ve for the RAM 243 is performed only when the setting is changed, the set value Ve is out of the usable range Re as in the process shown in FIG. 52A. If is not stored (route from S2162 to S2164), the set value Ve will not be set in the RAM 243.
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the value representing the set value Ve "1" (in other words, the value representing the lowest stage of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. While preventing an abnormal set value Ve from being set in the RAM 243, it is also possible to prevent the set value Ve from being set itself.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command process S2130e as a first modification, which includes the storage of the lowest step value as described above.
The setting-related command processing S2130e as the first modification corresponds to the case where the main control unit 20 transmits the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing by the above-mentioned "setting change completion command" to the effect control unit 24 side. It is said that the processing was done.
The differences from the processing shown in FIG. 52A are that the reception determination processing of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the processing of steps S2159 to S2161 and the processing of step S2164 are omitted, and step S2181. This is the point where the processing of is added.

In the process shown in FIG. 79, the CPU 241 first performs the reception determination process of the "setting change completion command" in step S2180. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command including notification information (identification data) of any of the set values Ve "1" to "6" is received as the "setting change completion command".
If it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has not been received, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2150. In this case, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2153 in response to the negative result obtained in step S2151. If a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 79.
Further, in this case, the CPU 241 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 79 in response to executing each scenario registration process of steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change end scenario registration process in step S2158.
If the set value Ve included in the received "setting change completion command" is within the usable range Re of "1" to "6" by the determination process of step S2180 described above, the setting change end scenario is set in step S2158. be registered. That is, even when an unused set value Ve within the usable range Re is received, an effect of notifying the end of the setting change is performed.

In response to the execution of the scenario registration process in step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether or not the setting information is within the usable range Re.
Then, when the setting information is in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 performs a process of storing the set value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to the history information update process of step S2166.
On the other hand, when the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the set value "1" in the RAM 243 in step S2181 and proceeds to the history information update process in step S2166.

By the processing as the first modification as described above, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, a specific value (specific value) is stored in the RAM 243, corresponding to the case where the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed. In this example, "1") can be stored.

When a specific value (“1”) is stored in the set value storage area (“notification setting value storage area A1”) of the RAM 243 as in the first modification described above, the set value in the setting history information A specific value (“1”) may also be stored for Ve (that is, the above-mentioned “history setting value storage area A2”).
Alternatively, an abnormal value may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing the abnormal value in the setting history information, it is possible to save the fact that the set value Ve is abnormal as the history information while making the lottery of the game based on the specific value.

Here, as the suitability determination of the set value Ve when the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243, it is also possible to determine whether or not it is within the usable range Ru, not whether it is within the usable range Re.
For example, when the set value Ve to be used is set to "1", "2", and "6" as in this example, first, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re, and then used. If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether or not the set value Ve is an unused value (any of "3", "4", and "5").
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. On the other hand, when the set value Ve is an unused value, it is conceivable to store a specific value (“1”) in the RAM 243. Alternatively, when the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve can be corrected to the value of the usage range Ru and stored in the RAM 243. For example, when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and when it is "5", it is corrected to "6".

FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command process S2130e as a second modification including the correction of the set value Ve as described above.
The difference from the processing shown in FIG. 79 is that the processing of steps S2182 and S2183 is added.
In this case, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2182 to determine whether or not the setting information is an unused value in response to the determination in step S2162 that the setting information is in the usable range Re. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is any of "3", "4", and "5" (any of "02H", "03H", and "04H").
If it is determined that the setting information is not an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183 and stores the correction value in the RAM 243 with reference to the setting value correction table. Specifically, in this example, the set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of ROM 242) is referred to, and when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2" and "5". At that time, the value is corrected to "6", and the corrected setting value Ve is stored in the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243.

Here, in the description so far, the main control unit 20 uses the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 to set the set value Vd handled by the main control unit 20 side according to the program on the effect control unit 24 side. An example of converting to the value Ve has been given, but the main control unit 20 transmits the information of the set value Vd to the effect control unit 24 without performing conversion using the set value offset conversion table, and sets the value on the effect control unit 24 side. A configuration that converts the value Vd can also be adopted.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a set value conversion table to be used on the effect control unit 24 side in this case. Here, it is assumed that the stage of the set value Ve and the value to be used are uniquely determined by the spec information of the game machine 1.

As shown in the figure, the set value conversion table includes a conversion table that stores information on the set value Vd transmitted by the main control unit 20 side, specifically, conversion values for each of "0" to "5". There are four types, "Spec 1" to "Spec 4").

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) selects the corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on the spec information specified by the spec specification command described above, and receives the set value Vd from the main control unit 20. Is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, "Spec 1" has 6 stages of setting, and the main control unit 20 in this case uses "0" to "5" as the set value Vd. "Spec 2" and "Spec 3" have two setting stages and three setting stages, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses "0", "1", and "0" to "3" as set values Vd, respectively. "Spec 4" is "no setting". In this case, "0" is stored as a conversion value for each set value Vd as shown in the figure.

By configuring the effect control unit 24 side to convert the set value as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control unit 20 side.

<7. Other transformation examples related to the set value>

Here, the information displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information exemplified in FIG. 46 and can be considered in various ways. For example, a certain set value may indicate how long the game has been played. Specifically, the date and time and time from when a certain set value is set to when it is changed next may be displayed. Further, the date and time and time from when the power is turned on until the game is played according to a certain set value and then the power is turned off may be displayed. Further, when the set value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time from the determination of the abnormal value to the setting of the normal set value may be displayed. In addition, originally, the set value is not changed during the game, or the set value does not change from the normal value to the abnormal value, but when the set value is changed even during the game due to noise or goto action. May store the date and time and display it as a history display. Further, the number of times the RAM clear processing and the backup restoration processing are performed and the date and time information may be similarly displayed. Further, the timing of displaying the history display may be, for example, while the setting change process is being performed, in addition to the time when the setting confirmation process is being performed. Further, even during the game, if a predetermined operation input is input, the history may be displayed.

Further, in the above, an example is given in which the history information is stored in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display, and the history information saved in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244. However, as the timing for storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244, the elapsed time stored in the internal work is referred to, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the memory 244 is stored (copied). Is also possible.

Further, regarding the setting history confirmation screen Gs, even after the display is finished in response to the end instruction operation, if the predetermined display conditions such as setting confirmation (or setting change) are satisfied, the display instruction is given again. It can be displayed as many times as you like depending on the operation. Alternatively, if the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times such as once under the condition that the predetermined display condition is satisfied, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. Can also be disabled.
In addition, it is desirable to hide the performance display monitor that displays the base value while the history information is being displayed. Further, the volume / light amount adjustment may be effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the adjustment content on the display means.
Further, the contents and state of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal, and in that case, it is desirable to display the contents and the state at a position that does not overlap with the history information. Further, the volume / light amount may be configured to be non-adjustable. In this case, there is no risk that the history information and the display overlap, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration is increased.

Further, it is desirable not to execute at least the initialization operation of the movable body on the board side while displaying the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body on the board side from moving to the front side of the display means and hindering the visibility of the display screen. Further, the movable body on the frame side may also be prevented from executing the initialization operation in the same manner. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized if there is no possibility of obstructing the display screen. In this case, for example, the initializing operation of the vibrating means mounted on the operating means, the air ejecting means for ejecting air, and the like may also be performed. As a result, for the movable body on the frame side, the initialization operation can be completed first, so that the movable body on the board side can be moved after the display of the history information is completed, that is, after the setting confirmation process (or setting change process) is completed. It is efficient because you only have to initialize the body. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed for all the movable bodies after the display of the history information is completed.

Further, when the set value is changed while the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 processes based on the changed set value. On the other hand, since the effect control unit 24 cannot know the information, it cannot be stored and displayed as history information. Therefore, by changing the setting value with the harness disconnected, turning off the power once, and then turning on the power with the harness reconnected, the setting can be changed without leaving any evidence that the setting value has been changed. You can do it. In order to prevent this, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 20 transmits the set value information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 transmits the stored set value information and the main control unit 20. If there is a contradiction by comparing with the information of the set value, an error notification may be performed using a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like.
Further, in this case, the effect control unit 24 side may be set to the game stop state, and even if a command related to the game is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the processing based on the command is not performed. You may. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when executing the setting change process or the RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 side is said to have performed the setting change process normally again. Judgment, memorize the newly determined setting value, and interrupt / cancel error notification (contradiction occurrence ⇒ error notification ⇒ power off ⇒ setting changing (non-error notification) ⇒ setting change completed (non-error notification)) You may try to do it. Further, when the power is turned on for the first time, there is no information on the set value on the effect control unit 24 side. Therefore, in such a case, if the information on the set value is transmitted from the main control unit 20 , It is desirable to configure so that error notification is not performed.

Further, as the set value suggestion effect, it is also possible to use an operation effect using an operation means that can be operated by the player. Specifically, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, a first operating means (example: PUSH button) and a second operating means (example: pato button) are provided (the first operating means and the second operating means are: It may be a separate operation device, or it may be a common operation device that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect), and only the operation of the first operation means is effective. When the operation of the first operation means is performed during the operation valid period, the setting suggestion notice suggesting the current set value Ve may be executed. Further, if the player does not operate the first operation means during the valid period of the first operation, the setting suggestion notice may not be executed. Further, when the setting suggestion notice is not executed, an effect different from the setting suggestion notice (eg, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the hit of the fluctuation) may be executed. Even when the setting suggestion notice is executed, in addition to the execution of the setting suggestion notice, an effect different from the setting suggestion notice (eg, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the hit of the fluctuation) should be executed. It may be configured as. Further, when the operation of the second operating means is performed during the valid period of the first operation, the operation of the second operating means is not effective, so that it is the same as the case where the first operating means is not operated. Can be the correspondence of.

The second operating means may have the same configuration as the first operating means described above.
In addition, when the expectation that the fluctuation will be a hit is higher when the operation effect by the second operation means is executed than when the operation effect by the first operation means is executed, the operation by the second operation means is performed. The setting suggestion notice may be executed in the effect, and the setting suggestion notice may not be executed in the operation effect by the first operation means. Further, the setting suggestion notice may be executed in the operation effect by the first operation means, and the setting suggestion notice may not be executed in the operation effect by the second operation means.

When the first operation means is operated in the specific operation effect in which the operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means are effective, the setting suggestion notice is executed and the second operation means is operated. May be configured not to execute the setting suggestion notice. Further, the reverse configuration may be used.
In addition, during the operation valid period of the specific operation effect, an image imitating either the first operation means or the second operation means is displayed on the display means, and which operation means should be operated by the player. In that case, when an image imitating the first operating means is displayed, the setting suggestion notice is executed when the first operating means is operated, and the second operating means is operated. In this case, the setting suggestion notice may not be executed. Further, when an image imitating the first operating means is displayed, the setting suggestion notice may be executed when the operation of the second operating means is performed.
Further, regarding the specific operation effect, the relationship between the case where the setting suggestion notice is executed and the case where the setting suggestion notice is not executed after the operation, and the relationship between the setting suggestion notice and the effect different from the setting suggestion notice are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned operation effect. It may be configured.

Further, the effect mode of the operation effect may be configured to be different depending on the set value Ve. For example, during the operation valid period of the operation means, the operation promotion effect may be executed by the display, voice, or lamp that prompts the operation by using the effect means, and the content of the operation promotion effect is changed according to the set value Ve. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, the minimum set value (example: setting 1) is denied by executing the operation promotion effect that appears only when the set value Ve is equal to or more than a predetermined value (example: setting 2 to 6). It becomes possible to notify that. Further, by executing the operation promotion effect that appears only when the set value Ve is equal to or more than a predetermined value (example: setting 6), it is possible to notify that the set value is the highest set value (example: setting 6). ..

Further, the above-described embodiment may be used in the winning operation effect, which is performed at the final stage of the reach effect in the operation effect and notifies the winning of the fluctuation. In this case, the content of the operation promotion effect may be configured to be different according to the set value Ve only when the winning result is a hit. Further, only in the case of the deviation, the content of the operation promotion effect may be configured to be different according to the set value Ve. In addition, the content of the operation promotion effect may be configured to be different according to the set value Ve only in the case of a hit that shifts to a probable change state that is advantageous to the player after the hit.

<8. Summary so far>

As described above, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays a variation of the symbol and controls the advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, and determines whether or not to control the advantageous state. The determination means (step S1502: jackpot random number determination process), the look-ahead determination means (step S1309: look-ahead determination process) that determines whether or not to control in an advantageous state before the determination by the determination means, and the determination of the look-ahead determination means. A look-ahead effect executing means (effect control unit 24, and a liquid crystal display) capable of executing a look-ahead effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state before the variable display of the symbol to be determined is performed based on the result. The effect means (effect means such as the device 36, the light display device 45a, the sound generator 46a, etc.) and the effect execution means (effect control unit) capable of executing a warning effect to notify the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state during the variable display of the symbol. 24, and the effect means such as the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, and the sound generator 46a), and a setting value (the same Ve) indicating a stage regarding the probability of controlling to an advantageous state can be set. Means (step S115: setting change processing) are provided.
Then, the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect (for example, SU advance notice effect), and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is executed. If this is the case, it is possible to determine the content of the advance notice of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol without being based on the set value, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, it is performed after the variable display of the symbol. When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol is not executed, the advance notice content of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol can be determined based on the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the look-ahead effect is being executed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol and controls it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and executes the above-mentioned determination means, pre-reading determination means, and pre-reading effect. A means, an effect executing means, and a setting means are provided, and the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the variable display of the symbol performed after the variable display of the symbol is targeted. When the pre-reading effect is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol without being based on the set value, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the symbol is displayed. If the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol that is performed after the variable display of the symbol is not executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined effect for the variable display of the symbol based on the set value. It was.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the look-ahead effect is being executed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol and controls it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and executes the above-mentioned determination means, pre-reading determination means, and pre-reading effect. In addition to being provided with means, effect executing means, and setting means, the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and a look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. Is executed, the notice content of the predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined without being based on the set value, and the predetermined design can be determined before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. When the look-ahead effect for the variable display of the symbol is not executed, the notice content of the predetermined effect for the variable display of the predetermined symbol can be determined based on the set value.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, the gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol and controls it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and executes the above-mentioned determination means, pre-reading determination means, and pre-reading effect. In addition to being provided with means, effect executing means, and setting means, the advance notice effect includes a predetermined effect, and a look-ahead effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol before the variable display of the predetermined symbol is performed. Is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined effect targeting the variation display of the predetermined symbol without being based on the set value, and before the variation display of the predetermined symbol is performed. , When the pre-reading effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol is not executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined effect targeting the variable display of the predetermined symbol based on the set value. It is a thing.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion by the predetermined effect from being performed in the state where the variation is the target variation of the look-ahead effect.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

<9. Suggestion effect regarding set value>

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a suggestion effect regarding the set value can be appropriately performed. The suggestion effect regarding the set value is an effect in which the player who plays the game machine 1 can infer the set value Ve set in the game machine 1. In the following description, the value (range) of the set value Ve is not the value (0 to 5) used inside the game machine 1 corresponding to the set value, but the operator or the player who sets the set value. Use a value (1 to 6) that can be grasped.

As the suggestion effect regarding the set value, in addition to the effect that the set value Ve can be estimated (set value suggestion effect), the effect that can estimate whether or not the set value Ve has been changed (set value change suggestion). (Direction) is also included. Specifically, is the set value Ve set on the previous day for a certain game machine 1 used without being changed on the current day, or the set value Ve on the previous day is changed and new? It is an effect that makes it possible to guess whether the set value Ve (including the case where the set value 4 is changed to the same set value 4 again) is set.

When performing an effect that can estimate the set value Ve as a suggestion effect regarding the set value, in addition to suggesting that the set value Ve is 6 or 5, the set value Ve has a certain range. It is possible to suggest possible values.
Specifically, an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is an even number (any of 2, 4 and 6) and an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is an odd number (any of 1, 3 and 5) can be considered. Be done. Further, an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is any of 4 to 6 may be used. As an example suggesting a wider range, there may be an effect suggesting that the set value Ve is other than 1 (that is, any of 2 to 6).

In the suggestion effect regarding the set value, the effect using the sound, light, liquid crystal, movable body accessory, button, etc. by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 is performed. Specifically, a sound effect using a sound generator 46a including a speaker 46 included in the game machine 1, a light effect using a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, a liquid crystal display device 36, and the like were used. Image effects, visual effects using movable objects, and experience-type effects using effect buttons 13 and wind pressure devices.

By using such a suggestion effect regarding the set value, it is possible for the player to estimate what kind of set value Ve is applied to the game machine 1 performing the game, and the game machine to be played. Can be used as a judgment material when selecting. By using such information when selecting a game machine, the player can stand in an advantageous manner over selecting a game machine in the dark clouds. As a result, it is possible to provide the game machine 1 that is easy for the player to select.
In addition, it is possible to provide the player with the joy of appropriately guessing the setting of the game machine 1 based on the suggestion effect regarding the set value and the joy of selecting the game machine 1.

FIG. 119 shows the relationship between the type of suggestion effect related to the set value and the execution timing of the suggestion effect. The portion of “type of suggestion effect regarding set value” shown in FIG. 119 is shown in FIG. 82, and the portion of “type of execution timing” shown in FIG. 119 is shown in FIG. 83. Further, FIG. 84 shows the portion of “whether or not the effect is executed (○ / unmarked)” in FIG. 119.

[9-1. Type of production]

A type of suggestion effect (hereinafter, simply referred to as “suggestion effect”) relating to the set value implemented in the game machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described (FIG. 82).
In FIG. 82, 21 types of suggestive effects shown in the effects 01 to 21 are described. Each suggestive effect is provided with columns for "type", "corresponding / other", and "effect means".
There are three types of "types": "set value suggestion effect", "set value change suggestion effect", and "big hit notice effect". The "set value suggestion effect" and the "set value change suggestion effect" are as described above. The "big hit notice effect" is originally a notice effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit, but by changing the notice mode according to the set value Ve, it has a role as a set value suggestion effect. It is a thing.

The distinction between "corresponding / other" is "corresponding" when the suggestion effect is related to the symbol variation display game, and "corresponding" when it appears regardless of the symbol variation display game. Others ".

The "directing means" defines which directing means is used to perform the suggestive effect. If the "sound" is marked with a circle, an effect of performing a sound effect using the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46 is executed, and if the "light" is marked with a circle, the decorative lamp 45 or An optical effect using an optical display device 45a including various LEDs is executed, and if a circle is marked on the “liquid crystal”, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like is executed, and the “movable body” is marked with a circle. If the mark is described, a visual effect using a movable body accessory or the like is executed, and if a ○ mark is described in the "button", the experience type using the effect button 13 or a wind pressure device or the like is performed. The production is executed.
Specific examples of each production will be described later.

[9-2. Production timing]

Subsequently, the timing at which the suggestion effect can be performed will be described with reference to FIG. 83.
First, the 42 types of suggestion effect timings shown in timings 01 to 42 are roughly classified into three types: "waiting for customers", "changing", and "big hit".
The suggestion effects performed during "waiting for customers" are divided into "initialize", "operation notification", "demo", and "menu screen" as more detailed execution timings, and "initialize" is the initialization of the frame accessory (timing 01). ) And the initialization of the board (timing 02).

Here, the frame accessory is a movable body accessory provided in the "frame". The "frame" includes a front frame 2, an outer frame 4, a glass door 6, a front operation panel 7, and the like.
Further, the board accessory is a movable body accessory provided on the "board". The "board" is configured to include the game board 3.

The suggestion effect performed in the "operation notification" is divided into a menu notification (timing 03) and a volume / light amount notification (timing 04). The menu notification is, for example, a liquid crystal display device 36 when a prize is not generated in the start port 34 for a predetermined time such as 5 seconds after the special symbol variation display game ends with the number of reserved balls being 0. This is a notification effect performed using the above, and is realized by displaying an image including words such as "The menu screen is displayed when the XX button is pressed!" On the liquid crystal display device 36.
Further, the volume / light amount notification is a notification effect performed by using the liquid crystal display device 36 when a prize is not generated in the upper start port 34 for a predetermined time such as 10 seconds after the execution of the menu notification. This is realized by displaying an image including words such as "The volume and amount of light can be changed by pressing the XX button!" On the liquid crystal display device 36.

The "demo" is the timing during the above-mentioned demo screen display, and can be further divided into the display of the model introduction (timing 05) and the display of the company logo (timing 06) and the display of the immersive warning (timing 07). ..

The suggestion effects executed while the "menu screen" is displayed are those executed while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08) and while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed. It is divided into those executed at (timing 09).
As shown above, the execution timing of the suggestion effect executed during "waiting for customers" can be further divided into nine types of timings 01 to 09.

The start timing of initialization (start of timing 01) can be grasped by the effect control unit 24 by receiving a power-on command from the main control unit 20. Since the effect control unit 24 knows the time required for the initialization process of the frame accessory and the time required for the initialization process of the board accessory, the timings 02 to 04 can be dealt with respectively.
Further, the demo start timing (start of timing 05) can be grasped by the effect control unit 24 by receiving a standby screen display command or a demo display command from the main control unit 20. Since the production control unit 24 knows the time required for the image production of the model introduction, the time required for the image production of the company logo, and the like for the timings 06 and 07, it is possible to deal with each of them.
While the menu screen is being displayed, a signal from the menu button as one of the effect buttons is received in response to the pressing of the button. As a result, the effect control unit 24 executes the process for displaying the menu screen on the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, the timing (timing 08, 09) during display of the first layer and the second layer of the menu screen can be grasped by the effect control unit 24.

The suggestion effect performed during "changing" is further divided into "before reach", "after reach", and "after end of reach".
As "before reach", for example, the left symbol is stopped as one of the decorative symbols at the time of winning (timing 10), low speed fluctuation (timing 11), high speed fluctuation (timing 12), which triggers the start of fluctuation. It is further classified into the first symbol stop (timing 13), the second pseudo-ream (timing 14), the third pseudo-ream (timing 15), and the fourth pseudo-ream (timing 16). In addition, although the example in which the number of pseudo-reams is 4 is given as an example, there may be a pseudo-ream after the 5th time. In that case, an effect timing capable of executing the suggestion effect is added as appropriate.

“After reach” means, for example, when the second symbol is stopped as the timing when the right symbol is stopped while the left symbol is stopped, that is, when the reach occurs (timing 17), for example, the middle symbol stops after the normal reach occurs. There is a time (timing 18) when the hit-and-miss effect is executed. Further, as "after reach", the title is being displayed after the occurrence of the first-class super reach (timing 19), the hitting effect is being executed (timing 20), and the effect is being announced (timing 20). There are timing 21), title display after the occurrence of the second type super reach (timing 22), and execution of the winning effect (timing 23).
In addition, in the first-class super reach production, a fanning production that informs whether or not the production will develop may be executed, but when the lottery is won and the production develops, the second-class supermarket is executed. Reach. That is, the first type super reach develops and the second type super reach is executed. Here, it is said that the Type 2 Super Reach has a higher expectation of winning than the Type 1 Super Reach. For example, the above-mentioned super reach 4 is a super reach type having an effect mode that develops from the first type super reach to the second type super reach.

The timing of "after the end of reach" includes a re-lottery effect (timing 24) and a stop of all symbols (timing 25), which is a timing at which the middle symbol stops while the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped.

As can be understood from the above, the execution timing of the suggestion effect executed “during fluctuation” can be further divided into 16 types of timings 10 to 25.

The timing 10 as the winning (variation start) timing before the reach can be grasped by receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command by the effect control unit 24. With respect to each of the timings 11 to 25, the effect control unit 24 determines the time-series development (effect content) based on the information included in the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, so that it can be grasped naturally. it can.

Next, each timing belonging to "big hit" will be described. The term “big hit” includes a normal jackpot game in which a transition to a normal state does not occur after a jackpot game and a probability variation jackpot game in which a transition to a probability change state occurs after a jackpot game.
The timing belonging to "big hit" is further divided into four types: "opening effect", "round", "pattern A ending", and "pattern B ending".

The "opening effect" can be divided into a jackpot notification effect (timing 26) and a right-handed instruction (notification) (timing 27).
"During a round" is divided into each round (1-7R). As an example, while the battle effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is being performed during the 1R game (timing 28), the battle is being produced during the 2R game (timing 29), and during the 3R game the battle is being produced (timing). Timing 30) and when over-winning occurs (timing 31), during 4R games during victory / defeat production (timing 32), during 5R games during short-time open V round (timing 33), during 6R games The character introduction production (timing 34) and the 7R game can be divided into the character introduction production (timing 35).

Over-winning means that more game balls win in the large winning opening 50 than the predetermined number of winnings that can be won in the large winning opening 50 in one round. .. For example, if the prescribed number of winnings in one round is 10 balls, and the 10th and 11th balls reach the vicinity of the large winning opening 50 at almost the same time with 9 balls winning, an over prize is awarded. There is a possibility.
That is, the timing 31 is a timing triggered by the occurrence of an over-winning.

The victory / defeat effect is, for example, an effect in which characters confront each other on the liquid crystal display device 36, and it is conceivable that a defeat effect is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, and a victory effect is executed in the case of a probability variation jackpot. In addition, although it is usually pretended to be a big hit, if it is a probable big hit internally, the player may be notified that the probable big hit is being played by executing the winning effect.

The V round is a specific round out of 1 to 7R, and is a round in which a specific winning opening for making a game state after a big hit game a probable change state is opened for a predetermined time by winning a game ball. .. That is, by making a game ball win a prize in a specific winning opening opened for a predetermined time during the round called the V round, it is possible to transition to the probabilistic state after the big hit game.

"Ending of pattern A" includes the mode display effect (timing 36) in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed, the warning display for forgetting to take the IC (timing 37), and the corporate logo display (timing 38). Can be divided.

In addition, "during the ending of pattern B" includes the mode display effect (timing 39) in which the transition mode after the big hit is displayed, the warning display for forgetting to remove the IC (timing 40), and the display of the immersive warning (timing 40). It can be divided into timing 41) and when the company logo is displayed (timing 42).
As described above, at the 42 types of timings indicated by the timings 01 to 42, each of the suggestion effects of the previous effects 01 to 21 can be executed. Hereinafter, a specific production mode will be described as an example.
It should be noted that the battle production and the victory / defeat production performed in each round are just examples, and it is not always necessary to perform this production. Further, the number of rounds (1 to 7R) is also an example, and may be a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot capable of playing 1 to 10R.

The effect control unit 24 can grasp the start timing of the jackpot, that is, the timing 26 as the start timing of the opening effect by receiving the jackpot start command. As for the timing 27, since the effect control unit 24 knows the time required for the jackpot notification effect, it is possible to know the arrival of the timing 27 naturally.
The timings 28 to 35 as the start timings of 1R to 7R can be grasped by receiving the round start command and the round end command from the main control unit 20 by the effect control unit 24.
For each timing (timing 36 to 38) belonging to the ending of pattern A and each timing (timing 39 to 42) belonging to the ending of pattern B, the jackpot end command is received from the main control unit 20. The effect control unit 24 can grasp.

[9-3. Production example]

FIG. 84 illustrates the relationship between 19 types of suggestive effects (effects 01 to 19) and 42 types of timing (timing 01 to 42). The circles in the figure indicate that the suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, the effect 01 can be executed at each timing of timings 02 to 09.

(Direction 01)

As a specific example of the production 01, a suggestion production using a frame accessory can be considered. For example, a set value suggestion effect in which the frame accessory vibrates is performed. The timing is set to timings 02 to 09, and is executed by the game machine 1 in the "waiting for customer" state.
The game machine 1 detects that the player touches the controls such as the buttons with respect to the game machine 1 that is "waiting for customers", and draws a lottery as to whether or not the effect 01 can be executed. When the lottery is won, the suggestion effect as the effect 01 is executed.
Here, the higher the set value Ve is set, the higher the winning probability regarding whether or not the effect 01 can be executed is set, and the player's motivation to play the game machine 1 in which the effect 01 is executed can be increased.

FIG. 85 shows a flowchart of an example of a specific processing flow.
In step S3101, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) determines whether or not the current timing is appropriate for executing the effect 01. That is, if the current situation is at any of timings 02 to 09 (in the case of S3101: Y), the process proceeds to the following step S3102, and if it is at any other timing (in the case of S3101: N), the series shown in FIG. Ends the processing of.

In step S3102, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of branching depending on whether or not the execution flag is 0. The execution flag indicates that "0" does not execute the effect 01, and "1" indicates that the effect 01 has already been executed.

Each process for the suggestion effect 01 shown in FIG. 85 can be executed at an appropriate place in, for example, the effect control main process (FIG. 41) or the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). In that case, after executing each process continuing from step S3101 shown in FIG. 85, each process continuing from step S3101 is executed again after a few msec. That is, for example, for the game machine 1 that has once transitioned to the state of waiting for customers, a series of processes shown in FIG. 85 can be executed many times during the transition from the state of waiting for customers to another state. Sex arises. If the process of FIG. 85 is executed at intervals of several msec and the lottery for whether or not to execute the effect 01 is won each time, the effect 01 will continue to be executed. Therefore, the frame of the game machine 1 The character will continue to vibrate, resulting in a suggestion effect 01 that is not appropriate for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the execution flag is "0", and if it is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3103. Perform the process to change. If the execution flag is "1" (S3102: N), the process of FIG. 85 is terminated without performing each subsequent process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect 01 as a suggestion effect from being excessively generated, and to make it appear appropriately.

Note that each process shown in FIG. 85 does not include a process of returning the execution flag to “0”. The execution flag is returned to 0, for example, when it is confirmed that the state of waiting for a customer transitions to another state. For example, when a variation pattern specification command is received from the main control unit 20, it is confirmed that the state of waiting for customers is exited. Therefore, when the command is received, the execution flag provided for the suggestion effect 01 is set. Set "0". As a result, when the state of waiting for customers is changed again, the process shown in FIG. 85 can be executed, and the effect 01 as a suggestion effect can be executed as appropriate. In other words, the effect 01 may be executed only once for each transition to the state of waiting for customers.

Although the execution flag appears in each suggestion effect described later, each suggestion effect has a different execution flag. That is, the execution flag used for the effect 01 and the execution flag used for the effect 02 are different flags.
In addition, the execution flag for the suggestion effect that is not implemented in the game machine 1 is not provided. Then, when there is only one suggestion effect mounted on the game machine 1 (for example, when the game machine 1 is capable of executing only the effect 01 as the suggestion effect), it is sufficient to have one execution flag. Needless to say, it is not necessary to consider that each production has a different execution flag.

In the subsequent step S3104, the effect control unit 24 in which the execution flag is set to 1 determines whether or not the operator that triggers the activation of the effect 01 has been operated. In the present embodiment, the operator that triggers the activation is, for example, the effect button 13.

When the operator is not operated (in the case of S3104: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 85.
Further, when the operator is operated (in the case of S3104: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve from the RAM 243 or the like in the following step S3105, and performs a lottery according to the set value Ve in the step S3106. .. The winning probability according to the set value Ve for the effect 01 is stored in the ROM 242 or the like in a state such as a table. Each table used in each of the subsequent productions is also stored in ROM 242 or the like, and the description of each table will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step S3107, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the lottery regarding whether or not the effect 01 can be executed has been won. If the selection is lost (S3107: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 85. If the player is elected (S3107: Y), the effect control unit 24 registers a scenario for vibrating the frame accessory in order to execute the effect 01 in step S3108, and executes the suggestion effect 01 shown in FIG. End the process.

As described above, once the suggestion effect as the effect 01 is executed, the lottery is not performed again until the game machine 1 is played and then the state of "waiting for customers" is entered again. The suggestion effect as 01 is not performed.
As a result, the processing load of the game machine 1 related to the lottery and the execution of the effect 01 is reduced.

It should be noted that the effect 01 is not displayed during the period as the timing 01 when the initialization process of the frame accessory is executed. This is because there is a moment when the variables and the like necessary for driving the frame accessory become inconsistent during the initialization process of the frame accessory used in the effect 01, and the frame accessory is used. This is because there is a possibility that the game machine 1 may not operate normally by performing the effect. That is, when the effect 01 is a suggestive effect such as vibrating the frame accessory, the occurrence of a defect is prevented by not executing the effect during the initialization period (timing 01) of the frame accessory. ..

(Direction 02)

As a specific example of the effect 02, a suggestion effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 can be considered. As the content of the effect, for example, an effect of displaying some score is performed, and the higher the set value Ve, the higher the score such as 100 points (out of 100 points) is displayed.

The suggestion effect as the effect 02 is executed on the game machine 1 in the "waiting for customers" state and the game machine 1 in the "before reach" state.
As an example, in the table shown in FIG. 84, the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is the volume / light amount notification (timing 04), the model introduction display (timing 05), and the company logo display in the "waiting for customers" state. While the immersive warning (Timing 06) is being displayed (Timing 07), and while the first layer of the menu screen is being displayed (Timing 08) among the states before the reach that are changing, the trigger for the start of the change It can be executed at each timing of winning a prize (timing 10), low speed fluctuation (timing 11), and high speed fluctuation (timing 12).

Since the menu notification (timing 03) is an effect executed when the starting port 34 is not won for a predetermined time such as 5 seconds when the number of reserved balls is 0, the player is a player. May be executed while the player is playing (ie, holding the launch control handle 15). In particular, when playing for a long time, there is a high possibility that the timing of menu notification will come several times during the game.
The menu notification is a production that makes the player constantly recognize that the game ball has not won a prize in the upper start port 34, and even if the suggestion production as the production 02 is performed at such a timing, the player is notified. It is not known whether it will be an effective production, and there is a risk that it will be a production that may lead to a decrease in motivation for playing. Therefore, at the timing of the menu notification, which is the timing 03, the present suggestion effect, which is the effect 02, is not performed.

Further, the volume / light amount notification (timing 04) is an effect executed when a prize is not generated in the starting port 34 for a relatively long period of time such as 15 seconds when the number of reserved balls is 0. Therefore, it is unlikely that it will be executed while the player is playing. That is, there is a high possibility that the player is taking a break from the firing operation handle 15. Therefore, by performing this suggestion effect at such a timing, the effect of returning the player to the gaming state can be expected.

When the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is performed while waiting for a customer, the effect may be executed in response to the player touching the effect button 13 or the like. It is assumed that the player suddenly touches the effect button 13 or the like of the game machine 1 while checking each machine while walking in the aisle to decide which game machine to play.
When the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is performed at such a timing, the point display on the liquid crystal display device 36 presented to the player by this suggestion effect contains an element of luck test (or test-bearing) by the player. There is. That is, the player performs an operation for generating the effect 02 on each game machine 1 on which the effect 02 is mounted, and the game machine 1 in which the point display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 has a high point is displayed. It is conceivable to start the game because it is auspicious.

In view of such a situation, while the first layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 08), the timing can be reached by the player with only one operation, so this suggestion effect is executed. It can be said that the timing is suitable for.
On the other hand, while the second layer of the menu screen is displayed (timing 09), the timing cannot be reached unless the player performs two or more operations. Therefore, the player who wants to easily generate this suggestion effect. There is a possibility that the timing is not suitable for.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect as the effect 02 is not executed at the timing 09.

An example of a specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
First, in step S3111, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 02. That is, if the current situation is any of timings 04 to 08 and 10 to 12, the process proceeds to step S3112, and if the current situation is other than that, the series of processes shown in FIG. 86 is terminated.

If there is no problem in the timing of executing the effect 02, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3112 whether or not the execution flag is 0.
The execution flag is set to "1" when the effect 02 has already been executed, and is set to "0" when the effect 02 has not been executed. The execution flags in each of the subsequent effects have the same meaning, and are set to "1" if they have been executed and "0" if they have not been executed.

When the execution flag is "1", the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 86.
On the other hand, when the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3113, acquires the set value Ve in the subsequent step S3114, and corresponds to the set value Ve in step S3115. Make a lottery. As a result, it is decided whether or not to execute the effect 02. In the lottery, not only whether or not to execute the effect 02, but also the number of points to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect 02 is executed is drawn. Which number of points is easy to win depends on the set value Ve as described above.
The winning probability and the number of points to be displayed for the effect 02 by the set value Ve are stored as a table in, for example, ROM 242.

In the following step S3116, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the previous lottery result has been won, and if it has been lost, the process ends.
If the execution lottery of the effect 02 is won, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the effect control unit 40 in step S3117.
As a result, points are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the suggestive effect as the effect 02 is realized in the game machine 1.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is arranged in chronological order from top to bottom on the drawing. The time chart describes the transition of the gaming state of the game machine 1 from the state immediately before waiting for the customer to the state immediately before waiting for the customer. In addition, the time required from the transition while waiting for a customer to the transition to each state is described. For example, when the transition is made while waiting for a customer, the waiting for the start of fluctuation is first started, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is in the symbol stop image state. After the symbol stop state continues for 15 seconds, the control for performing the operation notification is started, and an image indicating the menu notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. After a further 15 seconds, an image showing the volume / light amount notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 123 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in each state. The symbols (a) to (f) are assigned to each image, and the correspondence with each state is shown.

A specific example will be described in which the effect 02 is executed on the game machine 1 in which each image shown in FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. For example, while a symbol stop image such as the image (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, a menu notification or a volume / light amount notification such as the image (b) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. During that time, the setting value suggestion effect is not performed.
However, when the player presses the effect button 13 to display the menu screen in the state where the menu notification is performed as shown in the image (b), the set value suggestion effect is performed.

When the player presses the effect button 13 while the image (b) of FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the first layer of the menu screen as shown in the image (g) of FIG. 124 is a liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the display device 36. That is, the timing at which the image (g) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is the timing 08 shown in FIG.

In the image (g), a score of "72 points" is displayed along with a menu that the player can select using the operator. As described above, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the score is displayed.

(Direction 03)

As a specific example of the effect 03, a suggestion effect performed by using the liquid crystal display device 36 while waiting for a customer and displaying the demo screen can be considered. In the present embodiment, the timing is 05 to 07 while the demo screen is being displayed.
For example, the appearance probability of a specific image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 during the demo screen display is set to be higher as the set value Ve is higher. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to play the game machine 1 based on whether or not the specific image effect appears.
In particular, since the image effect is executed by using the liquid crystal display device 36 while the demo screen is displayed, even the game machine 1 that is not playing can motivate the player to play, so that the seat becomes vacant. The number of game machines 1 can be reduced, and the operating rate of the game machine 1 can be increased.

Further, the effect having such a setting difference may be produced after the decorative symbol variation display game is played a predetermined number of times after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. Specifically, the image effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve until the end of the 500 decorative symbol variation display game, and the demo screen display state after the end of the 500 decorative symbol variation display game. When the transition to is performed, the image effect having a different appearance rate may be executed according to the set value Ve. Further, it may be configured so that the specific image effect does not appear until the end of the 500 decorative symbol variation display game.
With such a configuration, even if the game machine 1 is left unattended after being played for a certain period of time (after the decorative symbol variation display game is executed at least 500 times or more), the game machine 1 is said to be displayed during the demo screen display. By executing the image production, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game, and the game machine 1 can be returned to the operation again.

An example of a specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 87.
FIG. 87 is an example (S2130f) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106) of FIG. 43, and specifically, is executed in response to receiving a demo display command from the main control unit 20. It is a thing.
Specifically, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of setting the execution flag to "1" in step S3121. This execution flag is provided separately from the execution flag in each of the above-mentioned effects. The same execution flag is used in each of the subsequent effects (each effect after effect 04), but the flags are different for each effect.
Although not shown in FIG. 87, the execution flag for the effect 03 is written back to "0" at the timing when the demo screen display ends. Specifically, the flag is written back to "0" when the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36 by winning a game ball in the upper start port 34.

Subsequently, in step S3122, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the special symbol variation display game executed after the power is turned on is 500 times or more. When the special symbol variation display game executed after the power is turned on is less than 500 times, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying the normal demo screen in step S3127 to the liquid crystal control unit 40. As a result, a normal demo screen that is not a suggestive effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display game is 500 times or more, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3123, and draws a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3124. In the lottery process, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability is set.

Next, in step S3125, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the previous lottery has been won, and if so, in step S3126, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a command for displaying the demo screen as effect 03. Do for 40. On the other hand, if the lottery has been lost, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying a normal demo screen in step S3127.

By performing the above processing, one of the demo screens is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player visually recognizes the type of the demo screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to obtain the set value Ve. Estimation is possible.

(Direction 04)

As a specific example of the effect 04, it is a suggestion effect generated at the time of winning the game ball (timing 10), and is an effect of operating a movable body accessory. Also, among the winning times, it is executed only at the time of winning, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on. In addition, the effect type is "set value change suggestion effect".
That is, the player plays the game machine 1 in which the decorative symbol variation display game has never been played after the opening of the hall, and confirms whether or not the effect 04 occurs, so that the set value Ve of the previous day is set. It can be inferred whether the set value Ve has been changed to the new set value Ve or whether the set value Ve of the previous day has been left unchanged.

By making such an effect 04 feasible, it is possible to create a situation in which even the game machine 1 having a low pre-sunrise ball rate can be easily selected as a game target. That is, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine 1.

It should be noted that the effect 04 may be configured to always occur at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game (that is, at the time of the first winning) after the set value Ve is changed.
Further, for example, when the setting value 4 is changed to the setting value 4, the effect 04 may be configured to be executed, or the effect 04 may not be executed because the set value Ve is the same. You may be.
Further, as a configuration opposite to the above-described configuration, the effect 04 is configured to occur at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after the power is turned on without changing the set value Ve. May be good.
It should be noted that the effect 04 may be executed by treating the button as a vibrable movable body accessory and vibrating the button.

An example of a specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 88. As an example only, a process (S2130b) for displaying the effect 04 is executed when the effect control unit 24 receives the decorative symbol designation command from the main control unit 20.
In this example, a process for executing the effect 04 is added to a process (FIG. 43C) executed when the effect control unit 24 receives the decorative symbol designation command. Therefore, the details described with reference to FIG. 43C will be omitted in order to avoid duplication.
By executing steps S2132 to S2136, the effect control unit 24 confirms the reception of the variation pattern designation command, registers the scenario for correcting the origin of the accessory, sets the symbol variation flag, changes start processing, and deletes the variation pattern specification command. I do.

Subsequently, in step S3131, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the special symbol variation display game is the first variation after the power is turned on.
In the case of the first fluctuation after the power is turned on (in the case of S3131: Y), the effect control unit 24 registers a scenario for executing the effect 04 for operating the movable body accessory in the following step S3132.
On the other hand, if it is not the first fluctuation after the power is turned on (in the case of S3131: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 88.

(Direction 05)

As a specific example of the effect 05, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 and a sound effect using the sound generator 46a are executed. At each of the timings 10 to 13 that are considered to be before the reach, for example, in a conversation between characters appearing in the image production executed by the game machine 1, a specific line for suggestive production is changed from a normal line with a predetermined probability. The suggestion effect changed to is executed. The predetermined probability may be different depending on the set value Ve (that is, the higher the set value, the higher the predetermined probability), or may be the same probability regardless of the set value Ve. If the probabilities are the same, it may be a suggestion effect in which the content of the dialogue changes depending on the set value Ve.

Decorative symbol variation display Each time the game starts, it is determined whether or not to perform the effect 05, and by appropriately executing the effect 05 according to the determination result, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to continue the game of the game machine 1. Can be provided to the player.

An example of a specific processing content is shown in FIG.
In step S3141, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 05, that is, whether or not any of the timings 10 to 13 is applicable.
When it is determined that the timing is not appropriate (S3141: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 89. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing is appropriate (S3141: Y), the effect control unit 24 confirms whether the execution flag is "0" in step S3142, and if the execution flag is not "0", performs processing. finish.
When the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3143, and draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the effect 05 in the following step S3144. In this example, the effect 05 as a suggestion effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

Subsequently, in step S3145, the effect control unit 24 branches the process depending on whether or not the lottery has been won. If the selection is lost, the effect control unit 24 ends each process shown in FIG. 89, and if the effect is won, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3146 and sets the set value Ve in step S3147. Make a conversation selection according to your needs. In conversation selection, one is selected from a plurality of conversations having different selection probabilities according to the set value Ve. For example, three types of conversations 1, conversation 2, and conversation 3 are prepared as a plurality of conversations, and conversations 1 to 3 are selected with a probability of 65%, 30%, and 5%, respectively, at the setting value 1. With the setting value 6, conversations 1 to 3 are selected with a probability of 10%, 15%, and 75%, respectively.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the setting value 6 is highly likely when the conversation 3 can be visually recognized, and the set value 1 can be recognized when the conversation 1 can be visually recognized. You can recognize that it is likely.

(Direction 06)

As a specific example of the effect 06, a suggestion effect is performed using a light display device 45a such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device at each timing (timing 10 to 25) during fluctuation. Specifically, the effect is produced by lighting the light display device 45a for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the emission color is changed according to the set value Ve. The emission color may be uniquely determined by the set value Ve, or the emission color that is easily selected may differ depending on the set value Ve.
Further, when the game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of light sources such as LEDs as the light display device 45a, the light source used for the effect may be changed depending on the set value Ve, and different light sources may be used for the effect depending on the set value Ve. It may be configured for ease of use.
Further, not only the light source used for the effect may be changed by the set value Ve from the various LEDs provided as the light display device 45a, but also the emission color thereof may be changed.

Further, the above-mentioned constant time may be changed depending on the set value Ve. In addition, the light emission effect may be configured to be performed at a plurality of timings out of the timings 10 to 25 during one variation, and the number of effects during one variation may be changed depending on the set value Ve. Specifically, in the case of the set value 1, the light emission effect is likely to be performed at 1 to 3 of the timings 10 to 25, and in the case of the set value 6, 6 to 8 of the timings 10 to 25. It is configured so that the light emission effect can be easily performed at the timing of. Of course, the effect may be a combination of the above-mentioned emission colors and the number of light display devices 45a used for the effect.

As a result, the higher the setting value, the higher the expectation that the more light emission effects are performed during one fluctuation. Therefore, even if an effect with a low degree of expectation is being executed during the fluctuation, the player can continue the game without losing interest when the suggested effect as the effect 06 appears.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In some cases, the same processing as in each of the previous production examples will be omitted in detail.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3151 whether or not the timing is suitable for executing the effect 06, and determines in step S3152 whether or not the execution flag is “0”.
When it is determined that the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3153, acquires the set value Ve in step S3154, and sets the set value in step S3155. A lottery will be held according to the Ve.

In this lottery, it is determined which light source is used and what display mode (lighting pattern such as blinking once or blinking twice) is adopted based on the set value Ve.
In the lottery, there may be a lottery result that none of the light sources is turned on (= lost).

Subsequently, in step S3156, the effect control unit 24 branches based on the winning of the lottery result, and in the case of winning, the scenario registration for performing the light effect is executed in step S3157.
By such a process, the effect 06 as a suggestion effect is executed.
The execution flag changed to "1" in step S3153 is cleared to "0" when the timing is completed. For example, when the effect 06 is executed at the timing 10 which is the timing of winning (variation start) and the execution flag is changed to "1", the period as the timing 10 ends and the next phase (for example, timing 11). The execution flag is returned to "0" when transitioning to. As a result, the effect 06 can be executed again at the timing 11.

(Direction 07)

As a specific example of the effect 07, the timing (timing 13) of the first decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right that are stopped and displayed in a specific area on the liquid crystal display device 36. , The type of the stopped decorative symbol corresponds to the set value Ve at any of the timings of the second and third pseudo-reams (timing 14, 15) and the timing when the second decorative symbol stops (timing 16). The suggestion production is performed.
For example, when the set value is 6, there is another probability that the reach effect (reach variation pattern) in which both the first stopped decorative symbol and the second stopped decorative symbol are 6 is executed. It is higher than the set value (1 to 5).

In addition, although the reach effect is not executed (that is, through the normal fluctuation pattern), in a state where all three decorative symbols are stopped, a specific order (for example, the left symbol is 1, the middle symbol is 2, and the right symbol is 3) is imitated. The suggestion effect may be performed by making the appearance rate of the decorative pattern) different depending on the set value Ve.
Even if the result of the reach effect deviates, if the stop mode is expected to be a high set value, the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, when all the decorative symbols are stopped and become a big hit through the reach effect, the appearance rate of the decorative symbols that became a big hit may be different according to the set value Ve. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that three decorative symbols imitating 6 will be a big hit.
Even if the hit type is unwilling for the player, if the stop mode is expected to be a high set value, the player's willingness to play can be not impaired.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Note that FIG. 91 is an example (S2130b) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106).
First, the effect control unit 24 executes each process of steps S2132 to S2134. These processes have already been described and will not be described in detail.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161 and executes the fluctuation start process in the subsequent step S3162.

The fluctuation start processing in this example is performed based on the set value Ve. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the set value Ve (that is, it is determined whether or not the setting value suggestion is included in the fluctuation pattern), and when it is determined to be included, it is based on the set value Ve. The variation pattern lottery is performed, and processing for starting the variation pattern selected as a result of the lottery (registration of a scenario, command transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc.) is performed.
As a result, for example, when the reach effect is executed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the set value Ve is tempered. Further, when displaying the state in which the three decorative symbols are aligned in order to notify the jackpot, the decorative symbols corresponding to the set value Ve are stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the lottery of the fluctuation pattern using the set value Ve is not always performed at the time of the reach effect and the big hit notification effect. Therefore, a part of the reach effect and the jackpot notification effect is a lottery of a variation pattern that does not depend on the set value Ve. In this case, the lottery of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command received from the main control unit 20 without using the set value Ve.

Subsequently, in step S2136, the effect control unit 24 deletes the variation pattern designation command, and ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 91.

(Direction 08)

As a specific example of the effect 08, in the "normal variation 4s", which is the shortest effect among the out-of-range fluctuation patterns, the higher the set value, the more likely the number of the stopped decorative symbol becomes a larger number. The fluctuation pattern of "normal fluctuation 4s" is taken as one aspect of the suggestion effect.
In addition, the decorative design according to the set value Ve can be easily stopped. Specifically, if the set value is 3, the decorative pattern imitating 3 is likely to stop.

Further, in the variation pattern of the out-of-order via the normal reach, the same decorative pattern may be easily stopped.
Examples of the execution timing of the suggestion effect include the time when the second symbol is stopped (timing 17) and the time when the normal reach is generated (timing 18).

In the effect 08, a feeling of expectation of a high set value can be obtained depending on the mode of the decorative symbol that stops even if the variation pattern is out of the way, and it is possible to prevent the attenuation of the motivation to play.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. The description of each process of steps S2132 to S2134 will be omitted.
The effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161 and performs the fluctuation start process in the subsequent step S3162.
In the fluctuation start processing, when the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation 4s" that does not include the reach effect, the decoration stop symbol is determined according to the set value Ve, and the scenario registration and the liquid crystal control unit 40 corresponding to the determination value Ve. A command is sent to.
As a result, the decorative symbol selected according to the set value Ve is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player can estimate the set value Ve.

(Direction 09)

As a specific example of the production 09, during the title display of the first type super reach (timing 19) and the title display of the second type super reach (timing 22), the liquid crystal display device 36 has a Danger pattern as one of the title images. When a special image (an image having a high expected value) such as the above is displayed, the winning probability of the jackpot differs depending on the set value Ve.
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36, but also the sound generator 46a, the light display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestion effect.
For example, the higher the set value Ve, the lower the winning probability after the suggestion effect appears.

Further, although the jackpot winning probability is the same for the set values 2 to 6, the jackpot winning probability may be 100% for the set value 1. That is, if a special image such as a Danger pattern is displayed as a title image but is not a big hit but a miss, the player may lose the motivation to play, but according to this configuration, at least the most. Since the possibility that the set value 1 is disadvantageous to the player disappears, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play and improve the motivation to play. That is, it is possible to increase the motivation to play regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a miss.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 91. The description of each process of steps S2132 to S2134 and S2136 will be omitted.
The effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3161, and then executes the fluctuation start process based on the set value Ve in step S3162.
In the fluctuation start process, a lottery of the effect mode according to the set value Ve is performed.
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is "missing", for example, the lottery is performed so that the title of the Danger pattern is not displayed and the title is displayed in another mode.
Further, when the set value Ve is 6 and the big hit lottery result is "missing", a lottery having a possibility that the title display of the Danger pattern is selected is performed.

For example, it can be realized by using a table as shown in FIG. 92. For the first type super reach, for example, three types of title screens of title 1, title 2, and title 3 (danger pattern) are prepared. Title 2 is more reliable than title 1 (the possibility of winning the big hit lottery), and title 3 is more reliable than title 2.

FIG. 92 shows the distribution probabilities of titles 1, 2, and 3 when the big hit lottery is missed and the first type super reach is executed (when the lottery for whether or not to execute the first type super reach is won). Is shown. Specifically, the numerical value of the numerator when the denominator is 65536 is described, and it is said that 45536 described in the column of the setting value Ve = 1 and the title 1 will appear with a probability of 45536/65536. Shown. Further, the rightmost column is the appearance rate of the title 3, and is calculated in consideration of the probability of winning each jackpot according to the set value Ve, the probability of appearance of the first type super reach, and the like. For example, if the set value is Ve = 2, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery, winning the execution of the first type super reach, and winning the title 3 in which the Danger pattern appears is 1.5e-6 (1.5e-6 ( It is said to be 1.5 × 10 ^ -6).

As can be understood from FIG. 92, the reliability (expectation of winning the big hit lottery) when the title 3 including the Danger pattern appears on the liquid crystal display device 36 as the first type super reach is higher than the set value 6. The set value 1 is higher.
That is, as described above, at the setting value 1, when a special image such as a Danger pattern is displayed as the title image, the jackpot confirmation effect is obtained, and at the setting value 6, the same effect is not the jackpot confirmation effect.

(Direction 10)

As a specific example of the effect 10, the appearance rate of a specific reach (for example, a first-class super reach or a second-class super reach) differs depending on the value of the set value Ve.
The production timing is defined as the timing related to the first type super reach (timing 19 to 21) and the timing related to the second type super reach (timing 22 and 23).
Not only the liquid crystal display device 36 but also the sound generator 46a, the light display device 45a, and the like are used for this suggestion effect.

For example, at least one of a plurality of reach modes as the first type super reach has different appearance rates depending on the odd / even number of the set value Ve. Further, the more the super reach appears continuously, the higher the possibility that the set value is high.
As a result, even if the super reach appears but deviates, the continuous appearance raises the expectation of a high set value, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation for playing.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. 93. Note that FIG. 93 is an example (S2130b) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106).
The effect control unit 24 executes each process of steps S2132 to S2134. Details of each process are omitted. Subsequently, in step S3171, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the special symbol variation display game to be played is the first-class super reach. This information can be obtained by analyzing the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20.

In the case of the first type super reach (in the case of S3171: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3172, and determines whether or not the set value Ve is an even number in the subsequent step S3173.
If the number is even (S3172: Y), the effect control unit 24 selects an even number table (step S3174). If the number is odd (S3172: N), the effect control unit 24 selects an odd number table (step S3175).

Next, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery for determining the effect mode (variation mode) based on each table in step S3176, and starts the variation in step S3177 based on the effect mode selected as a result of the lottery. Specifically, a process of transmitting a command for executing the decorative symbol variation display game to the liquid crystal control unit 40, a process of registering a scenario for performing each effect using the speaker 46, the light display device 45a, etc. Is executed in step S3177.

Further, in step S3171, when the special symbol variation display game to be played is not the first type super reach (in the case of S3171: N), the effect control unit 24 performs processing or lottery according to the variation mode to be executed in step S3178. Then, the fluctuation is started in step S3177.

After starting the variation, the effect control unit 24 executes the deletion process of the variation pattern designation command in step S2136.

In this way, by selecting different tables according to the even / odd number of the set value Ve (steps S3174 and S3175), it is possible to make the variation mode that is likely to appear in the even number and the variation mode that is likely to appear in the odd number different. .. As a result, the player can estimate the set value Ve through the behavior of the game machine 1.

(Direction 11)

As a specific example of the effect 11, a suggestion effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect button 13 during the execution of the hit-and-miss effect in the second type super reach. For example, when the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image instructing the pressing of the effect button 13 as one of the hit-and-miss effects, an image to be displayed depending on whether the fanning effect also serves as a suggestion effect or not. (For example, the wording for instructing the button press to be different).
The fanning effect as a suggestion effect is configured so that, for example, the probability of a probability variation jackpot is 100% and it appears only at the set value 6.

In this case, the appearance of the fanning effect as a suggestive effect ensures that the player has won a big hit such as the probability variation 10R, and also confirms that the set value Ve is 6, which is the maximum set value. It is possible to significantly improve the motivation to play.
Note that the "fixed" setting value here does not mean that what was internally indefinite in the game machine 1 is fixed at this moment, but is fixed as a value that already exists inside the game machine 1. It means that the set value Ve that has been set becomes clear to the player, and that the set value Ve that has been estimated for the player is fixed. Further, not only when the expected set value Ve is narrowed down to one number, but also when it is narrowed down to a value other than a specific number, it is described as "confirmed". Specifically, it is used as "determined to be an odd number" or "determined to be 2 or more". The same meaning is used when the word "confirmed" is used in the following description.

It is not essential to determine that the set value is 6, for example, a configuration in which it is determined that the set value is any of 4 to 6 or a configuration in which it is determined that the set value is not 1. It is also possible to do. In addition, even if it is not fixed, it may be an effect suggesting that a high setting value is rich.

Specifically, an example of executing an effect of displaying dialogue on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a hit-and-miss effect will be described with reference to FIG. 94.
FIG. 94A is a table showing lines 1 to 4 that can be selected for each of the set values Ve. When the set value Ve is 1, either serif 1 or serif 3 is selected and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, when the set value Ve is 2, the dialogue 1 is selected (that is, the dialogues 2 to 4 are not displayed).

Since the dialogue 1 is selected regardless of the set value Ve, it does not serve as a suggestive effect. The dialogue 2 can be selected only when the set value Ve is 6, and when the effect is selected, it is determined that the set value Ve is 6.
The dialogue 3 can be selected when the set value Ve is 1, 3, 5, and it is determined that the set value Ve is an odd number. Further, the dialogue 4 can be selected when the set value Ve is 4, 5 or 6, and it is determined that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 94B. The above-mentioned processing will be omitted in detail as appropriate.
The effect control unit 24 determines in step S3181 whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 11, and in the subsequent step S3182, determines whether or not the execution flag is “0”.
When the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 11 and the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3183 and sets the value in step S3184. Ve is acquired, and in the subsequent step S3185, branch processing according to the set value Ve is performed.

When the set value Ve is 1 or 3, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the dialogue 1 and the dialogue 3 in step S3186. At this time, the dialogue 3 may be configured to be less likely to be selected (that is, the selection probability is lower) than the dialogue 1.
When the set value Ve is 2, the effect control unit 24 selects the dialogue 1 in step S3187.
When the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the lines 1 and 4 in step S3188.
When the set value Ve is 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the lines 1, 3 and 4 in step S3189.
When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the lines 1, 2, and 4 in step S3190.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3191.

(Direction 12)

As a specific example of the effect 12, the liquid crystal display device 36 is used to perform a suggestion effect at the time of the re-lottery effect (timing 24) after winning the big hit. At this time, the appearance probability of the decorative symbol before the re-lottery and the appearance probability of the decorative symbol after the re-lottery are different depending on the set value Ve.
For example, as a re-lottery effect, a "probability change jackpot" that transitions from a state in which decorative symbols (for example, 2, 4, 6, 8) indicating "normal jackpot" that do not transition to the probability change state after the jackpot ends to a probability change state after the jackpot ends. When the image is changed to a decorative symbol (for example, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9) indicating ", if the set value Ve of the game machine 1 is 1, the probability of changing to the decorative symbol of 1 is increased. If the set value Ve is 6, the probability of changing to the decorative symbol of 7 is increased.

In such a game machine 1, even when the game machine 1 is promoted to a "probability change jackpot" through a re-lottery effect, the player may be happy with the case of changing to the decorative pattern of 1 or the case of changing to the decorative pattern of 7. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly interesting production of the game.

A specific processing example will be described with reference to FIG. 95. Note that FIG. 95 is an example (S2130b) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106).
After executing each process of steps S2132, S2133, and S2134, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of drawing a variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the hit type and the variation pattern in step S3201.
By the time the process of step S3201 is executed, the effect control unit 24 has received the decorative symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command from the main control unit 20. Therefore, as described above, the effect control unit 24 has already acquired information on the hit type (different from the loss, normal 4R, probability variation 10R, etc.) and the fluctuation pattern (other than normal 4s, super reach 1, etc.). In step S3201, this information is used to draw a lottery as to what mode of the decorative symbol variation display game is to be played on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Subsequently, in step S3202, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the variation mode selected as a result of the lottery of the previous variation mode includes the re-lottery. In the variation mode in which the re-lottery is not executed, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of starting the variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable mode in which the re-lottery is executed, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3203, and executes the process according to the set value Ve in the subsequent step S3204. Specifically, a lottery process for a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed to the player before the re-lottery and a decorative symbol to be presented to the player after the re-lottery is performed according to the set value Ve.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 96.
FIG. 96 is an example of a table used for a lottery of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed to the player via the liquid crystal display device 36. The re-lottery effect includes an effect mode in which the display on the liquid crystal display device 36 is changed from a decorative pattern indicating "normal jackpot" as a promotion success pattern to a decorative symbol indicating "probability change jackpot", and a "normal" promotion failure pattern. There is an effect mode in which the same "normal jackpot" decorative symbol is displayed again from the decorative symbol indicating "big hit". FIG. 96 is a table referenced when executing the promotion success pattern. The numerical value in the figure shows the selection probability of each decorative symbol, and the unit is%.

As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol is selected according to the set value Ve. For example, when the set value Ve is 1, the probability that "2" is selected is 60%, the probability that "4" is selected is 20%, and "6" is selected as the decorative symbol before the re-lottery. The probability is 10% and the probability that "8" is selected is 10%. Further, as the decorative symbol after the re-lottery when the set value Ve is 1, the probability that "1" is selected is 70%, the probability that "3" is selected is 10%, and "5" is selected. The probability is 10%, the probability that "7" is selected is 5%, and the probability that "9" is selected is 5%.
That is, when the set value Ve is 1, and when the promotion success pattern appears as the re-lottery effect, the effect mode in which the decorative symbol "2" is changed to "1" is most likely to be selected.
As can be understood from FIG. 96, the decorative symbols that are easily selected before and after the re-lottery differ depending on the set value Ve.

Returning to the description of FIG. 95.
The effect control unit 24, which has completed the lottery of the decorative symbols according to the set value Ve, performs a process of starting the variation in step S3205, and deletes the variation pattern designation command in step S2136. In the process of starting the variation, as described above, in order to transmit a command for executing the decorative symbol variation display game to the liquid crystal control unit 40, and to perform each effect using the speaker 46, the light display device 45a, and the like. Execute the process of registering the scenario of.

(Direction 13)

As a specific example of the effect 13, the liquid crystal display device 36 is used to perform a suggestion effect for the player to operate two controls (for example, two effect buttons including the effect button 13).
For example, as shown in FIG. 97A, after a word such as "W device chance!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image 1), two operators to be operated by the player as shown in FIG. 97B are simulated. An image (image 2) containing the icon image and a wording that induces an operation such as "press at the same time!" Is displayed.
Subsequently, the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (FIGS. 98A and 98B). When the jackpot lottery is won, the same decorative symbols (7 decorative symbols in the drawing) are available as shown in FIG. 98A. Will be notified. On the other hand, when the big hit lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. 98B, the loss is notified because the decorative symbols are not aligned.

After being notified of the loss as shown in FIG. 98B, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the image shown in FIG. 99A or FIG. 99B.
The image shown in FIG. 99A is, for example, an image in which the set value Ve is displayed in any of 1 to 6, and is an image selected with a high probability. On the other hand, the image shown in FIG. 99B is an image displayed with a low probability when, for example, the set value Ve is 6, and a specific character image (UFO character image in the figure) is added to the image shown in FIG. 99A. It is said to be an image. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 99A is always displayed when the set value Ve is 1 to 5, and the image shown in FIG. 99A or FIG. 99B is displayed only when the set value Ve is 6. Has been done.
When the image shown in FIG. 99B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can grasp that the set value Ve is 6, which is the maximum value.

In FIG. 99B, the speaker icon is shown together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. This indicates that when the image effect shown in FIG. 99B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is also performed at the same time. That is, the player can enjoy the production not only visually but also by hearing.
Then, even a player who misses the image effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 36 can notice the suggestion effect by performing the sound effect using the sound generator 46a such as a speaker.

The image (FIG. 99B) used for the final effect of the set value 6 is presented to the player when the big hit lottery is missed (that is, the timing 25 when all the symbols are stopped), so that the big hit lottery is missed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play and to improve the motivation to play, and it is possible to realize a production with a high degree of interest in the game.

A specific processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 100.
In step S3211, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for the execution of the effect 13. That is, it branches depending on whether or not the present is when all symbols are stopped (timing 25).

When the timing is not appropriate for executing the effect 13, the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 100. On the other hand, when the timing is appropriate, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is "0" in the following step S3212. When the execution flag is not "0", that is, when it is "1", the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 100.
When the execution flag is "0", that is, when the effect 13 is not being executed, the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3213, and acquires the set value Ve in step S3214.

Subsequently, in step S3215, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery of the effect mode according to the set value Ve and the winning information of the big hit lottery. In this lottery, whether or not to execute the decorative symbol variation display game using each image shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 is drawn, and when the lottery is executed, any image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Lottery to let them do it.
As a result of the lottery, when the effect of not using the images shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 is executed, the liquid crystal display device 36 ends without performing the subsequent processes shown in FIG. 100.

When performing an effect using each of the images shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the effect control unit 24 displays FIG. 97A (image 1) and FIG. 97B (image 2) on the liquid crystal display device 36 in order in step S3216. Command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.

Subsequently, in step S3217, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the player has been operated based on the image 2. That is, it branches based on whether or not the player operates the operator displayed as an icon image on the liquid crystal display device 36.
When the operator is operated, the liquid crystal display device 36 proceeds to the process of step S3219. Further, when the operator is not operated, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3218 whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 s) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control unit 24 re-executes the process of step S3217. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect control unit 24 proceeds to the process of step S3219.
That is, the effect control unit 24 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S3217 and S3218 until the player operates the operator or the predetermined time elapses.

In step S3219, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. The winning information can be obtained from the command received from the main control unit 20.
When the jackpot lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 98A (image 3) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3220.

When the big hit lottery is lost, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 98B (image 4) on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S3221 to the liquid crystal control unit 40, and the character image in the subsequent step S3222. It is determined whether or not to display (UFO icon image). Whether or not to display the character image has already been determined by the lottery in step S3215.

When the character image is not displayed, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 99A (image 5) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3223.
On the other hand, when displaying a character image, the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying FIG. 99B (image 6) on the liquid crystal display device 36 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3224.

The effect of displaying the images 5 and 6 on the liquid crystal display device 36 is regarded as a suggestive effect. That is, the player can estimate the set value Ve of the game machine 1 from the appearance ratio of the image 5 and the image 6 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the big hit lottery is lost.

(Direction 14)

As a specific example of the effect 14, a suggestion effect such as blinking the logo of the game machine 1 when all the symbols of the decorative symbol variation display game are stopped (timing 25) is performed.
More specifically, after the cumulative number of rotations after the power is turned on (the number of decorative symbol variation display games played after the power is turned on) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2000 times), there is a response to a predetermined opportunity. When all the symbols of the decorative symbol variation display game are stopped (timing 25) a specific number of times (for example, 20 times), a suggestion effect such as blinking the logo of the game machine 1 is performed. Then, after that, the same suggestion effect can be executed periodically (for example, for every 100 decorative symbol variation display games) for a predetermined period (for example, during 20 decorative symbol variation display games). A predetermined period (between 20 decorative symbol variation display games) in which the suggestion effect may be performed is described as the suggestion effect period.

It is an effect that denies that the set value Ve is 1 while blinking at least once in each suggestion effect period. That is, there is a possibility that the set value Ve is 1 when the suggestion effect of blinking the logo or the like does not occur even once in a certain suggestion effect period.
Since the player thinks that the set value Ve may not be 1 while blinking once in each suggestion effect period up to that point, performing the suggestion effect causes the player to continue the game. Can be the reason for.

Further, when the suggestion effect is performed twice in any of the above-mentioned suggestion effect periods (for example, when the suggestion effect is performed twice during the 20 decorative symbol variation display games in a certain suggestion effect period). Is configured to determine that the set value Ve is 2 or more. In this case, the player's willingness to play can be improved by the appearance of the suggestion effect twice in one suggestion effect period.

The predetermined trigger may be at the start of a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation display games, at the end of the game, or after a specific effect has been performed.
Further, as an example of using an optical display device 45a such as a decorative lamp 45 as the effect means, a sound effect using the sound generator 46a may be substituted, or an effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 may be used. It may be performed, or it may be an effect of operating a movable body accessory.

Further, the total number of out balls may be used instead of the cumulative number of revolutions after the power is turned on. According to this, in the game machine 1 in which the game balls are not so many prizes in each winning opening and the number of prize balls is small and the player is likely to stop the game, the game machine 1 is said to be at an earlier timing than the other game machines 1. With the arrival of a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the possibility of suppressing a decrease in the motivation for playing the game machine 1.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 101.
In step S3231, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not it is appropriate as the timing to execute the effect 14, and in the subsequent step S3232, determines whether or not the execution flag is “0”.
If the timing of execution is inappropriate or the execution flag is not "0", the effect control unit 24 ends the process shown in FIG. 101.

In step S3233, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of changing the execution flag to “1”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect 14 as a suggestion effect from being executed many times at the same timing.

The effect control unit 24 branches in step S3234 depending on whether or not the cumulative number of rotations is 2000 or more. If it is less than 2000 times, the effect control unit 24 ends each process shown in FIG. 101. When the cumulative rotation speed is 2000 or more, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3235 whether or not the last two digits of the cumulative rotation speed are less than 20. "%" In the figure indicates the remainder operator. That is, the formula of "cumulative rotation speed% 100" represents a formula for obtaining the remainder obtained by dividing the cumulative rotation speed by 100.

When the last two digits are 20 or more, the effect control unit 24 ends the suggestion effect 14 execution process without executing the subsequent processes.
If the last two digits are less than 20, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3236 whether or not the last two digits of the cumulative rotation speed are "00", and if it is "00", the effect count is 0. Is performed (step S3237).
In the effect 14, the suggestion effect can be executed at 20 rotations (2000 to 2019 times) after the cumulative number of rotations reaches 2000 times or more. Further, after that, every time the last two digits become "00", the suggestion effect can be executed during the subsequent 20 rotations. At this time, in one set of the suggestion effect execution period of 20 rotations, the number of times the suggestion effect is performed is changed according to the set value Ve. The number of times in which "0" is set in step S3237 is a variable indicating how many times the suggestion effect has been performed in one set of the suggestion effect enablement period, and the last two digits of the cumulative number of rotations are "00". It is reset to "0" every time.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3238, and draws lots for whether or not the effect 14 can be executed in step S3239 based on the number of effects and the set value Ve.
An example of the table used for the lottery is shown in FIG. 102.
The unit of the numerical value in the figure is "%", and indicates the probability (that is, the winning probability) that the effect 14 as the suggestion effect is executed.
For example, when the set value Ve is 1 and the number of times of effect is "0", that is, when the effect 14 is not yet executed in the suggested effect enableable period, the effect 14 is executed with a probability of 2%. Further, when the set value Ve is 1 and the number of times of production is 1 to 19, the winning probability is 0%. That is, the effect 14 is executed at most once during one set of the suggestion effect execution period. Therefore, when the effect 14 is executed a plurality of times during one set, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more.

As can be seen from FIG. 102, the higher the set value Ve, the easier it is for the effect 14 to be executed. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value Ve from the appearance frequency of the effect 14.

Return to FIG. 101. The effect control unit 24 branches in step S3240 depending on whether or not the effect 14 is executed, that is, whether or not the lottery in step S3239 is won.
If the selection is lost, the effect control unit 24 ends the suggestion effect 14 execution process of FIG. 101.
If the product is won, the effect control unit 24 adds 1 to the number of effects in step S3241, sends a command for effect 14 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3242, and registers a scenario for effect 14 in step S3243. I do.

(Direction 15)

As a specific example of the effect 15, it is a suggestion effect to be performed when an over-winning occurs during each round game (timing 28 to 35) during the big hit.
For example, when an over-winning occurs in each round, an unusual sound effect is performed. The higher the set value of the game machine 1, the higher the probability that different sound effects will be produced. Further, when the different effects are executed in the round 4 and the round 5, the setting 2 or more is confirmed.

By implementing such an effect 15 on the game machine 1, the player can play with a sense of expectation as to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed even during a normal big hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game machine 1 having a high degree of interest in the game.

In addition, instead of the sound effect, the light effect using the light display device 45a may be performed.

Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 103A. Note that FIG. 103A is an example (S2130 g) of each command process (S2130) in the command correspondence process (S2106), and is executed in response to the effect control unit 24 receiving the large winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20. This is an example of the processing to be performed. Further, in FIG. 103A, the processing other than the processing related to the effect 15 as the suggestion effect is omitted.
First, the effect control unit 24 executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 103A by receiving a large winning opening winning command from the main control unit 20. This command is issued from the main control unit 20 in response to the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 50 which is opened for a predetermined time in each round game in the big hit game.
In step S3251, the effect control unit 24 that has received the command performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize counter. This counter is a variable for counting the number of game balls that have won the grand prize opening 50 during each round game, and is cleared to "0" when each round game is started.

Subsequently, in step S3252, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the large winning counter is a value larger than the upper limit of winning. The maximum number of winning balls is the maximum number of winning balls allowed in one round, and when the number of winning balls reaches that number, the large winning opening 50 is closed. However, there is a slight error between the timing when the maximum number of winning balls reaches the maximum number and the timing when the large winning opening 50 is closed. When a prize is won in the mouth 50, more prize balls than the maximum number may be allowed (so-called over prize).
In step S3252, it is determined whether or not the winning balls related to the received command this time are more winning balls than the upper limit number.

If the winning of the large winning opening 50 this time is an over winning (in the case of S3252: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3253, and whether or not to execute the effect 15 in the following step S3254. Lottery.
In this lottery process, the winning probability is changed according to the set value Ve. For example, a lottery is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 103B. In this example, as shown in FIG. 103B, in the first round, the setting value 1 has a 10% probability of generating a special sound effect, and the setting value 6 has a 60% probability of generating a special sound effect. ..
Further, in the 4th and 5th rounds, the winning probability of the set value 1 is 0%, and when the effect 15 occurs, the set value 2 or more is confirmed.

The effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery is won in step S3255. When executing the effect 15, the effect control unit 24 registers a scenario for outputting a special sound in step S3256.
On the other hand, if the winner is lost (S3255: N), or if the current prize is not an over prize (S3252: N), the effect control unit 24 registers a scenario for outputting a normal sound in step S3257. ..

In the above example, the production control unit 24 also manages the number of winning balls during the round, but the main control is the large winning opening winning command in a state where the information indicating the number of winning balls is included. The effect control unit 24 may be configured to receive from the unit 20. In that case, the large winning counter held by the effect control unit 24 becomes unnecessary, and only the value of the upper limit of winning needs to be held. Further, a large winning opening winning command including information on whether or not the winning ball corresponds to an over winning may be received so that the effect control unit 24 does not have to hold the value of the upper limit of winning. .. In this case, the effect control unit 24 does not need to process step S3251, and instead of step S3252, it may perform a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening winning command is due to over winning.

In the above, an example of drawing a lottery as to whether to perform a normal sound effect or a special sound effect at the time of over winning has been described, but other examples are also conceivable.
For example, a special sound effect may be selected when the number of large prize counters reaches a predetermined number in a specific number of rounds. Specifically, in the 4th round, when the big prize counter reaches 5, a lottery is drawn according to the set value Ve to determine whether or not to execute a special sound effect, and if a winner is won, a special sound effect is executed. , If you lose, the normal sound production is performed. The effect 15 may have such an aspect.
In addition to that, a configuration may be configured in which no sound effect and with sound effect are selected according to the lottery result. That is, when a prize is won in the grand prize opening 50, it is usually considered that there is no sound effect, and the sound effect can be generated only at a specific timing (for example, the timing when the large prize counter in the fourth round becomes 5). It may be configured.

(Direction 16)

As a specific example of the effect 16, the liquid crystal display device 36 is at the start of the ending after all the round games in the jackpot are completed, that is, at the mode display effect (timing 36, 39) in which the transition mode after the jackpot is displayed. An image effect is performed to display a specific image different from the usual one on the top.
The normal image is, for example, an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the current number of consecutive villas of the big hit, and is an image that notifies the game state. On the other hand, the specific image is, for example, an image in which a specific character image is superimposed on the normal image. The image effect as the effect 16 is executed only when the lottery for whether or not to display a specific image different from the usual one is won.

The specific image effect is, for example, an effect that suggests that the set value Ve is not 1 (that is, an effect that causes the player to recognize that the set value Ve is 2 or more).

Specific processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. 104. Note that FIG. 104 is an example (S2130h) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106), and is executed in response to the effect control unit 24 receiving the jackpot end command from the main control unit 20. This is an example of processing.
The jackpot end command is a command issued when all the round games executed during the jackpot game are completed, and the effect control unit 24 triggers the reception of the command for ending on the liquid crystal display device 36. Each process for outputting the image effect is executed.
Note that, in FIG. 104, parts other than those related to the effect 16 are omitted.

The effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3261 and draws a lottery for whether or not the effect 16 as a suggestion effect can be executed in the subsequent step S3622.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 performs branching processing according to the lottery result in step S3263.
When the lottery is won (S3263: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying a special image to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3264. As a result, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 105B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the other hand, when the lottery is lost (S3263: N), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command for displaying a normal image to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3265. As a result, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 105A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

When displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 and performing a sound effect or a light effect, a process for registering a scenario is also performed together with steps S3264 and S3265.
For example, FIG. 105B shows a speaker icon along with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. This indicates that, as in FIG. 99B, when the image effect shown in FIG. 105B is executed, the sound effect by the speaker is also performed at the same time.

Further, the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 105B has the same effect (concentrated line effect) as the UFO icon drawn in the image of FIG. 99B. An image effect in which the same effect drawing is added to the same UFO icon may mean that the content is the same. For example, in the image effect shown in FIG. 99B, the UFO icon wearing a concentrated line is used for the effect of confirming that the set value Ve is 6 in the effect of confirming the set value 6. It can give the recognition that there is. Then, the image (for example, FIG. 105B) in which the UFO icon of the same drawing mode is used is only an effect of confirming that the set value Ve is 6, thereby causing the player to misunderstand the suggested content. It is possible to notify appropriately.

This is not limited to image production. Specifically, FIG. 99B shows that the sound effect is executed at the same time as the image effect, and FIG. 105B also shows that the sound effect is executed. It is desirable that the sound effects executed at this time are the same (for example, the same sound or sound effect is output). By adopting the same production mode in the sound production, it is possible to notify the correct suggestion content without causing misunderstanding of the player.
Of course, the same applies not only to sound effects but also to light effects using LEDs and the like. That is, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the suggested content by using the same LED used for sound production and using the same LED emission color.
Moreover, when the combination is the same, the same suggestion content may be shown. For example, if a UFO icon with a concentrated line appears, but the sound effect at that time is different, it may be configured to have different suggestion contents. That is, when both the UFO icon and the sound effect have the same effect mode, the suggestion effect may have the same suggestion content.

Another example of the effect 16 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 shows an example of a state transition different from that of FIG. 83. Specifically, in FIG. 126, after the round game (final R opening) of the final round during the big hit game, the big hit end interval effect is executed after the inter-round interval. After that, the enthusiastic warning and the IC forgetting warning (similar to the timing 40 and timing 41 shown in FIG. 83) are executed, and then the company logo (corresponding to the timing 42 in FIG. 83) and high accuracy / normal suggestion. The screen display (corresponding to the timing 39 in FIG. 83) is sequentially executed.
In addition, each round game is set as the second hit game section (the continuous operation period of the accessory), and the ending period is set as the third hit game section. The opening period (fanfare period) is the first game section.

As the first example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, that is, on the liquid crystal display device 36, is performed from the start of the jackpot end interval effect to the final phase of the jackpot game, that is, until the high accuracy / normal suggestion screen display ends. An image effect in which a specific pattern is superimposed on the image is executed.

Further, as a second example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the image effect is executed from the start of the jackpot end interval effect to the end of the display of the company logo.

Further, as a third example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, not only the ending period of the jackpot game but also the section before the ending period, that is, the image as the set value suggestion effect from the execution of the final round of the jackpot game. The production is executed.

In any of the first, second, and third examples of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect appears in a period longer than at least half of the ending period (20 seconds). It is configured to.
In this way, it is desirable that the set value suggestion effect appears for a predetermined period or longer. In addition, when the set value suggestion effect is performed during the ending period (third game section) or fanfare period (first game section), and those sections end in a relatively short time, As in the third example of the execution period of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect may be displayed from the second hit game section (or for a while after entering the second hit game section). .. In addition, it appears for a while after the ending section ends, that is, after the high-accuracy or low-accuracy (normal) game is started (for example, for n seconds or until the symbol variation display game ends n times). It may be configured as follows.

The set value suggestion effect is not executed so many times as compared with the jackpot suggestion effect. This is because the winning result of the big hit lottery occurs every time the big hit lottery is performed, and the notification frequency has to be high naturally, whereas the set value is not changed during the game of the day. This is because there is a high possibility that once notified (or significantly less), further notification becomes meaningless.
However, if the suggestion of the set value by the few set value suggestion effects is overlooked, the player has to wait for the setting value suggestion effect that appears infrequently to appear next, which is a significant disadvantage for the player. May occur. Therefore, it is desirable that the set value suggestion effect is produced over a long period of time, that is, the suggestion content is presented.

In addition, the timing at which the final round of the jackpot game is completed (that is, the ending period) is also the timing at which the player's interest in the game machine temporarily diminishes. However, at this timing, an image production is performed to call attention to immersiveness and to call attention to forgetting to take the IC. That is, even if such an alert is given at the timing when the player's interest is diminished, the effect may be diminished.
However, in the game machine 1 in this example, since the image effect as the set value suggestion effect is executed during the ending period, the image effect for calling various attentions while keeping the player highly interested. Can be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play and improve the effectiveness of each alert.

(Direction 17)

As a specific example of the effect 17, a suggestion effect using the sound generator 46a is performed with a predetermined probability during the ending of the pattern A (that is, timings 36 to 38). For example, when performing the suggestion effect, one of a plurality of types of voice data (dialogue data) is selected and output. There are five types of voice data, for example, and the suggested content differs depending on each voice data.

FIG. 106A shows the correspondence between the selected voice data and the suggested content.
As shown in the figure, when the voice data 1 is output, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 2 or more, and when the voice data 2 is output, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is an even number. Then, when the voice data 3 is output, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is an odd number. Further, when the audio data 4 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 3 or more, and when the audio data 5 is output, it is determined that the set value Ve is 6.

A specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 106B.
First, in step S3271, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing for executing the effect 17 is appropriate, and in step S3272, determines whether or not the execution flag is “0”.
If the timing is not appropriate or the execution flag is "1", the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 106B.

When the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is "0", the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to "1" in step S3273, and executes the effect 17 as a suggestion effect in the following step S3274. Whether or not it is drawn.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3275 whether or not the lottery has been won. If the selection is lost (S3275: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 106B. On the other hand, if the product is won (S3275: Y), the effect control unit 24 executes the branch processing according to the set value Ve in step S3276.

When the set value Ve is 1, the effect control unit 24 selects the audio data 3 in step S3277. When the set value Ve is 2, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the audio data 1 and the audio data 2 in step S3278. When the set value Ve is 3 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 3, and the voice data 4 in step S3279. When the set value Ve is 4, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 2, and the voice data 4 in step S3280. When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the voice data 1, the voice data 2, the voice data 4, and the voice data 5 in step S3281.
In each selection process of steps S3277 to S3281, a lottery process based on a predetermined probability is performed. That is, it is a process of selecting one of the options based on a predetermined probability. It should be noted that each option does not have to have the same ease of selection. For example, in the case of the setting value 6, one is selected from the voice data 1, the voice data 2, the voice data 4, and the voice data 5, but the voice data 2 is easier to be selected than the voice data 1. It may be configured in.

The effect control unit 24 registers the scenario for outputting the selected audio data in step S3282. As a result, the voice data corresponding to the set value Ve is selected and output, so that the player can estimate the set value Ve.

In the game machine 1 in which the effect 17 can be executed, even if the player's motivation to play is likely to be discouraged by winning the normal jackpot instead of the probability variation jackpot, during the ending of the pattern A. Since it is possible to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation to play.

(Direction 18)

As a specific example of the effect 18, for example, when the effect of notifying the transition to the probabilistic state is performed at the timings 36 to 42 of the probable change jackpot transition to the probable change state after the big hit game, the effect button 13 The sound production that is executed differs depending on the operation of such as. For example, in the case of performing a sound effect of playing a blessing voice for congratulating the transition to the probabilistic state, four types of the blessing voice are prepared (FIG. 107A).

When the blessing voice 1 is used, it is not possible to know which value the set value Ve is. That is, it is a non-suggestive effect. For example, in most cases the blessing voice 1 is configured to be selected. As a result, when the blessing voice 1 is not selected and the suggestion effect shown below is performed, the player can be given an uplifting feeling.
When the blessing voice 2 is used, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 2 or more. When the blessing voice 3 is used, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 4 or more. Further, when the blessing voice 4 is used, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 6.

A flowchart of specific processing is shown (FIG. 107B). Note that FIG. 107B is an example (S2130h) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106). Further, FIG. 107B shows only the processing related to the execution of the effect 18, and in reality, the effect control unit 24 also performs various processes (not shown).
In step S3291, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the mode to be shifted after the jackpot game is completed is in a probabilistic state. The mode to be shifted can be specified by the jackpot end command, for example, as described above.
If it is not in the probabilistic state (S3291: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 107.
When the transition mode is in the probability change state (S3291: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3292, and performs branch processing based on the set value Ve in the subsequent step S3293.

When the set value Ve is 1, the effect control unit 24 selects the blessing voice 1 in step S3294. When the set value Ve is 2 or 3, the effect control unit 24 selects one of the blessing voice 1 and the blessing voice 2 in step S3295. When the set value Ve is 4 or 5, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the blessing voice 1, the blessing voice 2, and the blessing voice 3 in step S3296. When the set value Ve is 6, the effect control unit 24 selects any one of the blessing voice 1, the blessing voice 2, the blessing voice 3, and the blessing voice 4 in step S3297. Each selection process is synonymous with performing a lottery process based on a predetermined probability set in advance.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 executes scenario registration for outputting the selected blessing voice in step S3298.
It should be noted that each blessing voice that is an option does not have to have the same ease of selection.

(Direction 19)

As a specific example of the effect 19, the light effect using the light display device 45a and the liquid crystal display device 36 are used at timings 36 to 42, which are considered to be during the big hit, for example, when notifying the transition to the time saving state after the big hit game. Suggestion production is performed by performing the image production using.
As an example, when there is a movable body accessory that can be moved at any of timings 36 to 42 in order to notify that the transition to the time saving state is performed, the movable body accessory is mounted on the movable body accessory in the suggestion effect. The effect of illuminating the light display device 45a (LED, etc.) is performed. At this time, the suggestion effect is performed depending on the color of the light source as the light display device 45a.

For example, there are five types of light colors: blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow. The "rainbow" is a light emitting mode in which a plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially changed at regular intervals such as 0.2 seconds.
FIG. 108A shows an example in which the selection probability of each color differs depending on the set value Ve. As shown in the figure, the issuance pattern that emits rainbow colors is the most difficult to select regardless of the set value Ve, but the higher the set value Ve, the easier it is to select. Further, the lower the set value Ve, the easier it is to select blue. As can be seen from the figure, blue has the lowest expected value, and green, yellow, red, and rainbow have the highest expected values in that order. That is, it is said that the player is motivated to play in the order of blue, green, yellow, red, and rainbow.
A flowchart of specific processing is shown (FIG. 108B). Note that FIG. 108B is an example (S2130h) of each command processing (S2130) in the command correspondence processing (S2106). Further, in FIG. 108B, only the processing related to the suggestion effect is shown as an excerpt.
In step S3301, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the transition mode after the big hit game is in the time saving state.
When the time saving state is not shifted (in the case of S3301: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 108B. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the time saving state (in the case of S3301: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in the following step S3302, and draws a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3303. In the lottery, a lottery based on the table shown in FIG. 108A is performed.

Subsequently, in step S3304, the effect control unit 24 registers a scenario for realizing the effect 19 as a suggestion effect.

(Direction 20)

The effects 20 to 21 are suggestive effects executed at timings not shown in FIG. 84. The effect 20 is an effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state. Specifically, it is an effect that a specific character appears on the liquid crystal display device 36 while the time is shortened (that is, until the transition to the normal state or the transition to the jackpot game). is there. The character image once appeared does not disappear during the game in the time-saving state, and the state of being superimposed and displayed on the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is maintained as another image effect.
Further, the number of the characters on the liquid crystal display device 36 can be increased while playing the time saving state, and the number of the characters finally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The set value Ve can be estimated according to the above.

A specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 109A. The series of processes shown in FIG. 109A are appropriately executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 109A at the timing when the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state is started, the timing when all the symbols are stopped, and the like. Further, it may be executed for each special symbol variation display game in the time saving state, or may be executed for each five special symbol variation display games.

First, in step S3311, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 20 as a suggestion effect. If the timing is not appropriate (S3311: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 109A.
When the timing is appropriate (S3311: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the execution flag is 0 in the following step S3312.

When the execution flag is 1 (S3312: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the process. When the execution flag is 0 (S3312: Y), the effect control unit 24 sets the execution flag to 1 in the following step S3313. The execution flag is reset to 0 each time the special symbol variation display game is started, for example. That is, the execution flag is a flag for preventing the effect 20 from being executed a plurality of times in one variable display game.

In step S3314, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT. The appearance counter CNT is the number of characters to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and as described above, the status quo is maintained or increased while the time saving state continues (that is, until the transition to another gaming state), and the number decreases. It is supposed that there is nothing to do. Although not shown, the appearance counter CNT is cleared to "0" when transitioning from the time saving state to another state.
FIG. 109B is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the lottery process according to the set value Ve and the appearance counter CNT.

As shown in the figure, when the appearance counter CNT is 0, the winning probability in one lottery opportunity is set low, but this means that lottery opportunities occur many times during the time saving state. I'm thinking.
Further, as can be understood from the figure, since the winning probability is 0% when the appearance counter CNT is 3, the maximum number of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is three. Further, in the set values 1 to 3, the maximum number is two. That is, when the three character images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player can recognize that the set value Ve is 4 or more.

Returning to the description of FIG. 109A.
After the lottery based on the table is performed, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3315 whether or not the lottery has been won. If the image is won (S3315: Y), a process of adding 1 to the appearance counter CNT is performed (S3316), and a command for image output according to the appearance counter CNT is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. (S3317).
On the other hand, if the selection is lost (in the case of S3315: N), the appearance counter CNT proceeds to step S3317 as it is, and a command for image output according to the appearance counter CNT is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
The command transmitted to step S3317 is a command based on the image effect that appears in the decorative symbol variation display game at that time, and is a different command if the image effect is different.

(Direction 21)

As a specific example of the effect 21, an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed as a suggestion effect at a specific time such as a predetermined time from the opening of the store, the evening, or just before the store closes.
When the game machine 1 is provided with the RTC function unit, the time zone of opening, evening, and just before closing is grasped based on the current time obtained by the RTC function. If the opening time and closing time differ depending on the store or region, the game machine 1 may be configured so that the opening time and closing time can be set.

Further, when the game machine 1 is not provided with the RTC function unit, it may be configured to indirectly grasp each time zone from the number of game balls discharged from the out port 49.
Specifically, when the big hit lottery is won between the generation of the first out ball and the generation of the 1000th out ball after the power is turned on, a specific effect appears as a suggestion effect at the time of opening the store. Further, when the big hit lottery is won between the occurrence of the 25,000th out ball and the occurrence of the 26000th out ball, a specific effect appears as a suggestion effect in the evening. Further, when the big hit lottery is won between the occurrence of the 40,000th out ball and the occurrence of the 41,000th out ball, a specific effect appears as a suggestion effect just before the store closes.
In this case, the player may be notified that the specific effect is a time zone in which the specific effect can appear as a suggestion effect.

That is, a specific effect that has appeared by lottery with a certain probability at other times appears as a suggestion effect in which the ease of appearance changes according to the set value Ve in each of the above sections. Become. In addition, it may be a dedicated production for suggestion production that does not appear except in each of the above time zones.
The specific effect that appears as a suggestion effect at the time of opening, the specific effect that appears as a suggestion effect in the evening, and the specific effect that appears as a suggestion effect just before the store closes may be different or the same. It may be a production.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 may display only an image for a specific effect as a suggestion effect, or an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as another image effect (irrelevant to the suggestion effect). An image (such as a small image such as an icon) presented as the suggestion effect may be superimposed and displayed on the image.

A specific processing flow will be described with reference to FIG. 110. Note that FIG. 110 is an example of a flowchart for the case where the RTC function unit is provided in the game machine 1.
First, in step S3321, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not the timing is appropriate for executing the effect 21. In this process, for example, it is determined only whether or not it is a predetermined timing in the special variation display game. Specifically, if the effect 21 is to be performed at the timing of the start of fluctuation in the special variation display game, it is determined whether or not the current timing is such a timing.

When the timing is appropriate (S3321: Y), the effect control unit 24 determines in step S3322 whether or not the execution flag is 0.
When the timing is not appropriate (in the case of S3321: N) or the execution flag is 1 (in the case of S3322: N), the effect control unit 24 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 110.

When the timing is appropriate and the execution flag is 0, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of setting the execution flag to 1 in step S3323, and then performs a process of acquiring the RTC value in step S3324.
Next, in step S3325, the effect control unit 24 determines from the acquired RTC whether or not the current time is a specific time zone, that is, whether or not it is a time zone corresponding to the opening of the store as described above.
When the current time is specific (S3325: Y), the effect control unit 24 acquires the set value Ve in step S3326, and draws a lottery according to the set value Ve in step S3327. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability.

On the other hand, when the current time is not a specific time (S3325: N), the effect control unit 24 performs an effect lottery to win with a certain probability in step S3328. That is, the player wins with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

After step S3327 or S3328, the effect control unit 24 branches depending on whether or not the lottery for effect 21 is won in step S3329.
If the image is won (S3329: Y), the effect control unit 24 transmits a command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S3330 to display the image effect as the effect 21.
On the other hand, if the selection is lost (S3329: N), the effect control unit 24 ends the series of processes shown in FIG. 110 without transmitting a command.

As can be understood from the explanation, when the effect 21 is won as a result of drawing with a certain probability in step S3328, the effect 21 appears as an image effect that is not a suggestion effect. Further, when the result of the lottery according to the set value Ve is won in step S3327, it appears as an image effect as a suggestion effect.

As described above, by executing the image effect as a suggestion effect just before the store opens, the player's game can be promoted immediately after the store opens, and the operating time of the game machine 1 can be improved. Further, by executing the image effect as a suggestion effect just before the store closes, the player's game can be continued until the store closes, and the operating time of the game machine 1 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to promote the game at the time of opening the store the next day.

(Summary of each production)

When the above-mentioned 21 types of suggestion effects are not displayed at the same time, it can be realized by devising the execution flag used in each suggestion effect. That is, in each execution flag, "0" indicates that it has not been executed, "1" indicates that it has been executed, and "2" indicates that it is being executed. Then, when determining whether or not to execute each effect, the other suggestive effect is being executed by confirming whether or not the execution flag for the other suggestive effect is "2". Can be grasped, so that it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestion effects from being executed at the same time.
Further, the suggestion effect that may be executed at the same time can be realized by omitting the process of confirming the execution flag for the suggestion effect.

As a matter of course, the game machine 1 does not have to include all of the 21 types of suggestive effects described above.
Further, FIG. 84 is just an example, and various suggestion effects may be performed at a timing when there is no description of a circle in FIG. 84.

[9-4. Other production examples]

Each of the above-mentioned production examples will be described. First, the operation flow of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The series of operation flows shown in FIG. 111 includes the processing of the main control unit 20, the processing of the effect control unit 24, and the operation by the hall staff, the player, and the like. Further, the process shown in FIG. 111 is an excerpt of a process that is important for understanding the movement of the game machine 1 among the processes performed by the game machine 1, and is a process executed by the game machine 1. It is said to be a part.

When the power-on operation is performed by the hall staff or the like (step S4001), the main control unit 20 of the game machine 1 detects the operation and sends a command to the effect control unit 24 to display a standby screen on the liquid crystal control unit 40. A command for causing the operation is transmitted, and a standby screen (an image including characters such as Please wait ...) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (step S4002).

Subsequently, in step S4003, the main control unit 20 performs branch processing according to whether or not the set value change condition is satisfied (step S104 described above).
When the set value change condition is satisfied, a command is issued from the main control unit 20 to the liquid crystal control unit 40 via the effect control unit 24 to notify the liquid crystal display device 36 that the setting is being changed. The screen is displayed (step S4004).

The main control unit 20 confirms whether or not the setting key switch is OFF in step S4006 while accepting the setting change operation in step S4005. That is, by accepting the setting change operation until the setting key switch is turned off, the hall staff and the like can be changed.
After confirming that the setting key switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 displays a screen for notifying the liquid crystal display device 36 of the end of the setting change by transmitting a command via the effect control unit 24 in step S4007. .. Further, the effect control unit 24 performs a process of turning on the setting change flag in step S4008.
The setting change flag is changed to "ON" when the setting is changed, and is a flag referred to for determining whether or not to perform the setting value change suggestion effect. The setting change flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 243 included in the effect control unit 24.
The above-mentioned steps S701 to S717 are executed at the timing of performing steps S4005 and S4006. The process corresponding to step S4007 is the process of step S722 described above.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 performs the RAM clear process in step S4009, and executes the RAM clear notification mode in step S4010. The RAM clear notification mode is a mode of the game machine 1 realized by the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24, the liquid crystal control unit 40, etc., and the liquid crystal display device 36, various lamps (LEDs, etc.), the speaker 46, and the like are used. Will be realized.

The main control unit 20 that has completed the setting change realizes the RAM clear notification mode by using the effect control unit 24 or the like in step S4009, and executes the RAM clear process in step S4010.
Steps S4009 and S4010 correspond to the above-mentioned processes of steps S116 to S118.

When it is determined in step S4003 that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4011 whether the RAM is abnormal or the backup flag is abnormal. When any of the abnormalities has occurred, the main control unit 20 realizes the error notification mode by using the effect control unit 24 (step S4012). The hall staff who recognizes the error notification mode performs, for example, an operation of turning off the power of the game machine 1 (step S4013).

If the set value change condition is not satisfied, the RAM is not abnormal, and the backup flag is not abnormal, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4014 whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON. When the RAM clear switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S4009.
On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is OFF, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4015 whether or not the set value confirmation condition is satisfied (step S108 described above).

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 20 executes the setting confirmation mode in step S4016. The setting confirmation mode is such that an image for notifying that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, a process of displaying the set value Ve on the setting / performance display 97, and the like are performed. , Corresponds to the above-mentioned step S109.
The main control unit 20 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting key switch is OFF in step S4017, and displays the set value Ve on the setting / performance display 97 until the setting key switch is turned OFF. to continue.
When the setting key switch is turned off, the main control unit 20 transmits a command for displaying the normal screen in step S4018.

After executing either step S4010 or S4018, the process proceeds to the process shown in FIG. 112.
The main control unit 20 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery probability state is highly accurate (step S4019). When the accuracy is not high, that is, when the accuracy is low (S4019: N), the effect control unit 24 sets the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag to ON in step S4020. The set value change suggestion effect lottery flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the lottery process for determining whether or not to perform the set value change suggestion effect, and if it is ON, the lottery process is executed by the process described later. Will be done. This flag is stored in, for example, the RAM 243 included in the effect control unit 24.

When the jackpot lottery probability state is highly accurate (in the case of S4019: Y), the effect control unit 24 turns off the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag (step S4021) and turns off the setting change flag (step S4022).
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, the jackpot lottery probability state is started from the low probability state. That is, the fact that the accuracy is high at the stage of step S4019 means that the set value has not been changed. Therefore, each process of steps S4021 and S4022 is performed so that the set value change suggestion effect does not appear.
Note that this process is a process just in case, and even if the process of turning off both flags is omitted here, the setting value change suggestion effect is not executed.

Subsequently, the main control unit 20 determines in step S4023 whether or not to start the jackpot game. When the power is turned off during the big hit game, the backup return process restores the state to the state during the big hit game after the power is turned on. In such a case, the determination result in step S4023 becomes Y, and the process proceeds to step S4024.
In step S4024, the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 perform a process for displaying the jackpot screen on the liquid crystal display device 36.
When starting from the state of the big hit game after the power is turned on, the effect control unit 24 executes a process of turning off both the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag and the setting change flag (steps S4025 and S4026), and the process of step S4027. Move to. Further, when it is determined in step S4023 that the jackpot game is not started, the process proceeds to step S4027.

In step S4027, the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 wait until the special symbol variation display game is started. When the special symbol variation display game is started, or when the special symbol variation display game is started due to the power failure recovery, the process proceeds to step S4028, and whether or not the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag is ON. The effect control unit 24 executes a determination process.

When the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag is ON, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery process as to whether or not to execute the set value change suggestion effect in step S4029.
When the lottery process is won, a set value change suggestion effect based on the effect mode won in the subsequent processes appears.
Subsequently, the effect control unit 24 turns off the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag in step S4030, and turns off the set value change flag in step S4031.

When the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 issue commands, the decorative symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in step S4032.

(Set value change suggestion effect 1)

The suggestion effect regarding the presence or absence of the set value change, which is the effect mode as shown in the above effect 04, is executed between step S4031 and step S4032, for example. Further, in the explanation of the effect 04, an example in which the button is vibrated when the effect 04 as a suggestion effect is executed, whereas the button is not vibrated when the effect is not executed is described, but other effect modes are also conceivable. ..
For example, at the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after the power is turned on, at least some button vibration is set to occur, and when the setting value change suggestion effect 1 as a suggestion effect is executed, the button It may be configured to increase the vibration (increase the number of vibrations and the vibration time). Specifically, it can be realized by using a PM type stepping motor or the like. For example, when the setting value change suggestion effect 1 as the suggestion effect is executed, the stepping motor is operated in 4 steps, and when the button is simply vibrated instead of the suggestion effect, the stepping motor is operated in 2 steps.
As a result, even when the set value change suggestion effect 1 is not executed, the vibration of the button is generated, and the player can be given an uplifting feeling.

If the game machine 1 is provided with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on is related to the special figure 2, the set value change suggestion effect 1 It is not necessary to carry out. That is, the set value change suggestion effect 1 may be executed when the first special symbol variation display game for the special figure 1 after the power is turned on is started.

(Set value change suggestion effect 2)

The set value change suggestion effect 2 appears at the timing when the background image (effect mode) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched. The background image (effect mode) is, for example, a type of scene displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and is an effect mode identified by the player. For example, the "town mode" in which the scene where the character is walking in the town is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, the "car mode" in which the scene where the character is in the car is displayed, and the character is resting at the beach. "Vacation mode", etc., in which the scene being displayed is displayed, is displayed as appropriate. When the image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 is performed in each effect mode, the image effect corresponding to each scene can appear. In addition, an effect that occurs only in a specific effect mode may be provided.

The timing at which the background image (effect mode) is switched may come, for example, for each special symbol variation display game a certain number of times, or for each special symbol variation display game, a lottery for transition to the production mode is performed with a predetermined probability, and the winner is elected. In some cases, the background image (effect mode) may be switched.
That is, the setting value change suggestion effect 2 may occur at a timing different from the start of the first decorative symbol variation display game after the power is turned on.
In such a case, for example, it can be realized by changing a part of the processing shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 as shown in FIG. 113.

After the set value change suggestion effect lottery flag is turned ON (in the case of S4028: Y) and the set value change suggestion effect lottery is executed in step S4029, whether or not the effect control unit 24 has won the lottery in step S4041. Branch by.
If the product is won, the effect control unit 24 stores the effect mode of the set value change suggestion effect won in step S4042 in the RAM 243 or the like. From the stored information, it is possible to identify the production timing and production content. The information stored here is deleted after being used for executing, for example, a setting value change suggestion effect.

The setting value change suggestion effect 2 is executed at the timing when the background image (effect mode) is switched for the first time after the power is turned on. At that time, a dedicated background image for the set value change suggestion effect 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. As a dedicated background image, for example, there is a "pool mode" in which a scene in which a character is playing in a pool is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
The dedicated production mode is maintained until the next background image switching timing. That is, it is difficult for the player to overlook the suggestion effect that suggests that the set value Ve has been changed, and it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

If the lottery in step S4029 is lost, the dedicated background image is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 even if the set value Ve is changed.

(Set value change suggestion effect 3)

The set value change suggestion effect 3 is a suggestion effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display device 36 under specific conditions until the end of the first big hit game after the power is turned on. Further, in this example, the set value change suggestion effect 3 also serves as the set value suggestion effect.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 114.
FIG. 114A is a diagram schematically showing a specific image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 after the end of the big hit game, for example, as a result screen for notifying the result of the big hit game.
In the specific image, one character image is displayed in the left half area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and another character image is displayed in the right half area. Although not shown, it is assumed that the result information such as the number of balls to be ejected is displayed in this image.
In the following description, the character image displayed in the left half area will be referred to as a “left character”, and the character image displayed in the right half area will be referred to as a “right character”.

When the left character and the right character appear at the same time, they are regarded as different characters, and there are patterns in which only one of the left and right characters appears and a pattern in which no character appears on either the left or right side.
In this example, the suggestion content is different depending on the combination of the characters appearing in the left character and the right character and the appearance timing.

FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of the combination of the left character and the right character and the suggested content. As shown in the figure, there are 14 types of character image appearance patterns (patterns Nos. 1 to 14). "ANY" in the figure means that any character appears, and is not included when the character does not appear. That is, the effect pattern in which the pattern No. 1 corresponds to the case where the left character does not exist and some character image is displayed as the right character.

The specific image effect of pattern No. 1 or 2 is a normal image effect that is not a suggestion effect because the suggestion content is "none". The background color in this case is "blue".
That is, when only one of the left character and the right character appears in a specific image effect after the big hit game, the player can grasp that it is a normal image effect that is not a suggestion effect.
Further, since the background color is set to "blue" only for the specific image effects set to patterns No. 1 and 2, a normal image that only recognizes that the background color is "blue" and is not a suggestion effect. You can understand that it is a production.

The specific image effects designated as patterns Nos. 3, 4, and 5 are a combination of the main character A or the main character B and the pets C, D, and E. In addition, in any of the image productions, the suggestion content is "○○ suggestion". This is different from the suggestion content of "○○ confirmed" described later, and it is said that it is not confirmed that it is ○○, but it is rich.
The specific image effect specifically set as pattern No. 3 is "4, 5, 6 suggestion", and the set value Ve is easily selected in 4 to 6, and the set value Ve is selected in 1 to 3. It is a difficult (however, the appearance rate is not 0%) production pattern.
The background color of each of the specific image effects of patterns Nos. 3, 4, and 5 is "green". That is, the appearance of a specific image effect having a background color of "green" allows the player to obtain information for assisting the estimation of the set value Ve.

The suggestion content of the specific image effects set to patterns Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 is "○○ confirmed". That is, it is an image effect that appears as a suggestion effect (confirmation suggestion effect) in which the value of the set value Ve is determined to be one or a certain range is determined. The background color is set to "gold" or "rainbow", and the player can understand that the setting value Ve is a definite suggestion effect only by looking at the background color.
Further, since the specific image effect shown in the pattern No. 6 in which the background color is "rainbow" is a suggestion effect in which the maximum set value of 6 is fixed, it is possible to significantly improve the player's motivation to play. Become.

In the specific image effects of patterns Nos. 11 and 12, the suggestion content is denied as "○○". That is, it is an image effect (negative suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value Ve is not a certain value. In any of the image effects, the background color is "black", and it is possible to recognize that it is some kind of negative suggestion effect only by checking the background color.

The specific image effects set as patterns Nos. 13 and 14 are combinations that do not appear on the game result display screen displayed after the big hit game is completed. Specifically, it will be described later.

As described above, even if the player does not know the original work such as the work that is the theme of the game machine 1, that is, even if the player does not recognize the characters such as the main character A and the main character B. It is configured so that it is possible to grasp what kind of suggestive effect is being performed just by looking at the background color of a specific image effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image production from being enjoyed by not knowing the original and the motivation to play is diminished.

Further, the specific image production by the table shown in FIG. 114B is configured to be enjoyable even for a player who knows the original. For example, when "Pet C" appears in the left character or the right character, it is suggested that the set value Ve is likely to be 4 to 6. That is, when the effect set as pattern No. 3 appears, it is notified by the image effect that there is a high possibility that the set value is 4 to 6, and when the effect set as pattern No. 8 appears, the set value 4 It is notified that ~ 6 is confirmed.
Further, when "Pet D" appears, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value Ve is an odd number.
Further, when "Pet D" appears in the left character or the right character, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value Ve is an even number.

In this way, even a player who knows the original can roughly grasp the suggested content according to the character image that appears. Therefore, it is possible to provide an image effect that enhances the interest of the game even to a player who does not know all the details of the table shown in FIG. 114B.

A specific image effect that appears as such a set value suggestion effect appears after the end of the jackpot game (or after the end of all round games), but there is a possibility that the suggestion effect may be overlooked depending on the player. is there. In particular, it is thought that it is easy to overlook when the acquired balls are transferred to the box.

Therefore, the game machine 1 is configured to display a combination of character images appearing in a specific image effect immediately before from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game on the demo screen.
In the game machine 1, there is a ball ejection ranking screen displayed in the demo screen, and a character image is displayed on the ball ejection ranking screen. Until the first big hit of the day, the ranking of the previous day is displayed, and after the first big hit, the current sunrise ball ranking is displayed.
After the first big hit, the character image and the background color that appeared in the specific image effect immediately before (that is, the result screen of the big hit game) are reproduced on the ball output ranking screen. However, the postures (poses) of the character images may be different. That is, the character image displayed on the payout ranking screen can be changed each time the big hit game is completed (Patterns Nos. 1 to 12).

Here, the image when the ball output ranking screen is displayed before the first big hit game is described.
In this example, a character image of a combination of pattern numbers 13 or 14 is displayed on the ball output ranking screen until the first big hit game is started.
In each of the patterns No. 13 and 14, the main character A and the main character B appear as character images, and only the appearance positions are different. Patterns Nos. 13 and 14 appear only before the first big hit game after the power is turned on, and basically do not appear after the first big hit game unless the power of the game machine 1 is turned off during the game. It is a thing.
When the image with the pattern No. 13 is displayed on the ball output ranking screen, the suggestion content is "None". That is, even if the effect appears, the player cannot obtain any information regarding the set value Ve.
On the other hand, when the image with the pattern No. 14 is displayed on the ball output ranking screen, the suggestion content is "setting change confirmed". That is, when the effect appears, it can be grasped that the set value Ve has been changed, so that it is a set value change suggestion effect. That is, the ball output ranking screen effect in this case is set value change suggestion effect 3.
The background color in the image is both "white". This is a background color different from any of the above-mentioned specific images, and the appearance of the ball ejection ranking screen in which the background color is "white" is a suggestion effect for the player to change the set value. It is possible to grasp.

As described above, the demo screen is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the game ball does not win a prize in the large winning opening 50 or the like for a certain period of time, so that the player can intentionally generate it. .. Therefore, even a player who misses a specific image effect that appears after the big hit game can be confirmed what kind of suggestion effect is performed. Then, before the first big hit game, the setting value change suggestion effect 3 indicating whether or not the setting value has been changed can be made to appear by one's own hand, and it is possible to confirm at the timing of one's liking. Is.

(Set value suggestion effect 1)

In this production example, as in the production 03 and production 21 described above, the appearance probability of the suggestion production is different depending on the time, conditions, and the like. Further, in the production 21, an example of using the RTC function has been described according to a flowchart, but here, an example of using the total number of out balls will be described.
Further, in this example, the number of big hit games (the number of big hit games in a predetermined number of rounds is counted as one, and hereinafter referred to as the number of big hits) is also taken into consideration.

In this example, each time the decorative symbol variation display game is started, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and if the game is won, a specific character is superimposed on another image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. A suggestion effect is performed to display an image (which may be a person or something like a medal). Of course, the character image (or the character image that appears) that tends to appear differs depending on the set value Ve.
In this example, a character image imitating a medal (hereinafter referred to as "medal character") appears.

Specifically, it will be described with reference to FIG. 115.
FIG. 115A is a table showing the appearance probability of the set value suggestion effect 1 under the condition that the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 1000 or less. There are a plurality of colors of medal characters that appear in the suggestion effect as the set value suggestion effect 1, and there are five types, for example, copper, silver, gold, a Danger pattern, and a rainbow.
As shown in the figure, no medal character appears at the setting value 1. In other words, if a medal character appears, it is determined that the set value Ve is 2 or more regardless of its color.
Similarly, at the setting value 2, silver, gold, Danger pattern, and rainbow medal characters may not appear, and only copper-colored medal characters may appear.
Further, at the setting value 3, gold, the Danger pattern, and the rainbow medal character do not appear, at the setting value 4, the Danger pattern and the rainbow medal character do not appear, and at the setting value 5, the rainbow medal character does not appear. Has been done. Combinations with an appearance probability of 0% (for example, set value 1, bronze medal character) also have an appearance probability of 0% in each subsequent table.

In FIG. 115A, since the total number of outs is 1 to 1000 and the number of big hits is less than 20, the state immediately after the opening of the hall is applicable. In such a state, the probability that the copper-colored medal character will appear is higher than during the subsequent games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation to play immediately after the opening of the hall.
When the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls exceeds 1000 and up to 6000, as shown in FIG. 115B, the appearance probability of the copper-colored medal character is considered to be lowered. ..
Further, when the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 6001 to 12000, the appearance probability of each medal character of silver, gold, Danger pattern, and rainbow increases (Fig. 115C).
When the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out-balls is between 12001 and 24000, the appearance probability of the copper-colored medal character increases as compared with the previous cases (FIG. 116A).
Further, when the number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out balls is 24001 or more, the appearance probability of the medal characters of each color is increased (Fig. 116B).

In this way, except for FIG. 115A, which seems to be immediately after the opening of the hall, the appearance probability of each medal character increases as the total number of out balls increases. That is, the suggestive effect for estimating the set value Ve is likely to appear with the passage of the game time, and the motivation for the game can be maintained.

Under the condition that the number of big hits is 20 to 30, each appearance probability is set high. The fact that the jackpot game was executed so many times means that it is expected that the decorative symbol variation display game was executed a certain number of times. Furthermore, it is highly possible that the player has obtained a certain amount of balls. In such a situation, it is desirable to increase the probability of appearance of the medal character and to keep the player motivated to continue the game by making the player recognize the appearance of the medal character.

When the number of big hits is 31 or more, it is conceivable that the number of balls to be paid out increases and the player is playing in a good mood. In such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of the medal character, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.
In addition, if the number of balls to be paid increases, the player may have a psychology to stop while hitting. Even in such a case, by increasing the appearance probability of the medal character as shown in the table of FIG. 117B, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game.

Further, in this example, the appearance probability of each effect differs depending on the conditions, but the suggested content when the effect appears is the same. Specifically, according to FIG. 115A, when a medal character with a Danger pattern appears, it is determined that the set value is 5 or the set value is 6. The relationship between the "danger pattern medal character" and the "information that the set values 5 and 6 are confirmed (that is, the suggested content)" is based on other conditions (that is, FIG. 115B, FIG. 115C, FIG. 116A, FIG. 116B, FIG. 117A, FIG. 117B). ) Does not change. Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value Ve is 5 or 6 for "the appearance of a medal character with a Danger pattern" without the player grasping the current conditions of the game machine 1. It is said to be an easy-to-understand suggestion effect for the player.

As shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the appearance probability is changed so that the suggested content is narrowed down (that is, the option of the set value Ve estimated by the player is narrowed down). May be changed.
Specifically, in the game machine 1 under the condition A, as shown in FIG. 118A, it is suggested that the "appearance of the medal character with the Danger pattern" is "determined that the set value Ve is 5 or 6". It is said to be a production to do. On the other hand, in the game machine 1 under the condition B, as shown in FIG. 118B, the appearance probability of the medal character may increase or decrease to 0%, whereby "the appearance of the medal character with the Danger pattern". Has been changed to an effect suggesting that "the set value Ve is confirmed to be 6". That is, under the condition B, when the set value Ve is 5, the appearance probability of the effect decreases to 0%, while when the set value Ve is 6, the appearance probability increases.
That is, by changing from the condition A to the condition B, the accuracy of the information of the notification content to be perceived by the player when the suggestion effect appears is improved.

Further, when the accuracy of the information transmitted to the player is higher in the condition B than in the condition A, it is desirable that the condition B is less likely to appear (difficult to achieve).
For example, if condition B is a normal state and condition A is a condition that rarely appears, the player must have a medal character with a Danger pattern appear under condition B, which is the normal state. After receiving the suggestion content that the set value Ve is 6, the condition A as the specific condition is satisfied, and there is a high possibility that the information of the suggestion content with reduced accuracy is additionally received. This is not preferable because the suggestion content received under the condition A becomes meaningless information for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the condition A is a normal game, and the condition B is a specific condition that is rarely satisfied, so that the player is in a normal game. The information that "the set value Ve is 5 or 6" is received when the suggestion effect occurs below, and the suggestion effect that appears after that under the specific conditions eliminates the possibility that the "set value Ve is 5". There is a high possibility of receiving upgraded information such as "confirmed to be 6." Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes a similar effect (that is, an effect in which a medal character with a Danger pattern appears), both suggestion effects can be given meaning, and meaningless suggestion effects can be reduced. At the same time, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to play.

In addition, for example, the condition B as a specific condition may be satisfied in the case of "when the big hit lottery is not won over the 500 times decorative symbol variation display game (= so-called 500 times addiction)". That is, the player may consider canceling the game if he / she continues to lose the big hit lottery for a long time, but in such a case, he / she is upgraded until he / she wins the next big hit lottery after exceeding 500 addictions. By making it easier to obtain the information, it is possible to maintain the motivation to play until the next big hit game.

This effect is achieved not only by the configuration in which the set value suggestion effect 1 as a suggestion effect can be executed for each decorative symbol variation display game as in this example, but also by the specific image effect displayed after the jackpot ends. It can also be obtained by configuration.
That is, after the big hit game that was won after being addicted 500 times, the player's motivation to play is motivated by setting a setting value suggestion effect that can (or is easy to obtain) the above-mentioned upgraded information. It can be maintained until the next big hit game.

<10. Suggestion production about big hit>

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a suggestion effect (preliminary effect described above) regarding a big hit can be appropriately performed. The suggestion effect regarding the jackpot is an effect that allows it to be inferred whether or not the player who plays the game machine 1 has won the big hit lottery performed by the game machine 1.

[10-1. Type of production]

A type of suggestion effect regarding a jackpot that can be executed in the game machine 1 in the present embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit suggestion effect”) will be described (FIG. 120).
First, as shown in FIG. 120, the jackpot suggestion effect is divided into "look-ahead / relevant" and "effect means".
The distinction by "look-ahead / relevant" indicates whether the jackpot suggestion effect is a "look-ahead notice effect" or a "preliminary notice effect in the fluctuation". The variation indicates a decorative symbol variation display game currently executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.

It should be noted that each jackpot suggestion effect is performed by using any of the effect means of "sound", "light", "liquid crystal", "movable body", and "button", as in the case of the suggestion effect related to the set value described above. It may be executed by using one effect means, or may be executed by using a plurality of effect means.
The effect of using "sound" as the effect means is a sound effect using the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46. The effect means for using "light" as the effect means is a light effect using an optical display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs. The effect of using the "liquid crystal" as the effect means is an image effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like. The production using the "movable body" as the production means is a visual production using a movable body accessory or the like. The effect of using the "button" as the effect means is an experience-type effect using the effect button 13, a wind pressure device, or the like.

[10-2. Production timing]

The timing at which the jackpot suggestion effect is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 121, the timing at which the jackpot suggestion effect is performed is performed only during "changing". In addition, in "waiting for customers" and "during big hit", the big hit suggestion effect is not executed.

The jackpot suggestion effect performed "during fluctuation" is further subdivided into timings 10 to 25. Since each timing has already been explained, detailed description is omitted.

[10-3. Production example]

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpot suggestion effects (effects 50 to 67) and the timing of execution. Each jackpot suggestion effect will be explained.

(Direction 50)

The effect 50 is a jackpot suggestion effect as a look-ahead advance notice effect performed by using the “liquid crystal” and the “button”, and is, for example, a “hold change advance notice effect”. The hold change notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started or at the timing when all the decorative symbols are stopped.
Specifically, the operation hold ball (hold icon) displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 provided in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is a different color (blue, red, yellow, etc.) from the normal color (for example, silver). ) And the special hold display mode (rainbow pattern, Danger pattern, etc.), which suggests the big hit lottery result in a specific variable display game from the next time onward. That is, in the variable display game targeted for the pending change notice effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot lottery result is likely to be won.

The specific flow of this production will be explained.
First, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the hold change notice effect can be executed. Set value information is used for this lottery. That is, it is said that the appearance probability of the effect changes according to the set value Ve.
When the lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 at a predetermined timing. At this time, an image effect such as the hold icon trembling may be performed at the same time. As a result, the player can grasp that the pending change notice effect can be executed.
Next, when the player presses the effect button 13, an image effect that changes the hold icon displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 from a normal color to a specific color, or if the color is already a specific color, further An image effect that changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation and an image effect that does not change the hold icon and maintains the original display mode of the hold icon are executed.

Whether or not to change the hold icon is determined by lottery by the effect control unit 24, for example, when drawing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the hold change notice effect. The lottery for executing the hold change notice effect may be performed at the same time as the big hit lottery for the corresponding operation hold ball is executed, or may be performed every time the special symbol change display game is started.

On the other hand, when the player does not press the effect button 13, an image effect in which the hold icon changes at a predetermined timing is executed.

Other concrete production examples can be considered. For example, the colors and display modes of the hold icons are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal colors) in descending order of expectation.
When the hold change notice effect is executed, the effect that the hold icon changes from silver to blue is first executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, an image prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.
When the player presses the effect button 13, an image effect is performed to show how the hold icon is drawn to see if the color changes to a higher expected color. This lottery may be actually executed at this timing, or an image effect based on a predetermined lottery result may be executed.

When the lottery is won, an image effect in which the blue hold icon changes to yellow is performed, and an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is further executed. By repeating this, it is possible to execute an effect that finally changes to a rainbow image icon.
In addition, if the lottery is lost, the hold icon does not change to a color / display mode with a higher expectation, and the hold change notice effect ends.

Such an effect may be executed, for example, while the operation hold ball, which is the target of the hold change notice effect, is changed in the display position along with the digestion of the special symbol variation display game. For example, after the color of the hold icon of the hold ball of the hold display unit b1 in FIG. 4 changes from silver to blue with the execution of the hold change notice effect, the hold display unit is displayed when the execution of the next special symbol change display game is started. After the blue hold icon moves to a1, the hold change notice effect is performed again (or the previous hold change notice effect is continuously executed), and the color of the hold icon of the operation hold ball of the hold display unit a1 changes from blue. It may turn yellow.

The hold change notice effect may be executed using only the liquid crystal display device 36 without using the effect button 13 or the like.

(Direction 51)

The effect 51 is a jackpot suggestion effect as a look-ahead advance notice effect performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "movable body", and is, for example, a "special zone entry advance notice effect".
The special zone entry notice effect is an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that there is a possibility of entering the special zone effect that is executed over one or multiple special symbol variation display games. Is.
The special zone entry notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is started or at the timing when all the decorative symbols are stopped.

In the special zone, for example, the background image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from the normal one, and there is a possibility that the big hit lottery in the last special symbol variation display game of the zone has been won. This is a section for suggesting that the value is high over the previous several special symbol variation display games (that is, while entering the special zone) with a sense of expectation for the player.
If the special zone is limited to one special symbol variation display game, for example, it means that the jackpot lottery has been won after the background color is different from the usual image production in the variation display game. Notification is given to the player. Further, in one special symbol variation display game, a pseudo continuous effect accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state of the decorative symbol may be performed.

A plurality of types of effect patterns may be provided for the special zone entry notice effect. For example, it may be possible to execute a definite effect that suggests that the special zone must be entered, or even if it is possible to execute an effect that can be selected both when entering the special zone and when not entering the special zone. Good.
In addition, there may be an effect that is likely to enter the special zone or an effect that is low.
By making it possible to perform various special zone entry notice effects in this way, it is possible to provide a highly interesting production of the game.

The specific flow of production will be described. Here, an example in which the effect related to the special zone is executed over the three special symbol variation display games will be described.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery process regarding whether or not the effect can be executed. In this lottery process, a setting difference is provided in the appearance probability by referring to the set value information.
If the lottery is won, the variation display operation of the decorative symbol is started in the special symbol variation display game (first game: special zone entry notice effect), and the light effect means provided in each part of the game machine is used. At the same time as the light effect is executed, the image effect is performed in such a manner that the liquid crystal display device 36 draws a lottery as to whether or not to enter the special zone.
In addition, as in this example, when entering a special zone, the movable body accessory is used to give the player an interesting effect, and the light effect means mounted on the movable object is used to produce light emission. Further, an image effect suggesting that the special zone has been successfully entered is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the other hand, when the special zone is not entered, an image effect suggesting that the special zone entry has failed is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At the same time, a light emitting effect by the light effect means or an effect using a movable body accessory may be displayed.

After suggesting that the special zone entry was successful or unsuccessful, the first special symbol variation display game was completed, and the special symbol was stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it was out of the jackpot lottery. To. That is, the special symbol is stopped at the missed roll. At this time, on the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative design is also stopped and displayed at the outlier.
As described above, the effect executed in the special symbol variation display game as the first game described above is referred to as the "special zone entry notice effect". If the effect of failing to enter the special zone is executed, one special symbol variation display game is completed and a series of effects related to the special zone is completed.

In the next variable display game (second game: special zone entry), when the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is started, the liquid crystal display device 36 gives a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. (For example, an effect that excites whether or not a battle is won, an effect that excites whether or not a specific mission can be achieved, etc.) is executed. Then, an image including characters such as "NEXT" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed at the outlier. During the execution of this variable display game (second game) and the next variable display game (third game), a display indicating that the special zone is being entered is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Further, in the next variable display game (third game: big hit winning suggestion game), after the image production for enlivening the production is executed, the winning suggestion of the big hit lottery is finally performed by the stop mode of the decorative symbol. For example, an image effect suggesting that the jackpot lottery was won by stopping and displaying the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol with a decorative symbol representing "3", or the left symbol and the right symbol both have "3". An image effect suggesting that the big hit lottery has been lost is executed by presenting a stop mode in which the decorative symbol is represented and the middle symbol is a decorative symbol representing "2".

In addition, when the effect related to the special zone is executed over the three special symbol variation display games, the execution of the three special symbol variation display games including the variation is confirmed at the start of the effect. It is desirable to have. That is, when executing the effect related to the special zone based on the start of the special symbol variation display game regarding the next operation holding ball, it is executed on the condition that the number of operation holding balls is 3 or more (3 or 4). To. In other words, when the execution of a series of effects related to the special zone is started, the number of pending balls may be 2 or more, with the game as the first game.
This is to pre-read the information related to the winning of the big hit lottery, and to consider that the special zone entry effect is likely to be executed when the pre-read lottery result is a winning. It is clear to the player that the expected winning value is low even if a series of productions starting from the special zone entry notice production as described above are executed for the special symbol variation display game that cannot be read ahead even if the prize is not even won. This is because it is not possible to produce a game that enhances the interest of the game.

The above example is merely an example, and a series of effects may be realized by a pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by a pseudo-continuously variable display state of the decorative symbol.

(Direction 52)

The effect 52 is a jackpot suggestion effect as a look-ahead advance notice effect performed using the “liquid crystal”, and is, for example, a “countdown advance notice effect”. The countdown notice effect is a notice effect that is executed over a plurality of special symbol variation display games. Further, it may be executed together with a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays executed during one special symbol variation display game. In this case, the countdown notice effect is completed in one special symbol variation display game.

Execution of countdown notice effect When a lottery is won, an image effect is performed in which a predetermined numerical value (for example, "2") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a count value in a specific symbol variation display game. The count value is subtracted each time the special symbol variation display game is executed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and when the count value becomes "0", an image effect suggesting the jackpot lottery result is executed. To.
In the specific symbol variation display game where the count value display is "0", in addition to the image production that suggests the big hit lottery result, other effects such as the production that develops into the first type super reach and the second type super reach It may be configured to be done.

Further, it is not necessary to continue the countdown notice effect until the count value becomes "0". For example, after the count value display becomes "1", an image effect indicating that the countdown notice effect is not continued is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It may be executed on the device 36 to end the countdown notice effect.
By making it possible to execute such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being paid only to the special symbol variation display game in which the count value is "0" when the countdown notice effect occurs. Even in the middle of the count value being "1" or "2", the game can be played with the expectation that the production will continue, and the game interest can be improved.

The specific flow of production will be described.
The effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the countdown notice effect can be executed in response to the reception of the hold addition command. In this lottery, the set value information is not referred to. That is, the lottery is won with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
After winning the lottery for whether or not the countdown notice effect can be executed, the effect control unit 24 determines the initial value of the count value in consideration of the number of balls on hold. For example, the number of operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball increased this time is set to "3", and the initial value of the count value is determined to be "2".

With the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of balls on hold for operation becomes "2", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified that the count value is "2" together with the character image, and a countdown notice effect is produced. An image effect is executed to notify the player that the execution has started.

Furthermore, with the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of balls on hold for operation becomes "1", the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified that the count value is "1", and the countdown notice effect continues. An image effect indicating that the game is being performed is executed.

Then, with the start of the next special symbol variation display game, the number of balls on hold for operation becomes "0", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is notified that the count value is "0", and a countdown notice effect is produced. Upon completion, the winning result of the big hit lottery will be notified on the liquid crystal display device 36. Specifically, along with the stop display of the special symbol variation display game, an image effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a stop mode (or a stop mode indicating that the decorative symbol has won the big hit lottery). Is executed.

As a variation of the effect, a plurality of types of initial count values may be prepared. Further, the winning expectation may be different for each initial value of the count value.

(Direction 53)

The effect 53 is a jackpot suggestion effect as a look-ahead advance notice effect performed by using the “liquid crystal” and the “button”, and is, for example, a “chance eye advance notice effect”.
The chance eye notice effect can be executed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation display game is started, at the time of low speed fluctuation, at the timing of high speed fluctuation, or at the timing of stopping all symbols.

The "low-speed fluctuation" is the timing during execution of the symbol fluctuation display game having a relatively long fluctuation time such as the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 12s" and "normal fluctuation 8s", and is per unit time. Refers to the state where the game digestion speed is low. Such fluctuations are likely to be performed, for example, when the number of pending balls is small.
Further, "at the time of high-speed fluctuation" is a timing during execution of a symbol fluctuation display game having a relatively short fluctuation time such as "normal fluctuation 4s" and "normal fluctuation 6s" described above, and is per unit time. Refers to the state where the game digestion speed is high. Such fluctuations are likely to be performed, for example, when the number of pending balls is large.

An example of a specific flow of production will be described.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 executes a lottery for whether or not to execute the chance eye notice effect. When this lottery is won, the effect control unit 24 makes the chance eye notice effect appear.
Specifically, a decorative symbol variation display game in which the decorative symbol varies on the liquid crystal display device 36 is started. On the liquid crystal display device 36, the left symbol (during variable display), the middle symbol (during variable display), and the right symbol (during variable display) are displayed, and characters and pictures prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 are displayed as images. Displayed inside.

When the player presses the effect button 13, for example, the stop display of the left symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (left symbol (during stop display), middle symbol (during variable display), right symbol (during variable display)), characters or the like prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 are further added. included.

When the player further presses the effect button 13 in response to the suggestion from the image effect, the stop display of the right symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36 on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, there is an image effect including a left symbol (during stop display), a middle symbol (during variable display), a right symbol (during stop display), and characters prompting the pressing of the effect button 13. Will be executed.

When the player presses the effect button 13 for the third time based on the image effect, an image effect for stopping and displaying the middle symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, the color of each decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed suggests to the player whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won.

For example, the left design is a decorative design that imitates the blue character "2", the middle design is a decorative design that imitates the blue character "8", and the right design is a decorative design that imitates the blue character "6". In the case of, since all three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are decorative symbols that imitate blue characters, the degree of expectation regarding the operation hold ball that will be used in the symbol variation display game after this is higher than usual. Is suggested to the player.

In addition, the left design is a decorative design that imitates the red character "5", the middle design is a decorative design that imitates the red character "1", and the right design is a decorative design that imitates the red character "7". If it is, the three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are all decorative symbols that imitate the red characters, so the expectation for the operation hold ball that will be used in the symbol variation display game after this is higher than usual. Is suggested to the player. For example, it is said that the decorative design in red characters has a higher degree of expectation than the decorative design in blue characters.

It should be noted that the high degree of expectation may be suggested by the order in which the decorative symbols are stopped. For example, in the above, an example in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed in this order has been described. The mode in which the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol are stopped and displayed in this order may be configured to have a higher degree of expectation than this stop mode.

The chance eye notice effect is configured to appear with a certain probability regardless of the set value.

(Direction 54)

The effect 54 is a jackpot suggestion effect in the fluctuation performed using "light", and is, for example, a "lamp notice effect at the time of winning".
The lamp advance notice effect at the time of winning is executed at the timing when the number of balls on hold for operation increases due to winning.

The specific flow of production will be described.
If an increase in the number of pending balls due to a new winning occurs while a special symbol variation display game for a winning ball is being executed, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not to execute the lamp advance effect at the time of winning. In this lottery, the set value Ve is referred to. That is, the appearance probability of the effect differs depending on the set value Ve.

By winning the lottery, the lamp notice effect at the time of winning is executed. In this lottery process, information on whether or not the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a big hit is referred to. That is, when the special symbol variation display game currently being executed is a big hit, it is easy to execute the lamp advance notice effect at the time of winning.

When it is decided to execute the winning lamp advance notice effect, the light effect for lighting the specific light display device 45a is executed as the winning lamp advance notice effect.

When the light display device 45a is turned on at the timing when the number of balls on hold for operation increases due to winning, as described above, the lamp notice at the time of winning suggests the degree of expectation for the special symbol fluctuation display game currently changing. In addition to executing the effect, it may be possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that there is a high degree of expectation for the increased number of reserved balls.

Further, those effects may appear in the same manner. In this case, the player who recognizes the light effect recognizes that the winning expectation of the special symbol variation display game currently changing is high, and the special symbol variation display game currently changing is not a big hit. Even if it is off, it is possible to have a sense of expectation about the reserved ball that triggered the execution of the production. That is, it is possible to obtain a feeling of expectation twice with one production, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Direction 55)

The effect 55 is a jackpot suggestion effect in the fluctuation performed using the “sound”, “light”, and “liquid crystal”, and is, for example, the “hold change notice effect”.
The pending change notice effect is at the start of fluctuation, at low speed fluctuation, at high speed fluctuation, at the time of stopping the first symbol when one of the decorative symbols is stopped, the second pseudo-ream, the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth pseudo-ream. It is said that it can be executed at the timing.

If the lottery for executing the hold change notice effect is won, the color, pattern, shape, etc. of the icon of the game currently being held hold K currently used for the game displayed above the icon of the seat J shown in FIG. 4 will be displayed. By changing, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the possibility of winning the big hit lottery in the fluctuation is higher than usual.

Here, the flow of the production will be described by giving an example in which the pending change notice production is executed in conjunction with the pseudo continuous production. The colors and display modes of the hold icons are rainbow, red, orange, yellow, blue, and silver (normal colors) in descending order of expectation.
First, when the special symbol variation display game is started, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the effect can be executed. In this lottery, since the set value information is referred to, the pending change notice effect has an appearance probability according to the value of the set value Ve.
When the lottery for whether or not the effect can be executed is won, the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the hold icon is changed from silver (normal color) to blue. At the same time, an effect of illuminating a specific light display device 45a in blue, which is the same color as the hold icon, is executed, and an effect of outputting a sound effect suggesting that the hold icon has changed to a high expected value from the sound generator 46a is output. Is executed.

Subsequently, after the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is temporarily stopped, the hold icon changes from blue to yellow when it is changed again by the second pseudo continuous effect. Is executed. At the same time, the effect of the light display device 45a and the sound generator 46a is also executed.

After the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is set as a pseudo second stop display, the hold icon changes from yellow to red when it is changed again by the third pseudo continuous effect. Image production is executed. At the same time, the effect of the light display device 45a and the sound generator 46a is also executed.

Further, after the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is set as a pseudo third stop display, the hold icon changes from red to rainbow when it is changed again by the fourth pseudo continuous effect. A changing image effect is performed. At the same time, the effect of the light display device 45a and the sound generator 46a is also executed.

By performing such an effect, the player can be expected to be notified that the big hit lottery has been won after the fourth pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

(Direction 56)

The effect 56 is a jackpot suggestion effect in the fluctuation performed by using the “movable body” and the “button”, and is, for example, a “button vibration notice effect”.
The button vibe notice effect is, for example, an effect executed in parallel with the reach effect executed when two of the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
With the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not to execute the button vibe notice effect with reference to the set value information. That is, the effect appears with a probability according to the set value.
After the special symbol variation display game is started, the first, second, and third symbols are variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, if there is a high possibility that the jackpot lottery for the change has been won, the effect may be performed during the change display of the three decorative symbols.
For example, if the previous execution possibility lottery is won, the button vibration notice effect is executed.
Specifically, the moving body accessory is vibrated to visually arouse the expected feeling, and the effect button 13 is vibrated to experience the high expected value.

Further, in the liquid crystal display device 36, the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed together with the execution of the button vibration notice effect. At this time, two patterns are provided for the stop mode of the first symbol and the second symbol. One is a pattern in which the decorative symbols of the first symbol and the second symbol are the same, and the reach effect is continuously executed when the button vibe notice effect ends.
The other is a pattern in which the decorative symbols of the first symbol and the second symbol are different, and the variation ends with the stop display of the third symbol without executing the reach effect.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of vibration patterns of the movable body accessory and the effect button 13 may be prepared, and the selection probability may be changed depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery is won. Specifically, the vibration pattern A may be easily selected when it is won, and the vibration pattern B may be easily selected when it is lost. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly interesting production of the game.

(Direction 57)

The effect 57 is a jackpot suggestion effect in the fluctuation performed by using the “liquid crystal” and the “movable body”, and is, for example, a “movable body fanning notice effect”.
The movable body fanning notice production is, for example, in a configuration capable of executing a highly reliable production that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the big hit lottery by moving the movable body, the highly reliable movable body production is performed. It is a production that is executed before it is executed. This effect can be performed, for example, with a reach effect.
For example, the movable body fanning notice effect is an effect of vibrating the movable body, and a pattern for executing the above-mentioned highly reliable movable body effect and a pattern for not executing the movable body fanning notice effect are provided. .. That is, the movable body fanning notice production is considered to be a production that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the production will develop into a highly reliable production.

Specifically, the flow of production will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery for whether or not the movable body fanning notice effect can be executed and a lottery for whether or not the movable body effect with high reliability can be executed. In this lottery, the winning probability differs according to the set value Ve by referring to the set value information.
The result of the lottery is pattern A, in which both effects are performed and the player is notified that the big hit lottery result has been won, and the player is informed that both effects are performed but the big hit lottery result is lost. It is divided into a pattern B that executes the effect of notifying, a pattern C that executes the movable body fanning notice effect but does not develop into a highly reliable movable body effect, and a pattern D that does not execute either of the effects.

Here, pattern A will be described as an example.
After the special symbol variation display game is started, the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, an effect of vibrating the movable body accessory is executed, and an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as if a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not the movable body effect is developed with high reliability.

Subsequently, after the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 with the same decorative symbol and reach the reach state, an image effect suggesting that the effect is developed is executed, and the movable body accessory is used. It is highly possible that a high-reliability effect using the above (for example, an effect in which two movable objects are combined or separated) is executed, and a big hit lottery is won on the liquid crystal display device 36. The image effect indicating is executed.

Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, all of the first to third symbols are stopped and displayed with decorative symbols imitating the same numbers, so that an image effect indicating that the big hit lottery has been won is executed, and the role of a movable body is executed. Even for things, a production that suggests winning is executed.

(Direction 58)

The effect 58 is a jackpot suggestion effect in the fluctuation performed using “light”, and is, for example, an “illumination flash notice effect”.
The illumination flash notice effect is an effect of causing the illumination panel mounted on the game machine to emit light in a predetermined pattern. The illumination panel includes, for example, a rectangular light guide plate and a light emitting portion arranged at the edge of the light guide plate, and the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the inside of the light guide plate and moves forward at a predetermined position. It is formed so that a predetermined pattern emerges by being reflected toward it. That is, the illumination flash notice effect is an effect of causing the player to visually recognize a predetermined pattern by causing the light emitting unit to emit light.
The Illumination Flash notice effect can be performed along with the reach effect.

The flow of production will be explained concretely.
Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the illumination flash notice effect can be executed. In this lottery, the winning probability differs according to the set value Ve by referring to the set value information.

When the execution possibility lottery is won, the first and second symbols are stopped on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reach effect is executed, and the light emitting part of the illumination panel is made to emit light to make a predetermined pattern appear on the illumination panel. Illumination flash notice production is executed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the possibility of winning the big hit lottery is higher than usual.

The illumination panel can form a reflecting portion so as to reflect only light emitted from a specific direction forward. Therefore, the reflection portion that reflects the light emitted from the left-right end portion of the illumination panel in the forward direction is arranged so as to form a pattern A, and the light emitted from the vertical end portion is reflected forward. By arranging the portions so as to form the pattern B, a plurality of types of patterns can be made to emerge on the illumination panel.
By using such an illumination panel, it is possible to distinguish between a highly reliable illumination flash advance notice effect and a low reliability illumination flash advance notice effect.

It is also possible to express the high and low reliability by preparing a plurality of types of flash patterns. For example, it is possible to express a high-reliability effect by displaying a flash pattern that blinks the illumination panel at a high frequency, and to express a low-reliability effect by displaying a flash pattern that blinks at a low frequency. Is.
In addition, high or low reliability may be expressed by changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit.

(Direction 59)

The effect 59 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using "sound", "liquid crystal", and "button", and is, for example, a "telephone notice effect".
Here, a notice effect is performed using a "telephone", which is an important item appearing in the theme of the game machine 1. Therefore, it may be a notice effect using other important items according to the theme of the game machine 1. For example, if the game machine 1 has a soccer theme, a "soccer ball notice effect" using a "soccer ball" may be executed.

The telephone notice effect can be performed together with the reach effect. For example, after the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the reach effect is executed, an image effect showing the appearance of an incoming call is executed, and the sound generator 46a of the telephone is used. The ringtone is output as a sound effect, and an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The flow of the production will be explained with a concrete example.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 executes a lottery for whether or not to execute the telephone notice effect.
When the lottery is won, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 for the first symbol and the second symbol, and after the reach effect is executed, the onomatopoeia of the characterized ringtone is displayed. The ringtone is output by the sound generator 46a while producing an image.
After that, an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

When the effect button 13 is pressed by the player, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and an image effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won is performed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

In the effect 59, the winning probability of the executeability lottery differs depending on the set value Ve. For example, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability of the lottery. Therefore, it can be inferred that the higher the frequency of appearance of the effect 59, the higher the set value Ve.

(Direction 60)

The effect 60 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using the “liquid crystal”, and is, for example, a “background change advance notice effect”.
The background change notice effect can be executed at the timing of, for example, the start of the special symbol variation display game, the low speed variation, the high speed variation, or the stop of the first symbol when one of the decorative symbols is stopped.

Specifically, it is an image effect in which the background image in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is different from the usual one.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The specific flow of production will be described.
Along with the start of the special symbol change display game, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not the background change notice effect can be executed. If the image is won, an image effect is performed in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner on a specific background image. For example, it is usually a background image showing the background during the daytime, but when the lottery for whether or not to execute the background change notice effect is won, it is used as the background image showing the background in the evening.

Other effects (for example, reach effects) may be executed together with the stop display of the second symbol.
Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the execution timing of the background change notice effect. For example, it may be considered that the background change notice effect is executed when the first symbol is stopped, rather than the background change notice effect is executed when the special symbol variation display game is started.

(Direction 61)

The effect 61 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using the “liquid crystal” and the “movable body”, and is, for example, a “step-up notice effect”.
The step-up notice effect can be executed at the timing of, for example, the start of the special symbol variation display game, the low-speed fluctuation, the high-speed fluctuation, or the stop of the first symbol.

In the step-up notice effect, the image effect up to a predetermined stage is executed among the image effects prepared in a plurality of stages. Then, it is suggested that the big hit lottery was won by executing the image production at the final stage. Alternatively, it may be configured to suggest that winning the jackpot lottery is rich.

Such an effect may be executed over the above-mentioned plurality of timings.
This will be described in detail.
First, based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect. When the lottery is won, a lottery is also executed as to what kind of step-up notice effect is to be executed. For example, as a step-up notice effect, a first stage effect to a fourth stage effect are provided.
At the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol is actually started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the step-up notice effect is executed, and the first stage image effect is executed.

Subsequently, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the second stage image effect is executed at the timing when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.
Further, the third stage image effect is executed at the timing when the third pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the fourth pseudo-continuous effect is executed at the timing when the fourth pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Four stages (final stage) of image production are executed.
As a result, the player is notified that there is a high possibility that the big hit lottery has been won.
After that, the first to third symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to notify that the big hit lottery has been won.

The step-up notice effect has a certain appearance probability (probability of winning the execution enablement lottery) regardless of the set value Ve.

(Direction 62)

The effect 62 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using the “light”, “liquid crystal”, and “button”, and is, for example, a “notice effect when the symbol is stopped”.
The symbol stop notice effect can be executed, for example, at the timing of the first symbol stop.

The specific flow of production will be described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery for whether or not to execute the advance notice effect when the symbol is stopped is executed. If the lottery is won, a notice effect when the symbol is stopped appears. This effect is executed with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

Along with the start of the special symbol variation display game, the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the light emission control by the light display device 45a is executed at the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed.

When the player presses the effect button 13, the liquid crystal display device 36 stops the second symbol to perform a fanning effect as to whether or not the reach effect is executed.
When the user is suggested to execute the reach effect, a symbol similar to the first symbol is stopped and displayed as the second symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and one of the reach effects appears.
On the other hand, when it is suggested to the user that the reach effect is not executed, a symbol different from the first symbol is stopped and displayed as the second symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and then the third symbol is also stopped and displayed.

(Direction 63)

The effect 63 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using "sound" and "light", and is, for example, a "roulette notice effect".
The roulette notice effect is an effect that can be performed in combination with the pseudo-continuous effect, and appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.
The flow of roulette notice production will be explained with an example.

Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, an executeability lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the roulette notice effect.
Here, it is assumed that the execution of the effect is decided.
On the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbol variation display game is started, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at one end, and then the pseudo-ream is started by restarting. The roulette notice production is started in response to the start of the pseudo-ren.
In the game machine 1, for example, a plurality of shaped objects having different shapes are formed around the game area 3a. Each model has, for example, a round shape, a star shape, and a flower shape, and each of them is formed so as to be able to emit light in a different color.

In the roulette notice effect, after the round, star, and flower-shaped objects emit light in order, only a specific model (for example, a star-shaped object) emits light, and the sound generator 46a performs the effect. A sound effect is output.
It is configured so that only the modeled object according to the high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery will finally emit light, for example, the highest expectation when the flower-shaped modeled object finally emits light. It is said to be a degree.

After the start of the second pseudo-ream, each model is emitted in sequence, and then the star-shaped model is emitted with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the second pseudo-ream.
After the start of the third pseudo-ream, each of the shaped objects is sequentially emitted, and then the star-shaped shaped object is emitted again with the stop display of the decorative symbol in the third pseudo-ream.
Further, with the start of the fourth pseudo-ream, each of the shaped objects is sequentially emitted, and then the flower-shaped shaped object is emitted with the stop display of the decorative pattern in the fourth pseudo-ream.
As a result, the player can experience the roulette notice effect according to the progress of the pseudo-ream effect, and at the same time, the player can produce the effect with a sense of expectation as to which modeled object will be in a light emitting state together with the stop display of the pseudo-ream. You can experience it. That is, it is possible to provide a highly interesting production of the game.

Other examples of roulette notice production are also described.
Reach effects are set for each of the round, star, and flower-shaped objects.
Then, the reach effect corresponding to the finally emitted light is executed. That is, the reach production corresponding to the flower shape is considered to be a reach production with a high degree of expectation, and when the roulette notice production appears, the player has a high degree of expectation because the flower-shaped model emits light. It is possible to experience the production while expecting the production to be executed.

In addition, there may be prepared a mode in which none of the shaped objects emits light and the reach effect is not executed.

(Direction 64)

The effect 64 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using "light" and "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "group notice effect".
The group notice effect can be executed, for example, at the timing of stopping the second symbol. That is, it may be executed together with the reach effect.

Specifically, the flow of production will be described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not the group notice effect can be executed. If the lottery is won, the execution of the group notice effect is decided.

After the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, the stop display of the second symbol is executed following the stop display of the first symbol. At this timing, a group notice effect in which a large number of specific characters are displayed is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the player is notified that the possibility of winning the big hit lottery is higher than usual. Further, as a part of the group notice effect, light emission control by the light display device 45a is executed.
After the group notice effect is executed, the reach effect using the liquid crystal display device 36 or the like is executed.

It should be noted that the high and low expectations may be expressed by the difference in the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in the group notice effect.

(Direction 65)

The effect 65 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using the “liquid crystal” and the “button”, and is, for example, a “SP development notice effect”.
The SP development notice production appears when performing a fanning production that fuels whether or not it develops into a first-class super reach.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the SP development notice effect can be executed.
Next, the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. Both the first symbol and the second symbol have the same decorative symbol, and the reach effect is developed on the liquid crystal display device 36. At this time, the SP development notice production is also executed. Specifically, an image effect for inciting whether or not to develop into a first-class super reach is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

In this fanning effect, for example, an image effect in which the main character and the enemy character fight is executed, and at the same time, a notification prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed as the image effect.
When the player presses the effect button 13 in accordance with this notification, an image effect in which either the main character or the enemy character wins is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Here, when the image effect in which the main character wins is executed, the image effect that develops into the first type super reach is further executed. This makes it possible for the player to know that there is a high possibility that the jackpot lottery has been won.

(Direction 66)

The effect 66 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using "sound" and "liquid crystal", and is, for example, a "SP title notice effect".
The SP title notice production is a production performed using the display mode such as the color and pattern of the title of the super reach displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 when it develops into the first type super reach or the second type super reach. is there.
This effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

The flow of production will be specifically described.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the SP title notice effect can be executed.
Next, the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed. If the first symbol and the second symbol are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol, and after the reach effect is executed, the first type super reach has a higher expectation, the first type super reach. The title image of is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

The title notice production suggests the possibility of winning the big hit lottery depending on the mode of the title image at this time.
For example, if the title is formed of gold letters, the expectation is higher than that of the title formed of red letters. In addition, if it is a rainbow pattern or a Danger pattern, it is said that the expectation is even higher than that of gold.
Further, when the title image is displayed, the sound effect by the sound generator 46a is output. A plurality of sound effects may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on which sound sound is output.

(Direction 67)

The effect 67 is a jackpot suggestion effect performed using "light", "liquid crystal", and "button", and is, for example, a "promotion effect fanning notice effect".
The promotion effect fanning notice effect is an effect (promotion effect) that suggests whether or not to promote from a jackpot type with a low advantage to a jackpot type with a high advantage for the player after the jackpot type is notified to the player. ..
For the player, it is advantageous that the promotion effect is executed after the notification that the jackpot of the normal 4R or the normal 6R has been won is given. Further, when the promotion effect is executed, the situation is further advantageous for the player by being changed (promoted) to a jackpot type such as probability variation 6R or probability variation 10R.

The flow of production will be explained concretely.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery for whether or not the promotion effect fanning notice effect can be executed. After winning the lottery, the decorative symbol variation display game is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol. Various effects can be executed until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

After the decorative symbols having the same three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed and the player is notified that the big hit lottery has been won, the promotion effect fanning notice effect can be executed based on the previous execution possibility lottery. When this effect is executed, the player can be expected to be promoted to a jackpot type with a high advantage. Internally, it is determined in advance whether the jackpot game to be executed from now on is a low-advantageous or high-advantageous game. "Promotion" here means that it becomes clear to the player that the type of jackpot game, which was uncertain for the player, has a high degree of advantage.

In the promotion effect fanning notice effect, the player is notified that the promotion effect is executed by illuminating, for example, a light emitting unit provided on the effect button 13 as the light display device 45a. In response to the player pressing the effect button 13, an image effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to give a feeling of expectation as to which of the highly advantageous decorative symbol and the low decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. .. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, an effect (promotion effect) is executed in which the decorative pattern is re-variated to encourage the player to change from the already notified jackpot type to a more advantageous jackpot type. The result is notified. As a result, the jackpot type confirmed at the time of winning is correctly notified to the player.

The promotion effect fanning notice effect appears with a certain probability regardless of the set value Ve.

<11. Other productions>

In addition to the suggestion effect regarding the set value and the suggestion effect regarding the jackpot, there may be an effect provided in the game machine 1.
For example, although no suggestion is made regarding the set value Ve or the jackpot, a lively effect may be executed.

(Direction 80)
The production 80 is a lively production performed using the “liquid crystal”. Specifically, it is an effect that can be executed at a timing (timing 10) in which the number of pending balls increases by winning a prize.
Based on the start of the special symbol variation display game, a lottery for whether or not to execute the effect 80 is performed, and if the lottery is won, an image effect in which a passerby crosses from left to right is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36. ..

In addition, it may be possible to execute a similar effect as a suggestion effect regarding a set value or a suggestion effect regarding a big hit. For example, an image effect in which a passerby crosses from left to right may be a lively effect, and an image effect in which a passerby crosses from right to left may be feasible as a suggestion effect regarding a jackpot.
In this way, by setting a production similar to the suggestion effect regarding the set value and the suggestion effect regarding the jackpot as a lively effect, it is possible to improve the game entertainment even if the lively effect does not suggest the set value or the jackpot.

<12. About the production where the appearance probability differs depending on the set value>

As described above, among the effects mounted on the game machine 1 in the present embodiment, those having different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve are included. There are several possible examples of effects in which the appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve. Here, each example will be described.

[12-1. First example]

In the first example of an effect in which the appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve (hereinafter, simply referred to as "setting difference first example"), the effect appears because the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the corresponding effect differs for each set value Ve. The probabilities are different.
For example, an example of the jackpot probability according to each set value Ve is shown below.

・ Set value 1: 1/180
・ Setting value 2: 1/170
・ Set value 3: 1/160
・ Set value 4: 1/150
・ Set value 5: 1/140
・ Set value 6: 1/120

Further, an example of the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for a certain effect X, that is, the probability that the effect X is executed is shown below.

・ Set value 1: 1/8 when the big hit lottery is won
・ Setting value 2: 1/7 of the big hit lottery
・ Setting value 3: 1/6 of the big hit lottery
・ Set value 4: 1/5 of the big hit lottery
・ Set value 5: 1/4 of the time when the big hit lottery was won
・ Setting value 6: 1/3 of the time when the big hit lottery was won

The appearance probability of the effect X per one fluctuation (one game) is calculated from these numerical values as follows.

・ Set value 1: 1/1440
・ Set value 2: 1/1190
-Set value 3: 1/960
・ Set value 4: 1/750
・ Set value 5: 1/560
・ Set value 6: 1/360

As a result, it can be estimated that the set value Ve is higher as the game machine 1 has more appearances of the effect X.
In addition, the player can estimate the set value Ve by grasping the number of times that the effect X appears with respect to the number of times the big hit lottery is won.

[12-2. Second example]

In the second example of the effect in which the appearance probability differs depending on the set value Ve (hereinafter, simply referred to as "setting difference second example"), the winning probability of the execution possibility lottery for the effect is constant regardless of the set value Ve. In the first place, the appearance probability of the effect X is different because the winning probability in the big hit lottery is different depending on the set value Ve.
For example, the jackpot probability according to each set value Ve is the same as in the first example. In addition, the probability of winning the execution enablement lottery for the effect X is 1/5 when the big hit lottery is won regardless of the set value Ve.
At this time, the appearance probability of the effect X per one fluctuation (one game) can be calculated as follows.

・ Set value 1: 1/900
・ Set value 2: 1/850
・ Set value 3: 1/800
・ Set value 4: 1/750
・ Set value 5: 1/700
・ Set value 6: 1/600

As a result, it can be estimated that the set value Ve is higher as the game machine 1 has more appearances of the effect X.
As in the first example, the set value Ve cannot be estimated even if the number of times the effect X appears with respect to the number of times the big hit lottery is won.

<13. Example of selective implementation on a game machine>

The suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect regarding the above-mentioned set values may be all implemented in one game machine, or may be partially selected and implemented in one game machine.
Here, an example in which a part of each of the above-mentioned suggestion effects is selected and implemented on one game machine will be described.

In the game machine 1 in this example, each effect is selectively mounted from the above-mentioned effects 1 to 21, effects 50 to 67, and effect 80.
Specifically, the game machine 1 includes the production 1, the production 4, the production 15, the production 20, the production 50, the production 52, the production 53, the production 54, the production 58, the production 62, the production 63, the production 64, and the production 65. A production 66, a production 67, and a production 80 are implemented. In the following description, this gaming machine will be referred to as gaming machine 1A.
Regarding the effect 20, in the above-described example, the timings that can be executed are each timing in the decorative symbol variation display game in the time saving state. That is, as an example, of the timings 01 to 42, the timings 10 to 25 in the time saving state can be executed.
The game machine 1A in this example is configured so that the effect 20 can be executed only at the timing 10 as the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state.

Each effect mounted on the game machine 1A is shown in FIG. 122.
The classification of the effects in FIG. 122 is defined as "set value change suggestion effect", "set value suggestion effect", "big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference)", "big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference)", and "lively effect". ..

It is possible to estimate the set value Ve, such as those with different appearance probabilities depending on the set value Ve, those with different effect modes depending on the set value Ve, or those whose effect mode is likely to differ depending on the set value Ve. It is a directing.
The effects with different settings are referred to as "set value suggestion effect" and "big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference)".
In addition, the effects with no setting difference are referred to as "set value change suggestion effect", "big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference)", and "lively effect".
It should be noted that the "setting value change suggestion effect" may be an effect having a setting difference.

In the following description, the setting value change suggestion effect is "effect A", the set value suggestion effect is "effect B", the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) is "effect C", and the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference). ) May be described as "Direction D", and a lively production that is neither a jackpot suggestion production nor a suggestion production regarding a set value may be described as "Production E".

Here, the grouping of the classification of each production will be described. The effect (effect 80) that is neither a jackpot suggestion effect nor a suggestion effect related to the set value is excluded here.
First, as one of the grouping, it is conceivable to distinguish between a suggestion effect that does not suggest a big hit and a suggestion effect that suggests a big hit.
In this case, "setting value change suggestion effect" and "set value suggestion effect" are provided as effects that only suggest the set value without suggesting the big hit.
Further, as for the effect of suggesting the big hit, "big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference)" and "big hit suggestion effect (without setting difference)" are provided.

Further, as another classification method, it is conceivable to distinguish between a suggestion effect including a suggestion regarding the set value and a suggestion effect not including the suggestion regarding the set value.
In this case, "set value change suggestion effect", "set value suggestion effect", and "big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference)" are provided as suggestion effects including suggestions regarding the set value.
Further, as a suggestion effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the set value, a "big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference)" is provided.

[13-1. About the appearance timing of the production]

The classification of the appearance timing of various effects has been described using the above-mentioned timings 01 to 42, but here, a different classification will be used for description.
Specifically, each timing at which the production can appear is classified into "waiting for customers", "pre-reading", "changing (first half)", "changing (second half)", and "big hit".

"Waiting for customers" is a period equivalent to the above-mentioned timings 01 to 09.
"Pre-reading" is the timing at which the pre-reading notice effect can appear, and the operation hold ball (that is, undigested operation hold) that has not yet been used for executing the symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). (Ball) is the timing at which the jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game related to the operation-holding ball can be executed as the look-ahead determination process.

"Fluctuating (first half)" is a period from the start of the decorative symbol variation display game to the stop display of the second symbol (for example, the right symbol) when focusing on the decorative symbol.
Speaking of the timing described above, it is a period equivalent to timings 10 to 16.
In the following description, "changing (first half)" may be described as the first period.

"Fluctuating (second half)" means that the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the right symbol) are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol, and the third symbol (for example, the middle symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. This is the period from the state in which the third symbol is set to the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, it is said that the three decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed after the decorative symbols are in the reach state.
Speaking of the timing described above, it is a period equivalent to timings 17 to 25.
In the following description, "changing (second half)" may be described as the second period.

The “big hit” is a period from the start to the end of the big hit game, and corresponds to the period of timings 26 to 42 described above.

[13-2. Waiting for customers]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effect that can be executed while waiting for the customer of the game machine 1A of the present embodiment is the effect 01 as the set value suggestion effect.
In addition, other effects are configured so that they are not executed while waiting for customers. That is, the only effect that can be executed while waiting for a customer is the effect 01.

While the set value suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for customers, the suggestion effect for suggesting a big hit is not executed, so that the game machine 1A can be configured so that the effect is difficult to be executed while waiting for customers. ..
Therefore, when the effect 01 is executed while waiting for a customer, the player can be made to recognize that it is a relatively rare case, and the player is interested in the game machine in which the effect 01 is executed. It becomes possible to arouse interest. In particular, it is possible to realize an effective production with a small number of productions as compared with a game machine in which various productions constantly appear.
It is possible to further enhance such an effect by not executing the lively effect while waiting for customers.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
It is equipped with a storage unit that stores a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A set value that can be guessed about the set value based on the appearance probability and / or the effect content, and a set value that cannot be estimated about the set value based on the appearance probability and / or the effect content. Unguessable production is feasibly provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the set value guessable effect can be displayed and the set value unguessable effect does not appear while waiting for a customer.

In addition, such a configuration can be paraphrased as follows.
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. A second effect that can estimate the height of the item, and a third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery With,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first effect can be executed and neither the second effect nor the third effect can be executed while waiting for a customer.

Further, the implementation mode of the effect is different from that shown in FIG. 122, and the game machine 1A may be configured so that the set value change suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for a customer. In that case, both the set value change suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for the customer.
If the game machine 1A has such a configuration, it is possible to estimate whether or not the set value Ve has been changed even while waiting for a customer, or to estimate the set value Ve set in the game machine 1A. Is made possible by the appearance of the production, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game machine.

Further, since the effect executed here is not a suggestion effect for the jackpot but is related to the set value Ve, the advantageous effect regarding the set value Ve for the player is provided in the game machine in which the player is not playing. When executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will play the game machine for a long time.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The setting value change suggestion effect that can estimate whether or not the set value has been changed after the last power-on operation based on the effect mode, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode, and the winning expectation of the big hit lottery The first effect, in which the height cannot be estimated, the second effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode, and the high and low expectations of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated, and the high and low of the set value based on the effect mode. It is equipped with a third effect that cannot be guessed and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated, and an effect execution means that can execute.
The effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the set value change suggestion effect and the first effect can be executed while the customer is waiting, and the second effect and the third effect cannot be executed. ..

[13-3. About pre-reading]

Of the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the look-ahead of the game machine 1A of the present embodiment are the effect 20 as the set value suggestion effect and the effect suggesting the jackpot (with a setting difference). 50 and 52, 53 as a jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference).

As for the effects that may appear during the look-ahead, the number of types of suggestive effects that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest big hits.
The "number of types of production" referred to here is to count the production of the same system as one. For example, in the case of the effect 09 described with reference to FIG. 92 described above, since three types of titles to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 are prepared, at least three patterns are prepared as the effect modes. Become. If the appearance timing is taken into consideration, the production pattern will increase further. However, in the "number of types of production", they are collectively counted as "one".
In the following description, when the effect patterns are different and each effect pattern is counted as one, it is described as "total number of effect modes".

During the look-ahead, expectations for the operation-holding ball are increasing, and even if the set value suggestion effect is executed in such a state, it is highly possible that the player has won the big hit lottery for the operation-holding ball. There is a risk of misunderstanding.
Therefore, in order to prevent such a misunderstanding, the player was aware of the number of types of suggestion effects that suggest big hits rather than the number of types of suggestion effects that do not suggest big hits. It is possible to increase the possibility that the production will be performed.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
A decorative symbol display means for proactively executing a variable display operation of a decorative symbol in association with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol.
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means, and
The storage order is specified up to a predetermined maximum number of reserved storages until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is used to execute the variable display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means. With a hold storage means that holds and stores as an operation hold ball,
The number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls, is notified by displaying a hold icon for the number of reserved balls.
A pre-reading determination means for pre-reading the winning of the big hit lottery regarding the operating-holding ball at a predetermined timing before the operation-holding ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol.
A look-ahead notice effect effect means for performing a look-ahead notice effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon for the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead determination.
It is provided with a storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
As the pre-reading notice effect, the first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode. At least one of the second effect in which the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated, and the third effect in which the high and low of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated. With
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is b (). b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is c (c is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a number smaller than (b + c).

In addition, another configuration example that achieves the above effects is shown below.
A setting means that can set a setting value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a setting means that can set a setting value.
A display means capable of variablely displaying an effect symbol composed of three symbol groups that fluctuate according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state.
A type 1 effect suggesting the set value set in the game machine and a type 2 effect suggesting the lottery result are provided.
Based on the winning of the lottery result regarding the operation-holding ball before being subjected to the variable display, the pre-reading advance notice effect for the operation-holding ball is executed.
Let t be the second type effects that can be executed during the look-ahead period.
A game machine characterized in that t> s ≧ 0 is established.

In a state where the relationship between the variable s and the variable t is established, the first-class effect may include an effect (effect a) that mainly suggests a set value for the purpose of the effect. In addition, the second type of production mainly suggests the winning of the lottery result for the purpose of the production, and the selection ratio differs depending on the set value (effect b), and the purpose of the production is mainly related to the winning of the lottery result. The effect (effect c) that makes a suggestion and has the same selection ratio regardless of the set value may be included.
That is, when the variable s is the number of effects a and the variable t is the sum of the number of effects b and the number of effects c, t> s ≧ 0 may be established.

As a result, during the look-ahead, more effects whose main purpose is to suggest the jackpot lottery result can be executed than to those whose main purpose is to suggest the set value. As a result, a lot of productions including suggestions about big hits appear in a state where the player has high expectations for the operation holding ball, so that the player is less likely to be confused and the player's willingness to play is amplified. Effective production can be performed. Further, since it is difficult for the first type effect to appear, the processing load of the effect execution control means can be reduced and the power consumption can be reduced.
The variable t and the variable s referred to here may be the "number of types of effect" or the "total number of effect modes".

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
For the purpose of the production, the production that mainly gives suggestions regarding the set value is defined as the production a.
For the purpose of the production, the production b is mainly used to suggest the winning of the lottery result and the selection ratio is different according to the set value.
For the purpose of the production, the effect of the lottery result is mainly suggested, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The effect a is included in the type 1 effect.
The effect b and the effect c are game machines characterized in that they are included in the second type effect.

In the state where the variable s and the variable t are satisfied, the first type effect may be the effect b, and the second type effect may be c.
That is, when the variable s is the number of effects b and the variable t is the number of effects c, t> s ≧ 0 may be established.

As a result, when focusing on the effect that suggests the jackpot to be executed during pre-reading, it appears regardless of the set value, rather than the effect that makes it possible to estimate the set value so that the appearance frequency differs depending on the set value. Since more productions that do not change in frequency appear, the player can enjoy the production without considering whether it is a suggestion regarding a set value or a jackpot. Further, by configuring the first type effect so as to be difficult to appear, the processing load of the effect execution control means can be reduced and the power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, regarding the production whose main purpose is to suggest the set value, the production should be different from the production whose main purpose is to suggest the big hit, or should be unmistakable, so that the appropriate production is performed while avoiding the confusion of the player. Can be done. For example, the setting value may be casually suggested by causing a specific character image to appear in a corner or the like on the liquid crystal display device 36 during the effect of suggesting the jackpot. Further, if an effect of suggesting a big hit is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 and the player is paying attention to the liquid crystal display device 36, a light emission effect using a decorative lamp 45 or the like is casually performed. This may appeal to a player who has an advanced understanding of the game machine 1.

The variable t and the variable s referred to here may be the "number of types of effect" or the "total number of effect modes".

A configuration example of the game machine 1 that exhibits the above effects will be shown.
For the purpose of the production, the production that mainly gives suggestions regarding the set value is defined as the production a.
For the purpose of the production, the production b is mainly used to suggest the winning of the lottery result and the selection ratio is different according to the set value.
For the purpose of the production, the effect of the lottery result is mainly suggested, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The effect b is included in the type 1 effect.
The effect c is a gaming machine characterized in that it is included in the second type effect.

In a state where the above variables s and t are satisfied, the first type effect may be the effect a and the effect b, and the second type effect may be c.
That is, when the variable s is the sum of the number of effects a and the number of effects b, and the variable t is the number of effects c, t> s ≧ 0 may be established.

As a result, during the look-ahead, the effect whose main purpose is to suggest the set value, that is, the number of the effects a and b is reduced, so that the player pays more attention to whether or not the operation holding ball is a big hit. It is possible to experience the production while doing so. That is, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect without causing confusion for the player. Further, by making the configuration in which the appearance of the effect a and the effect b as the first type effect is avoided, the processing load of the effect execution control means can be reduced and the power consumption can be reduced.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 that exhibits such an effect is shown below.
For the purpose of the production, the production that mainly gives suggestions regarding the set value is defined as the production a.
For the purpose of the production, the production b is mainly used to suggest the winning of the lottery result and the selection ratio is different according to the set value.
For the purpose of the production, the effect of the lottery result is mainly suggested, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The effect a and the effect b are included in the first type effect.
The effect c is a gaming machine characterized in that it is included in the second type effect.

Some examples can be considered for the number of type 1 effects and the number of type 2 effects described above. One is to regard the productions with different appearance timings and appearance triggers as one production. That is, in other words, a similar production in which the appearance timing and the appearance trigger are the same but the production mode is slightly different, for example, a production in which the dialogue displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is different, etc. It is just a variation, and it is regarded as one production including various variations.
As a result, the balance of each effect mounted on the game machine 1 is adjusted in consideration of the number of types of effects that the player can substantially perceive as the number of effects, that is, the number of effects in which a plurality of variations are grouped together. Can be done. That is, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects that suggest the set value so that the player does not get confused, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, a balance of effects that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be achieved. It is feasible.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect will be shown.
The number of production groups with different appearance timings and / or appearance triggers is defined as the number of production groups.
The number of production variations in which the appearance timing and / or the appearance triggers are similar to each other is counted separately.
A gaming machine characterized in that t and s are the number of production groups.

As another example of the number of the first type production and the number of the second type production, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are similar, each of them is regarded as one production. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are the same, if the production mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different production. That is, the more variations of the production, the larger the number of productions.
A part of the effects having different variations is stored as common information inside the game machine 1. Therefore, by treating the effects with different variations as different effects (different effects), it is possible to realize various effects while improving the efficiency of using the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The number of production groups with different appearance timings and / or appearance triggers is defined as the number of production groups.
The number of production variations in which the appearance timing and / or the appearance triggers are similar to each other is counted separately.
A gaming machine characterized in that t and s are the number of production variations.

It should be noted that when the set value suggestion effect is executed, the game machine 1A is configured so that the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference) and the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) are always executed so as not to cause a misunderstanding. It is possible to.

Next, consider the number of production opportunities. The effect 20 in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment can be executed during the decorative symbol variation display game in the time-saving state, and can be executed in the game state other than the time-saving state as in the effects 50, 52, and 53. It has not been. That is, the effect 20 is set to have fewer execution opportunities than the effects 50, 52, and 53.
Therefore, it is possible to provide the game machine 1A in which the above-mentioned misunderstanding is unlikely to occur because there are more opportunities to execute the suggestion effect that suggests the big hit than the opportunity to execute the suggestion effect that does not give the suggestion about the big hit. Will be.

In addition, considering the number of production opportunities, it can be considered that the game machine 1A has more execution opportunities for the suggestion production that does not include the suggestion regarding the set value than for the suggestion production that includes the suggestion regarding the set value. is there. Specifically, it means that the execution opportunities of the effects 52 and 53 are more frequent than the execution opportunities of the effects 20 and 50.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because he / she does not know what the effect is, because many effects that suggest only the lottery result of the big hit regarding the operation hold ball appear. it can.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
A decorative symbol display means for proactively executing a variable display operation of a decorative symbol in association with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol.
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means, and
The storage order is specified up to a predetermined maximum number of reserved storages until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is used to execute the variable display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means. With a hold storage means that holds and stores as an operation hold ball,
The number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls, is notified by displaying a hold icon for the number of reserved balls.
A pre-reading determination means for pre-reading the winning of the big hit lottery regarding the operating-holding ball at a predetermined timing before the operation-holding ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol.
A look-ahead notice effect effect means for performing a look-ahead notice effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon for the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead determination.
It is provided with a storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
As the pre-reading notice effect, the first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode. At least one of the second effect in which the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated, and the third effect in which the high and low of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated. With
The number of types of the first effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is b (). b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is c (c is 0 or more).
(A + b) is a gaming machine characterized in that the number is c or less.

Next, a suggestion effect for suggesting a big hit will be described.
In the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, the effects 50, 52, and 53 can be executed during the look-ahead as the suggestion effect for suggesting the big hit. Among them, the number of types of the big hit suggestion effect (without setting difference) is larger than that of the big hit suggestion effect (with setting difference).
As a result, it is possible to produce more jackpot suggestion effects (no setting difference) that do not confuse whether it is a suggestion effect for the set value Ve or a win or loss of the jackpot lottery, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It becomes possible to do. In particular, as shown in FIG. 122, the number of types of effects mounted on the game machine 1A as the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) is one (effect 50), so that the player can perform the effect (effect). By understanding that the effect 50) is an effect that includes a suggestion regarding the set value Ve, it can be understood that the other effects (effects 52 and 53) are effects that only suggest the jackpot, so that the set value Ve You can enjoy the production without worrying about it.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
A decorative symbol display means for proactively executing a variable display operation of a decorative symbol in association with the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol.
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means, and
The storage order is specified up to a predetermined maximum number of reserved storages until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is used to execute the variable display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means. With a hold storage means that holds and stores as an operation hold ball,
The number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls, is notified by displaying a hold icon for the number of reserved balls.
A pre-reading determination means for pre-reading the winning of the big hit lottery regarding the operating-holding ball at a predetermined timing before the operation-holding ball is subjected to the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol.
A look-ahead notice effect effect means for performing a look-ahead notice effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon for the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead determination.
It is provided with a storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
As the pre-reading notice effect, a second effect in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery can be estimated, and the high and low of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode Equipped with at least one of the third productions that can estimate the high and low expectations of winning the big hit lottery
The number of types of the second effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is b (b is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect that can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is c (b). c is 0 or more)
A gaming machine characterized in that b is a number smaller than c.

[13-4. During fluctuation (first half)]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the fluctuation (first half) of the game machine 1A of the present embodiment are the effect 04 as the setting value change suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect (setting). There is a difference), a big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference), 62, 63, and a lively effect 80.

As for the effects that may appear during the fluctuation (first half), the number of types of suggestive effects that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest big hits.
Specifically, the number of types of suggestion effects that do not suggest big hits is only one of the set value change suggestion effects. In addition, the number of types of suggestion effects that suggest big hits is one for jackpot suggestion effects (with setting difference) and two for jackpot suggestion effects (no setting difference), for a total of three. As described above, the effect 80 that neither suggests the set value nor suggests the jackpot is excluded here.

During the fluctuation (first half), the player's interest in whether or not each advance notice effect such as the reach effect is executed has increased. If a lot of setting value suggestion effects and setting value change suggestion effects are executed in such a state, it will be an unwilling effect for a player who is highly interested in whether or not the fluctuation has won the big hit lottery. There is a risk that the attractiveness of the game machine 1A may be halved.

In the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, the number of types of suggestive effects that suggest big hits is larger than the number of types of suggestive effects that do not suggest big hits. It is said that many suggestive effects regarding the big hits of interest can appear.

An example of the configuration of such a game machine 1 will be given.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected value of winning the big hit lottery The second effect that can estimate the height of the lottery, the third effect that the high and low of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode, and the high and low of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery can be estimated, and the set value is changed based on the effect mode. Provided with an effect execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects that can be inferred from the presence or absence of
The effect executing means can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effect is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and is executed in the specific period. The number of possible types of the third effect is c (c is 0 or more), and the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that (a + d) is a smaller number than (b + c).

In particular, in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, the suggestion effect that does not suggest the big hit that appears during the fluctuation (first half) is only the effect 04 that is the set value change suggestion effect. It is sufficient for the player to confirm the setting value change suggestion effect once, and the set value change suggestion effect becomes unnecessary while the game is continued thereafter. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the set value change suggestion effect appear many times while the game is being continued, and the appearance probability may be lower than that of other suggestion effects. Actually, as described above, the effect 04 can be executed only at the time of winning, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not it appears once after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, the effects 54, 62, and 63 are configured so that they can appear many times a day, and as an opportunity to execute the effect, a suggestion about a big hit is given rather than a suggestion effect that does not give a suggestion about a big hit. There are more suggestive productions.
As a result, almost all of the effects experienced by the player during the fluctuation (first half) are considered to be suggestive effects that suggest big hits, so there is a possibility that the player may be confused as to what the suggestive effects have appeared. Is lowered.

Although the setting value change suggestion effect (for example, effect 04) is an effect in which the effect opportunity is extremely limited, it is also an important effect for determining whether or not to continue playing the game machine in which the effect appears. is there.
It is said that it is possible to motivate a long-time game by making such a production feasible even though there are few production opportunities.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment has explained that the only suggestion effect that does not suggest the jackpot that appears during the fluctuation (first half) is the effect 04, which is the set value change suggestion effect. For example, it is configured so that the set value suggestion effect does not appear during fluctuation (first half).
This makes it less likely that the player will be confused as to what suggestive effect has appeared.

An example of the configuration of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect will be given.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. The second effect that can estimate the high and low of Provided with an effect execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects that can be inferred from the presence or absence of
The effect executing means is the first in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 1 A game machine characterized in that the production is not feasible.

In addition, since there are two or more types of suggestion effects (effects 54, 62, 63) that suggest big hits, it is possible to make suggestions about big hits using various effects without becoming monotonous. It has become. That is, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.
In particular, since multiple jackpot suggestion effects (no setting difference) are implemented and the number of types of effects is the largest (two of effects 62 and 63), we are interested in winning the jackpot lottery related to the fluctuation. It is possible to produce an effective effect for the player who has it.

An example of the configuration of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect will be given.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. The second effect that can estimate the high and low of Provided with an effect execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects that can be inferred from the presence or absence of
A plurality of types of the effect executing means are used in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. A game machine characterized in that the third effect of the above can be executed.

Further, in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, a big hit suggestion is made rather than the total number of types of the set value change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the lively effect (1 piece, 0 pieces, 1 piece total 2 pieces). The total number of types of production (with setting difference) and jackpot suggestion production (without setting difference) is larger (1 or 2 for a total of 3), which is the most interesting jackpot lottery for players. There are many variations of suggestive productions about the winning of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

An example of the configuration of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect will be given.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery The second effect that can estimate the height of the game, the third effect that the high and low of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery can be estimated, and the set value change based on the effect mode At least one of the fourth effect, in which the presence or absence of the above can be estimated, and the fifth effect, in which the high and low of the set value cannot be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, can be executed. With a means of execution,
The effect executing means can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation until the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the first effect is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific period is b (b is 0 or more), and is executed in the specific period. The number of possible types of the third effect is c (c is 0 or more), the number of types of the fourth effect that can be executed in the specific period is d (d is 0 or more), and the specific period. The number of types of the fifth effect that can be executed in the above is e (e is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that (a + d + e) is a smaller number than (b + c).

[13-5. During fluctuation (second half)]

Of the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the fluctuation (second half) are the effect 58 as the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) and the effect 64 as the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference). It is said to be 65, production 66, and production 67.
That is, the game machine 1A in this example is not provided with the set value change suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect that can be executed during the fluctuation (second half), and one big hit suggestion effect (with a setting difference) suggests a big hit. There are four productions (no setting difference).

During the fluctuation (second half), the setting value change suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are not provided, so that the effect executed by the game machine 1A is an effect that suggests a big hit. Do not cause confusion.
In particular, during the fluctuation (second half), since the decorative design is in the reach state on the liquid crystal display device 36, the interest in whether or not the fluctuation is a big hit is remarkably improved. It is not preferable to execute an effect that only suggests the set value at such a timing.

For example, when a flashy effect that gives a sense of expectation to a player who is playing a game without knowing the characteristics of the game machine 1A is executed, the game is performed even though the effect suggests a high setting value. One may expect that the decorative pattern variation display game being played at that time is likely to be a big hit. As a result, if the decorative symbol variation display game is displaced, the player may be confused, or the player may be disappointed and the game may be terminated.
According to this example, since it is impossible to execute an effect that only suggests the set value Ve during the fluctuation (second half), there is no risk of causing such a situation, and the effect is executed. It is possible to enjoy the production by paying attention only to the winning result of the big hit lottery.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. The second effect that can estimate the high and low of Provided with an effect execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects that can be inferred from the presence or absence of
The effect executing means specifies from the reach state in which two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that neither the first effect nor the fourth effect is feasible during the period.

In addition, since there are two or more types of suggestion effects that suggest jackpots, it is possible to suggest jackpots using various effects without becoming monotonous. That is, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. The second effect that can estimate the high and low of Provided with an effect execution means capable of executing at least one of the fourth effects that can be inferred from the presence or absence of
The effect executing means specifies from the reach state in which two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed until the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of the second effect and the third effect can be executed during a period.

In addition, the execution time may be longer for the production in the reach state. In such a state, if not only the suggestion effect that suggests the big hit but also the suggestion effect that does not suggest the big hit is further executed, the effect time may become long, which causes annoyance to the player. You may feel it.
According to this example, since the suggestion effect that does not suggest the big hit is not executed during the fluctuation (second half), it is possible to prevent the effect time from becoming unnecessarily long.

Of the timings 17 to 25 during the fluctuation (second half), the number of suggestion effects that suggest the jackpot that can be executed at the timing 17 is the largest.
Specifically, there are two types of suggestion effects, that is, effect 58 and effect 64, which suggest the jackpot that can be executed at the timing 17. There are two types of suggestion effects, which are the effect 65 and the effect 66, which suggest the jackpot that can be executed at the timing 19. The suggestion effect that gives a suggestion about the jackpot that can be executed at the timings 20, 22, and 23 is one type of the effect 66. The suggestion effect that gives a suggestion about the jackpot that can be executed at the timings 24 and 25 is one type of the effect 67.
The suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot that can be executed at the timings 18 and 21 is not implemented in the game machine 1A in this example.

Timing 17 is the timing at which the second symbol stops, and is one of the timings at which the player has great expectations. That is, the player is very interested in whether or not the same decorative symbol as the first symbol is stopped.
By implementing many suggestion effects that suggest the big hit that can be executed at such timing 17 on the game machine 1A, it becomes possible to provide the game machine 1A that is highly enjoyable for the player.

In addition, there are other possible timings when the player has great expectations. For example, it may be applicable during the execution of the hit-and-miss effect at timing 20, the execution of the hit-and-go effect at timing 23, or the fanning effect for notifying whether or not the effect of timing 19 is developed. The same effect can be obtained by preparing a wide variety of suggestion effects that suggest jackpots that can appear at such timing.

Further, among a plurality of timings in which the expectations of the player are increasing, various effects may be executed by focusing on one timing, or various effects may be executed at all timings.
If it is possible to execute various effects by focusing on one timing, the player will have a higher expectation as to whether or not the effects will be executed when the player reaches the corresponding timing. That is, when the corresponding timing is recognized by the player as the timing at which the game interest is most enhanced in the game machine 1A, the timing is regarded as a unique timing of the game machine 1A, and is differentiated from other game machines. Can be planned.
In addition, it is possible to remarkably improve the player's motivation to play by occasionally appearing a suggestion effect that suggests a big hit in a manner that a player's surprise is struck at a timing other than the corresponding timing.

Note that these effects are not limited to the fluctuation (second half). That is, it is possible to obtain the same effect by configuring the game machine 1A so that various effects can be performed at the timing when the player has high expectations.

[13-6. About big hit]

Of the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effect that can be executed during the big hit (during the big hit game) of the game machine 1A of the present embodiment is only the effect 15 as the set value suggestion effect.

During the jackpot, the game machine 1A is configured so that the jackpot suggestion effect does not appear, so that the effect that appears during the jackpot period is determined to be the effect that suggests the set value. The person can properly grasp the content of the production.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is impossible to execute the second effect and the third effect during a big hit game.

In addition, the jackpot is a period in which the player enjoys a favorable situation, and is also a period in which it is determined whether or not the game should be continued in the game machine 1A.
Since the effect that appears in such a period is only the set value suggestion effect, the player who visually recognizes or experiences the effect can make an appropriate judgment.

During the big hit game, it is possible to obtain a predetermined number of prize balls by making the open big prize opening 50 win a game ball, but since it is relatively easy to win the big winning opening 50, it is not so much. It is possible to play a game without paying attention to the grand prize opening 50. Therefore, there is a risk that interest in the game machine 1A may be diminished during the big hit game.
However, in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, in the effect 15 as the set value suggestion effect, the sound effect based on the occurrence of the over prize can be executed. That is, the probability of occurrence of the set value suggestion effect can be improved by launching the game ball so as to encourage the occurrence of over winning. As a result, the player can improve the accuracy of guessing about the set value Ve of the game machine 1A. That is, since the player can concentrate on the big hit game in order to generate the over prize, the game interest is improved.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
A large prize-winning means formed in the game area and configured to be able to execute a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the game ball and an open state in which the game ball can be easily entered.
Based on the detection information by the ball entry detecting means that detects the game ball that has entered the big winning means, the number of winning ball counting means that counts the game balls that have entered the big winning means.
A lottery means to execute a lottery regarding whether or not to win,
An opening control means capable of controlling the large winning means to the open state until the number of game balls counted by the winning number counting means reaches the specified number of balls within a range not exceeding a predetermined predetermined time.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first effect can be executed when the counted game balls exceed the specified number of winning balls and the over-winning is achieved.

During the big hit, even if the game ball wins in the upper start opening 34 and the lower start opening 35, the winning amount exceeding the maximum reserved memory number is not subject to the big hit lottery. That is, when the number of operation holding balls reaches the maximum number of holding storage balls, the player may lose interest in winning the game balls in the upper starting port 34 and the lower starting port 35.
Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 in a state where the number of operation hold balls is maximized during the big hit game, some sound effect for suggesting a set value is reproduced. The game machine 1A may be configured so that the setting value suggestion effect can be executed. As a result, even after the number of operation holding balls reaches the maximum number of holding storage balls, the player can be interested in the fact that the game balls have won the upper start opening 34 and the lower start opening 35. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

[13-7. During fluctuation (overall)]

Among the effects shown in FIG. 122, the effects that can be executed during the fluctuation (overall) of the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, that is, the effects that can be executed during the fluctuation (first half) and the fluctuation (second half). The effects being performed are the effect 04 as the setting value change suggestion effect, the effect 54,58 as the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference), and the effect 62, 63, 64, 65 as the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference). It is said to be 66,67.

In the gaming machine 1A of the embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is not included in the effect that may appear during the fluctuation (overall). In addition, since the production 04 as the only setting value change suggestion effect that may appear is set only at the time of winning, which is the first fluctuation start timing after the power is turned on, as described above, it can appear. Timing is significantly limited.
Therefore, in the effect that can appear during the fluctuation (overall), the suggestion effect regarding the set value is hardly included.
As a result, the production that appears during the fluctuation (overall) is almost certainly a big hit suggestion production except for the production 80 that does not give any suggestion, so appropriate information without causing confusion to the player. Is suggested.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that none of the first effects can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols.

In addition, among the jackpot suggestion effects that can appear during fluctuation (overall), those with a setting difference (effects 54 and 58) are those without a setting difference (effects 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67). The number of types is reduced in comparison.
During the fluctuation, the interest in winning the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation is the highest. On the other hand, the effect of not giving a suggestion to the set value Ve but only suggesting the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery (that is, the big hit suggestion effect (no setting difference)) is the suggestion to the set value Ve and the expectation of winning the big hit lottery. By providing more than the effects that both suggest the degree (that is, the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference)), it is possible to provide an effect that does not confuse the player what the suggestion effect is. ..

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The number of types of the second effect that can be executed in the specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols is b (b is 0 or more). , The number of types of the third effect made feasible in the specific period is c (c is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that c is a larger number than b.

Further, as an effect that can appear during fluctuation (overall), a plurality of types of jackpot suggestion effects (with setting differences) are provided. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of effects that suggest only the winning result of the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation that the player is most interested in, and the interest of the game is improved.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of the third effect can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols.

It may be possible to obtain the effect by making the mode of the effect (effect content, appearance probability, etc.) to be executed during the change (first half) and the change (second half) that make up the change (whole) different. ..
For example, the number (n) of the effects (type 1 effects) that can suggest the set values that can be executed in the first period (changing (first half)) is the second period (changing (second half)). It is conceivable to increase the number (m) of the first-class effects made possible in.
In the second period, it is considered essential for the purpose of playing games to be able to carry out an effect to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery. In such a period, performing an effect capable of suggesting a set value increases the number of effects executed in the second period, and in some cases, a plurality of types of effects are executed at the same time. This increases the length of time used for the production and increases the processing load of the CPU related to the production. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to reduction of processing load and reduction of power consumption. Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility that frame dropping occurs in the image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A setting means that can set a setting value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a setting means that can set a setting value.
A display means that can change and display the production design according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state,
The effect execution control means capable of executing and controlling the first type effect suggesting the set value set in the game machine while the effect symbol is changed by the display means is provided.
The effect symbol is used in a game machine composed of three groups of symbols, each of which varies.
In the display means, the period from when the three symbol groups start to fluctuate until when two of the symbol groups stop fluctuating is set as the first period (during fluctuation (first half)), and the two symbol groups change. When the period from the stop to the stop of all the three symbol groups is the second period (changing (second half)),
The number of the first type effects that can be executed in the first period is n.
Assuming that the first type production that can be performed in the second period is m pieces
A gaming machine characterized in that n> m ≧ 0 is established.

In addition, it is effective by providing a difference in the effect that can be executed according to the stop mode when two of the three symbol groups (left symbol group, middle symbol group, right symbol group) are stopped and displayed. It may be possible to obtain.
For example, when the stop mode when the two symbol groups are stopped and displayed is not the "reach state (reach mode)", the number of first-class effects (m1) that can be executed in the second period is the "reach state (m1)". In the case of "reach mode)", it is conceivable to increase the number of first-class effects (m2) that can be performed in the second period.
In the second period, it is essential for the purpose of the game to be able to perform a production to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, but if it is not in the reach state, there is no problem even if the first type production appears. Absent. Therefore, in the non-reach state, there is a high possibility that the effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery will not be executed, and it is unlikely that the effect and the first type effect will be executed at the same time. It is possible to execute the first type production without causing an increase in power consumption and an increase in power consumption. Further, by executing the first type effect instead of executing the effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery, it is possible to efficiently suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.
That is, in the second period, it is desirable that the number of first-class effects that can be performed in the non-reach state is larger than that in the reach state.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
In the display mode when the three symbol groups start to fluctuate and then two of the symbol groups stop fluctuating.
When the two symbol groups do not have the predetermined reach mode, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is set to m1.
When the two symbol groups have a predetermined reach mode, the number of the first type effects that can be executed in the second period is m2.
A gaming machine characterized in that m1> m2 ≧ 0 is established.

Some specific examples will be described with respect to the above-mentioned type 1 effect (effect that can suggest a set value).
In the following description, the effect whose main purpose is to suggest the set value is "directed a", and the effect whose main purpose is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery is "directed b". Or, it is set as "directing c". Regarding "effect b" and "effect c", an effect having a different selection ratio according to a set value is referred to as "effect b", and an effect having a selection ratio not different according to a set value is referred to as "effect c".
In the first example, the first type effect includes the effect a and does not include the effect b and the effect c.
As a result, the effect of suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery is not included in the first type effect. By not executing the seed effect, it is possible to obtain the various effects described above.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
For the purpose of the production, the production that mainly gives suggestions regarding the set value is defined as the production a.
For the purpose of the production, the production b is mainly used to suggest the winning of the lottery result and the selection ratio is different according to the set value.
For the purpose of the production, the effect of the lottery result is mainly suggested, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The first type effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect a is included, and the effect b and the effect c are not included.

Further, in the second example of the above-mentioned first-class production, the first-class production includes the production b and does not include the production a and the production c.
As a result, the main purpose is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, but there is also a production that includes suggestions regarding the set value, so to speak, a production that makes some players wonder what they are suggesting. It is defined as a first-class production.
By controlling the type 1 effect so that the effect for suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery is not executed at the desired timing, the effect does not give the player a misunderstanding of the suggested content. Can be executed at an appropriate timing. Further, even if the effect (effect a) whose main purpose is to suggest the set value is not executed, the effect is mainly to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, and By making it possible to execute an effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value, it is possible to perform an interpolation in which the effect a is not executed.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
For the purpose of the production, the production that mainly gives suggestions regarding the set value is defined as the production a.
For the purpose of the production, the production b is mainly used to suggest the winning of the lottery result and the selection ratio is different according to the set value.
For the purpose of the production, the effect of the lottery result is mainly suggested, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The first type effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect b is included, and the effect a and the effect c are not included.

Further, in the third example of the above-mentioned first-class effect, the first-type effect includes the effect a and the effect b, and does not include the effect c.
As a result, not only the production (directing a) whose main purpose is not to suggest the winning result for the big hit lottery, but also the main purpose is to suggest the winning result for the big hit lottery, but since the selection ratio differs depending on the set value, the set value A production that can be suggested is also defined as a type 1 production.
By not executing such a first-class effect at a timing when it is desirable to execute an effect for suggesting a winning result for the jackpot lottery, the player has a set value set for the game machine 1 currently playing. It is possible to enjoy the production without worrying about how many Ve. Further, at the timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU and the power consumption by mainly executing the effect having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
For the purpose of the production, the production that mainly gives suggestions regarding the set value is defined as the production a.
For the purpose of the production, the production b is mainly used to suggest the winning of the lottery result and the selection ratio is different according to the set value.
For the purpose of the production, the effect of the lottery result is mainly suggested, and the selection ratio is the same regardless of the set value.
The first type effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect a and the effect b are included, and the effect c is not included.

In addition, some examples can be considered for the number of first-class productions. One is to regard the productions with different appearance timings and appearance triggers as one production. That is, in other words, a similar production in which the appearance timing and the appearance trigger are the same but the production mode is slightly different, for example, a production in which the dialogue displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is different, etc. It is just a variation, and it is regarded as one production including various variations.
As a result, the balance of each effect mounted on the game machine 1 is adjusted in consideration of the number of types of effects that the player can substantially perceive as the number of effects, that is, the number of effects in which a plurality of variations are grouped together. Can be done. That is, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects that suggest the set value so that the player does not get confused, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, a balance of effects that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be achieved. It is feasible.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The number of production groups with different appearance timings and / or appearance triggers is defined as the number of production groups.
The number of production variations in which the appearance timing and / or the appearance triggers are similar to each other is counted separately.
A gaming machine characterized in that n and m are the number of production groups.

As another example of the number of first-class productions, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are similar, each of them is regarded as one production. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are the same, if the production mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different production. That is, the more variations of the production, the larger the number of productions.
A part of the effects having different variations is stored as common information inside the game machine 1. Therefore, by treating the effects with different variations as different effects (different effects), it is possible to realize various effects while improving the efficiency of using the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The number of production groups with different appearance timings and / or appearance triggers is defined as the number of production groups.
The number of production variations in which the appearance timing and / or the appearance triggers are similar to each other is counted separately.
A gaming machine characterized in that n and m are the number of production variations.

[13-8. Setting value suggestion effect and appearance timing]

The set value suggestion effects that can appear in the present embodiment are the effects 01, 15, and 20. As for these productions, the number of types of productions that appear during other periods is larger than that during fluctuations (overall). Specifically, there are 0 types of set value suggestion effects that can appear during fluctuations (overall), and 3 types of set value suggestion effects that can appear during other periods.
As a result, it is difficult for the set value suggestion effect to appear during the fluctuation (overall) in which the winner of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation is most interested, and the gaming machine 1A during the game is continued at other times. The set value suggestion effect that can be used as a judgment material for judging whether or not to play the game is made easy to appear. Therefore, appropriate information is provided.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing at least one first effect in which the high or low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high or low of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery cannot be estimated.
The effect executing means has a number of types of the first effect that can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols (a is 0 or more). The number of types of the first effect that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than b.

[13-9. Big hit suggestion production and appearance timing]

The jackpot suggestion effects (with setting differences) that can appear in the present embodiment are the effects 50, 54, and 58. As for these effects, the number of types of effects that can be displayed during fluctuation (overall) is larger than the number of types of effects that can be displayed during other periods.
That is, there are two types of jackpot suggestion effects (with setting differences) that can appear during fluctuations (overall), and jackpot suggestion effects (with setting differences) that can appear during other periods. Is one type.

Since the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) is a kind of jackpot suggestion effect, it is possible that many appear during the fluctuation, which is appropriate for the player who is interested in winning the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation. It is possible to produce.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing at least one second effect capable of estimating the high or low of the set value based on the effect mode and estimating the high or low of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery.
The effect executing means has a number of types of the second effect (a is 0 or more) that can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols. The number of types of the second effect that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than b.

In addition, during the fluctuation, the set value suggestion effect is not separately executed, but the jackpot suggestion effect also serves as the set value suggestion effect, that is, the jackpot suggestion effect (with setting difference) can appear. As a result, most of the effects that appear during fluctuations are considered to be effects that suggest big hits, so it is possible to give appropriate suggestions to the player and the game that is interested in the set value Ve. It is possible to give appropriate suggestions regarding the set value Ve to the person. Further, since the effect 54 or the like also serves as a suggestion effect for the set value Ve and a suggestion effect for the jackpot, the number of effects mounted on the game machine 1A can be suppressed, so that the game machine 1A used for the effect It can contribute to the reduction of storage area.

The jackpot suggestion effects (no setting difference) that can appear in the present embodiment are the effects 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67. As for the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference), the number of types of effect that can appear during fluctuation (overall) is larger than that of other periods (6 types). As a result, the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference) appears at the timing when the player is most interested in winning the jackpot lottery, so that the player can be appropriately suggested.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
On condition that the starting means detects the game ball and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol display means for executing the variable display operation of the special symbol and deriving and displaying the display result, and the special symbol display means.
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing at least one third effect that cannot estimate the high or low of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the high or low of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery.
The effect executing means has a number of types of the third effect (a is 0 or more) that can be executed in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols. The number of types of the third effect that can be executed in a specific period is b (b is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than b.

In addition, as for the jackpot suggestion effect (no setting difference), the most types that can appear during the fluctuation (second half) are prepared. During the fluctuation (second half), it is in the reach state, and the player is most interested in winning the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation. By preparing various jackpot suggestion effects (no setting difference) during such a period, the game interest is improved without boring the player.

[13-10. Production buttons and each production]

Each effect implemented in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment includes an effect that appears using an operator such as an effect button 13. Specifically, each of the effects 01, 50, 53, 62, 65, and 67 can be executed by operating the controls. The effect circled in FIG. 122 is applicable.

The effect that appears using the operator is, for example, an effect that appears by operating the operator, but does not appear if the operator is not operated. Alternatively, the effect appears immediately by the operation of the operator, but when the operator is not operated, the effect appears (progresses) after a lapse of a predetermined time.

For those in which the effect appears (progresses) after a lapse of a predetermined time even if the operator is not operated, the effect time differs depending on the presence or absence of the operation.
A specific example will be described.
First, an image effect A for displaying an image prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. When the player presses the effect button 13, the image effect B is executed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to advance the effect, and finally the image effect C is performed to give some suggestion. On the other hand, when the player does not press the effect button 13, the image effect C for presenting the suggested content is performed after a predetermined time such as 5 seconds has elapsed.
That is, the flow of the effect on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is pressed continues with the image effects A, B, and C, whereas on the liquid crystal display device 36 when the effect button 13 is not pressed. The flow of the production continues with the image productions A and C.
Such an effect is regarded as one aspect of an effect that appears (progresses) triggered by an operator.

Of the effects implemented in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, in the effect that appears using the operator, the jackpot suggestion effect (effect 50) is compared with the set value suggestion effect (effect 01). , 53, 62, 65, 67) has a larger number of types.
In the set value suggestion effect, the player can obtain important information used for determining whether or not to continue the game of the game machine 1A or whether or not to start the game of the game machine 1A. It is a possible production. Such an important effect does not appear depending on the presence or absence of the operator's operation, and the effect time of the important effect is shortened depending on the presence or absence of the operator's operation, resulting in insufficient confirmation of the suggested content. Can be a significant disadvantage to the player.

In the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, the set value suggestion effect that appears using the controller such as the effect button 13 is only the effect 01, so that many set value suggestion effects are games. Suggestions can be transmitted equally regardless of the person's operation.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A special symbol display means that executes a variable display operation of a special symbol and derives and displays a display result on condition that an operation means that can be operated by the player and a start means detect the game ball and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When,
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The number of types of the first effect executed triggered by the operation of the operating means is a (a is 0 or more), and the number of types of the second effect executed triggered by the operation of the operating means is b. (B is 0 or more), and the number of types of the third effect executed triggered by the operation of the operating means is c (c is 0 or more).
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a smaller number than (b + c).

Further, among the suggested effects triggered by the operation of the effect button 13 implemented in the game machine 1A, the effect start timing and end timing of the set value suggestion effect are not changed by the operation.
For example, in the effect 01, after the set value suggestion effect is started by pressing the effect button 13, the effect ends at a predetermined timing after the effect is started regardless of whether or not the effect button 13 is pressed. That is, the end timing of the effect is the timing at which a certain time has elapsed from the start of the effect regardless of the pressing of the effect button 13.

On the other hand, among each suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 13, the effect start timing and end timing of the jackpot suggestion effect are different depending on the operation.
For example, in the effect 50, the hold change notice effect is executed, but after the image effect for prompting the pressing of the effect button 13 is executed, the next image effect (for example, the next image effect (for example,) is performed at the timing corresponding to the press of the effect button 13. An image effect that changes the hold icon from a normal color to a specific color) is executed. That is, the image effect that changes the hold icon started by pressing the effect button 13 from the normal color to a specific color is set to a different timing depending on the press of the effect button 13. Further, if the effect button 13 is pressed late, the end timing of the effect is also delayed accordingly.

Further, in other words, among each suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 13 implemented in the game machine 1A, it can be said that the effect time length is unchanged by the operation for the set value suggestion effect. ..
Further, among each suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 13, it can be said that the effect time length is variable for the jackpot suggestion effect.

As for the set value suggestion effect, as described above, the effect cannot be confirmed because the effect does not appear depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operator and the effect time of the effect is shortened depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operator. Since it can be extremely disadvantageous for the player to be sufficient, the end timing and the length of the production time are unchanged.

On the other hand, the jackpot suggestion effect is a suggestion effect regarding the winning of the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation (or the fluctuation scheduled to be executed in the future for the operation pending ball), and the desire to obtain information about the winning as soon as possible according to the player. And there is a desire to enjoy the contents of the production carefully. Therefore, in the game machine 1A of the present embodiment, the start timing, the end timing, and the effect time length are made variable by the operation timing of the operation button 13, so that an appropriate effect can be obtained according to the game mode of the player. It is said that it can appear.

A configuration example of such a game machine 1 is shown below.
A special symbol display means that executes a variable display operation of a special symbol and derives and displays a display result on condition that an operation means that can be operated by the player and a start means detect the game ball and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When,
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The end timing of the first effect, which is executed triggered by the operation of the operating means, is unchanged regardless of the operating timing of the operating means or the presence or absence of the operation.
The end timing of at least a part of the second effect or the third effect executed by the operation of the operation means is changed according to the operation timing of the operation means or the presence or absence of the operation. A featured game machine.

Further, the following configuration example of the game machine 1 can be considered.
A special symbol display means that executes a variable display operation of a special symbol and derives and displays a display result on condition that an operation means that can be operated by the player and a start means detect the game ball and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When,
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect time length of the first effect, which is executed triggered by the operation of the operation means, is made invariant depending on the operation timing or the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means.
The effect time length of at least a part of the second effect or the third effect executed by the operation of the operation means is changed according to the operation timing of the operation means or the presence or absence of the operation. A game machine featuring.

Further, the effect 01 is such that the effect is executed in response to the player pressing a certain operator while waiting for the customer, which is like a so-called hidden effect. Therefore, unlike other effects, the execution is decided in order to appeal the suggestion content to the player, but the execution is canceled by the non-operation of the operator.
Therefore, with respect to the set value suggestion effect executed during the game of the game machine 1A (during look-ahead, during fluctuation, or during jackpot), the suggestion content can be equally transmitted regardless of the operation of the player.

In the game machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the jackpot suggestion effects that appear using an operator such as the effect button 13 are the effects 50, 53, 62, 65, 67. In addition, there are those in which the effect does not appear due to the operation of the player and those in which the effect time is shortened.
The jackpot suggestion effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be invited in the near future from the execution of the effect, and even if the effect is overlooked, it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, as for the jackpot suggestion effect, many of them are implemented in which the effect appears (or develops) according to the operation of the operator for the purpose of improving the sense of presence and the entertainment of the game.

It should be noted that the set value suggestion effect executed in response to the operation of the operator is not provided as long as it is fluctuating (overall).
The effect executed in response to the operation of the operator is considered to be an effect with high expectations for the player. When performing such an effect during a change, the player tends to presume that it is a suggestive effect for the jackpot of the change that he is most interested in at the time. If the set value suggestion effect is performed at such a timing, there is a risk that the effect that cannot meet the expectations of the player will be executed, or that the player will be confused by the content of the effect.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1A of the present embodiment is configured to always be a jackpot suggestion effect when performing an effect that involves the operation of the operator during fluctuations.
With such a configuration, an appropriate production that meets the expectations of the player is executed, and the player is not confused.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A special symbol display means that executes a variable display operation of a special symbol and derives and displays a display result on condition that an operation means that can be operated by the player and a start means detect the game ball and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect executed by the operation of the operation means in a specific period from the start of the variable display operation to the stop display of the three decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is not included in the specific effect.

Further, in the game machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the effect content of the set value suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the operator such as the effect button 13 is unchanged regardless of the operation mode of the operator. For example, the effect 01 mounted on the game machine 1A is started by pressing the effect button 13. However, the effect content is based on the effect content determined in advance by lottery, and is not variable depending on the operation mode (operation timing and presence / absence of operation) of the effect button 13.

On the other hand, in the game machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the content of the jackpot suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the operator such as the effect button 13 is variable depending on the operation mode of the operator. For example, in the effect 50 mounted on the game machine 1A, whether or not the hold icon changes to a color with a higher degree of expectation by pressing the effect button 13 after executing an image effect for prompting the press of the effect button 13. An image effect indicating that the lottery is being performed is executed, and an image effect in which the hold icon changes to a high-expected one is executed.
However, if the effect button 13 is not pressed after the image effect for prompting the press of the effect button 13 is executed, the image effect in which the hold icon changes to the one with high expectation is executed after a certain period of time has elapsed. Will be done. That is, the mode of image production differs depending on whether or not the effect button 13 is pressed.

Since the set value suggestion effect is an important effect for the player to determine the continuation of the game, the game is played by displaying the same effect content regardless of the operation mode of the controls such as the effect button 13. It presents appropriate suggestions to the person.
The jackpot suggestion effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be invited in the near future from the execution of the effect, and even if the effect is overlooked, it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the game enjoyment of the player, the content of the effect is changed according to the operation mode of the operator such as the effect button 13.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 is shown below.
A special symbol display means that executes a variable display operation of a special symbol and derives and displays a display result on condition that an operation means that can be operated by the player and a start means detect the game ball and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When,
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
In the first effect, which is executed triggered by the operation of the operation means, the same effect mode is used regardless of the difference in the mode of the operation.
At least a part of the second effect or the third effect, which is executed by the operation of the operation means, is characterized in that the effect mode is different depending on the difference in the operation mode. Game machine.

The above-mentioned game machine 1 may further have the following features.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different production modes have different production times.

Further, the game machine 1 may have the following features.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different production modes are different image productions.

In the effect displayed by using the operator (hereinafter referred to as the operation effect), the difference between the changing (first half) and the changing (second half) may be considered.
For example, the period from when three symbol groups start to fluctuate until when two of the symbol groups stop fluctuating is the first period (during fluctuation (first half)), and two symbol groups stop fluctuating. When the period from when all three symbol groups are stopped is set as the second period (during (second half)), the operation effect that can be executed in the second period can suggest a set value (first effect). Seed production) may not be included.
In the second period, it is considered essential for the purpose of playing games to be able to carry out an effect to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery. In such a period, performing an effect capable of suggesting a set value as an operation effect increases the number of effects executed in the second period, and in some cases, a plurality of types of effects are executed at the same time. This increases the length of time used for the production and increases the processing load of the CPU related to the production. According to this configuration, by avoiding such a situation, it is possible to contribute to reduction of processing load and reduction of power consumption. Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility that frame dropping occurs in the image effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
A setting means that can set a setting value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a setting means that can set a setting value.
A display means that can change and display the production design according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Operation effect using the operation means and
It is provided with a first-class effect suggesting the set value set in the game machine, and an effect execution control means capable of performing execution control.
The effect symbol is composed of three groups of symbols, each of which varies.
In the display means, the period from when the three symbol groups start to fluctuate until when two of the symbol groups stop fluctuating is set as the first period, and after the two symbol groups stop fluctuating, the three symbols are said. When the period until all the symbols are stopped is set as the second period,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect that can be executed at least in the second period does not include the first type effect.

Some examples of the above-mentioned type 1 production will be described.
It should be noted that the effect that is an operation effect and whose main purpose is to suggest the set value is "effect Ba", and the main purpose is to be an operation effect and to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery. The production is referred to as "production Bb" or "production Bc". Regarding "effect Bb" and "effect Bc", an effect in which the selection ratio differs depending on the set value is referred to as "effect Bb", and an effect in which the selection ratio does not differ according to the set value is referred to as "effect Bc".
Further, an effect that is an operation effect and is a type 1 effect is defined as a "specific effect", and an effect that is an operation effect but is not a type 1 effect is defined as a "non-specific effect".

In the first example, the specific effect includes the effect Ba and does not include the effect Bb and the effect Bc. As a result, the operation effect that mainly suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery is not included in the specific effect. Therefore, it is desirable to execute the effect of suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery. By not executing the effect, it is possible to execute an appropriate operation effect without causing confusion for the player. Further, since the effect Bb and the effect Bc are not executed at the timing when the specific effect is executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU and the power consumption.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The production that is the operation production and the first type production is defined as a specific production.
The operation effect and the effect other than the first type effect are defined as non-specific effects.
The effect Ba, which is the operation effect and mainly suggests the set value for the purpose of the effect, is defined as the effect Ba.
It is the operation effect and the effect is mainly to suggest the winning of the lottery result, and further, the effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value is set as the effect Bb.
It is the operation effect and the effect is mainly to suggest the winning of the lottery result, and further, the effect having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is set as the effect Bc.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the specific effect includes the effect Ba, and does not include the effect Bb and the effect Bc.

In the second example, the specific effect includes the effect Bb and does not include the effect Ba and the effect Bc. As a result, the main purpose is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, but it is possible to wonder what the player is suggesting, so to speak, the operation effect that includes the suggestion about the set value. A sexual effect is defined as a specific effect.
By controlling not to execute the specific effect at the timing when it is desirable to execute the effect to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, the effect that does not give the player a misunderstanding of the suggested content is performed at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible to execute. By not executing the specific effect, even if the effect Ba whose main purpose is the effect of suggesting the set value does not appear, the effect Bb having a different selection ratio depending on the set value can appear. It is possible to make an effect that replaces the suggestion regarding the set value appear. Therefore, depending on the player, information on the set value can be appropriately transmitted, and various information can be provided with a small amount of production.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The production that is the operation production and the first type production is defined as a specific production.
The operation effect and the effect other than the first type effect are defined as non-specific effects.
The effect Ba, which is the operation effect and mainly suggests the set value for the purpose of the effect, is defined as the effect Ba.
It is the operation effect and the effect is mainly to suggest the winning of the lottery result, and further, the effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value is set as the effect Bb.
It is the operation effect and the effect is mainly to suggest the winning of the lottery result, and further, the effect having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is set as the effect Bc.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect includes the effect Bb and does not include the effect Ba and the effect Bc.

In the third example, the specific effect includes the effect Ba and the effect Bb and does not include the effect Bc. As a result, an effect that can suggest a set value is defined as a specific effect. Therefore, when the operation effect is executed at the timing when the specific effect is not displayed, the player grasps the suggestion content of the winning result for the big hit lottery without causing confusion about the effect content (or the suggestion content in the production). be able to. That is, the content of the suggestion by the production is made easy to understand.
Further, since the effect Ba and the effect Bb are not executed at the timing when the specific effect is not displayed, the processing load of the CPU is reduced, the power consumption is reduced, or the display means (liquid crystal display device 36, etc.) used for the effect is processed. It is possible to reduce the burden. In particular, in the liquid crystal display device 36, since the frequency of performing processing for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effects is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that frame dropping or the like occurs.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The production that is the operation production and the first type production is defined as a specific production.
The operation effect and the effect other than the first type effect are defined as non-specific effects.
The effect Ba, which is the operation effect and mainly suggests the set value for the purpose of the effect, is defined as the effect Ba.
It is the operation effect and the effect is mainly to suggest the winning of the lottery result, and further, the effect having a different selection ratio according to the set value is set as the effect Bb.
It is the operation effect and the effect is mainly to suggest the winning of the lottery result, and further, the effect having the same selection ratio regardless of the set value is set as the effect Bc.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect includes the effect Ba and the effect Bb, and does not include the effect Bc.

Further, in the effect executed during the fluctuation, it is conceivable to increase the number of non-specific effects rather than the number of specific effects.
The specific effect includes an effect that can suggest a set value. By reducing the possibility that such an effect will appear during fluctuations, the number of effects that suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery will be relatively large. That is, the appearance of the non-specific effect is increased during the fluctuation in which the player's interest is directed to whether or not the big hit lottery is won, so that an appropriate effect is performed according to the player's interest. Can be done.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
During the change of the effect symbol by the display means
Let i be the number of the specific effects that can be executed by the effect execution control means.
Assuming that the number of the non-specific effects that can be executed by the effect execution control means is j,
A gaming machine characterized in that j> i ≧ 0 is established.

Both the specific effect and the non-specific effect use the operation of the operating means, but the effect can appear without operating the operating means. The difference between the specific effect and the non-specific effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated will be described.
First, in the specific effect including the effect that can suggest the set value and the non-specific effect that includes the effect that can suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery, the end timing of each effect and the operation of the operation means The relationship between the presence and absence will be described.

For example, in the specific effect, the end timing does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means, but in the non-specific effect, the end timing may change depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means.
As described above, the specific effect includes an effect that can suggest a set value. The set value is often set to be immutable during the game, and is important information for the player that determines whether or not to continue the game. Therefore, it is possible to cancel the effect by operating the operating means, and shortening the time for which the suggestion information regarding the set value is presented to the player may be significantly disadvantageous to the player. high. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed earlier, the suggestion information is presented earlier, and because the operation is slow, the start of the suggestion information presentation is delayed and the suggestion information presentation time is shortened. It is also possible.
It is highly possible that the specific effect that presents the suggestion information regarding the set value appears less frequently than the non-specific effect that suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery. Therefore, shortening the presentation time of the suggestion information regarding the set value is likely to be significantly disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the end timing of the effect does not change regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated. It is desirable to do. Similarly, it is desirable that the start timing of the effect does not change regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated.

Regarding the suggestion of the winning result of the big hit lottery, for example, even if the player overlooks it, if the big hit lottery is won, the big hit game will be started naturally, so that the player may suffer a disadvantage. Is low. Therefore, with regard to the production that suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery, it is possible to perform a production with a high degree of interest in the game by starting, developing, and developing the production in synchronization with the operation of the player.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
In the specific effect, it is assumed that there is no change in the end timing of the effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the end timing of the effects changes depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

Further, in the specific effect, the time length required for the effect does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means, but in the non-specific effect, the time length required for the effect may change depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means. Be done.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a disadvantage to the player as described above.

A specific configuration example of the game machine 1 is shown below.
In the specific effect, it is assumed that there is no change in the effect time required for the effect depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the effects in the non-specific effect, there is a change in the effect time required for the effect depending on the presence or absence of operation of the operating means.

Further, in the specific effect, the effect content is unchanged regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means, but in the non-specific effect, the effect content may change depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means.
Since the specific effect includes a suggestion regarding the set value, if the effect is not displayed by not operating the operation means and the suggestion cannot be made based on the effect content, the reason as described above is given. Therefore, it may be a significant disadvantage for the player.
On the other hand, the non-specific effect includes the suggestion of the winning result of the big hit lottery, and even if the effect does not appear without operating the operating means, it is unlikely that the player will be disadvantaged.
Therefore, regarding the specific effect, it is desirable that the end timing of the effect does not change regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated. Further, regarding the non-specific effect, it is desirable not to make the effect appear or to start the effect with a delay depending on whether or not the operation means is operated. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that is synchronized with the operation of the player, and it is possible to produce an effect that has a high appealing effect on the suggested content.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
In the specific effect, it is assumed that there is no change in the effect content depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in at least a part of the non-specific effects, the contents of the effects are changed depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

In addition, some examples can be considered regarding the number of specific effects and non-specific effects. One is to regard the productions with different appearance timings and appearance triggers as one production. That is, in other words, a similar production in which the appearance timing and the appearance trigger are the same but the production mode is slightly different, for example, a production in which the dialogue displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is different, etc. It is just a variation, and it is regarded as one production including various variations.
As a result, the balance of each effect mounted on the game machine 1 is adjusted in consideration of the number of types of effects that the player can substantially perceive as the number of effects, that is, the number of effects in which a plurality of variations are grouped together. Can be done. That is, when the intention is to reduce the number of effects that suggest the set value so that the player does not get confused, by considering the number of types of effects excluding variations, a balance of effects that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be achieved. It is feasible.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The number of production groups with different appearance timings and / or appearance triggers is defined as the number of production groups.
The number of production variations in which the appearance timing and / or the appearance triggers are similar to each other is counted separately.
A gaming machine characterized in that i and j are the number of production groups.

As another example of the number of specific effects and non-specific effects, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are similar, each of them is regarded as one effect. That is, in other words, even if the appearance timing and the appearance opportunity are the same, if the production mode is slightly different, it is regarded as a different production. That is, the more variations of the production, the larger the number of productions.
A part of the effects having different variations is stored as common information inside the game machine 1. Therefore, by treating the effects with different variations as different effects (different effects), it is possible to realize various effects while improving the efficiency of using the storage capacity.

A configuration example of the game machine 1 capable of obtaining such an effect is shown below.
The number of production groups with different appearance timings and / or appearance triggers is defined as the number of production groups.
The number of production variations in which the appearance timing and / or the appearance triggers are similar to each other is counted separately.
A gaming machine characterized in that i and j are the number of production variations.

<14. Example 2 of selective implementation on a game machine>

Here, the game machine 1B in which each effect is selectively implemented from the above-mentioned effects 1 to 21, effects 50 to 67, and effect 80 will be described.
The effects selectively implemented in the game machine 1B are production 01, production 04, production 15, production 20, production 51, production 52, production 54, production 58, production 62, production 63, production 64, production 65, production. It is said to be 66 and 67.

In the game machine 1B, the effect 20 is a look-ahead advance notice effect in a time-saving state that can be executed only at the timing 10.

In the game machine 1B, there are four types of effects that appear (develop) when the operator such as the effect button 13 is operated, that is, the effect 01, the effect 62, the effect 65, and the effect 67.
Further, among them, only the effect 01 can be executed while the fluctuation is stopped. Note that the variable stop state means that all of the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

In the game machine 1B, the only effect triggered by the operator that can appear while the fluctuation is stopped is the effect 01, which is one of the set value suggestion effects. The number of types of set value suggestion effects triggered (that is, one) is larger than the number of types of jackpot suggestion effects triggered by an operator that can appear while the fluctuation is stopped (that is, 0).
While there is growing interest in winning the jackpot lottery during the fluctuation, it is also the timing when the fluctuation is not being performed while the fluctuation is stopped, and during that time, the game ball does not win a prize at the starting port. It also includes the state in which the person is bored.
At such a timing, it is conceivable that the player may be wondering whether or not to continue playing the game machine being played.
According to the game machine 1B of the present embodiment, the number of types of the suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the operator performed at such a timing is larger in the set value suggestion effect than in the jackpot suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, an aspect of the game machine 1 different from the game machine 1B will be described. For each effect implemented in the game machine 1, the type of effect (different from set value change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect, etc.) and execution timing (different from waiting for customers, pre-reading, etc.) are summarized in FIG. 125. It is a table shown in.
In FIG. 125, as the types of effects, a set value change suggestion effect (effect d), a set value suggestion effect (effect a), a jackpot suggestion effect with a setting difference (effect b), and a jackpot suggestion effect without a setting difference (effect) are shown. c), a lively production (directing e) is shown. Further, it is shown which effect type each effect mounted on the game machine 1 belongs to, and which effect is executed at the execution timing.
Further, the table shows the number of variations for each effect and information indicating whether or not the effect involves pressing a button. Pressing the button means that the player operates not only the effect button 13 but also any of the various controls provided on the game machine 1.
For example, production No. Is 01, that is, the effect 01 is an effect accompanied by pressing a button, and there is one kind of variation. Further, the effect 20 is an effect in which there are three types of variations without pressing a button. As an example of the variation of the effect 20, the number of specific characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 is three patterns of one to three.

In the summary column of FIG. 125, aggregated information about the effects that can be executed at each execution timing is shown. For example, it is shown that there is only one effect executed while waiting for a customer, which is a set value suggestion effect. In addition, there is only one effect that involves pressing a button.

A configuration example of such a game machine 1 is shown below.
A special symbol display means that executes a variable display operation of a special symbol and derives and displays a display result on condition that an operation means that can be operated by the player and a start means detect the game ball and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. When,
With the execution of the variable display operation of the special symbol, the first symbol display area for variable display of the first decorative symbol, the second symbol display area for variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol for variable display are displayed. 3 Decorative symbol display means for producing a variable display operation of each decorative symbol using the symbol display area, and
A storage means for storing a set value indicating a stage regarding the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a storage means.
The first effect, in which the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the high and low expectation of winning the big hit lottery cannot be estimated, and the high and low of the set value can be estimated based on the effect mode and the expected degree of winning of the big hit lottery. Execution of at least one of the second effect that can estimate the height of the item and the third effect that cannot estimate the level of the set value based on the effect mode and can estimate the level of the winning expectation of the big hit lottery. With means,
The effect execution means has a number of types of the first effect (a is 0 or more) that can be executed by the operation of the operation means in a specific state in which the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The number of types of the second effect that can be executed triggered by the operation of the operating means in the specific state is b (b is 0 or more), and the first that can be executed triggered by the operation of the operating means in the specific state. The number of types of 3 productions is c (c is 0 or more),
A gaming machine characterized in that a is a larger number than (b + c).

<15. Definition>

(About "Type 1 production" and "Type 2 production")
As already described, as one of the characteristic parts of the present invention, in a scene where a player expects a big hit (synonyms with words such as scene, timing, and directing part), a directing (notice, announcement) suggesting a setting. , Notification, display, pronunciation, light emission, etc. are synonymous, the same applies hereinafter), and the production suggesting a big hit (notice, notification, notification, display, pronunciation, light emission, etc. are synonymous, the same applies hereinafter) is prioritized. To do.

However, in a game machine, it is not easy to clearly delineate the two effects (set value suggestion effect and jackpot suggestion effect). This is because the jackpot suggestion effect (for example, the jackpot expectation is about 50% when the "group notice" appears) is set to 2 or more when the set value suggestion effect (for example, the "group notice" appears). This is because it is assumed that it also serves as (such as confirming that there is).

Therefore, in the following, some examples of definitions when drawing a line with reference to FIG. 125 and the like, with the set value suggestion effect as "type 1 effect" and the jackpot suggestion effect as "type 2 effect". Is shown.

First, the effects performed during the game will be described by dividing them into the effects a to c as follows. The effect may be limited to this, or an effect having a different purpose (for example, an effect d or an effect e as shown in FIG. 125) may be provided.

(Effect a) Setting value suggestion effect The purpose of this effect is mainly to suggest a set value. That is, the suggestion of the winning result of the big hit lottery is only a bonus. For example, as for the jackpot suggestion, even if this effect is produced, the player does not have much expectation.
Specifically, even if the effect appears when the expectation of the big hit lottery is less than 50%, less than 30%, or less than 10%, the big hit lottery is won. Especially when you can hardly expect it.
In addition, the set value suggestion effect may include an effect that does not suggest a big hit at all.
Alternatively, the effect a may be defined by focusing on the portion of interest of the user. For example, when a movable body accessory operates with a sound effect and a set value is suggested by executing a character image effect on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player's attention is paid to the movement of the movable body accessory and the liquid crystal display device 36. It is poured into the image (image change) of. At this time, when a big hit is casually suggested at a place other than the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a light emitting effect using a part of the housing), the player's attention to experience the effect. Since the information obtained from the location is only information related to the setting value suggestion, such an effect may be classified as a set value suggestion effect.
Further, in the case of performing the same effect using the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, when the jackpot suggestion is given in an area less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the degree of attention of the player is high. It can be presumed that it is directed to the setting value suggestion. Therefore, such an effect can also be classified into the effect a.
Further, the information may be classified by focusing on the information that the player receives first. For example, of the two types of information, the suggestion information regarding the set value and the suggestion information regarding the jackpot, the effect in which the information first received by the player after the start of the effect is the set value suggestion information may be classified into the effect a.

As an example, when the effects belonging to the effect a are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the effects corresponding to the effect a are the effect 01, the effect 20, and the effect 15. Further, the effect 04 may be included in the effect a.

(Production b) Large hit suggestion effect with setting difference The purpose of this effect is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery. However, since there is a difference in the appearance frequency, it is possible to suggest the set value.
When the production classified into the production b is defined, it is a production having a relatively higher expectation than other productions, for example, when the expectation of the big hit lottery is 50% or more, or 30% or more.
Further, a part of the effect in which not only the setting difference is provided in the appearance frequency but also the suggestion regarding the set value may be performed may be classified into the effect b.
For example, as defined in the effect a, the effect b may be defined by focusing on the portion of interest of the user. When a movable body accessory operates with a sound effect and a big hit is suggested by performing a character image effect on the liquid crystal display device 36, the player's attention is paid to the movement of the movable body accessory and the image of the liquid crystal display device 36 ( Image change) is poured. At this time, even if the setting value is casually suggested (for example, a light emitting effect using a part of the housing) at a place other than the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, the effect is experienced. Since the information obtained from the attention point of the player is only suggestive information regarding the jackpot, such an effect may be classified into the effect b.
Further, in the case of performing the same effect using the movable body accessory or the liquid crystal display device 36, when the set value is suggested in an area less than 50% of the display area on the liquid crystal display device, the degree of attention of the player. Can be presumed to be directed to the jackpot suggestion from the size of the occupied area in the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, such an effect can also be classified into the effect b.
Further, even if there is no difference due to the set value on the table referred to when executing the process of selecting the effect, that is, the effect is selected with a certain probability regardless of the set value. Even in this case, the effects having substantially different appearance frequencies (details will be described later) may be classified into the effects b because the setting difference actually exists.
In addition, the information may be classified by focusing on the information that the player receives first. For example, of the two types of information, the suggestion information regarding the set value and the suggestion information regarding the jackpot, the effect in which the information first received by the player after the start of the effect is the jackpot suggestion information may be classified into the effect b.

As an example, when the effects belonging to the effect b are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the effects corresponding to the effect b are the effect 50, the effect 54, and the effect 58.

(Effect c) No setting difference Big hit suggestion effect The purpose of this effect is to suggest the winning result of the big hit lottery as in the effect b. In particular, unlike the production b, since there is no setting difference, it can be said that the production purely suggests the winning result of the big hit lottery.
It should be noted that the effect described in the effect b, that is, the effect in which the appearance frequency is substantially different even if the effect is not provided with a difference due to the set value on the table referred to when the process of selecting the effect is executed. Since there is no setting difference in the selection rate on the table, the effect is not intended to intentionally produce the setting difference, and therefore, it may be classified into the effect c.

As an example, when the effects belonging to the effect c are specifically classified using FIG. 125, the effects corresponding to the effect c are the effect 52, the effect 53, the effect 62, the effect 63, the effect 64, the effect 65, the effect 66, and the effect. 67.

Next, the above-mentioned type 1 effect and type 2 effect will be described using these effect classifications.
(Example 1)
The first type production includes the production a, and does not include the production b and the production c.
As a result, the effect of suggesting the winning result of the big hit lottery is not included in the first type effect. By not executing the seed effect, the chance of executing multiple types of effect at the same time is reduced, the time length used for the effect can be shortened, and the increase in the processing load of the CPU related to the effect can be suppressed. it can.

(Example 2)
The first type production includes the production b, and does not include the production a and the production c.
For example, at the timing when the first type effect is not executed, only the effect a and the effect c can appear. That is, only the effect a whose main purpose is to suggest the set value and the jackpot suggestion effect c where there is no setting difference. As a result, the player does not have to worry about whether the effect is to suggest the set value or the jackpot, so that the effect is effective without causing confusion. It is possible to put it out.

(Example 3)
The first type production includes the production a and the production b, and does not include the production c.
For example, at the timing when the first type effect is not executed, only the effect c can appear. That is, since there are few effects that can be displayed, the opportunity for a plurality of effects to be executed at the same time is reduced, the processing load can be reduced, and the lengthening of the effects can be suppressed.

(Example 4)
The second type production includes the production b and the production c, and does not include the production a.
For example, at a timing when the type 2 effect is more likely to be executed than the type 1 effect, the player's effect is such that it is difficult for the player to produce an effect whose main purpose is to suggest a set value such as effect a. It can be less confusing.

(Example 5)
The second type production includes the production c, and does not include the production a and the production b.
For example, at the timing when the second type production is easier to execute than the first type production, not only the production whose main purpose is to suggest the setting value like the production a but also the big hit with the setting difference like the production b. Since it is difficult for the suggestion effect to appear, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to be confused.

(About "appearance frequency" and "selection ratio")
In each of the above explanations, the terms “frequency of occurrence” and “selection ratio” have been used, but here, the definitions of these terms will be described.
The "appearance frequency" is the "frequency of appearance per hour (for example, once an hour)", "frequency of appearance per number of fluctuations (for example, once in 100 times)", or "frequency" of the target effect. It refers to the frequency of appearance when a specific condition is met (for example, once in 10 times when normal reach is met).
That is, the fact that the appearance frequency differs depending on the set value means that the selection rate of the target effect differs for each set value (or only for a specific one or a plurality of set values) in the effect selection table. Therefore, since "appearance frequency" and "selection ratio" are substantially synonymous, they can be replaced with each other.

As described above, when there is an effect P selected at the same effect selection ratio (for example, 1/100 when the loss fluctuates) on the effect selection table, the meaning depends on each term of the appearance frequency and the selection ratio. There are also different cases.
The fact that the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value (the jackpot probability does not have to be different for all the set values, but if the jackpot probability is the same for all the set values, there is no point in setting the set value in the first place). It means that the loss probability differs depending on the set value. Therefore, in the effect P in the above example (the effect that appears at 1/100 when the loss fluctuates), the selection ratio does not differ between the set values, but the loss frequency differs between the set values, and as a result, the appearance frequency increases. It will be different (the lower the setting, the higher the frequency of appearance of the effect P).

However, if all of them are taken into consideration, there will be no production that belongs to the category of "no setting difference", so basically any phrase should be used unless two terms are used properly in the same claim. Even if they are used, the case where the selection ratios in the selection table are the same is defined as "no setting difference", and the case where the selection ratios in the selection table are different is defined as "there is a setting difference".

In addition, "no setting difference" is further subdivided so as to indicate that there is no setting difference between specific setting values such as no setting difference among specific setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3). May be good.
Similarly, "with setting difference" may be further subdivided so that only a specific setting value (for example, setting value 6) has a different selection ratio from other setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 5). ..

<16.1 CPU configuration>
[16-1. Control configuration of pachinko game machines]

Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine 1A as another embodiment will be described.
The pachinko gaming machine 1A is a computer device for controlling the effect of one CPU.
Since the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2, the description thereof will be omitted. In the following description, parts that are similar to the parts that have already been explained are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is a schematic block diagram of the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.
As can be seen in comparison with FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in that the liquid crystal control unit 40 is not provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the effect control unit 24A is provided in place of the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit 24A, as a so-called 1 CPU, realizes the functions of the liquid crystal control unit 40 (the liquid crystal control CPU described above) as well as the functions of the effect control unit 24 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. It is configured.
Further, the effect control unit 24A in this example is configured to realize not only the function of the liquid crystal control CPU but also the function corresponding to the above-mentioned acoustic control unit (sound controller 280 described later).

In this example, the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S are provided as the liquid crystal display device 36, but the configuration is such that only a single liquid crystal display device 36 is provided as in the case of FIG. You can also do it.
In the main LCD 36M, under the control of the effect control unit 24A, for example, three decorative symbols, left, middle, and right, are displayed in a variable manner on the background image. In addition, various production images such as normal production, reach production, and super reach production are also displayed. Similarly, the sub LCD 36S is also displayed according to various effects.
The main LCD 36M variablely displays the decorative symbol by the image in synchronization with the variable display of the first and second special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b.

Since the effect control unit 24A also has a function as a control device for the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S, it also has a function as a VDP, an image ROM, and a VRAM.
VDP refers to a function that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing.
The image ROM refers to a memory in which image data (effect image data) for which VDP performs image development processing is stored.
The VRAM is an image memory area that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP.

With these configurations, the effect control unit 24A generates various image data based on the command (effect control command) from the main control unit 20 and outputs the various image data to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. As a result, various effects images are displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

[16-2. Composition of production control unit]

FIG. 128 shows a specific configuration example of the effect control unit 24A.
Note that the memory 244 is not shown in FIG. 128.
The effect control unit 24A in the example of FIG. 128 is configured by externally connecting ROM242, CGROM260 (CG: Computer Graphics, corresponding to the above-mentioned image ROM), and DRAM (Dynamic RAM) 278 to, for example, the composite chip 250. There is.
The composite chip 250 includes a CPU circuit 250a in which a CPU 241 is built in and a VDP circuit 250b that functions as a VDP, and the above-mentioned functions such as VDP and VRAM, as well as optical display control, can be performed by the illustrated parts. It has the functions of motor control and acoustic control.
Each component will be explained.

In the composite chip 250, the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b are connected through the CPU interface circuit 258. The CPU interface circuit 258 is a circuit that relays transmission / reception data between the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b.
In the composite chip 250, the CPU circuit 250a issues a display list DL (details will be described later) at predetermined time intervals for image production control, and the VDP circuit 250b outputs image data based on the issued display list DL. Generate to drive the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

A ROM 242 and a work memory 259 are connected to the CPU interface circuit 258. The work memory 259 is, for example, a RAM having a storage capacity of about 2 Mbytes, and is configured to be accessible from the CPU circuit 250a. In the work memory 259, a DL buffer BUF for temporarily storing a display list DL in which a series of instruction commands for specifying each frame of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S are described is secured.

In the case of this example, a series of instruction commands in the display list DL include a texture load command such as a TXLOAD command for reading an image material (texture) from CGROM260 and decoding (expanding) it, and a VRAM at the decoding (expanding) destination. Texture setting commands such as the SET INDEX command, which has a function to specify the area (index space) in advance, and the image material after decoding (expansion) are placed at predetermined positions in the virtual drawing space (details will be described later in FIG. 143, etc.). Primitive drawing commands such as the SPRITE command for placement, and the SETDAVR command and SETDAVF command for specifying the drawing area actually drawn on the display device among the images drawn in the virtual drawing space by the drawing command. Includes environment setting commands and index table control commands (WRIDXTBL) for index table 268 that manages index space.

The CPU circuit 250a is a circuit having the same performance as a general-purpose one-chip microcomputer, and has a CPU 241 that comprehensively controls image production based on a control program of ROM 242 and a WDT that forcibly resets the CPU 241 when the program goes into a runaway state. A watchdog timer) circuit 251 and a RAM 243 having a storage capacity of about 16 kbytes and used as a work area of the CPU 241 and a DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller) 252 that realizes data transfer without going through the CPU 241. For operation control of a serial input / output port (SIO) 253 having a plurality of input ports Si and an output port So, a parallel input / output port (PIO) 254 having a plurality of input ports Pi and an output port Po, and a CPU circuit 250a. It is configured to have various control registers 255 to which various values of are written.

For convenience, the expression "input / output port" is used, but in the effect control unit 24A, the input / output port includes an input port and an output port that operate independently. This point is the same for the input / output circuit 256 and the input / output circuit 257 described below.

The parallel input / output port 254 is connected to an external device such as the main control unit 20 through the input / output circuit 256, and the CPU 241 receives a control command (effect control command) CMD and a strobe signal via the input / output circuit 256. (Interrupt signal) STB and STB are received.
The received control command CMD is supplied to the parallel input / output port (PIO) 254 via the input / output circuit 256. Further, the strobe signal STB is supplied to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 241 via the input / output circuit 256 to activate the reception interrupt processing. Therefore, the CPU 241 that grasps the control command CMD based on the reception interrupt processing uniformly controls the sound effect, the light effect, the motor effect, and the image effect corresponding to the control command CMD through an effect lottery or the like. become.

Although not particularly limited, in this example, the SMC unit (Serial Management Controller) 276 of the VDP circuit 250b is used for the light effect and the motor effect. The SMC unit 276 is a composite controller having a built-in lamp controller 276a and a motor controller 276b, and is configured to be able to output a serial signal by a clock synchronization method. Further, the motor controller 276b is configured to be able to output a latch pulse at an arbitrary timing based on a set value for a predetermined control register in various registers 265 included in the VDP circuit 250b, which will be described later, and is a serial signal in a clock synchronization method. Is configured to be inputtable.

Therefore, in this example, the motor drive signal (drive signal of the movable accessory motor 80c) and the lamp drive signal (drive signal of the optical display device 45a) are output from the SMC unit 276 in synchronization with the clock signal, while being appropriately output. The latch pulse is output as the operation control signal ENABLE at the correct timing.

Further, in this example, a parallel / serial conversion unit 277 is connected to the SMC unit 276. A position detection sensor 82a is correspondingly arranged in the movable accessory motor 80c shown in FIG. 127, and a signal from the position detection sensor 82a is input to the parallel / serial conversion unit 277.
Further, FIG. 128 shows an example in which the user's operation information from the operation unit 17 is also input to the parallel / serial conversion unit 277. The user's operation information is a signal corresponding to the operation of the effect button 13, the cross key 16, and the like.
The parallel / serial conversion unit 277 is mounted on the effect control unit 24A as an IC built in the composite chip, for example, but may be mounted on the effect control unit 24A as an IC separate from the composite chip 250.
For example, the parallel / serial conversion unit 277 inputs signals of 32 systems, converts the input data into serial data, and supplies the signals to the motor controller 276b. The operation of the parallel / serial conversion unit 277 is controlled by a control signal from the motor controller 276b. Further, the parallel / serial conversion unit 277 transfers serial data using a clock signal.
With this configuration, the SMC 276 can efficiently detect the operating state of the movable body accessory motor 80c and the user operation on the operation unit 17 such as the effect button 13, that is, the input required for the effect control. Therefore, the CPU 241 can efficiently grasp the effect state.

It is not essential to use the SMC unit 276 for controlling the light effect and the motor effect. That is, since the CPU circuit 250a has a built-in general-purpose serial input / output port (SIO) 253, it is possible to use these to control the optical effect and the motor effect.
Specifically, it is as shown by the broken line in FIG. 128, and in the configuration shown by the broken line, the clock signal CK and the drive signal SDATA are output via the input / output circuit 257 connected to the serial input / output port 253. , The operation control signal ENABLE is output via the input / output circuit 256 connected to the parallel input / output port 254. For convenience, they are referred to as input / output ports and input / output circuits, but what actually functions is the output ports and output circuits.

Here, in the serial input / output port 253, the serial output port SO is configured to incorporate a 16-stage FIFO register. When the control of the light effect and the motor effect is executed by using the serial input / output port 253, the DMAC circuit 252 is activated in response to the operation start instruction from the CPU 241 to drive the light effect and the motor effect. Hereinafter, necessary drive data are sequentially read from the "lamp / motor drive table") and transferred to the FIFO register of the serial output port SO by DMA. The drive data stored in the FIFO register is serially output from the serial output port SO in a clock synchronous manner. Although there are a plurality of (for example, 4) DMA channels in the DMAC circuit 252, the lamp drive data is DMA-transferred on the first DMA channel and the motor drive data is DMA-transferred on the second DMA channel.

In the CPU circuit 250a, the WDT circuit 251 performs a down-count operation based on a set value for a predetermined control register (WDT control register, etc.) among a plurality of control registers provided as control registers 255 accessible from the CPU 241. It is configured to have a WDT counter. The WDT counter starts from a predetermined initial value, is down-counted toward zero in a predetermined operation cycle, and when the down-count value reaches zero, an internal interrupt (WDT interrupt) is generated.

After executing the WDT interrupt processing program, the CPU 241 is put into a reset state by software reset processing.

The DMAC circuit 252 is set for each predetermined data transfer unit in a predetermined DMA transfer mode from the transfer source (Source) to the transfer destination (Destination) based on the set value in the predetermined control register in the control register 255. , A circuit that repeats data transfer a predetermined number of times.

For example, in the embodiment in which the serial output port SO functions (see the broken line in FIG. 128), the predetermined control register in the control register 255 is set to the start address of the lamp / motor drive table (the start value of the transfer source address). , The address of the input register of the serial output port SO (fixed value of the transfer destination address), the data transfer unit (8 bits), and the number of transfers are specified. Then, the DMAC circuit 252, which has received the operation start instruction in the predetermined control register, performs DMA transfer of the drive data to the predetermined transfer destination address while updating the transfer source address.

This point is almost the same in the case of the later embodiment (for example, FIG. 150, etc.) in which the display list DL is issued by the DMAC circuit 252. That is, the CPU 241 sets the start address of the transfer source (DL buffer BUF), the address of the transfer destination (transfer port TR_PORT), the DMA transfer mode, the data transfer unit, and the number of transfers in a predetermined control register of the CPU circuit 250a. , Other conditions will be set. These points will be described later in FIG. 151 and the like.

In general, the DMA transfer mode includes a "cycle steal transfer mode" in which the DMA operation does not occupy the memory bus, such as releasing the bus control right in the middle of the unit operation (R operation / W operation) of the DMA transfer, and a plurality of Rs. "Burst transfer (pipeline transfer) mode" that does not release the bus control right until the specified number of transfers is completed, such as continuous operation and W operation, and DMA transfer request (demand) received from other devices are active. During that time, a "demand transfer mode" in which the DMA operation is continued can be considered.
The DMAC circuit 252 of this example functions in the cycle steal transfer mode in which a memory release period of at least one cycle is provided between the read access activation (R operation) and the write access activation (W operation) at the time of DMA transfer. , The operation of the CPU 241 is not hindered. Specifically, according to the adoption of the cycle stealing transfer mode, the bus of the CPU 241 can be used during the memory release period of the above one cycle, and the bus is released to the CPU 241 for each read access, so that the operation of the CPU 241 is significantly delayed. There is no.

Then, for example, in the embodiment in which the DMAC circuit 252 is used when issuing the display list DL to the VDP circuit 250b, the data transfer unit (1 operand) for one cycle is set to 32 × 2 bits, and the display list DL is stored. While appropriately increasing the source address of the RAM 243 (+8 for each operand transfer), the DMA transfer operation is executed for the transfer port register TR_PORT (see FIG. 140) of the data transfer circuit 267 specified by the fixed address. are doing.
As will be described later, in the above embodiment, the total data size is set to a fixed value (for example, 4 × 64 = 256 bytes, or its own) by adding a required number of NOP (no operation) commands to the display list DL. It is adjusted to (integer multiple), and the issuance of the display list DL is completed by repeating one-operator transfer of 32 bits × 2 times 32 times (or an integral multiple thereof). Even if the drawing circuit 274 executes the NOP command, virtually no change occurs.

Subsequently, the VDP circuit 250b will be described.
To the VDP circuit 250b, a CGROM 260 for storing compressed data which is a component of still images and moving images constituting an image effect and a DRAM 278 having a storage capacity of about 4 Gbit are connected, and a main LCD 36M and a sub LCD 36S are connected. Is connected. The DRAM 278 is preferably composed of DDR (Double-Data-Rate SDRAM).

Although not particularly limited, the CGROM 260 in this example is composed of a flash SSD (Solid State Drive) composed of a NAND flash memory having a storage capacity of about 62 Gbit, and acquires necessary compressed data by serial transmission. It is configured to do. Therefore, the problem of skew (difference in transmission speed for each bit data) that inevitably occurs in parallel transmission is solved, and extremely high-speed transmission operation becomes possible. Although not particularly limited, in this example, the CGROM 260 is accessed at high speed by the HSS (High Speed Serial) method compliant with SATA (Serial ATA).

Regardless of whether or not the HSS method conforming to Serial ATA is adopted, the NAND flash memory is mechanically more stable than the hard disk and can be accessed at high speed, but is a sequential access memory. , There is a difficulty in random accessibility as compared with DRAM and SRAM. Therefore, by executing a preload operation in which a group of compressed data (CG data) is read out to the DRAM 278 prior to the drawing operation, smooth random access of the CG data during the drawing operation can be realized. By the way, the access speed becomes slower in the order of VRAM261> DRAM278> CGROM260.

In detail, the VDP circuit 250b has various registers 265 in which various operation parameters defining the operation of the VDP can be set by the CPU 241 and about 48 Mbytes used when generating image data to be displayed on the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. VRAM 261 and data transfer circuit 267 that executes data transmission / reception between each part inside the chip and data transmission / reception with the outside of the chip, index table 268 that can specify the address information of Source and Destination with respect to VRAM 261, and preceded the drawing operation. The preloader 269 that can execute the preload operation to read-access the CGROM 260, the GDEC (graphics decoder) 273 that decodes (decodes / decompresses / expands) the compressed data read from the CGROM 260, and the still image data after decoding (decompression). A drawing circuit 274 that generates image data for each frame of the main LCD 36M and a sub LCD 36S by appropriately combining video data and video data, and a geometry that generates a stereoscopic image by appropriate coordinate conversion as part of the operation of the drawing circuit 274. Three systems (A / B / C) display circuits that can read image data generated by the engine 275 and the drawing circuit 274 and held in the frame buffers FBa and FBb of the VRAM261 and execute appropriate image processing in parallel. Based on the output of 270 and the display circuit 270 of 3 systems (A / B / C), it is possible to output up to 3 systems of 2 systems of LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) output and 1 system of digital RGB output. The LCD interface 271, the output selection unit 272 that appropriately selects and outputs the output of the display circuit 270 of the three systems (A / B / C), the SMC unit 276 described above, and the sound controller 280 that functions as a sound source IC. Have.
Here, in the VRAM 261, the frame buffer FBa is a frame buffer for the main LCD 36M, and the frame buffer FBb is a frame buffer for the sub LCD 36S.
Further, the VDP circuit 250b has a CPU interface unit 264 that relays data transmission / reception with the CPU interface circuit 258 described above, a CG bus interface unit 263 that relays data reception from CGROM 260, and a DRAM that relays data transmission / reception with DRAM 278. It has an interface unit 266 and a VRAM interface unit 262 that relays data transmission / reception with the VRAM 261.

FIG. 129 shows the relationship between the CPU interface unit 264, the CG bus interface unit 263, the DRAM interface unit 266, and the VRAM interface unit 262, and various registers 265, CGROM 260, DRAM 278, and VRAM 261.
In the case of the embodiment in which the preload operation is performed, the CG data acquired from the CGROM 260 is transferred as preload data to the preload area of the DRAM 278 via the data transfer circuit 267 and the DRAM interface unit 266.
The preload operation is not an essential operation, and an embodiment in which the preload operation is not performed is also possible. Further, the data transfer destination is not limited to DRAM 278, and may be VRAM 261.
In the embodiment in which the preload operation is not executed, the CG data is transferred to the VRAM via the data transfer circuit 267 and the VRAM interface unit 262.

By the way, in this example, in the VRAM 261, an image that specifies the expansion area of the compressed data read from the CGROM 260 and each ARGB information (32 bits = 8 × 4) of W × H display pixels of the LCD (liquid crystal display) 36. A frame buffer area for storing data, a Z buffer area for storing depth information of each display pixel, and the like are required. In the ARGB information, A means 8-bit α-plane data, and RGB means 8-bit data of the three primary colors.

Here, each of the above-mentioned areas of the VRAM 261 is indirectly accessed by the CPU 241 based on various instruction commands (such as the above-mentioned texture and SPRITE) described in the display list DL, but in the READ / WRITE access, one by one. , It is complicated to specify the Destination address and Source address of the VRAM 261.
Therefore, in this example, in the initial processing after the CPU reset, a one-dimensional or two-dimensional logical memory space (hereinafter referred to as "index space") required for drawing operation is secured, and each index space is indexed. By assigning a number, access based on the index number is possible.
Specifically, after the CPU is reset, the VRAM 261 is roughly divided into three types of memory areas, and a required number of index spaces are secured in each memory area. Then, by constructing an index table 268 (see FIG. 141) that stores the index space and the index number in association with each other, the subsequent operation based on the index number is realized.
A specific example of the method of using the VRAM 261 using the index space in this example, a specific method of the drawing operation in the VRAM 261, and the like will be described later.

In FIG. 128, the data transfer circuit 276 uses a resource (storage medium) inside the VDP circuit 250b and an external storage medium as a transfer source port or a transfer destination port, and performs a DMA (Direct Memory Access) data transfer operation between them. Is a circuit that executes.
The details of the data transfer circuit 276 will be described later.

The preloader 269 executes a necessary preload operation based on the display list DL issued by the CPU 241 and transferred by the data transfer circuit 267. Specifically, the preloader 269 analyzes the display list DL and transfers the image material referred to in the display list DL, that is, the CG data on the CGROM2260 to the designated area on the DRAM 278, that is, the preload area.
At this time, the preloader 269 outputs a display list DL (hereinafter referred to as "rewrite list DL'") in which the reference destination of the CG data is rewritten to the address on the DRAM 278 after the transfer. This rewrite list DL'is stored in the DL buffer area BUF' allocated on the DRAM 278. The rewrite list DL'stored in the DL buffer area BUF' is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 by the data transfer circuit 267.
The preload area and DL buffer area BUF'are reserved in advance at the time of initial processing after the CPU reset (ST3 in FIG. 145).

The drawing circuit 274 sequentially analyzes the instruction command sequence of the display list DL and the rewrite list DL'transferred via the data transfer circuit 267, and forms the VRAM 261 in cooperation with the GDEC 273 and the geometry engine 275. This is a circuit for drawing an image for one frame of the main LCD36M and the subLCD36S in the frame buffers (FBa, FBb).

As described above, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function, the reference destination of the CG data in the rewrite list DL'is not the CGROM 260 but the preload area set in the DRAM 278. Therefore, the sequential access to the CG data generated during the execution of drawing by the drawing circuit 274 can be quickly executed, and even a high-resolution moving image with intense movement can be drawn without any problem. That is, according to this example, as the CGROM 260, it is possible to perform complicated and advanced image production while utilizing an inexpensive serial ATA module.

Here, the frame buffer FB in the VRAM 261 is a double buffer divided into a drawing area Ad and a read area Ar, and these two areas are alternately used by switching their uses. Further, in this example, since the two LCDs 36M and 36S are connected, the frame buffers FBa / FBb of two sections are secured. Therefore, the drawing circuit 274 draws image data for one frame in the drawing area Ad (writing area) of the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, and draws the image data for one frame, and draws the drawing area Ad (writing) of the frame buffer FBa for the sub LCD 36S. The image data for one frame will be drawn in the area). When the image data is written in the drawing area Ad, the display circuit 270 reads the image data in the other read area Ar (display area) and outputs the image data to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.

The display circuit 270 is a circuit that reads out the image data of the frame buffer FB, performs final image processing, and then outputs the data. The final image processing includes, for example, scaling processing for enlarging / reducing the image, subtle color correction processing, and dithering processing for minimizing the quantization error of the entire image.

FIG. 130 shows a block diagram of three systems of display circuits 270 and LCD interface 226.
The display circuit 270 of each A / B / C system has a synchronization signal generation unit 285, and performs processing in synchronization with each frame of the image. The synchronization signal generation unit 285 generates, for example, a V blank signal indicating a vertical blank period (ineffective line scanning period), a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal as synchronization signals. These synchronization signals can be used for control processing inside the composite chip 250, and are also used for display data transfer and display control operation to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S.
The synchronization signals used in each display circuit 270 can be synchronized with each other. For example, each display circuit 270 can be forcibly synchronized by using the falling edge of the vertical synchronization signal of an external display such as the main LCD 36M as a trigger.

Each display circuit 270 acquires the frame data read from the frame buffer FB of the VRAM 261 by the VRAM reading unit 281.
Regarding the display circuit 270 of each A / B system, it is possible to perform scaling processing by the scaler 282, color correction processing by the color correction unit 283, and dithering processing by the ditherer 284 on the acquired frame data. Then, digital RGB output and LVDS output are performed as outputs after processing by the ditherer 284. The same applies to the display circuit 270 of the C system, but in the example of this figure, the display circuit 270 of the C system does not have the function of the scaler 282.
Here, in this example, since there are two LCD 36s, the display circuit 270 to be operated is only two systems of A / B. Specifically, the display circuit 270 of the A system reads the data of the frame buffer FBa, and the display circuit 270 of the B system reads the data of the frame buffer FBb, and each performs the final image processing described above.

The LCD interface 271 has a digital RGB output unit 271a and an LVDS output unit 271b.
Display data as digital RGB output from the display circuit 270 of each A / B / C system is supplied to the digital RGB output unit 271a. The digital RGB output unit 271a can select one digital RGB output of each display circuit 270 and output it to the connected display device.
Further, display data as LVDS output from each display circuit 270 is supplied to the LVDS output unit 271b. The LVDS output unit 271b is capable of selecting two LVDS outputs from each display circuit 270 and outputting them to a connected display device.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of this example, the LVDS output of the A system display circuit 270 of each display circuit 270 is output to the main LCD 36M, and the LVDS output of the B system display circuit 270 is output to the sub LCD 36S. There is.
Of course, this is an example, and it is conceivable to output the digital RGB output to the main LCD 36M or the sub LCD 36S.
The selection of which display circuit 270 to output to which system is realized by the control of the LCD interface unit 271 by the output selection unit 272 described above.

In FIG. 128, the VDP circuit 250b is provided with a sound controller 280.
The sound controller 280 has, for example, a sound data storage unit that stores compressed audio data, decodes the compressed audio data, generates an output audio signal, and outputs the output audio signal to the external amplifier unit 46d based on the control of the CPU 241.
Regardless of whether or not the sound controller 280 is mounted, the CPU 241 may control the sound source IC provided outside the composite chip 250 to output the audio signal to the amplifier unit 46d.

The SMC unit 276 is a composite control controller incorporating a lamp controller 276a and a motor controller 276b. Then, the LED drive signal and the motor drive signal are output in synchronization with the clock signal to the lamp driver unit 45d and the motor driver unit 80d (driver IC with a built-in shift register) mounted on the external board, and are appropriately output. It is configured to be able to output a latch pulse at the timing.

Regarding the internal circuit of the VDP circuit 250b and its operation described above, the operation content to be executed by the internal circuit is defined by the operation parameters (set values) set by the CPU 241 in the CPU circuit 250a in various registers 265, and the VDP circuit 250b The execution state can be specified by READ the operation status values of various registers 265. The various registers 265 mean a large number of VDP registers RGij mapped in a memory space (0 to FFFFFH) of about 1 Mbyte on the memory map of the CPU 241. The CPU 241 is used for the operation parameter LIGHTE via the CPU interface unit 258. The (setting) operation and the READ operation of the operation status value are executed (see FIG. 129).

As shown in FIG. 129, various registers 265 (VDP register RGij) include a "system control register" in which initial setting values related to system operations such as interrupt operation are written, and various area settings for VRAM 261 (for example, an AAC area described later). (A), page area (b), etc.) and settings related to data transfer processing by the data transfer circuit 267 between the "index table register" related to the construction or modification of the index table 268 and the internal circuit of the CPU 241 and the VDP circuit 250b. Regarding the operation of the preloader 269, the "data transfer register" in which the values are written, the "GDEC register" in which the execution status of the GDEC 273 is specified, the "drawing register" in which the setting values related to the instruction command and the drawing circuit 274 are written. A "preloader register" in which setting values are written, a "display register" in which setting values related to the operation of the display circuit 270 are written, a "lamp control register" in which setting values related to lamp controller 276a are written, and a motor controller. It includes a "motor control register" in which the set values for 276b are written.

In the following description, one or more registers RGij included in various registers 265 may be referred to by the above-mentioned individual names or collectively referred to as VDP register RGij. In any case, the CPU 241 is a predetermined VDP. The internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b is controlled by writing an appropriate set value to the register RGij. Specifically, the CPU 241 realizes a predetermined image effect based on a display list DL that is updated at an appropriate time interval and a set value in a predetermined VDP register RGij. In this example, since the CPU 241 is in charge of including the lamp effect and the motor effect, the VDP register RGij also includes the lamp control register and the motor control register.

[16-3. Function comparison of production control unit]

FIG. 131 shows a configuration in which a computer device (liquid crystal control unit 40) for liquid crystal control is provided separately from the computer device as the effect control unit 24 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a functional block diagram schematically showing each functional configuration of the effect control unit 24 and the liquid crystal control unit 40 in the case of "2 CPU configuration").
As understood from the explanations so far, the effect control unit 24 receives and analyzes the effect control command from the main control unit 20, and based on the analysis result, about the effect other than the image effect as a lamp, sound, and motor. Scenario data (production progress data: various registration information as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38) is generated, and drive data for lamps, sounds, and motors is generated and output based on the scenario data. The desired production operation is realized.
Further, regarding the liquid crystal, the liquid crystal control command obtained based on the analysis result of the effect control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

The effect control unit 24 has an effect control command buffer F11 (the above-mentioned “command reception buffer”) which is a buffer area (storage area) for holding the effect control command transmitted by the main control unit 20, and also has an effect control command. Scenario data for lamps, sounds, and motors is generated and generated based on the command analysis results of the effect control command analysis processing unit F12 that analyzes the effect control commands held in the buffer F11 and the effect control command analysis processing unit F12. It has an effect control scenario execution processing unit F13 that executes processing based on the created scenario data, and a command output buffer F14 that is an output buffer for liquid crystal control commands.

The effect control command analysis processing unit F12 performs the process shown in FIG. 42 above as the effect control command analysis process, and specifies the type of the command. The processing to be executed for each type of effect control command is predetermined. Depending on the type of effect control command, it is stipulated that a predetermined liquid crystal control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. For example, the processing of the "command set" illustrated in FIGS. 43D and 43E. In this case, as a result of the analysis processing of the effect control command analysis processing unit F12, a predetermined liquid crystal control command is set in the command output buffer F14.
Further, as the effect control command, it is stipulated that the same command as the effect control command should be transmitted (that is, through transmission) to the liquid crystal control board F12. Also in this case, as a result of the analysis processing of the effect control command analysis processing unit F12, the liquid crystal control command (the data is the same as the received effect control command) is set in the command output buffer F14.
The through transmission of the command will be described later in FIGS. 135 to 137.

In the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13, the generation of scenario data based on the command analysis result is realized by the scenario registration process provided as a part of the command correspondence process (S2106) as in step S2141 of FIG. 43D, for example. ..
Further, as specific processing based on the scenario data executed by the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13, the processing related to the update of the scenario described with reference to FIG. 41 (S2004) and the execution processing of the scheduler for the sound, the lamp, and the motor And output processing (S2032, S2033, S2034, S2042, S2202, S2203 in FIG. 44) and the like.

Here, as the effect control command, it is stipulated that a predetermined liquid crystal control command should be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the effect control command (hereinafter, the liquid crystal control command). Also referred to as "time difference transmission").
In this example, when such time-lag transmission is performed, scenario data (hereinafter, also referred to as “command transmission scenario data”) for managing the command to be transmitted and the transmission timing for the liquid crystal control command is used.
When such command transmission scenario data is generated as a result of command analysis by the effect control command analysis processing unit F12, the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13 executes processing according to the command transmission scenario data. , The liquid crystal control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. That is, in this case, a predetermined liquid crystal control command is set in the command output buffer F14 as the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13 executes the scenario.
The time difference transmission of the liquid crystal control command will be described later in FIGS. 135 to 137.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 analyzes the liquid crystal control command buffer F21, which is a buffer area for holding the liquid crystal control command transmitted by the effect control unit 24, and the liquid crystal control command held in the liquid crystal control command buffer F11. Based on the command analysis results of the control command analysis processing unit F22 and the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F22, scenario data for the liquid crystal effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "liquid crystal scenario data") is generated, and processing based on the generated scenario data is performed. It has a liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 to execute.
When the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 performs processing based on the liquid crystal scenario data, the above-mentioned display list is created and drawn, and image data necessary for realizing an image effect is appropriately generated, and the image data is generated. Is output to the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, various effects images are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Here, when the control function for the image effect of the liquid crystal control unit 40 as described above is mounted on the effect control unit 24 to make one CPU, a program for effect control other than the image effect (main control). Create a new program that integrates the analysis of the effect control command transmitted from the unit 20 and the generation of scenario data about lamps, sounds, motors, etc.) and the program for image effect control, and use this program as one CPU. It is conceivable to have a computer device (CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A in the pachinko game machine 1A) execute the program.
At this time, since it is not necessary to send the liquid crystal control command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 when one CPU is used, the liquid crystal scenario data is generated without interposing a command separate from the command from the main control unit 20. It is conceivable to configure such a program.

However, according to this, the program for image effect control executed by one CPU needs to be relatively significantly changed from the program executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU), and the work load of program creation becomes heavy. There is a risk of increase.
In particular, under circumstances such as having a different company create the program of the effect control unit 24 and the program of the liquid crystal control unit 40, the work load of creating the program to be executed by one CPU becomes larger.

Therefore, in this example, the effect control unit 24A as one CPU has a control configuration as shown in FIG. 132.
As shown in the drawing, the effect control unit 24A has an effect control command buffer F11, an effect control command analysis processing unit F12, and an effect control scenario execution processing unit F13, similarly to the effect control unit 24. In this case, the command output buffer F14 is omitted, and the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is provided. Further, the effect control unit 24A has a liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and a liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17.
The processing contents of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17 are the same as those of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F22 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 in the liquid crystal control unit 40, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 analyzes the liquid crystal control command held in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15, and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17 uses the command analysis result by the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16. Based on this, liquid crystal scenario data is generated, and by executing processing based on the generated liquid crystal scenario data, image data necessary for realizing the liquid crystal effect is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36.

In the effect control unit 24A, the effect control command buffer F11 is set as, for example, a part of the storage area of the RAM 243. Further, the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is also set as, for example, a part of the storage area of the RAM 243.
When the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A is supposed to transmit a liquid crystal control command in association with the processing of the effect control command analysis processing unit F12 and the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13, the target liquid crystal control command is sent to the liquid crystal control command. Set in buffer F15.

As described above, the effect control unit 24A holds the effect control command buffer F11 that holds the effect control command transmitted by the main control unit 20, and the liquid crystal control that holds the liquid crystal control command obtained by analyzing the effect control command. It has a command buffer F15.
As a result, the effect control unit 24A analyzes the effect control command and sets the liquid crystal control command obtained by the analysis in the predetermined storage area. The effect control unit 24 process (the liquid crystal control command in the command output buffer F14). It is possible to follow the process of setting).
Further, regarding the control process of the image effect, the liquid crystal control command set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 is acquired, the liquid crystal scenario data is generated based on the liquid crystal control command, and the liquid crystal display device 36 based on the liquid crystal scenario data. It is possible to follow the same process as the liquid crystal control unit 40, which is control (control of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S in the configuration of FIG. 127).
As a result, as the program to be executed by the effect control unit 24A as one CPU, the program executed by the effect control unit 24 at the time of 2 CPUs and the program executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU) are almost the same. It is possible to follow. As a specific change, the liquid crystal control command is mainly set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 instead of the command output buffer F14.
Therefore, it is possible to almost eliminate the need to rewrite the existing program in order to realize one CPU, and it is possible to reduce the work load related to the program creation.

Further, the effect control unit 24A manages the progress of the effect other than the image display based on the analysis result of the effect control command transmitted from the main control unit 20 (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13). ) And the image display instruction information generation means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) that generates the image display instruction information (liquid crystal control command) related to the image display according to the progress of the effect by the first effect progress management means. Second effect progress management means (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution process) that manages the progress of the effect related to image display based on the image display instruction information generated by the image display instruction information generation means. It has a part F17).
The processing by the first effect progress management means and the image display instruction information generation means is the same as the processing of the effect control scenario execution processing unit F13 included in the effect control unit 24. The processing by the second effect progress management means is the same as the processing of the liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F22 and the liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F23 of the liquid crystal control unit 40.
As a result, as the program to be executed by the effect control unit 24A as one CPU, the program executed by the effect control unit 24 at the time of 2 CPUs and the program executed by the liquid crystal control unit 40 (liquid crystal control CPU) are almost the same. It is possible to follow.
Therefore, it is possible to almost eliminate the need to rewrite the existing program in order to realize one CPU, and it is possible to reduce the work load related to the program creation.

Here, the program for realizing the processing of the first effect progress management means and the image display instruction information generation means and the program for realizing the processing of the second effect progress management means are independent program modules. Can be configured.

[16-4. Production control unit processing]

Subsequently, the processing of the effect control unit 24A will be described.
The CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A executes the same processing as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 44). The CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A mainly executes a process different from that of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 for the effect control main process (FIG. 41).

The flowchart of FIG. 133 shows the effect control main process executed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A.
In the following, only the different processes will be described in comparison with the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, and the duplicated processes will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

The major difference from the main process shown in FIG. 41 is that steps S2060 and S2061 and steps S2025 to S2028 have been added because the CPU 241 in this case executes the process according to the liquid crystal control command.
Further, in this case, instead of the various initial setting processes of step S2000, various initial setting processes of step S2000'are performed. As the process of this step S2000', the WDT initialization and the movable body function performed in step S2000 are performed. Performs necessary initial setting processing before the start of the game operation, such as restoration of the starting point of an object, initialization of control, initialization of sound source control, and initialization of schedulers (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler). However, in the initial setting process of step S2000', various processes shown in FIG. 145 are performed, which is different from step S2000. The process of FIG. 145 will be described later.

When the CPU 241 in this case determines in step S2003 that the frame update flag is OFF, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2060 to execute the liquid crystal control frame update process. This liquid crystal control frame update process corresponds to a process of advancing the scenario for the image effect whose progress is managed by the liquid crystal scenario data described above by one frame.
In the liquid crystal scenario data, a value based on, for example, a timer value that manages the progress timing of the scenario is registered, such as "wait time (delay)" and "sub-scenario timer (scTm)" of the scenario registration information shown in FIG. 37A. It is included in one of the information. Therefore, in the liquid crystal control frame update process in step S2060, the image effect scenario is advanced by one frame by updating the value.

In step S2061 following step S2060, the CPU 241 performs drawing update processing. That is, based on the liquid crystal scenario data, for example, the display list DL, which is a group of drawing commands described in the order of drawing as described above, is created, and the drawing start control of the drawing circuit 274 is performed. Further, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 functions, the execution start control of the preload is performed.
In the drawing update process of step S2060, a process for switching between the drawing area Ad and the reading area Ar is also performed for the double buffer as the frame buffer FB. The details of the drawing update process in this example will be described later.

In response to the execution of the drawing update process in step S2061, the CPU 241 proceeds to the scenario scheduler frame update process in step S2004. As a result, the timer of the effect scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.

Further, the CPU 241 in this case can perform the analysis processing of the liquid crystal control command when the V blank interrupt counter is 0, that is, in the first half period of the frame by the processing of steps S2025 to S2028.
Specifically, the CPU 241 in this case proceeds to step S2025 when there is no receive command in step S2022 or when the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024 after the command analysis process in step S2023. Check whether the V blank interrupt counter is 1 or 0. Here, it is clearly shown that the reception command confirmed in step S2022 is an effect control command from the main control unit 20.

If the V blank interrupt counter is 1 in step S2025, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2026 to confirm the reception of the liquid crystal control command. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not one or more liquid crystal control commands are stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 described above. If there is no liquid crystal control command, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2030.
If one or more liquid crystal control commands are stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15, the CPU 241 performs an analysis process for the commands stored in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 as the liquid crystal control command analysis process in step S2027. In the liquid crystal control command analysis process, a predetermined process is executed according to the received command, as in the case of the previous effect control command analysis process. Among the liquid crystal control commands, as a corresponding process, a process of registering a scenario in the liquid crystal scenario data is defined, and in that case, a new scenario is added to the liquid crystal scenario data.
For example, in this way, the liquid crystal scenario data is generated based on the analysis result of the liquid crystal control command.

In the drawing update process of step S2061 described above, the display list DL is created and the preload execution start control is performed based on the liquid crystal scenario data generated based on the analysis result of the liquid crystal control command as described above, and the VDP is performed. The image data required for the production can be obtained in the circuit 250b.

The CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2028 in response to executing the command analysis process in step S2027, and proceeds to step S2030.

Up to this point, the effect control main process executed by the CPU 241 in the effect control unit 24A has been described, but in the above processing examples, the CPU 241 performs various processes according to the frame period of the display data.

FIG. 134 shows various timings within the frame period of the display data.
The drawing process by the drawing circuit 274 is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed during the display period of the frame FR0. Specifically, since drawing is started in step S2061, drawing for the next frame is started at the beginning of the frame. This drawing is usually completed within the frame period.

In the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function, the preload is executed in the period one frame before in preparation for drawing. For example, the preload for drawing the display data of the frame FR2 is executed within the frame period of the frame FR0. Specifically, since it is started in step S2061, the preload for the next frame is started at the beginning of the frame. Even as a preload, it is usually completed within the frame period.

At the start timing of each frame, the CPU 241 first updates the liquid crystal control frame by the process of step S2060. Then, by the processing of step S2061, the area for newly drawing the frame buffer FB is switched (in the figure, the drawing area Ad <=> read area Ar), and the display list DL is created and the drawing circuit 274 is formed. Draw start control and preload execution start control. Further, the CPU 241 updates the scheduler frame (scenario, lamp, sound) according to step S2004.
Then, after the scheduler frame update process is performed once, the effect control command analysis process in step S2022, the liquid crystal control command analysis process in step S2027, and various scheduler execution processes in steps S2032 to S2034 are performed as necessary. Scenarios, sounds, lamps, and in this example, including scheduler updates for command transmission scenarios) are performed.
Further, the lamp drive data update and output processes in steps S2041 and S2042, and the key event process in step S2043 are executed.

Then, if the above processing is completed within the first half of the frame period (within 16 ms), it is possible to perform the analysis processing for the effect control command and the liquid crystal control command again, and if the analysis processing is performed. Further, various scheduler execution processes, lamp drive data update / output processes, and key event processes are performed.

[16-5. Operation example of production control]

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137, an operation example of the effect control realized by the processing of the effect control unit 24A (CPU 241) described above will be described.
In the following operation example, an operation example of the effect control performed corresponding to the end of the jackpot will be described.

FIG. 135A shows an example of the types of effect control commands transmitted by the main control unit 20.
As the effect control command, various commands are defined as shown in the figure depending on the value of the upper 1 byte. Then, each command has a predetermined process (corresponding process) to be executed correspondingly (in this example, it is defined as a "function").
In this example, the focus is on the effect control command (“0xF3”) as the jackpot end designation command.

FIG. 135B exemplifies a list of liquid crystal control commands whose transmission is determined in the corresponding processing of the jackpot end designation command.
For the jackpot end designation command, through transmission of the jackpot end designation command (F301H) is defined, and the selected character command (02xxH), the number of consecutive villas command (03xxH), the capture flag command (05xxH), and the jackpot end designation command. The transmission of the symbol command (0AxxH), the jackpot root command (88xxH), the character command at the time of determination (9FxxH), and the background designation command (01xxH) is defined.

The selected character command is a command indicating the distinction of the character selected by the player (for example, a favorite character), and the consecutive villa number command is a command indicating the number of consecutive jackpots. The capture flag command is a command that indicates whether or not the player was able to capture the selected character, the jackpot symbol command is a command that indicates the symbol as the hit of this time, and the jackpot root command is the type of jackpot this time, such as big or small. It is a command that indicates the jackpot of the game and the number of rounds of the jackpot.

The character command at the time of determination and the background designation command are commands for which transmission (that is, the above-mentioned time difference transmission) is specified after a predetermined time from the reception of the jackpot end designation command. In the pachinko gaming machine 1A of this example, the player is made to select a character according to the end of the big hit. For example, a specific character is selected from the characters displayed on the main LCD 36M or the like, and the effect control unit 24A accepts an operation on a predetermined operator such as the effect button 13 as a determination operation for character selection by the player. ..
The character command at the time of determination is a command representing the type of character determined by such an operation of the player.
The background designation command is, for example, a command for designating the type of the background image in the display image of the main LCD 36M (for example, the background image corresponding to the determined character is designated).
In this example, the character command and the background designation command at the time of determination are defined as commands to be transmitted with a time difference of about 9 s (270 frames) from the reception of the jackpot end designation command. In other words, in the production at the end of the jackpot in this case, the player selects (determines) the character from the end of the jackpot to 9s, and then the character command at the time of determination according to the determined character. And the background designation command is transmitted (set to the liquid crystal control command buffer F15).

In this example, the above-mentioned command transmission scenario data is used for the transmission management of the character command at the time of determination in which the time difference transmission is determined and the background specification command.
Specifically, the effect control unit 24A of this example has a jackpot end specification command (through) that is not subject to time difference transmission in the command analysis process (step S2023) when the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command. (Transmission), selected character command, number of consecutive villas command, capture flag command, jackpot symbol command, and jackpot root command are set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15.
Then, in the command analysis process (S2023) in this case, the process of registering the main scenario number (mcNo) determined in response to the received jackpot end designation command in the scenario registration information is performed, and the process is registered in this way. In the main scenario, the scenario of the lamp, sound, and motor corresponding to the end of the big hit is defined, and the scenario of transmitting the character command at the time of determination and the background designation command after 9 seconds is defined. That is, by registering the main scenario number (mcNo) corresponding to the jackpot end specification command as described above, the lamps, sounds, and motors corresponding to the jackpot end by the subsequent various scheduler execution processes (S2032 to S2034). Scenarios (sub-scenarios) for each effect are registered, and command transmission scenarios are registered. As described above, the scheduler execution process for the command transmission scenario data can be executed, for example, as a part of the scenario scheduler execution process in step S2032.

FIG. 136 schematically shows scenario data for sounds, lamps, motors, buttons, and command transmissions defined in response to the jackpot end designation command.
The time (f) in the figure represents the progress time of the effect, and the unit is a "frame" (frame of display data). In this case, the production scenario at the end of the big hit is supposed to extend for a time length of 300 frames. Regarding the time (f), the numerical value in parentheses represents the scenario execution time of the corresponding line. This corresponds to the execution time (time) for the lamp and sound / motor described above (see FIGS. 40A and 40B).

As shown in the figure, in the scenario data in this case, the sub-scenario data for the sound, the lamp, and the motor are set in the line of time = 0, and the sub-scenario data of the lamp is set in the line of time = 120. It is stipulated to set data indicating lighting. The button here means an operator used for the above-mentioned character determination operation, and the button lamp means a lamp for causing the operator to emit light. The button here is assumed to be the effect button 13 in this example.
Further, in the line of time = 123 and the line of time = 144, it is stipulated that information indicating the effective start and effective end of the button is set. Valid / invalid here means valid / invalid of operation acceptance.
Further, in the line of time = 270, data indicating that the button lamp is turned off is set as the sub-scenario data of the lamp, and data indicating the transmission of the character command at the time of determination and the background designation command are set as the command transmission scenario data. It is stipulated.
A code indicating the end of the scenario is described in the line of time = 300 (see the end codes D_LSEND and D_SEEND described above).

Although the example of managing the validity / invalidity of the button based on the scenario data is shown here, the method of managing the validity / invalidity of the button is not necessarily limited to the method using the scenario data.

FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining a flow of processing executed by the effect control unit 24A in response to the reception of the jackpot end designation command.
In FIG. 137, the horizontal axis represents the elapsed time within one frame period, and the vertical axis represents the elapsed time in frame units. For reference, the flow of each process within one frame period is shown in the uppermost row in the same manner as in FIG. 134.

It is assumed that the jackpot end designation command from the main control unit 20 is received in a certain nth frame. It is assumed that the command reception timing is the timing during which each scheduler frame update process (S2004) is being executed as shown in the figure. The command reception process is executed in the external interrupt process as described above.

In this case, in the first effect control command analysis process (S2023) of the nth frame, the process corresponding to the received jackpot end designation command is executed. That is, the process of setting the above-mentioned jackpot end designation command (through transmission), selected character command, consecutive villa number command, capture flag command, jackpot symbol command, and jackpot root command in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 (command to liquid crystal control). Transmission processing) and registration of the main scenario number (mcNo) determined in response to the jackpot end specification command to the scenario registration information is performed.

Then, in the subsequent liquid crystal control command analysis process (S2027), the jackpot end designation command, the selected character command, the number of consecutive villas command, the capture flag command, the jackpot symbol command, and the jackpot root command set in the liquid crystal control command buffer F15 are described. The analysis process is performed.

As described above, depending on the liquid crystal control command analysis process, the scenario is registered in the liquid crystal scenario data. Then, in the drawing update process of step S2061, the display list DL is created based on the liquid crystal scenario data and the execution start control of the preload is performed, and the image data necessary for the effect is obtained.
The liquid crystal scenario based on the liquid crystal scenario data updated in the nth frame is started by updating the value for managing the scenario progress timing by the liquid crystal control frame update process (S2060) in the n + 1th frame, and drawing immediately after that. The update process (S2061) performs a process for updating the drawing according to the started scenario.

In the nth frame, depending on the various scheduler execution processes (S2032 to S2034) executed immediately after the above-mentioned liquid crystal control command analysis process, sub-scenarios about lamps and sounds corresponding to the registered main scenario numbers are registered and started. Will be done. Further, by the lamp drive data update / output process (S2041 and S2042) immediately after that, the update / output of the drive data (LED drive data) for performing the lamp control according to the registered lamp sub-scenario is started. That is, the corresponding lamp effect is started.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command, a scenario related to time difference transmission (after 270 frames) of the character command at the time of determination and the background designation command is registered as the command transmission scenario.
Therefore, depending on the various scheduler execution processes in the n + 270th frame, the character command at the time of determination and the liquid crystal control command as the background designation command are transmitted according to the command transmission scenario data. Further, in the line of time = 270, a sub-scenario related to turning off the button lamp is registered, and depending on various scheduler execution processes in this case, the sub-scenario related to turning off the light is started, and the lamp drive is performed immediately after that. The output of the corresponding lamp drive data is started by the data update / output.
At the n + 270th frame, the character command and the background designation command at the time of determination transmitted by the above-mentioned various scheduler execution processes can be analyzed in the liquid crystal control command analysis process executed at the n + 270th frame. In the example of FIG. 137, since the lamp drive data output process is completed at a timing sufficiently earlier than 16 ms from the start of the frame period, these commands are analyzed by the liquid crystal control command analysis process at the n + 270th frame. Shown. As described above, the liquid crystal control command analysis process can be executed within 16 ms from the start of the frame period.

Although not shown, the character command and background specification command at the time of determination are also new scenarios for liquid crystal scenario data based on the command analysis results, similar to the various commands (selected character commands, etc.) that are not subject to the time difference transmission described above. Is registered, and the new scenario is started by the liquid crystal control frame update process in the next frame, and the drawing update process immediately after that performs the process for drawing update according to the started scenario.

Here, the analysis processing of the effect control command and the liquid crystal control command is a processing with a relatively heavy processing load, and the processing increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the type of command, it may be necessary to perform a lottery for the production.
In this example, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which various scheduler execution processes and lamp-driven data update / output processes that follow are not completed within the frame period.

On the other hand, in this example, it is allowed to perform the analysis processing of the effect control command and the liquid crystal control command a plurality of times during the first half of the frame. As a result, the received command can be efficiently analyzed in a limited processing period.

[Summary of 16-6.1 CPU configuration and modification example]

According to the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1A, the processing for effect control can be made more efficient, and appropriate effect control can be realized.
In addition, the effect control processing load can be reduced.

Further, as the first configuration, the pachinko game machine 1A performs the effect control based on the main control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of the game operation and the instruction information (effect control command) from the main control means. The effect control means (effect control unit 24A) is provided, and the effect control means executes the first means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) for managing the execution of the effect other than the image display and the effect related to the image display. A second means for managing (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17), and an instruction information storage means (effect control command buffer F11) for storing instruction information from the main control means. , The second instruction information (instruction information) which is the instruction information about the analysis means (effect control command analysis processing unit F12) for analyzing the instruction information stored in the instruction information storage means and the second means obtained by the analysis result of the analysis means. It further has a second instruction information storage means (liquid crystal control command buffer F15) for storing the liquid crystal control command).

Since the effect control means has the second instruction information storage means as described above, when the effect control means is configured as a so-called 1 CPU, the instruction information from the main control means is analyzed and obtained by analysis. Regarding the process of setting the second instruction information in the predetermined storage area, it is possible to follow the process of the effect control means (effect control unit 24) in the case of the 2 CPUs.
Also, regarding the image effect control process, the image effect in the case of two CPUs is that the second instruction information set in the second instruction information storage means is acquired and the image display device is controlled based on the second instruction information. It is possible to follow the same processing as the control means (liquid crystal control CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40).
As described above, by having the second instruction information storage means, the programs to be executed by the effect control means as one CPU include the program executed by the effect control means at the time of two CPUs and the image effect control means. It is possible to follow the program that was being executed almost as it is.
Therefore, in order to realize one CPU, it is possible to make it almost unnecessary to rewrite the existing program, reduce the work load of program creation, and reduce the cost.
Further, the program for image effect control can be made substantially common between the case of 1 CPU and the case of 2 CPUs, and therefore the versatility of the program can be enhanced. Similarly, as a program for control other than the image effect control, it can be made substantially common between the case of 1 CPU and the case of 2 CPUs, and the versatility can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine as the first configuration described above, the second instruction information is used as command information.
As a result, it is possible to further reduce the changes from the existing program in response to the case where the second instruction information in the existing two-CPU configuration is the command information.
Therefore, the work load of program creation in realizing one CPU can be further reduced, and further cost reduction can be achieved. Moreover, the versatility of the program can be further enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has, as a second configuration, performing effect control based on a main control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of the game operation and instruction information (effect control command) from the main control means. The effect control means (effect control unit 24A) is provided, and the effect control means executes the first means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) for managing the execution of the effect other than the image display and the effect related to the image display. It has a second means for management (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17) and an analysis means for analyzing instruction information from the main control means (effect control command analysis processing unit F12). , The first means is the first effect progress management means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) that manages the progress of the effect other than the image display based on the analysis result by the analysis means, and the effect by the first effect progress management means. It has an image display instruction information generation means (effect control scenario execution processing unit F13) that generates image display instruction information (liquid crystal control command) related to image display according to the progress of the image display, and the second means is an image display instruction. The second effect progress management means (liquid crystal control command analysis processing unit F16 and liquid crystal control scenario execution processing unit F17) that manages the progress of the effect related to the image display based on the image display instruction information generated by the information generation means. Have.

In the case of the two-CPU configuration, the image effect control means (liquid crystal control CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40) acquires the image display instruction information obtained by the effect control means (effect control unit 24) analyzing the instruction information from the main control means. Then, the image display device is controlled based on the image display instruction information to realize the required image effect operation.
Therefore, by having the second means (second effect progress management means) as described above, it is possible to follow the program of the image effect control means almost as it is for the control related to the image effect. To.
Further, since the processing by the first means is almost the same as the processing executed by the effect control means in the two CPU configuration, it is possible to follow the program used at the time of two CPUs almost as it is for this processing.
As described above, as the program to be executed by the effect control means as one CPU, it is possible to follow the program executed by the effect control means at the time of two CPUs and the program executed by the image effect control means almost as they are. Program.
Therefore, it is possible to almost eliminate the need to rewrite the existing program in order to realize one CPU, and it is possible to reduce the cost.
Further, the program for realizing each of the first means and the second means can be made substantially the same as in the case of the two CPUs, and therefore the versatility of the program can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine as the second configuration described above, the image display instruction information is used as the command information.

As a result, it is possible to further reduce the changes from the existing program in response to the case where the image display instruction information in the existing two-CPU configuration is used as the command information.
Therefore, the work load of program creation in realizing one CPU can be further reduced, and further cost reduction can be achieved. Moreover, the versatility of the program can be further enhanced.

<17. About image production control>
[17-1. Comparison with and without preload]

Subsequently, the details of the image effect control in the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described.
First, with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139, a comparison is made between the case where the preloader 269 does not function and the case where the preloader 269 functions.
Here, as a premise, the CPU circuit 250a and the VDP circuit 250b repeat a predetermined operation at a cycle corresponding to the frame cycle of the display data. Hereinafter, the operation cycle corresponding to such a frame cycle (corresponding to the frame cycle in this example) is referred to as “operation cycle δ”.

In the embodiment in which the preloader 269 does not function, as shown in FIG. 138, the display list DLi (i is a natural number) completed by the CPU 241 at the start timing of each frame period (1/30 second in this example) is the drawing circuit 274. The drawing circuit 274 completes the image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by the drawing operation based on the display list DLi. Then, the image data completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb is output to the main LCD36M and the subLCD36S by the display circuit 270 in the next frame period, and the player senses the image data by the subsequent display operation of the main LCD36M and the subLCD36S. The display screen is displayed.

On the other hand, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function, as shown in FIG. 139, the display list DLi completed by the CPU 241 is issued to the preloader 269, and the preloader 269 interprets the display list DLi and executes the necessary look-ahead operation. At the same time, a part of the display list DLi is rewritten to complete the rewrite list DL'. The pre-read CG data and the rewrite list DL'are stored in appropriate places in the DRAM 278.
Next, the drawing circuit 274 acquires the rewrite list DL'from the DRAM 278 in the next frame period (+ δ), and completes the image data in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by the drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL'. Then, the image data completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb is output to the main LCD36M and the subLCD36S by the display circuit 270 in the next frame period (+ 2δ), so that the main LCD36M and the subLCD36S are displayed thereafter. The display screen is detected by the player depending on the operation.

[17-2. About data transfer circuit]

FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the data transfer circuit 267, along with related circuit configurations.
As shown in FIG. 140, the data transfer circuit 267 is configured to transmit / receive data to / from the CGROM 260, the DRAM 278, and the VRAM 261 via the integrated connection bus ICM having a router function. The CGROM 260 and the DRAM 278 are accessed via the CG bus interface unit 263 and the DMM interface unit 266.

On the other hand, the CPU circuit 250a issues a display list DL to the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 via the transfer port register TR_PORT built in the data transfer circuit 267. The CPU circuit 250a and the data transfer circuit 267 are bidirectionally connected, but when the display list DL is issued, the transfer port register TR_PORT functions as a data write port that accepts one unit of data constituting the display list DL. To do. The write unit (one unit data length) of the transfer port register TR_PORT is 32 bits corresponding to the FIFO structure of the CPU bus control unit 267d.

As shown in the figure, the CPU 241 can write-access the transfer port register TR_PORT via the CPU interface circuit 258, while when the DMAC circuit 252 is used, the DMAC circuit 252 directly writes-accesses the transfer port register TR_PORT. It will be. A series of instruction commands (that is, instruction command sequences constituting the display list DL) written in the transfer port register TR_PORT is a CPU bus containing a FIFO buffer having a FIFO structure (32 bits x 130 stages) in units of 32 bits. It is configured to be automatically stored in the control unit 267d.

Further, the data transfer circuit 267 executes a data transmission / reception operation on a transmission path of 3 channels ChA to ChC, and has a FIFO buffer having a FIFO structure (64 bits × N stages) ChA control circuit 267a (N = 130 stages). ), A ChB control circuit 267b (N = 1026 stages), and a ChC control circuit 267c (N = 130 stages).

Then, the instruction command sequence (display list DL) accumulated in the CPU bus control unit 267d is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 or the preloader 269 based on the set value in the data transfer register RGij (a type of various registers 265) by the CPU 241. Will be done.
In the embodiment in which the preloader 269 does not function, the display list DL is transferred from the CPU bus control unit 267d to the drawing circuit 274 via the FIFO buffer of the ChB control circuit 267b, as shown by the arrows. In the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function, the display list DL is transferred to the preloader 269 via the FIFO buffer of the ChC control circuit 267c.

In this example, the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267b are specialized in the transfer operation of the display list DL, and the data stored in the FIFO buffer of the CPU bus control unit 267d is the ChB control circuit 267b. Alternatively, the data is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 or the display list analyzer (Display List Analyzer) of the preloader 269 as a part of the display list DL, respectively, via the FIFO buffer of the ChC control circuit 267c.

Then, the drawing circuit 274 starts a drawing operation based on the transferred display list DL. On the other hand, the preloader 269 executes a necessary preload operation based on the transferred display list DL. The CG data of the CGROM 260 is pre-read in the preload area reserved in the DRAM 266 by the preload operation, and the display list DL whose source address of the texture is changed, that is, the above-mentioned rewrite list DL'is secured in the DRAM 266 with respect to the TXLOAD command and the like. It is saved in the DL buffer area BUF'.

On the other hand, the ChA control circuit 267a and the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e function for data transfer between storage media such as the CGROM 260, the DRAM 266, and the VRAM 261. Further, when accessing the VRAM 261 that requires the address information of the index table 268, the index table access arbitration circuit 267f functions. Specifically, the ChA control circuit 267a may, for example, (a) transfer the compressed data of the CGROM 260 to the VRAM 261, (b) preload (pre-read) the compressed data of the CGROM 260 and transfer it to the DRAM 278. (C) It functions when the read-ahead data in the preload area is transferred to the VRAM 261.

Here, the ChA control circuit 267a is configured to be operable in parallel with the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c, and the above-mentioned operations (a) to (c) are display list DL issuing operations ( It can be executed in parallel with ST8 in FIG. 146, PT11 in FIG. 154) and the transfer operation of the rewrite list DL'(PT10 in FIG. 154). Further, the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c can also be executed at the same time. For example, the processing of step PT10 in FIG. 154 in which the ChB control circuit 267b functions and the processing in step PT11 in which the ChC control circuit 267c functions are parallel. Is feasible. However, since the forwarding port register TR_PORT is single, when one of them (267b / 267c) is using the forwarding port register TR_PORT, the other (267c / 267b) should access the forwarding port register TR_PORT. Can't.

When the ChA control circuit 267a is operating, the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e arbitrates data transmission with each storage element (CGROM260, DRAM266) via the integrated connection bus ICM. On the other hand, the index table access arbitration circuit 267f arbitrates data communication with the VRAM 261 by controlling the ChA control circuit 267a based on the index table 268. In the case of the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function, the rewrite list DL'stored in the DL buffer area BUF' of the DRAM 278 is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e and the ChB control circuit 267b. Will be done (see FIG. 156).

As described above, the data transfer circuit 267 of this example is between a data transfer source arbitrarily selected from various storage resources (Resource) and a data transfer destination arbitrarily selected from various storage resources (Resource). It realizes high-speed data transfer. As confirmed from FIG. 140, the storage resource in which the data transfer circuit 267 functions includes not only the VRAM 261 but also an external device via the CPU interface unit 258, the CG bus interface unit 263, and the DRAM interface unit 266.

Then, the amount of data transferred to an external device on which the ChA control circuit 267a functions, such as the amount of data to be acquired from the CGROM 260 at one time (memory sequential read), is the display on which the ChB control circuit 267b and the ChC control circuit 267c function. It is enormous as compared with the case of the list DL, and the amount of data transfer differs greatly from each other.

Here, for these various types of data transfer, it is conceivable that the unit data amount and the total transfer data amount can be set in detail, but this complicates the control operation inside the VDP circuit 250b and makes smooth transfer. The movement is hindered. Therefore, in this example, the minimum data amount Dmin for data transfer is uniquely defined, and the total transfer data amount is limited to an integral multiple of the minimum data amount DTmin to realize a high-speed and smooth data transfer operation. are doing. Although not particularly limited, in the data transfer circuit 267 of the embodiment, the minimum data amount Dmin (unit data amount) is set to 256 bytes, and the total transfer data amount is limited to an integral multiple of this.

Therefore, the instruction command sequence of the display list DL stored in the FIFO buffer of the CPU bus control unit 267d every 32 bits is displayed in the ChB control circuit 267b or the ChC control circuit 267b at the timing when the total amount reaches the minimum data amount Dmin. It will be transferred and stored in each FIFO buffer.

The display list DL is composed of a series of instruction commands. In this example, the display list DL has a command length of an integer N times (N) of 32 bits, corresponding to the write unit (32 bits) of the transfer port register TR_PORT. It is composed only of the instruction command of> 0). Therefore, the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 that receive the instruction command of the display list DL via the data transfer circuit 267 can start the command analysis process (DL analyze) quickly and smoothly. It should be noted that the command length of 32 bits, which is an integer N times, does not mean that all of them are significant bits, and also includes an involuntary bit (Don't care bit), which means a 32-bit integer N times.

[17-3. About cache of preload data]

Here, as described above, the rewrite list DL'is described in the drawing circuit 274 via the connection bus access arbitration circuit 267e of the data transfer circuit 267 and the ChB control circuit 267b at the start of the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274. Transferred to the display list analyzer. Then, the drawing circuit 274 executes the drawing operation based on the rewrite list DL'. Therefore, based on the TXLOAD command or the like, the CG data that should be originally acquired from the CGROM 260 is acquired from the preload area of the DRAM 278 as the preload data that is pre-read in the preload area. In this case, the preload data can be used repeatedly unless it is overwritten and erased, and the preload data cache-hit in the preload area is repeatedly reused.

In this example, since the preload area is set in the external DRAM 278 having a sufficient storage capacity, the above cache hit function functions effectively. Further, since the storage capacity of the DRAM 278 is large, for example, multiple preloading that preloads CG data for a plurality of frames at once is possible. That is, with respect to the operation period of the preloader 269, multiple preloads can be achieved by appropriately setting the operation period of a series of preload operations including the look-ahead operation of CG data within a range of an integral multiple of the operation cycle δ of the VDP circuit 250b. It will be realized.

However, here, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the embodiment does not have multiple preloads. In this case, the preloader 269 decides to complete the preload operation for one frame in one operation cycle (δ).

[17-4. About the use of VRAM at the time of drawing]

As described above, in this example, the index space is determined by the index table 268, and the VRAM 261 is used at the time of drawing.
It is necessary to (1) add this index space after the initial processing, and conversely, (2) open it. Therefore, during the operation of these add / release CPUs 241, it is possible to determine whether or not the addition / release processing is possible, and whether or not the addition / release processing is actually completed. Is provided in the index table 268. The VRAM 261 is roughly divided into three types of memory areas, two AAC areas (a1 and a2), a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c), which will be described below, and these three types of memory areas ( The index table 268 is divided into three categories corresponding to a1, a2) (b) and (c). Details are as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142.

As shown in FIG. 142, in this example, the first AAC region (a1) and the second AAC region (a2) are secured as the AAC region (a), but the region is not particularly limited and either one is not particularly limited. Just be good. In the following description, when the first and second AAC regions (a1, a2) are collectively referred to, they may be referred to as the AAC region (a).

In the case of this example, the VRAM 261 unitizes (a) an AAC area in which an index space and its index number are automatically assigned by internal processing and has a memory cache function, and (b) a two-dimensional space of, for example, 4096 bits × 128 lines. As a result, the page area in which the index space can be secured in the range of an integral multiple of the page area and (c) the arbitrary area in which the start address STx and the horizontal size Hx can be arbitrarily set are configured to be distinguishable (see FIG. 142). .. However, in order to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the start address STx of the index space arbitrarily set in the arbitrary area (c) has a lower 11 bits of 0 and is in units of predetermined bits (2048 bits = 256 bytes). Must be.

Then, after the CPU is reset, the maximum value of the memory space required for each and the start address (lower 11 bits = 0) are defined, and the first AAC area (a1), the second AAC area (a2), and the page area are specified. (b) is secured, and the remaining memory area becomes an arbitrary area (c). In order to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b, the maximum value of the memory space in the AAC area (a) is defined in units of 2048 bits, and the maximum value of the memory space in the page area (b) is the above-mentioned 4096 bits × 128 lines. It is an integral multiple of the unit space of.

Next, the required number of index spaces are set in each of the areas (a1, a2) (b) (c) secured in this way. When the arbitrary area (c) is used, the horizontal size Hx of the index space that handles two-dimensional data can be arbitrarily set as a multiple of 256 bits in order to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b. Its vertical size is a fixed value (eg, 2048 lines).

In any case, the index space and index number are automatically assigned to the first and second AAC regions (a1 and a2) by the VDP circuit 250b, so that they are decoded by, for example, the SETINDEX command of the texture setting command. If the destination is specified in the AAC area (a), the TXLOAD (texture load) command that reads CG data from CGROM260 only needs to specify the Source address of CGROM260 and the horizontal / vertical size after expansion (decoding). become. Therefore, in this example, the decoding destination of the still image (texture) such as a character that temporarily appears at the time of the advance notice production or the I-stream moving image is set to the AAC area (a).

Since the memory cache function is added to each of the AAC areas (a), for example, when the same texture of the CGROM 260 is read into the AAC area (a) multiple times, the second and subsequent times may be performed. The decoded data cached in the AAC area (a) can be utilized, and extra READ access and decoding processing can be suppressed. However, when the AAC area (a) is used up, old data is automatically destroyed. Therefore, in this example, when the AAC area (a) is used, the first AAC area (a1) is used in principle. Only specific textures that are used repeatedly are acquired in the second AAC region (a2).

As the texture to be used repeatedly, for example, a character that repeatedly appears at the time of a predetermined advance notice effect, a background image when the background screen is constructed with a still image, and the like can be exemplified. In such a case, the SETINDEX command, which is a texture setting command, sets the decoding destination to the second AAC area (a2), and the TXLOAD command decodes the textures such as characters and background images to the second AAC area (a2). After that, the decoding result is protected by not using the second AAC region (a2).

Then, after that, if the decoding destination is specified in the second AAC area (a2) by the SETINDEX command and the same TXLOAD command for reacquiring the acquired texture is executed, the acquired texture will be cache hit. , Read access to CGROM260 and the time required for decoding processing can be deleted.
As described above, this kind of cache hit function is also exhibited in the preload data pre-read in the preload area of DRAM 278, whereas the cache hit preload data in the preload area is compressed data before decoding. It is significant that the cache hit in the AAC area (a) is the expanded data after decoding.

By the way, the texture is a concept that generally refers to the texture and texture of the surface of an object, but in the present specification, sprite image data constituting a still image and image data constituting one frame of a moving image are used. It is used as a concept that includes not only image data to be pasted on drawing primitives such as triangles and squares, but also image data after decoding. Then, when copying the image data inside the VRAM 261 (hereinafter referred to as "move" for convenience), use the SET INDEX command of the texture setting command to set the image data of the move source as a texture, and then execute the SPRITE command. Will be executed.

By executing the SPRITE command, the source image data of the movement source is formally drawn in the virtual drawing space shown in FIG. 143, but the drawing area in the virtual drawing space actually drawn on the liquid crystal display device 36 If the correspondence between the frame buffer FB and the index space that becomes the frame buffer FB is set in advance by the environment setting command (SETDAVR, SETDAVF) or the texture setting command (SETINDEX), for example, the virtual drawing space by the SPRITE command can be set. By drawing, the source image data of the movement source is drawn in the predetermined index space (frame buffer FB) (see FIG. 143).

In any case, in this example, the VRAM 261 is roughly divided into an AAC area (a1, a2), a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c), and an appropriate number of index spaces can be secured for each. , Each index space is specified by an independent index number for each region (a) (b) (c). The index number is, for example, 1 byte long, and the page area (b) and the arbitrary area (c) (excluding the AAC area (a) automatically assigned by the internal circuit) are in the range of 0 to 255 CPU 241. Can freely assign an index number.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 141, a pair of frame buffers FBa are secured in the arbitrary area (c) for the main LCD 36M, and index numbers 255 and 254 are assigned to both of the double buffer structures. There is. That is, as the frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, the index space 255 and the index space 254 that are toggled and used are secured. Although not particularly limited, the index space 255, 254 has a horizontal size of 1280 corresponding to the number of horizontal pixels of the main LCD 36M. Since each pixel is specified by ARGB information 32 bits, the horizontal size 1280 means 32 × 1280 = 40960 bits (a multiple of 256 bits).

Further, for the sub LCD36S, another pair of frame buffers FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c), and index numbers 252 and 251 are assigned to both of the double buffer structures. That is, the index space 252 and the index space 251 are secured as the frame buffer FBb for the sub LCD36S. The index spaces 252 and 251 have a horizontal size of 480 corresponding to the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the sub LCD36S. Also in this case, since each pixel is specified by the ARGB information 32 bits, the horizontal size 480 means 32 × 480 = 15360 bits (a multiple of 256 bits).

The frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c) by setting the arbitrary area (c) to an arbitrary horizontal size as a multiple of 32 bytes (= 256 bits = 8 pixels). This is because if the number of horizontal pixels of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S is matched as described above, the reserved area will not be wasted. On the other hand, in the page area (b), only a horizontal / vertical size that is an integral multiple of the unit space of 128 pixels × 128 lines can be set.

However, the vertical size of the two-dimensional index space secured in the arbitrary region (c) is a fixed value (for example, 2048 lines). Therefore, in the frame buffer FBa, only the area of horizontal size 1280 × vertical size 1024 is an effective data area for the main LCD 36M. This point also applies to the sub LCD36S, and in the frame buffer FBb, only the area of the horizontal size 480 × the hanging size 800 is the effective data area for the subLCD36S (see FIG. 143).
Here, FIG. 144 shows the relationship between the entire frame buffers FBa and FBb and their respective effective data areas.

The effective data areas of the frame buffers FBa and FBb as described above will be further described later, but in any case, the frame buffers FBa and FBb are double buffers (255/254, 252) as drawing areas for the drawing circuit 274. / 251) are used alternately, and each double buffer (255/254, 252/251) is used alternately as a display area for the two A / B display circuits 270. In this example, since the Z buffer that stores the depth information of the display pixels is not used, a missing number (253) occurs. However, when the Z buffer is used, the indexes of the index numbers 253 and 250 in the arbitrary area (c) are used. Spaces 253 and 250 serve as Z-buffers for the primary LCD 36M and the secondary LCD 36S.

Further, in this example, when an additional index space (memory area) is secured in the arbitrary area (c) in which the frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured, an index number starting from 0 is assigned. Although not limited in any way, in this example, the effect image composed of characters and other still images is arbitrarily used as a work area for a preview effect to appear on a part of the display screen in an appropriate rotation posture as needed. An index space (0) is secured in the area (c).

However, the use of the work area is not essential, and the index space as the work area may be secured in the page area (b) instead of the arbitrary area (c). By using the page area (b), it is possible to secure an index space that is a multiple of a square unit space having a horizontal size of 128 (= 4096 bits) and a vertical size of 128, which is suitable for handling a small effect image.

By the way, in this example, the image is composed of a moving image including a background image, and the image production is realized only by the moving image. In particular, a large number (usually 10 or more) of moving images are drawn at the same time during the variable effect. All of these videos are stored in the CGROM 260 in a compressed state as a series of video frames, but an I-stream video composed of only I-frames and an IP-stream video composed of I-frames and P-frames. It is divided into. Here, the I frame (Intra coded frame) means a frame that compresses the input image as it is, independently of other screens. On the other hand, the P frame (Predictive coded frame) means a frame for performing forward predictive coding, and an I frame or P frame located in the past in time is required.

Therefore, in this example, the IP stream moving image is developed not in the AAC area (a) where there is a concern about the destruction of old data, but in the page area (b). That is, a large number of index spaces (IDX0 to IDXN) are secured in the page area (b) in which an index space having a multiple dimension of horizontal size 128 × vertical size 128 can be secured, and a series of video frames are provided in each video MVi. The corresponding, always identical index space IDXi is used for decoding. That is, the moving image MV1 is expanded in the index space IDX1, the moving image MV2 is expanded in the index space IDX2, and similarly, the moving image MVi is expanded in the index space IDXi.

To explain the moving image MVi more specifically, the SETINDEX command specifies in advance that the decoding destination of the IP stream moving image MVi is the index space (i) of the index number i in the page area (b). The TXLOAD command to acquire one frame of the IP stream video MVi video is executed.

Then, one frame (any of a series of video frames) of the video on the CGROM 260 specified by the TXLOAD command is first acquired in the AAC area (a), and then the page area (b) is automatically activated by the GDEC273. In the index space (i) of), one frame of the acquired moving image is decoded and expanded.

On the other hand, in this example, the I-stream moving image is treated the same as the still image, and the SETINDEX command is used to specify that "the decoding destination of the I-stream moving image MVj is the first AAC area (a1)" and TXLOAD. Execute the command. As a result, the moving image frame is acquired in the first AAC area (a1), and then the automatically activated GDEC273 expands the decoded data in the first ACC area (a1). As described above, the index space of the AAC area (a) is automatically generated, so it is not necessary to specify the index number. The expansion volume required for the index space, that is, the horizontal size and vertical size of the decoded texture (video frame), is TXLOAD regardless of whether the expansion destination is the AAC area (a) or the page area (b). Specified by the command.

By the way, the IP stream moving image MVi and the I stream moving image MVj are generally composed of N moving image frames (I frame and P frame). Therefore, in the TXLOAD command, for example, the Source address of the CGROM 260 in which the kth (1 ≦ k ≦ N) moving image frame is stored, the horizontal / vertical size after expansion, and the like are specified. Although not limited in any way, in the embodiment in which the still image is scarcely used, most of the memory space of 48 Mbytes (about 30 Mbytes) of the VRAM 261 is allocated to the page area (b). Then, in the embodiment in which the still image is hardly used, only the first AAC region (a1) is secured as the AAC region (a), the second AAC region (a2) is not secured, and the above-mentioned AAC region (a) Do not utilize the cache hit function of a).

In addition, in order to speed up the decoding process of the compressed moving image data, it is conceivable to provide a dedicated GDEC circuit. Then, if a dedicated GDEC circuit is built in the VDP circuit 250b, it is sufficient to indicate the start address of the video compressed data to the GDEC circuit in the decoding process of the compressed video data composed of N compressed video frames. It is not necessary to specify the start address for each of N compressed video frames.

However, if a plurality of such dedicated GDEC circuits are built in for each compression algorithm, the internal configuration of the VDP circuit 250b becomes more complicated. Therefore, the software GDEC may be used, and the data such as the IP stream moving image, the I stream moving image, the still image, and other α values may be configured to be decoded by the software processing corresponding to each compression algorithm. The processing time difference between the hardware processing and the software processing does not matter so much, and the processing time becomes a problem mainly in the access (READ) time from the CGROM 260.

[17-5. CPU processing related to image production control]

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 159, the details of the processing related to the image effect control executed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A will be described.
The flowchart of FIG. 145 shows the processes executed in the various initial setting processes (S2000') shown in FIG. 133 above.
In the various initial setting processes of step S2000', the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A uses the VRAM 261 having a storage capacity of 48 Mbytes as an ACC area (a), a page area (b), and an arbitrary area (c) having an appropriate storage capacity. ) And appropriately (ST1). Specifically, for the ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b), the start address and the required total data size of each are set in the predetermined index table register RGij (ST1). Then, the reserved ACC area (a1, a2) and the residual area not included in the page area (b) become the arbitrary area (c).

Here, the start addresses of the first and second ACC areas (a1, a2) and the page area (b) must be 0 in the lower 11 bits of each, but can be arbitrarily selected in units of 2048 bits (2048 bits). 1 address = 1 byte, selection for each 256 addresses). The total data size is also arbitrarily selected in the range of an integral multiple of the unit size. Although not particularly limited, the unit size of the ACC area (a) is 2048 bits, and the unit size of the page area (b) is 512 kbit.

As described above, in this example, certain conditions are set for the area settings of the ACC area (a1, a2) and the page area (b), but it uses as much wasted area as possible for the VRAM 261 having a limited memory capacity. This is to facilitate the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b while eliminating it. That is, if the storage capacity of the VRAM 261 is increased indiscriminately, there is a concern that the manufacturing cost will rise and the chip area will increase. On the other hand, if a free area setting that completely eliminates the wasted area is allowed, the internal processing becomes complicated. This is because the processing time for VRAM access cannot be shortened. For the same reason, certain restrictions are placed on securing the index space described below.

Following the process in step ST1, the CPU 241 secures the necessary index space IDXi for the page area (b) and the arbitrary area (c) (ST2). Specifically, the index space IDXi of each area (b) (c) is secured by setting necessary information in the predetermined index table register RGij.

For example, when the index space IDXi is provided in the page area (b), multiple information of an arbitrary horizontal size Hx and an arbitrary vertical size Wx corresponding to an arbitrary index number i (multiple information in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the unit space). ) Is set in the predetermined index table register RGij (ST2).

As described above, the index space IDXi of the page area (b) has a unit space of 128 horizontal size x 128 vertical size lines, and one pixel is specified by 32 bit information, so that it is perpendicular to the horizontal size Hx. Based on the setting of the size Wx, the index space IDXi of the data size (bit length) = 32 × 128 × Hx × 128 × Wx is secured. The start address of the index space IDXi in the page area (b) is automatically assigned internally.

Further, when the index space IDXi is provided in the arbitrary area (c), the arbitrary start address STx and the multiple information of the arbitrary horizontal size Hx correspond to the arbitrary index number i, and the predetermined index table register RGij Is set to (ST2). Note that the arbitrary here is premised on a predetermined condition, and the horizontal size Hx is arbitrarily determined in units of 256 bits, the lower 11 bits of the start address STx is 0, and is arbitrarily determined in units of 2048 bits. As explained above, the vertical size of the arbitrary area is fixed to the 2048 line, so based on the setting of the horizontal size Hx, the index of the data size (bit length) = 2048 x Hx after the start address STx. Space has been secured.

Specifically, as a frame buffer FBa for the main LCD 36M, a pair of index spaces of horizontal size 1280 × vertical line 2048 are set in one or a plurality of predetermined index table registers RGij by specifying each index number. As the frame buffer FBb for the sub LCD36S, a pair of index spaces of horizontal size 480 × vertical line 2048 are set in one or a plurality of predetermined index table registers RGij, each specifying an index number. If the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 does not match an integral multiple of 256 bits / 32 bits, the horizontal size of each index space is larger than the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 and is an integral multiple of 256/32 = 8. Set to a value that minimizes the generation of wasted memory area.

As described above, the required number of index space IDXi is generated by setting the necessary size information and address information for the page area (b) and the arbitrary area (c) in the predetermined index table register RGIj, respectively. (ST2). Then, in response to this setting process (ST2), an index table 268 that specifies the address information and size information of each index space IDXi is automatically constructed.
As shown in FIG. 141, the start address of each index space IDXi is stored in the index table 268 together with other necessary information, and is stored at the time of data transfer inside the VDP circuit 250b or from an external storage resource (Resource). It is referred to when data is acquired (see FIG. 140). Since the index space IDXi in the AAC area (a) is automatically generated and automatically disappears when necessary, the setting process in step ST2 is unnecessary.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, each pair of frame buffers FBa and FBb are secured in the arbitrary area (c), and each is assigned an index number. In the embodiment in which the Z buffer is not used, a pair of index spaces 255 and 254 with index numbers 255 and 254 are secured as the frame buffer FBa. Further, as the frame buffer FBb, a pair of index spaces 252 and 251 to which the index numbers 252 and 251 are assigned are secured. In this example, the work area (index space 0) of the index number 0 is also secured in the arbitrary area (c).

Further, in this example, the required number of index space IDXi, which is the decoding area of the IP stream moving image, is secured in the page area (a), and the index number i is assigned. However, initially, only the index space IDX0 for the background moving image (IP stream moving image) is secured. Then, the index space IDXj in the page area (a) is increased based on the setting process in the index table register RGij and the instruction command of the display list DL according to the necessity in the image effect (variation effect or notice effect). After that, when it becomes unnecessary, the index space IDXj is released.

The index space of the ACC area (a) is automatically generated when necessary based on the instruction command described in the display list DL, and the index table 268 shows the start address of the automatically generated index space IDXj. And other necessary information are set automatically. In this example, this AAC region (a) is used as a decoding region for still images and other textures.

The above operation of securing the index space is realized exclusively by the setting operation in the index table register RGij included in the various registers 265, but it is necessary for the other VDP registers RGij following the processing of steps ST1 to ST2. By executing the various setting operations, the operation of the VDP circuit 250b described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 is enabled.

For example, by writing predetermined operation parameters (number of lines and number of pixels) to a predetermined display register RGij that defines the operation of the display circuit 270, the number of display lines and the number of horizontal pixels are set for the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S. (SS30). As a result, in each of the frame buffers FBa and FBb, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the effective data area (broken line portion in FIG. 144) to be READ-accessed by the display circuit 270 are specified.

Next, a predetermined operation parameter (address value) is written in the predetermined display register RGij to specify the vertical display start position and the horizontal display start position for each frame buffer FBa and FBb (SS31). As a result, the effective data area whose vertical and horizontal dimensions are specified in the process of step SS30 is determined on the frame buffers FBa and FBb. Here, the vertical display start position and the horizontal display start position are relative address values in each index space, and in this example, the display start position is (0,0).

Subsequently, the display register RGij (DSPAINDEX) related to the display circuit 270 (A) that drives the main LCD 36M and the display register RGij (DSPBINDEX) related to the display circuit 270 (B) that drives the sub LCD 36S are displayed in the display area (0). ) ”And“ display area (1) ”are set to define each display area (SS32).

Here, the “display area” means an index space (frame buffers FBa, FBb) in which image data should be read in order for each display circuit 270 of A / B to drive the main LCD36M and the subLCD36S, respectively. It means one of the double buffers in the frame buffers FBa and FBb having a double buffer structure (see "Read area Ar" described above). However, the display circuits 74A and 74B actually read the image data only in the "effective data area" specified in steps SS30 to SS31 in the display area (0) or the display area (1).

Although not limited in any way, as a definition of the display area at the time of initial setting, in this example, for the frame buffer FBa, the index space 254 of the index number 254 in the arbitrary area (c) is defined as "display area (0)". The index space 255 of the index number 255 in the arbitrary area (c) is defined as the “display area (1)” (SS32). Regarding the frame buffer FBb, the index space 251 of the index number 251 in the arbitrary area (c) is set as the "display area (0)), and the index space 252 of the index number 252 in the arbitrary area (c) is set as the" display area (1). ) ”(SS32).
The definition of the "display area" in the initial processing (SS3) is not particularly limited, and the index space (display area) in which the display circuit 270 should access the image data by READ is toggled for each operation cycle δ. It may be switched.

In this example, once the above initial processing (SS30 to SS32) is completed, the setting value in the predetermined system control register RGij is not changed due to the influence of noise or the like. A predetermined prohibition value is set in RGij (first prohibition setting SS33).

Here, the setting values for which writing is prohibited include (1) setting values related to the display clocks of the main LCD 36M and sub LCD 36S, (2) setting values related to the sampling clock of the LVDS, and (3) selection operation of the output selection circuit 272. The set value, (4) the synchronization relationship between the plurality of main LCD 36Ms and the sub LCD 36S (the display circuit 270 (B) is dependent on the operation cycle of the display circuit 270 (A)) and the like are included. Although there is a software process for canceling the first prohibition setting, it is not used in this example. However, it is also preferable to use it as needed.

Next, by setting a predetermined prohibition value in the second type prohibition setting register RGij, the write prohibition setting is set for the VDP register RGij of the initial setting system (second prohibition setting SS34). Here, the prohibited register includes the VDP register RGij according to steps SS30 to SS32.

On the other hand, by setting a predetermined prohibition value in the third type prohibition setting register RGij, it is possible to set the prohibition to a large number of VDP registers including the VDP register related to the setting process of steps ST1 to ST3 (the first). Prohibition setting of 3). However, in principle, it is not used in this example. In any case, the second prohibition setting and the third prohibition setting can be arbitrarily canceled by writing the release value in the predetermined release register RGij, and the set value can be changed after the initial setting. It will be possible.

(Example of not making the preloader work)

Subsequently, the details of the drawing update processing in step S2061 in FIG. 133 will be described, but the processing content of this drawing update processing differs depending on whether the preloader 269 is functioning or not.
In the following, first, a case where the preloader 269 does not function will be described.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the drawing update process (S2061) when the preloader 269 is not operated.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A determines whether or not the processing start condition is satisfied (ST5). As can be seen with reference to FIG. 133, this determination timing is a timing corresponding to the start of the frame period. The display timing of the sub LCD 36S is set at the time of initial setting (S2000') so as to depend on the display timing of the main LCD 36M.

The start condition of step ST5 will be described.
When the preloader 269 is made to function, the circuit configuration and the program are originally designed so that the internal operation of the VDP circuit 250b proceeds as shown in the time chart of FIG. 138. That is, based on the display list DL completed at the start of a certain frame period, the drawing circuit 274 should finish the drawing operation within the frame period. However, for example, as in the display list DL3 completed at the start of the frame period (T1 + 2δ) of the third frame in FIG. 138, the drawing operation can be completed during the corresponding frame period (T1 + 2δ to T1 + 3δ). It cannot be said that there are cases where it cannot be done.

The determination process in step ST5 takes such a situation into consideration, and the CPU 241 accesses the status register RGij (a type of various registers 265) indicating the operating state of the drawing circuit 274, and at the timing of step ST5, the drawing circuit 274. Determines if the required operation has been completed. For example, at the timing T1 + δ of FIG. 138, the status information of the drawing register related to the drawing circuit 274 is read-accessed, and it is determined whether or not the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 is completed.

If the start condition is not satisfied (nonconformity) in step ST5, the abnormality flag ER that counts the number of abnormalities is incremented, and the processes of steps ST6 to ST8 are skipped. The abnormality flag ER is determined by the processing of steps ST9 and ST10 together with the other serious abnormality flag ABN, and if the number of continuous abnormalities is not large (ER ≦ 2) on the assumption that the serious abnormality flag ABN is in the reset state, The process for analyzing the effect control command is executed as in the normal state (S2022 to S2020).
Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the effect control command has not been received in step S2022, or the command analysis process of step S2023 is performed on the received effect control command, the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024. In that case, the CPU 241 returns to step S2002 in FIG.

In the above, the case where the processing start condition is non-conforming and the error flag ER is ER ≦ 2 has been described. However, in such a case, the display circuit 270 reads out during the frame period. The process of switching the area in a toggle manner (ST6) and the process of creating the display list DL (ST7) are skipped, and the production scenario does not proceed (the frame update flag is not turned ON in step S2005 of FIG. 133). Because the process does not proceed from step S2003 to S2020). This is because the image data of the frame buffers FBa and FBb in an incomplete state is not output. Therefore, for example, in the frame period starting from the timing (T1 + 3δ) of FIG. 138, the image production does not proceed, and the original screen (screen based on DL2) is redisplayed and the frame is dropped.

Here, in order to avoid dropping frames, a configuration in which the start condition of step ST5 is satisfied may be considered. However, since there are many control processes to be executed by the CPU 241 and it is necessary to secure each process time, in this example, a frame drop occurs when the start condition is not satisfied.

However, even if the frame is dropped, the progress of the image production is only delayed by about 1/30 to 2/30 seconds, and it is rare for the player to notice this. Moreover, when the frame is dropped, the progress of effects other than the image effects such as sounds and lamps is also skipped (steps S2032 to S2042 in FIG. 133 are skipped), so that the reach effects, advance notice effects, and roles that are started after that are skipped. In the object production, there is no possibility that the start timings of the image production, the sound production, the lamp production, the motor production, and the like are shifted.
That is, in the production scenario, the start timing of the image production, the audio production, the lamp production, and the motor production and the content of the production to be executed after that are centrally managed, and the progress is permitted only in the normal state. The production of is never out of sync. For example, if there is an effect operation that combines an explosion sound, an explosion image, an accessory movement, and a lamp flash operation, each of the above effect operations is started in correct synchronization even after a frame drop occurs. To.

The above description describes a relatively minor abnormality, but when the serious abnormality flag ABN is in the set state or when the number of continuous abnormalities is large (ER> 2), an infinite loop state is set after the determination in step ST10. There is. As a result, the downcount operation of the WDT timer progresses, the composite chip 250 including the CPU 241 is abnormally reset, and then the initial processing (ST1 to ST3) is re-executed, which is the root cause of the occurrence of the abnormal situation. Is expected to be resolved.

Although the abnormal situation has been described above, in reality, the above-mentioned abnormality rarely occurs even in a minor case, and after the processing of step ST5, the setting to the predetermined display register RGij (DSPACTL / DSPBCTL) is performed. Based on this, the "display area" of the frame buffers FBa and FBb for storing the image data to be read by the display circuit 270 (A) and the display circuit 270 (B) is toggled (ST6). As described above, since the "display area (0)" and the "display area (1)" are defined in advance in the initial processing (ST3), in the processing of step ST6, the frame buffers FBa and FBb are described this time. It is specified whether the "display area" of the above is the display area (0) or the display area (1).

By executing this step ST6, the display circuit 270 (A) alternately moves from the index space 254 (display area (0)) and the index space 255 (display area (1)) every operation cycle δ. The image data is read out and the main LCD 36M is driven. Similarly, the display circuit 270 (B) alternately reads out image data from the index space 251 (display area (0)) and the index space 252 (display area (1)) for each operation cycle δ, and the sub LCD36S. Will be driven. As described above, the display circuit 270 actually performs READ access only to the effective data area in the display area (0) / display area (1) (see FIG. 144).

In any case, in this example, since the "display area" (read area Ar) is switched every operation cycle δ, the drawing circuits 274 of the display circuits 270 (A) and 274 (B) are completed in the immediately preceding frame period. The output processing of the generated image data to the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S will be started. However, since the processing in step ST5 is started from the start of the vertical blanking interval (V blank) of the main LCD 36M, the image data output processing is actually started after the vertical blanking interval is completed. It will be. In FIG. 138, the arrow shown in the column of the display circuit indicates the operation cycle of this output processing.

When the processing of step ST6 having the above significance is completed, the CPU 241 subsequently completes the display list DL that specifies the image data to be output to the LCD 36 by the display circuit 270 (ST7). Although not particularly limited, in this example, the list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) of the RAM 243 is secured, and the display list DL is completed there (see FIG. 140).

The display list DL is configured by arranging a series of instruction commands in an appropriate order, and is configured to end by writing an EODL (End Of DL) command. When the drawing circuit 274 recognizes this EODL command in the display list DL, the drawing circuit 274 ends the image data generation process instructed by the display list DL.
Then, in this example, in order to realize smooth operation of the data transfer circuit 267, the drawing circuit 274, and the preloader 269, all the instruction commands including the EODL command are given an integer N times (N> 0) whose command length is 32 bits. Limited to instruction commands only. As described above, the instruction command composed of a 32-bit integer N times may also include a don't care bit.

As described above, since the display list DL of this example is composed only of instruction commands having a command length of 32 bits and an integer N times (N> 0), the data volume value (total amount of data) of the entire display list DL is. It is always an integral multiple of the minimum unit of command length (32 bits = 4 bytes). Further, in this example, in consideration of the minimum data amount Dmin of the data transfer circuit 267, the data volume value of the display list DL is an integral multiple (1 or more) of the minimum data amount Dmin and is the minimum of the instruction command. It is adjusted to be an integral multiple of the unit (4 bytes). For example, if Dmin = 256 bytes, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to any value of 256 bytes, 512 bytes, and so on.

Here, it is also preferable to appropriately adjust to 256 bytes or 512 bytes according to the complexity of the effect content, but in this example, the LCD 36 is two and the sub LCD 36S is a so complicated image. The data volume value of the display list DL is always adjusted to 256 bytes in consideration of not executing the effect.
However, this method is not limited in any way, and is adjusted to 512 bytes or 768 bytes in the case of three or more LCD 36s or in the case of a game machine that executes a complicated image effect including the sub LCD36S. Further, during a normal effect, the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to 256 bytes, and the data volume value of the display list DL is adjusted to 512 bytes or 768 bytes only when a special effect is executed. Is also suitable.

As a method for adjusting the data volume value of the display list DL, a simple method (A) of filling a 32-bit length NOP (No Operation) command after a 32-bit length EODL command or a 32-bit length NOP (No Operation) command is used, or the shortage area is 32 bits. A standard method (B) is conceivable in which a 32-bit length EODL command is described at the end after filling with a long NOP command. It should be noted that the data volume value (total data amount) of the display list DL is terminated by the EODL command without any adjustment, and dummy data is additionally transferred during the operation of the data transfer circuit 267, which is an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin. An unadjusted method (C) for securing the transfer amount of the data can be considered.

Here, when the standard method (B) is adopted, first, the command counter CNT is initially set to a specified value (64-1 corresponding to 256 bytes), and every time a significant instruction command is written to the DL buffer area BUF. A method is conceivable in which the command counter CNT is appropriately subtracted, and when the writing of a series of significant instruction commands is completed, the NOP command is described until the command counter CNT becomes zero, and finally the EODL command is described. In the case of this example, since the command length is limited to an integer N times (N> 0) of 32 bits, the above processing is easy, and the subtraction processing of the command counter CNT is an integer N. It becomes the subtraction process corresponding to.

On the other hand, when the simple method (A) is adopted, when creating the display list DL, it is sufficient to first fill the entire list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) with the NOP command, so at first glance, it is better than the standard method (B). Seems to be excellent. Further, from the viewpoint of simplicity, the non-adjustment method (C) seems to be excellent. However, in this example, the standard method (B) is basically adopted, and the actual amount of data from the beginning of the display list DL to the EODL command, that is, the amount of data up to the EODL command is always the lowest of the data transfer circuit 267. The amount of data is adjusted to be an integral multiple of Dmin.

This is in consideration of an example of utilizing the preloader 269, and if the simple method (A) or the non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, the actual data amount of the display list DL up to the EODL command is random. This is because the value becomes a value, and problems occur when transferring the rewrite list DL'rewritten by the preloader 269 to the DRAM 278 or when transferring the rewrite list DL'from the DRAM 278 to the drawing circuit 274. The ChA control circuit 267a of the data transfer circuit 267 functions when the rewrite list DL'is transferred to the DRAM 278, and the ChB control circuit 267b functions when the rewrite list DL' is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 (FIG. 140 above). In either case, only the rewrite list DL'up to the EODL command will be transferred.

The advantages of the standard method (B) for adjusting the data volume value of the display list DL have been described above, but in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 does not function, the issued display list DL is only processed by the drawing circuit 274. Therefore, the use of the simple method (A) and the non-adjustment method (C) is not prohibited at all.

However, in the following description, the details of the display list DL will be described based on FIG. 147 on the premise that the standard method (B) is adopted in principle regardless of whether or not the preloader 269 is used.

Although not particularly limited, in this example, the instruction command sequence (L11 to L16) relating to the main LCD36M is first described in the display list DL, and then the instruction command sequence (L17 to L20) relating to the sub LCD36S is described. .. Further, the standard method (B) is adopted to adjust the data volume value of the display list DL to a fixed length (256 bytes). Note that FIG. 147 also shows a procedure in which the CPU 241 writes an instruction command to the list buffer area of the RAM 243 and an operation of the drawing circuit 274 based on the display list DL.

As shown in FIG. 147, at the head of the display list DL, an instruction command (SETDAVR) of the environment setting system is described to define the upper left base point address (X, Y) on the index space IDX for the frame buffer FBa of the main LCD 36M. (L11). As described with respect to FIG. 141, in this example, a pair of frame buffers FBa are secured in the arbitrary area (c) for the main LCD 36M. Then, normally, by setting the base point address (X, Y) = (0,0) corresponding to the effective data area for the display circuit 270, it is utilized in the drawing circuit 274 from the start position of the frame buffer FBa. ..

In FIG. 143A, L11 is attached to the actual drawing area on the lower left side thereof. This means that the actual drawing area on the frame buffer FBa is set to the base point address (0,0) position of the frame buffer FBa by the instruction command L11. It means that it was identified as starting with. However, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the actual drawing area and the index number that specifically specifies the actual drawing area are still undecided, and are determined by the instruction command (SETINDEX) L13 described later. The instruction command L11 also specifies whether or not to use the Z buffer.

Next, the upper left base point coordinates (Xs, Ys) and the lower right diagonal point coordinates (Xe, Ye) are set on the virtual drawing space by the instruction command (SETDAVF) of the environment setting system, and the W × H dimension is set. The drawing area of is defined (L12). Here, the virtual drawing space is a virtual two-dimensional space having ± 8192 in the X direction and ± 8192 in the Y direction, which can be drawn by an instruction command for drawing (SPRITE command or the like) (see FIG. 143A).

By this instruction command L12 (SETDAVF), the virtual drawing space is divided into a drawing area in which the drawing contents are actually reflected on the main LCD 36M and other non-drawing areas. Further, the instruction command L12 (SETDAVF) associates the actual drawing area whose start position (base point address) is defined by the instruction command L11 with the drawing area on the virtual drawing space.

In other words, the instruction command L12 defines a W × H actual drawing area starting from the base point address in the frame buffer FBa (index space is undecided), which corresponds to the drawing area on the virtual drawing space. Will be. Therefore, the drawing area specified by the instruction command L12 needs to be the same as or smaller than the horizontal size of the frame buffer FBa. Usually, the drawing area and the actual drawing area are defined to have the same dimensions as the effective data area (FIG. 144) for the display circuit 270.

Then, after the drawing circuit 274 executes the instruction commands L11 and L12, only the drawing contents drawn in the virtual drawing space included in the drawing area are reflected in the actual drawing area of the frame buffer FBa. become. Therefore, the drawing contents of the portion protruding from the drawing area and the portion described as the work area in FIG. 143A are not reflected in the frame buffer FBa as they are. When securing a work area in the virtual drawing space, the non-drawing area of the virtual drawing space is used.

Next, in this operation cycle, the drawing circuit 274 defines where to draw the drawing contents to be drawn based on the display list DL to be completed (L13). Specifically, for the frame buffer FBa having a double buffer configuration, the index space IDX which is the "write area" (drawing area Ad) of the drawing contents based on the display list DL this time is specified (L13). Specifically, by the SETINDEX command, which is a texture setting command, (1) the frame buffer FBa is secured in an arbitrary area, and (2) an arbitrary area of the index space IDXN that becomes a "write area". The upper index number N is specified.

When, for example, N = 255 is specified by this instruction command L13, the actual drawing area corresponding to the drawing area defined on the virtual drawing space is specifically in the frame buffer FBa having a double buffer structure. It is defined as the index space IDX255.

In the case of this example, the index number of the frame buffer FBa is 255 or 254 (FIG. 141), and either toggled switch is specified (L13). Note that this index number is the index number that is not the display area (0) / (1) specified in step ST6 described above. For example, in the process of step ST6, when the display area (0) is designated for the display circuit 270, the display area (1) becomes the “write area” for the drawing circuit 274.

As described above, after the correspondence between the actual drawing area (W × H logical space) and the drawing area (W × H virtual space) is generally defined by the instruction command L11 and the instruction command L12, By the instruction command L13 (SETINDEX) that specifically specifies the index space IDX, the virtual space of W × H is associated with the logical space of W × H in the specific index space IDX.

In other words, in the future, the content virtually drawn in the W × H virtual space based on a series of instruction commands will be the VDP circuit 250b that defines the correspondence between the virtual space and the real address of the VRAM 261. Based on the internal conversion table, it becomes the image data of VRAM261 (frame buffer).

Subsequently, an instruction command for executing a frame buffer clear process for filling the index space IDX specified as the "write area" with, for example, black is described (ST14, ST15). This is nothing but the erasing process of the image data written in the frame buffer FBa two frames before.

Specifically, the SETFCOLOR command, which is a type of environment setting command, is used to select black, for example, and the RECTANGLE command, which is a primitive drawing command, is used to fill the rectangular area. In the RECTANGLE command, the XY coordinates of the upper left end point and the right lower end point of the drawing area (virtual space corresponding to the frame buffer FBa) set in the virtual drawing space are specified (see FIG. 143A).

Since the drawing preparation process is completed by the above processing, next, instruction commands for drawing an appropriate texture such as a still image or a moving image frame in the virtual drawing space are listed. Typically, first, the index space IDX to which the texture is expanded is specified by the SETINDEX command of the texture setting system, and then the TXLOAD command, which is the instruction command of the texture load system, is described to read from the CGROM 260. The texture is described in the display list DL so as to expand into a predetermined index space IDX.

As described above, in this example, the background moving image is composed of the IP stream moving image. Therefore, for example, for the background video, the index space IDX to be expanded is specified as the index space IDX0 of the page area (b) by the SETINDEX command of the texture setting system, and then the TXLOAD command of the texture load system is described. .. In the TXLOAD command, it is necessary to specify the start address (texture source address) of the CGROM 260 and the data size (horizontal x vertical) after expansion for the moving image frame to be loaded this time.

When the above TXLOAD command is executed in the VDP circuit 250b, one frame (texture) of the background moving image is first acquired in the AAC area (a), and then the page area (b) is automatically activated by the GDEC273. ) Is expanded to the index space IDX0. Next, one frame of this moving image is drawn in the virtual drawing space. In this case, the SETINDEX command (texture setting system) may be used to set "the index space IDX0 of the page area (b) is the texture to be processed thereafter", but the TXLOAD command is continuously processed. In that case, the description of this SET INDEX command can be omitted.

In any case, in the state where "the index space IDX0 of the page area (b) is the texture to be processed after that" is specified, then the parameters for the α blend processing are set as appropriate. Describe the instruction command of the inter-drawing calculation system. The α-blending process is related to the transparency / translucency processing of the image already described in the drawing area (frame buffer FBa) and the image to be overwritten. Therefore, it is not necessary to use the instruction command of the inter-drawing calculation system in the drawing operation of the first sheet as in the moving image frame of the background moving image.

Then, by using the SPRITE command, which is an instruction command for the primitive drawing system, "texture of index space IDX0 in page area (b) (1 frame of background video)" is drawn in the appropriate place (rectangular destination area) in the virtual drawing space. Describe the SPRITE command as much as possible. For the SPRITE command, it is necessary to specify the upper left end point and the lower right end point of the Destination area of the virtual drawing space.

This Destination area is the whole or a part of the drawing area (virtual space defined on the virtual drawing space) associated with the actual drawing area (FBa) in advance by the instruction commands L11 and L12. However, since the background moving image is usually drawn on the entire display screen, the Destination area in such a case is the entire drawing area or more. The case where the Destination area is larger than the entire drawing area is, for example, the case where the background moving image is zoomed up.

Since the drawing of the video frame of the background video is completed by the above processing, the instruction commands such as the texture load system, the texture setting system, the inter-drawing calculation system, and the primitive drawing system commands are listed in an appropriate order. The display list DL is configured to draw various textures on the background moving image. As described above, a large number of moving images are required at the time of variable production. In that case, an instruction command of the index table control system is used to increase the index space IDX for the page area (b) of the VRAM 261. (NEWPIX) will be described.

For example, regarding the second IP stream video, the NEWPIX command allocates an additional index space IDX1 in the page area (b), then specifies this index space IDX1 (SETINDEX), and then the second video Instruct the expansion of one frame (TXLOAD) and place the expanded texture in the appropriate place in the drawing area (SPRITE). Normally, the Destination area in this case becomes a part of the drawing area.

The same applies to the following. If the index space IDXk is secured one after another by the NEWPIX command and then a plurality of IP streams are drawn in the drawing area while executing appropriate α-blending processing, the drawing contents in the drawing area can be changed. The image data is sequentially accumulated in the frame buffer FBa, which is the actual drawing area. When a plurality of N IP stream moving images are drawn, a plurality of N index spaces are functioning in the page area (b).

Then, when a series of fluctuation effects are completed, the DELPIX command is used to release the index space IDX that is considered unnecessary among the large number of index spaces IDX1 to IDXk secured in the page area (b). The index space IDX may be deleted.

When drawing a still image or an I-stream movie, the SETINDEX command specifies that the decoding destination of these textures is the AAC area (a), and then the TXLOAD command is executed to execute the AAC area. The texture acquired in (a) is then expanded into the ACC area (a) by the automatically activated GDEC273. Then, the expanded texture may be drawn at an appropriate position in the drawing area by the SPRITE command. The first AAC region (a1) or the second AAC region (a2) is used depending on whether or not the cache hit function is utilized.

In the description so far, each texture is drawn directly in the drawing area of the main LCD 36M, but is not necessarily limited to such an operation. For example, if an appropriate drawing area is provided (FIG. 143A) in a state where it does not overlap the drawing area already reserved for the main LCD 36M and this drawing area is associated with the work area of the VRAM 261, an intermediate drawing area is constructed. Then, an appropriate production image can be completed. Here, the reason why the drawing area does not overlap with the drawing area for the main LCD 36M is that the later association setting is prioritized for the overlapping area and the drawing contents in the area are not reflected in the frame buffer FBa.

As shown in FIG. 143A, the work area of this example is the index space IDX0 in the arbitrary area (c). Then, in the effect timing using this work area, the instruction command sequence (SETDAVR, SETDAVR,) for associating the drawing area for the effect image (see FIG. 143A) with the work area (actual drawing area of the index space IDX0) precedes. (SETDAVF, SETINDEX) are described. As shown in FIG. 143A, the drawing area for the effect image is secured in an area not included in the drawing area for the main LCD 36M.

Then, after that, the same instruction commands as the instruction command sequence L16 regarding the frame buffer FBa may be listed, and an appropriate effect image may be completed in the index space IDX0. In the case of this example, since the effect image is composed of a still image, an instruction command (SETINDEX) is described so that the decoded data is expanded in the first AAC area (a1), and then the drawing area of the index space IDX0. The instruction command (SPRITE) of the primitive drawing system whose destination is the appropriate place of is used. It should be noted that such an operation is repeated once or a plurality of times depending on the content of the effect.

Then, after positioning the index space IDX0 that has completed the effect image as a texture (SETINDEX), the effect image (texture) of the index space IDX0 may be drawn at an appropriate position in the drawing area of the main LCD 36M by the SPRITE command. In such a case, it is conceivable to decompose the effect image of the index space IDX0 into triangular drawing primitives, rotate them at an appropriate angle, and then draw them in the drawing area. The rotation angle of the texture is associated with, for example, the reliability of the advance notice effect.

The instruction command sequence (L11 to L16) for completing one frame of the main LCD 36M has been described above, but the same applies to the instruction command sequence (L17 to L12) for completing one frame of the sub LCD 36S. That is, the start XY coordinates of the frame buffer FBb are defined (L17: usually X = 0, Y = 0), and the drawing area for the sub LCD36S is defined on the virtual drawing space shown in FIG. 143B (L18).

By the way, in this example, after the generation of the image data for the main LCD 36M is completed, the process shifts to the generation process for the sub LCD 36S, so that the drawing area for the sub LCD 36S overlaps with the drawing area for the main LCD 36M. The drawing area can be set freely without the problem of. Therefore, when developing a display list DL generation program, for example, when pasting an appropriate texture to a newly set drawing area with the SPRITE command, set the operation parameters (Destination area) of the SPRITE command and so on. It can be stylized to some extent.

After the definition of such an arbitrary drawing area is completed (L18), next, for the frame buffer FBb of the sub-LCD36S having a double buffer configuration, the index space IDX which becomes the "writing area" of the drawing contents based on the display list DL this time. (L19). The index number of the index space IDX is the index number of the frame buffer FBb that does not correspond to the display area (0) / (1) specified in step ST6 of the main process.

Then, after that, the instruction command sequences L20 to L22 for the sub LCD36S are listed in the same manner as the instruction command sequences L14 to L16 for the main LCD36M. It is also possible to use the effect image completed in the index space IDX0.

As described above, the instruction commands of L11 to L22 constituting the display list DL are all limited to those whose command length is an integral multiple of 32 bits in this example. Then, as explained earlier, the data volume value (total amount of data) of the display list DL of this example is adjusted to a fixed length (256 bytes), and the required number of NOP commands (L23) as dummy commands are added. Above, it is terminated by the EODL command (L24). That is, in the embodiment of FIG. 147, the above-mentioned standard method (B) is adopted.

However, even when the standard method (B) is adopted, it is not always essential to fix the total amount of data in the display list DL to 256 bytes in all operation cycles. That is, in another embodiment, when the total amount of data in the display list DL excluding the NOP command exceeds 256 bytes (for example, during a special production period), the total amount of data in the display list DL is added with the NOP command. Is adjusted to 512 bytes or more N × 256 bytes. As described above, when the standard method (B) is adopted, the end of N × 256 bytes is terminated by the EODL command.

Although the configuration of the display list DL has been described in detail above, the CPU 241 will issue the completed display list DL having a fixed byte length to the VDP circuit 250b (ST7 to ST8).

FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating a DL issuing process (ST8 in FIG. 147) in which the CPU 241 directly writes and accesses the transfer port register TR_PORT of the data transfer circuit 267 to issue a display list DL to the drawing circuit 274.
The transfer port register TR_PORT is a type of data transfer register RGij that defines the operation content of the data transfer circuit 267.

In order to realize the DL issuance process, it is first necessary to set necessary setting values in a plurality of data transfer registers RGij that define the operation contents of the data transfer circuit 267. Specifically, the transfer operation mode of the data transfer circuit 267 and the transmission via transmission inside the data transfer circuit 267 are specified in a predetermined data transfer register RGij. The setting contents are not particularly limited, but here, data is passed from the CPU interface unit 264 via the ChB control circuit 267b (FIG. 140), and data is checked for the CPU bus control unit 267d while checking the remaining amount of the FIFO buffer. Set to execute the transfer operation (ST20). In the following description, the ChB control circuit 267b may be abbreviated as "transfer circuit ChB" for convenience.

Next, the total transfer size is set in the predetermined data transfer register RGij. As described above, in this example, the total amount of data in the display list DL is adjusted to an integral multiple of 256 bytes, so that value is set. The total amount of data = 256 × N is also an integer N times the minimum amount of data Dmin of the data transfer circuit 267. Usually, the multiple N is 1 or 2, but in the following description, it will be described as N = 1.

Here, since the transfer port register TR_PORT (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a transfer port) is a register having a length of 32 bits, the CPU 241 executes a register write operation for the transfer port TR_PORT every 32 bits. Become. Therefore, the value of the management counter CN that manages the number of register writes is initially set to 64 (ST21). When the non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, the data transfer amount that is an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin is determined at this timing, and the management counter CN is set.

Since the initial setting is completed by the above processing, next, the data transfer operation via the transfer circuit ChB is set to the start state (ST22), and the setting to the predetermined drawing register RGij that defines the operation of the drawing circuit 274 is set. The drawing operation is started based on the value (ST23). As a result, after that, the drawing circuit 274 (display list analyzer) guarantees a quick and smooth Analyze process for the instruction command sequence in which the CPU 241 writes a register to the transfer port TR_PORT.

The fact that the instruction commands listed in the display list DL are limited to instruction commands having a command length of 32 bits, which is an integral multiple of the command length, also contributes effectively to the quick and smooth Analyze processing. The timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 indicate the operation timing of step ST23. Since the display list DL issuance process (ST8) is completed quickly, the time width required for the issuance process is not shown in FIGS. 138 to 139.

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the setting of step ST22 has worked (ST24). This is because the initial setting of each part of the data transfer circuit 267 takes longer than the register write operation (setting operation) by the CPU 241, so that the data transfer circuit 267 in an incomplete state is not given a subsequent instruction. Is. Then, if the operation start state is not reached even after waiting for a predetermined time, the critical abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuance process is completed (ST25). As a result, the WDT circuit 251 then functions and the composite chip 250 is abnormally reset (see ST10 in FIG. 146).

However, since the setting of step ST22 is usually completed quickly, it is subsequently confirmed that the FIFO buffer (32 bits × 130 stages) of the CPU bus control unit 267d is not full (ST26). , Write the instruction command to the forwarding port TR_PORT line by line in order from the first line constituting the display list DL (ST28).
Then, while decrementing the management counter CN (ST29), the processes of steps ST26 to ST29 are repeated until the management counter CN becomes zero (ST30). In the case of this example, since the minimum data amount Dmin is specified in the data transfer circuit 267, the data transfer operation is executed at the timing when the minimum data amount Dmin is accumulated in the FIFO buffer, which is intermittent. Transfer operation.

In any case, in this example, the DL issuance process (ST28) is completed quickly, but if the settings in the VDP register RGIj are inconsistent due to the influence of noise or the like, the determination in step ST26 is made. In some cases, the state of the FIFO buffer Full may not be resolved even after waiting for a predetermined time. Then, in such a case, the initialization data is set in the predetermined VDP register RGij, the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267 are initialized, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set, and the DL issuance process is performed. Finish (ST27).

By the way, at this timing, the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 have already started operation and have completed some processing. Therefore, in the initialization processing of the drawing circuit 274, the contents of the drawing register RGij are used. While maintaining, (1) set all internal parameters that may be set by the display list DL to the initial values, (2) set all internal control circuits to the initial state, (3) It includes initializing the GDEC273 and (4) initializing the cache state of the AAC area. Similarly, the initialization process of the data transfer circuit 267 includes the initialization process of the entire data transfer up to that point, such as clearing the FIFO buffer. As a result, the status information indicating the operating state of the data transfer circuit 267 changes to a predetermined value (a value indicating that the entire data transfer is being initialized).

In the initialization process of step ST27 described above, the contents of the drawing register RGij are maintained, but the contents of the predetermined drawing register may be initialized. The predetermined drawing registers that are cleared to the initial values include (a) an execution control register that sets the start of drawing execution (see ST23), (b) a status register that indicates the execution status of the drawing circuit 274, and (c) the current state. Contains a status register that locates the display list being processed.

In any case, as a result of setting the serious abnormality flag ABN, the WDT circuit 251 then functions and the composite chip 250 is abnormally reset (ST10). Therefore, the process of initializing the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267. Is not always required. On the other hand, when the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267 are initialized, as a result, abnormal recovery can be expected. Therefore, the DL issuance process is re-issued by returning to the process of step ST20 without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. It is also preferable to carry out.

This point is the same in the process of step ST25, and it is preferable to initialize the data transfer circuit 276 and the drawing circuit 274 and then return to the process of step ST20 without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. However, in such a case, the number of times the DL issuance process is re-executed is counted, and if the number of re-executions exceeds the limit value, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuance process is completed.

FIG. 149 is a confirmatory illustration of a normal operating state. As shown in the figure, the issued display list DL is analyzed by the drawing circuit 274 (display list analyzer) in the order of the listed instruction commands, and the operation based on each instruction command is executed. This operation is executed in parallel with the display list DL issuance process and the data transfer operation (ST26 to ST30) of the data transfer circuit 267.

For example, when the instruction command (TXLOAD) is executed, the necessary texture is read from the CGROM 260 and acquired in the AAC area (a), and then GDEC273 is automatically started to execute the decoding operation and decode. Later data is expanded into a given index space. Further, depending on the instruction command, the geometry engine 275 and others function, but in any case, the image data corresponding to the display list DL is completed in the frame buffers FBa and FBb by the cooperation of each part of the drawing circuit 274. Will be.

Subsequently, a case where the display list DL is issued via the DMAC circuit 252 will be described.
The flowchart of FIG. 150 shows a process to be executed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24A when the display list DL is issued via the DMAC circuit 252. Specifically, it is a process to be executed as step ST8.
Although not limited in any way, the third DMA channel among the first to fourth DMA channels built in the DMAC circuit 60 will be used.

In FIG. 150, the CPU 241 first sets clear values in the predetermined data transfer register RGij and the predetermined drawing register RGij, respectively, and initializes the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 (ST20). This processing is the same as the error processing in step ST27 of FIG. 148, the internal circuit of the data transfer circuit 267 including the FIFA buffer is initialized, and the status bit of the data transfer register indicating the progress status of the data transfer is the initial value. And the bit indicating that the entire data transfer is being initialized becomes a predetermined value.
The same applies to the drawing circuit 274, and the above-mentioned (1) setting the internal parameters to the initial values, (2) setting the internal control circuit to the initial state, (3) initializing the GDEC 273, and (4) ) A process for initializing the cache state of the AAC area is included. Further, in the initialization process of the drawing circuit 274 (ST20 in FIG. 150), the predetermined drawing register RGij may be initialized. In the process of FIG. 148, such an initialization process may be executed first.

In the process of FIG. 150, next, it is confirmed by reading the predetermined status register RGij that specifies the operating state of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 that the initialization process is completed normally (ST21). Then, in the unlikely event that the initialization cannot be performed, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process is completed (ST22). However, such a situation rarely occurs in reality.

Next, the transfer operation mode of the data transfer circuit 267 and the transmission via the inside of the data transfer circuit 267 are set in the predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST23). The setting content is not particularly limited, but here, it is set to follow the setting to the DMAC circuit 252 with respect to the transfer protocol from the CPU interface unit 264 to the CPU bus control unit 267d via the ChB control circuit 267b (). ST23).

Next, the total transfer size is set in the predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST24). As in the case of FIG. 148, the total amount of data = 256. When the non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, the total transfer size, which is an integral multiple of the minimum data amount Dmin, is determined and set at this timing.
Next, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started based on the set value in the predetermined drawing register RGij (ST25). The timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 are also the operation timings of step ST25. Then, after starting the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST26), the data transfer operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is started (ST27).

The operation start processing of the DMAC circuit 252 is as shown in FIG. 151. First, in a state where the DMAC transfer is prohibited, the transfer of one cycle of the data transfer unit (1 operand) is waited for completion (ST40). The detailed operation content is the same as the process shown in FIG. 152, and is divided into a process for prohibiting DMAC transfer (ST53) and a subsequent standby process (ST54).

Such processing is provided by (1) in other embodiments, the DMAC circuit 252 (third DMA channel) may be used in the main processing and the timer interrupt processing, and (2). In another embodiment in which the process of step ST5 of FIG. 146 is not provided, the DMAC circuit 252 that has started issuing the display list DL may not be able to end the DL issuing operation within the operation cycle (δ). It is a consideration.

In the above exceptional situation, if a new setting value (inconsistent setting value, etc.) is additionally set for the operating DMAC circuit 252, normal DMA operation is not guaranteed at all, and serious trouble occurs. Although there is concern, by providing the process of step ST40, normal operation based on the subsequent set value is guaranteed. That is, even in the modified embodiment in which the present embodiment is partially modified, the subsequent normal DMA operation can be realized regardless of the preceding trouble.

If the process of step ST40 having the above significance is executed, then the operating conditions of the DMAC circuit 252 are set (ST41). Specifically, the cycle steal transfer mode is selected, and one operand transfer is set to 32 bit transfer x 2 times. Further, since the Source address is the address of the list buffer area (DL buffer BUF) of the RAM 243, it should be recognized as increasing sequentially, while the Destination address should be a fixed value because it is the forwarding port TR_PORT. ..

Next, the start address of the DL buffer BUF of the RAM 243 is set in a predetermined operation control register that defines the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 (ST42), and the address of the transfer port TR_PORT, which is the transfer destination address, is set (ST43). .. Further, after setting the total transfer size, that is, the total amount of data in the display list DL to 256 bytes (ST44), the DMA operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is started (ST45).

By the way, the description so far has assumed that the actual bit lengths of the instruction commands are all integral multiples of 32 bits. However, since the configuration of the display list DL and the instruction command is not necessarily limited, such a case will be described below.

For example, when the total data amount X of the display list DL is an arbitrary value X that is not an integral multiple of 32 bits, including the case where the above-mentioned non-adjustment method (C) is adopted, this arbitrary value X is set in the process of step ST44. After adjusting to an appropriate transfer amount MOD, the transfer total size setting process is executed. Here, an appropriate transfer amount MOD is defined based on the setting contents for one operand transfer and the minimum data amount Dmin (bytes) of the data transfer circuit 267.

Specifically, if the one-operand transfer setting is N bytes × M times, the transfer amount MOD is adjusted to an integer multiple of N × M (bytes) and an integral multiple of Dmin (bytes). Will be done. For example, if N × M = 8 × 4 and Dmin = 256, the arbitrary value X (= 300) bytes are adjusted to the transfer amount MOD (= 512) bytes.

As described above, the DMA operation of the DMAC circuit 252 starts the cycle steal transfer operation, and the display list DL is displayed every 32 bits in the case of the embodiment without particularly hindering the operation of the CPU 241. Is forwarded to the forwarding port TR_PORT. Then, the transferred data is transferred to the drawing circuit 274 via the transfer circuit ChB.

In order to realize such an operation, in this example, following the process of step ST45, the transfer operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is started and the process is completed (ST27). After that, the data transfer circuit 267 receives an instruction command sequence of the display list DL from the DMAC circuit 252 with the minimum data amount Dmin as one unit, and transfers this to the drawing circuit 274. Then, the drawing circuit 274 executes the drawing operation based on the instruction command of the display list DL. Therefore, after the processing of step ST27, the CPU 241 can start the processing after step S2004 of FIG. 133 through step ST9 of FIG. 146, and the drawing operation by the VDP circuit 250b (DL issuance processing by the DMAC circuit 252). In parallel with this, it is possible to control the sound, lamps, and motor effects.

FIG. 153 illustrates this operation content. Prior to the DMA transfer, the operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started (ST25), the display list analyzer of the drawing circuit 274 executes the Analyze process quickly and smoothly, and other operations such as GDEC273 and the geometry engine 275 are performed. Based on the above, in the frame buffers FBa and FBb, image data for one frame each is generated for the LCD 36M and 36S.

By the way, the method of FIG. 150 in which the DL issuance process is completed by the process of step ST27 is not necessarily limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 162 described later, when the effect control of the sound, the lamp, and the motor is controlled by another CPU provided separately from the CPU 241, the DMAC circuit 252 and the data transfer are performed after the processing of step ST27. It is preferable to confirm the normal operation of the circuit 267.

FIG. 152 is an operation following step ST27 of FIG. 150, and is a flowchart illustrating a confirmation process of normal operation.
First, it is confirmed that the transfer operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is normally completed by referring to a predetermined status register (ST50). Further, it is confirmed that the data transfer circuit 267 has finished the transfer operation (ST51). Normally, the DL issuance process of FIG. 150 is completed by such a route.

On the other hand, even if you wait for a predetermined time. If the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is not completed, or if the data transfer circuit 267 has not completed the transfer operation, a clear value is set in the predetermined VDP register RGij for the drawing circuit 274 and the data transfer circuit 267. Then, the DL issuance process is initialized (ST52). This is an operation based on the fact that the display list DL issuance process is not normally completed. Specifically, it has the same contents as the error process in step ST27 in FIG. 148 and the initial process in step ST20 in FIG. 150. is there.

That is, also in this case, since the drawing circuit 274 has already started operation and has completed some processing, there is a possibility that (1) the display list DL sets the initialization processing of the drawing circuit 274. Set all internal parameters to the initial values, (2) set all internal control circuits to the initial state, (3) initialize GDEC273, (4) initialize the cache state of the AAC area. Is included.

Next, after prohibiting a new DMA transfer operation (ST53), it waits for the transfer operation of one operand being executed to end (ST54). As described above, in this example, 32 bit transfer × 2 times is set as one operand, and this is to avoid suddenly initializing the DMAC circuit 252 in operation.

Then, when this preparatory work is completed, a clear value is set in a predetermined operation control register that defines the operation of the DMAC circuit 252, and the DMAC circuit 252 is initialized (ST52). Then, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the DL issuance process is completed. In this case, since abnormal recovery can be expected by the processing of steps ST52 and ST55, it is also preferable to return to step ST20 of FIG. 150 and re-execute the DL issuance processing without setting the serious abnormality flag ABN. is there. However, it is necessary to count the number of re-executions of the DL issuance process (ST23 to ST27), and if the number of re-executions exceeds the limit value, set the serious abnormality flag ABN and end the DL issuance process.

(Example of making the preloader work)

Subsequently, the processing when the preloader 269 is made to function will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159.
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a drawing update process (S2061) to be executed by the CPU 241 when the preloader 269 is made to function.
The process of FIG. 154 is similar to the process of FIG. 146, but first, the content of the start condition determination (ST5') is different. That is, in the embodiment using the preloader 269, at the start of each operation cycle, the status information of the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 is read-accessed, the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 is completed, and the display list. Confirm that the preload operation based on DL2 is completed (ST5').

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 139, the preloader 269 should have completed the look-ahead operation (preload operation) during the frame period (T1 to T1 + δ) based on, for example, the display list DL1 issued at the timing T1. Is. Further, the drawing circuit 274 should finish the drawing operation based on the display list DL1 during the frame period (T1 + δ to T1 + 2δ) based on the operation start command instructed in the frame period starting from the timing T1 + δ, for example. Is.

Therefore, in step ST5', the status information of the VDP register RGij related to the drawing circuit 274 and the preloader 269 is read-accessed to confirm the above normal operation. In FIG. 139, normal operation is confirmed in the determination of each of the first, second, third, and fifth frame periods, but in the determination of the fourth frame (frame period starting from timing T1 + 3δ), the preload operation ends. It is shown that it is not.

Then, at the time of such an abnormality, the abnormality flag ER is incremented (ER = ER + 1), and then the process proceeds to step ST9. Therefore, as in the case of FIG. 146, frame dropping occurs. That is, since the display area switching process (ST6) is skipped, the same screen is redisplayed. The frame period (T1 + 3δ to T1 + 4δ) shown in FIGS. 138 and 139 indicates the operating state.

Further, in the determination of step ST5', if the start condition is not satisfied, the drawing operation start instruction (PT10) based on the rewrite list DL'is not executed for the drawing circuit 274, so that the drawing circuit 274 does not operate. It is in a state and no new display list is generated. In FIG. 139, the timings t0, t2, and t4 indicate the operation timing of the drawing operation start instruction (PT10), or more accurately, the timing of step ST26 in FIG. 155, which will be described later.

The case where the determination in step ST5'is incompatible has been described above, but in a normal case, after the display areas of the frame buffers FBa and FBb are toggled (ST6), the rewrite list DL is applied to the drawing circuit 274. 'The drawing operation based on'is started (PT10). The specific contents are as shown in FIG. 155, and the drawing circuit 274 is rewritten from the DL buffer BUF'of the DRAM 278 via the data transfer circuit 267 (transfer circuit ChB) under the control of the CPU 241. Will be acquired and the drawing operation will be executed.

Prior to explaining the flowchart of FIG. 155 that realizes this operation, when the operation of the preloader 269 is confirmed, the preloader 269 performs a look-ahead operation (preload) of the CGROM 260 based on the display list DL acquired one frame before. The completed and pre-read data has already been stored in the preload area reserved in the DRAM 278. Further, for the texture load type command (TXLOAD) described in the display list DL, the Source address is rewritten to the address of the preload area, and the DL buffer BUF'of the DRAM 278 is rewritten as the rewrite list DL'(see FIG. 140). It is stored in.

In this rewriting process, the total amount of data in the display list DL does not change, and the total amount of data in the rewriting list DL'is the same as that in the display list DL. Further, the display list DL is created by the standard method (B), and the end of the rewrite list DL'is an EODL command as in the case of the display list DL.

Based on the above, FIG. 155 will be described. First, the CPU 241 initializes the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 by setting clear values in the predetermined data transfer register RGij and the predetermined drawing register RGIj, respectively. (ST20). This process has the same contents as the process of ST20 in FIG. Next, it is confirmed that this initialization process is completed normally (ST21), and if the initialization is not completed even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the critical abnormality flag ABN is set and the process is completed (ST21). ST22).

Normally, the initialization of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 is completed normally, so that the transmission via the data transfer circuit 267 is subsequently set in the predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST23). Specifically, it is set to transfer data from the DRAM 278 to the drawing circuit 274 via the ChB control circuit 267b (ST23). Next, the start address of the DL buffer BUF'of the DRAM 278 in which the rewrite list DL'is stored is set in the predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST24).

Further, for this rewrite list DL', the total transfer size is set in the predetermined data transfer register RGij (ST25). As described above, the total amount of data in the rewrite list DL'is the same as the total amount of data in the display list DL, and specifically, for example, 256 bytes.

Next, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is started based on the set value in the predetermined drawing register RGij (ST26). The timings t1, t2, t3, and t4 in FIG. 138 are also the operation timings of step ST26. Then, the operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is started and the process is completed based on the set value in the predetermined data transfer register RGIj (ST27). After that, the CPU 241 is not particularly involved in the operation of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274, and shifts to the display list generation process (ST7) that is activated in the next operation cycle.

On the other hand, the drawing circuit 274, which starts the operation at the timing of step ST26, executes the drawing operation based on the rewriting list DL'and generates image data based on the rewriting list DL'in the frame buffers FBa and FBb. In this operation, the drawing circuit 274 exclusively reads and accesses the preload area without reading and accessing the CGROM 260, so that a series of drawing operations can be completed quickly.

Since the processing content of step PT10 has been described above, returning to FIG. 154 and continuing the description, in the embodiment in which the preloader 269 is made to function after the processing of step PT11, the display list DL to be activated in the next cycle is displayed. Created based on the standard method (B) (ST7). For example, in the frame period starting from the timing T1 shown in FIG. 19, the display list DL referred to by the drawing circuit 274 is created in the next frame period (T1 + δ to T1 + 2δ).

Next, the CPU 241 issues the created display list DL to the preloader 269 instead of the drawing circuit 274 (PT11). The specific operation contents are as shown in FIGS. 157 to 159. First, regarding the embodiment in which the preloader 269 does not function (FIG. 146), the CPU 241 issues the display list DL directly to the drawing circuit 274 (FIG. 149) and the display list DL via the DMAC circuit 252 (FIG. 149). Although 153) is shown, almost the same operation as these is shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, except that the issuing destination is the preloader 269.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of FIG. 158, which is substantially the same as the flowchart of FIG. 148. However, it is different from passing through the ChC control circuit 267c from the CPU interface unit 264 and setting the CPU bus control unit 267d to execute the data transfer operation while checking the remaining amount of the FIFO buffer (ST20). .. In the following description, the ChC control circuit 267c may be abbreviated as "transfer circuit ChC" for convenience.

Next, the total transfer size (for example, 256 bytes adjusted by the standard method (B)) is set to the predetermined data transfer register RGij, and the management counter CN is initially set to 64 (ST21). Further, the data transfer operation via the transfer circuit ChC is set to the start state (ST22), and the preload operation is started based on the set value in the preload register RGij that defines the operation of the preloader 269 (ST23).

As a result, after that, the preloader 269 executes necessary analysis (Analyze) processing for each instruction command written by the CPU 241 to the transfer port TR_PORT, and when it detects an instruction command (TXLOAD) that should read access the CGROM 260, the texture is displayed. It is preloaded and stored in the preload area of DRAM 278. Further, the rewrite list DL'with the source address of the texture changed is saved in the DL buffer area BUF' of DRAM 278.

The timings t1, t3, and t5 in FIG. 139 substantially indicate the operation timing of step ST23 in FIG. 157. However, also in this embodiment, if any abnormality occurs in the process of issuing the display list DL, the processes of step ST25 and step ST27 are executed. Specifically, the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the preloader 269 are initialized, and the display list DL issuance processing (ST20 to ST30) is re-executed to the extent possible. The initialization process of the preloader 269 includes erasing the rewrite list DL'in the unfinished state and clearing the preload area in which the preload data is newly stored.

[17-5. Modification example and other modification related to image production control]

Although the case where the preloader 269 does not function and the case where the preloader 269 functions are described in detail above, the specific operation content is not particularly limited.
FIG. 160 shows an embodiment in which the display list DL generated by the CPU 241 is issued to the drawing circuit 274 with a delay of one operation cycle instead of the generated operation cycle (frame period). In the case of such an embodiment, since the drawing circuit 274 can use almost the entire time of one frame period, the possibility of dropping frames is reduced.

Further, FIG. 161 shows an example in which the display list DL generated by the CPU 241 is issued to the preloader 269 with a delay of one operation cycle instead of the generated operation cycle. In this case, since the preloader 7269 can execute the predose operation using almost the entire time of one frame period, the possibility of dropping frames is reduced in this case as well.

In the description so far, the composite chip 250 is used, but it is not always necessary to integrate the CPU 241 and the VDP circuit 250b into one element.
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the entire effect control is controlled by a single CPU (CPU241), but the upstream side CPU and the downstream side effect control CPU cooperate with each other to perform the effect control operation. May be executed.

FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a schematic internal configuration of the effect control unit 24A'corresponding to such an embodiment. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the CPU 241'on the upstream side (the CPU in the chip 250c in the effect control unit 24A') controls the sound effect, the lamp effect, and the motor effect. On the other hand, the CPU 300 on the downstream side (the CPU in the chip as the image control unit 250d provided by the effect control unit 24A'and equipped with the VDP circuit 250) controls only the image effect based on the control of the CPU 241'. There is.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, the CPU 300 does not need to execute the processing for effect control (particularly S2032 to S2042) for the sound and the lamp described with reference to FIG. 133, and is complicated over a sufficient period of time. Display list DL can be generated, and more complicated and advanced image effects such as 3D (Dimension) can be realized. In such a case, the display list DL becomes large, but in that case, the total amount of data in the display list DL is adjusted to 512 bytes or more to N × 256 bytes by adding a dummy command. To.

Further, since the operation of the CPU 300 on the downstream side is specialized in the image effect control, it is possible to confirm that the drawing operation is completed after the display list DL is issued. The lower part of FIG. 148 shows an operation control example in this case. If the drawing operation is not completed even if the time limit is exceeded, the serious abnormality flag ABN is set and the process is completed (ST32). Since the processing of the CPU 300 on the downstream side is only the image effect control, the completion of the drawing operation may be simply waited in an infinite loop.

When such a configuration is adopted, the start condition determination (ST5) of FIG. 146 can be repeated for a predetermined time. Even with this configuration, if the delay in completing the drawing operation is not so long, there is only a problem that the switching between the display area (0) and the display area (1) is delayed. That is, as in the frame period starting from the timing T1 + 3δ shown in FIG. 163, while the display operation is repeated twice, the frame is dropped only in the first half, and a normal frame is displayed in the second half.

This point is the same when the preloader is used, and the start condition determination (ST5') of FIG. 154 can be repeated for a predetermined time. Then, if there is a slight delay, the frame will be dropped only in the first half and a normal frame will be displayed in the second half, as in the frame period starting from the timing T1 + 3δ shown in FIG. However, if the completion of the drawing operation is significantly delayed, a complete frame drop will occur as in the frame period (T1 + 3δ to T1 + 4δ) in FIG. 138, and if such a situation continues, the WDT circuit 251 Will start. Therefore, after that, all or part of the effect control operation (only the image effect) may be abnormally reset. This point is the same even when the preloader is not used.

Further, when the control operation of the CPU 300 is specialized for image production control, in the embodiment in which the DMA transfer is adopted, as shown in FIG. 165, the drawing operation of the drawing circuit 274 is completed and the operation of the data transfer circuit 267 is completed. , It is determined that the operation of the DMAC circuit 252 is completed (ST50'to ST52'). If any of the operations is not completed normally, the operations of the data transfer circuit 267 and the drawing circuit 274 are initialized, and the same processing (ST55'to ST57') as the processing of steps ST53 to ST55 is executed. To. Also in this case, it is preferable to re-execute the DL issuance process a predetermined number of times.

By the way, in the above, an example of constructing a horizontal size index space that completely matches the number of horizontal pixels of each LCD 36 as the frame buffers FBa and FBb of the main LCD 36M and the sub LCD 36S has been described.
FIG. 166 is a confirmatory illustration of this relationship, and both the drawing area (W × H) on the virtual drawing space and the effective data area (actual drawing area W × H) on the index space are shown. , Indicates a case that matches the number of horizontal / vertical pixels of the display device.

In such a correspondence relationship, the drawing operation in the virtual drawing space by the display list DL is not necessarily limited to the drawing area (W × H). Therefore, for example, as shown by the downward slash in the upper part of FIG. 166, the drawing area. By moving the drawing position of the drawn image (W'xH') exceeding (WxH) in time, the drawing contents in the actual drawing area WxH shown by the downward slash at the bottom of FIG. 167 can be obtained. , It is possible to move it vertically / horizontally / diagonally as appropriate.

Further, in order to execute such an effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, an index space having a horizontal size W larger than the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 may be provided. In this case, the drawing area W × H on the virtual drawing space defined by the instruction command L12 (SETDAVF) of the display list DL is set to be larger than the actual drawing area w × h corresponding to the number of horizontal / vertical pixels of the LCD 36. Will be done. In the lower part of FIG. 167, the actual drawing area w × h is indicated by a downward-sloping diagonal line.
The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the actual drawing area w × h are specified as the number of display lines and the number of horizontal pixels of the LCD 36 by the process of step SS30 in FIG. 145, and the upper left end point of the actual drawing area w × h is in FIG. 145. In the process of step SS31 of the above, the vertical / horizontal display start position is set in a predetermined display register.

On the other hand, the base point addresses (X, Y) in the index space are set in a predetermined drawing register by the instruction command L11 of the display list DL. As described above, specifically, the upper left base point address on the index space IDX is defined as (0,0) by the instruction command L11 (SETDAVR) of the environment setting system. Then, if the upper left end point of the actual drawing area w × h is appropriately moved, the drawing content of the actual drawing area W × H indicated by the downward-sloping diagonal line at the lower part of FIG. 167 can be appropriately moved vertically / horizontally / diagonally. become.

As described above, the VDP registers RGij related to steps SS30 to SS32 are write-protected at the time of initial setting (second prohibition setting SS34), but at the timing of executing the above effect, a predetermined VDP is set. By writing the release value to the register RGij, this prohibition setting is released.

Although various examples have been described in detail above, the specific contents of the description do not limit the present invention. Although the bullet game machine has been described for convenience, the present invention can be suitably applied to other game machines such as a rotating body game machine.

The various examples described above can be appropriately combined as long as the combination is not impossible.

Further, in the above, an example of using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) as an image display means has been given, but other image display means such as an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device can also be used.

Here, as shown in FIG. 133, the CPU 241 performs the history display process in step S2050.
As described above, in the history display process in step S2050, the CPU 241 generates a liquid crystal control command for displaying the setting operation history (see FIGS. 54, 55 and its description). In the case of one CPU configuration, this liquid crystal control command is analyzed by the command analysis process of step S2027 (FIG. 133), and the CPU 241 creates a display list DL in step S2061 or creates a display list DL according to the analysis result. Issuing to the VDP circuit 250b.
The VDP circuit 250b performs necessary drawing processing based on the issued display list DL, and the display circuit 270 displays the image instructed by the display list DL on the main LCD 36M.
Due to such a processing flow, the information of the setting operation history is displayed on the display screen of the main LDC36M.

1, 1A Pachinko game machine 13 Direction button 16 Cross key 20 Main control board (main control unit)
201 CPU
202 ROM
203 RAM
24 Production control board (Production control unit)
241 CPU
242 ROM
243 RAM
36 Liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b Special symbol display device 40 Liquid crystal control unit 45 Decorative lamp 45a Light display device 46 Speaker 46a Sound generator 61 Front door open sensor 94 Setting key switch 97 Setting / performance display 98 RAM clear switch Gs Setting history confirmation screen

Claims (1)

An image control means having a CPU circuit that issues a display list that identifies a display screen of a display device, and
An image generation means having a drawing circuit for generating image data based on an instruction command described in a display list issued by the image control means, and an image generation means.
A setting confirmation means that displays a setting value indicating the probability of winning a gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the setting confirmation operation so that it can be confirmed.
A history information storage means for storing the setting operation history information as a history of operations related to the setting in a memory when the setting confirmation operation is performed, and
A history display means for displaying the setting operation history on the display screen based on the setting operation history information stored by the history information storage means according to the establishment of a predetermined display condition.
In a game machine that has
The first memory, which cannot retain the stored information when the power of the game machine is cut off,
A second memory, which is capable of retaining stored information even when the power of the game machine is cut off and whose information reading speed is slower than that of the first memory, is provided.
The image generation means
It is configured to have a data transfer circuit that transfers the configuration data of the display list received from the image control means in predetermined acquisition bit units to the drawing circuit in predetermined transfer bit units.
The image control means relates to the generation of a display list.
An end instruction command for instructing the drawing circuit to end the image data generation process is described in the middle or at the end of the display list, and at the same time.
Make sure that the actual bit lengths of all the instruction commands listed in the display list are integral multiples of the acquired bit units.
The history information storage means
When the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting operation history information is stored in the first memory, and the setting operation history information stored in the first memory is transferred to the second memory at a predetermined timing. Including means of transfer
The history display means
A game machine that displays the setting operation history on the display screen based on the setting operation history information stored in the first memory.

Images